http://www.proprofs.com/quiz-school/story.php?title=ugc-net-mcq-june-2012

1) Of the following libraries in , which one is the oldest library ?

(A) Asiatic Society Library, Bombay

(B) Connemara Public Library, Madras

(C) Public Library, Delhi

(D) National Library of India, Calcutta.

2) "Shodhganga" is a national level repository of:

(A) E-Books

(B) E-Journals

(C) E-Theses

(D) Journal Articles

3) ‘Cranfield Studies’ are an example of : (related question)

(A) Survey Research

(B) Experimental Research

(C) Historical Research

(D) Case Study

4) First university to introduce MPhil and PhD in LIS in India (A) Muslim University (B) University of Calcutta (C) University of Delhi (D) University of Madras

5) The Head Office of IASLIC located at (A) (B) Delhi (C) (D) 6) Who had given the Minimal, Middling and Maximum theories of reference service?

(A) C. M. Winchell (B) S. R. Ranganathan (C) James I Wyer (D) Samuel Rothstein

7)CODEN related with

A)Books

B)Serials

C)Reports

D)Gray Literature

8) What is Solomon four group design?

9) calculaiton of impact factor:

1.web of science

2.science direct

3.scopus

4.ebsco

Q.1 ans: The question was in matching with the above options whatever u had written.

Q.2

Ans. E.Thesis

Q.3 it was not in NET exam.

Q.4It was chronological Question i.e. IASLIC, NASSDOC, ALA, SLA

Ans. ALA

Q.5

Ans. University of Delhi Q.6

Ans.(D) Samuel Rothstein

Q.7

Ans.B)Serials

1. What is the another name of canon of sought heading - canon of recall value 2. Three kind of analytical entries-Author analytical,Title analytical,Subject analytical 3. Who started the cataloging in source- Library of congress 4. White elephant is the another name of - Catalouge card 5. The term used by ranganathan "prnnatal catalouge in year 1948 6. Work of Unknown Authorship- anonymous work 7. LOCAS - one taype of Cataloging service 8. According to CCC the name of an author is taken from out side the book ,then how it will be shown in the main entry- whiten square bracket 9. A title disclosed the subject of document is - Binders Title 10. What is the indecator sign for the omission of a long title according to AACR2 -(...) 11. Books of unknown or doubtful Authorship is Known as - A Pocryphal Book 12. MUMS is a one type of MARC system 13. RAK is a cataloging code 14. Periodical are entered under which of the following according AACR 2- Title of Periodical 15. What is EMCO index- The computer produced expert medica index 16. studey of coordinate indexing- mortimer Taube 17. The Elementary catagories of POPSI- DEAPM 18. The indexing system KWOC is a revised form of -KWICK 19. LUCI is the another name of -Chain Indexing 20. What is the alternative name of "Telegraphic abstract" - Standardized abstract 21. Alternative Name of Post coordinate index- Manipulative Index 22. When an index system contains current as well as past year information then it is called - Retrospective Index

National Library (Calcutta) National Science Library ( New Delhi) National Library for deaf-mute (Deharadun) Khudabaksh Oriental Library () Saraswati Mahal Library (Thanjavur)

i) () Public Libraries Act, 1960; ii) Public Libraries Act, 2009; iii) Public Libraries Act, 2007; iv) Chattisgarh Public Libraries Act, 2007; v) Public Libraries Act, 1993; vi) Public Libraries Act, 2001; vii) Public Libraries Act, 1989; viii) (Mysore) Public Libraries Act, 1965; ix) Public Libraries Act, 1989; x) Public Libraries Act, 1967; xi) Public Libraries Act, 1988; xii) Public Libraries Act, 1993; xiii) Orissa Public Libraries Act, 2001; xiv) Pondichery Public Libraries Act, 2007; xv) Public Libraries Act, 2006; xvi) (Madras) Public Libraries Act, 1948; xvii) Public Libraries Act, 2005; xviii) (Uttaranchal) Public Libraries Act, 2005 and xix) Public Libraries Act, 1979.

S.R. Ranganathan

S. R. Ranganathan's Portrait at City Central Library, Hyderabad

Born Shiyali Ramamrita Ranganathan

12 August 1892

Shiyali, British India (present-dayTamil Nadu, India)

Died 27 September 1972 (aged 80)

Bangalore, India

Occupation Author, academic, mathematician, librarian

Nationality Indian

Genres Library Science, Documentation,Information

Science

Notable Prolegomena to Library Classification work(s) The Five Laws of Library Science

Colon Classification Ramanujan: the Man and the Mathematician

Classified Catalogue Code: With Additional Rules

for Dictionary Catalogue Code

Library Administration

Indian Library Manifesto

Library Manual for Library Authorities, Librarians,

and Library Workers

Classification and Communication

Headings and Canons; Comparative Study of Five

Catalogue Codes

Shiyali Ramamrita Ranganathan was a mathematician and librarian from India. His most notable contributions to the field were his five laws of library science and the development of the first major

 1. Dr. Shiyali Ramamrita Ranganathan (1892 – 1972) Julinah Sabria Binte Abu Bakar Free Powerpoint Templates V. Somasundram

 2. About S.R. Ranganathan (S.R.R.) • Mathematician and library science scholar from India • Father of library science, documentation and information science in India • Contributions has worldwide influence S.R.Ranganathan, 1964 Free Powerpoint Templates

 3. Growing up • Born on August 9, 1892 in Shiyali (present day Sirkazhi) Madras, India o Father: Ramamrita Ayyar, Mother: Seethalakshmi o First child and first grandchild of both maternal and paternal parents Sitalakshmi (1872 - 1953),Sirkazhi S.R.R.’s mother Free Powerpoint TemplatesImage source: http://municipality.tn.gov.in/sirkazhi/

 4. Education • Earned B.A. (1913) and M.A. (1916) degrees in Mathematics from Madras Christian College • Shared excellent teacher-student relationships • Lifelong goal: To teach mathematicsRanganathan as a student, 1913 Free Powerpoint Templates Madras Christian College, 1895  5. Career Taught at Mathematics faculties at Universities in , and Madras His classes were lively and purposive, earned the name “born teacher” Had thrilling intellectual experiences with students & faculties Presidency College, Madras SRR and G.A. Srinivasan, Madras (1923) Free Powerpoint Templates

 6. Family • Married to Rukmani when he was 15 years old, in 1907 o Rukmani died in an accident in 1928 • In 1929, he married Sarada o She was very devoted to S.R.R. o Helped S.R.R. to work ceaselessly for library profession o Only had one son, Shri. R. Yogeshwar Free Powerpoint Templates SRR with son, YogeshwarSarada and SRR in Zurich (summer 1954) (June 1937)

 7. Some interesting facts about S.R.R. • Workaholic, spent hours in the library; even during his leisure hours • Had a stammering problem which he gradually overcame during his professional life • Initiated the first graduate course in Library Science in 1948, in Discussing with Free Powerpoint Gupta, 1949 S. Das Templates

 8. Stepping into the librarianship….• Had applied for the post of University Librarian in the University of Madras (UM) in 1923• University Management created the post to oversee their poorly organized collection• They required someone with research background; SRR’s papers on mathematics met the requirements Free Powerpoint Templates

 9. Stepping into the library world• Initially reluctant to pursue the position (as he had forgotten about it when he was called for interview)• Took charge of the University Library on 4th January 1924Welcome as First Madras University Librarian (1924) Free Powerpoint Templates Library Madras University

 10. Role as an University Librarian• Found the solitude of the job unbearable• Begged the university administration for a teaching position• A deal with the administration o Travel to London to learn contemporary Western practices in librarianship. o If he still rejected librarianship after the trip, he will be offered the mathematics lectureship o Went to University College London, where his mathematical knowledge came in handy for classification Free Powerpoint Templates

 11. Library Education • Left for England in September 1924 for a 9- month studies & observation tour • Went to University College London, where his mathematical knowledge came in handy for classification School of Librarianship, University Free Powerpoint Templates College London

 12. Library Education • W.C. Berwick Sayers, Chief Librarian of Croydon Public Library and lecturer in the School of Librarianship, University College London • Inducted S.R.R. into the library profession • Under Sayers’ guidance, S.R.R. visited a large number of libraries • Libraries  community reading centres • Services rendered to various strata • Discovered a social mission for library profession and himself Powerpoint Templates Free W C Berwick Sayers

 13. Contributions • Wrote large mass of literature about librarianship; particularly classification • Was awarded the Padmashri Award by the Government of India for valuable contributions to library science Padmashri.Investiture in Delhi, SRR Birth Centenary, 29 October 1957 by August 1992. Dr. Rajendra Prasad, Indian Post Office Free Powerpoint President of India Templates issues postage stamp

 14. PublicationsIndian Library, A., & Ranganathan, S. R. (1951). Indian library directory. Delhi.Kaula, P. N., & Ranganathan, S. R. (1965). Library science today : Papers contrib. on the 71-st birthday of S. R. Ranganathan. London: Asia.Library Seminar on Research in the Social, S., Ranganathan, S. R., & Girja, K. (1960). Socialscience research and libraries; papers and summary proceedings, Bombay; New York.Madras Library, A., & Ranganathan, S. R. (1953). Library legislation. Handbook to theMadras Library Act. Madras & London.Madras Library, A., & Ranganathan, S. R. (1963). The five laws of library science. Bombay &London.Parkhi, R. S., & Ranganathan, S. R. (1964). Decimal classification and Colon classification inperspective : with a foreword by S. R. Ranganathan. London: Asia Publishing House.Ranganathan, S. R. (1965). The colon classification, New Brunswick, N.J.Ranganathan, S. R. (1934). Classified catalogue code. Madras; London: Madras libraryassociation; E. Goldston. Free Powerpoint Templates

 15. PublicationsRanganathan, S. R. (1938). Theory of library catalogue. Madras; London: Madras libraryassociation; E. Goldston.Ranganathan, S. R. (1942). School and college libraries. Madras; London: Madras libraryassociation; E. Goldston.Ranganathan, S. R. (1944a). Library classification: fundamentals & procedure; with 1008graded examples & exercises. Madras; London: Madras library association; E. Goldston.Ranganathan, S. R. (1944b). Post-war reconstruction of libraries in India, a scheme. Lahore:Modern Librarian. Punjab Library Association. Forman Christian College Library.Ranganathan, S. R. (1945). Elements of library classification : based on lectures delivered atthe University of Bombay in December 1944. Poona: N.K. Pub. House.Ranganathan, S. R. (1946a). National library system : a plan for India. Lahore: IndianLibrarian.Ranganathan, S. R. (1946b). Suggestions for the organization of libraries in India. [Madras,New York: Indian Branch, Oxford Univ. Press.Ranganathan, S. R. (1949). Rural adult education. [S.l.]: Blunt. Free Powerpoint Templates

 16. PublicationsRanganathan, S. R. (1950a). Library catalogue; fundamentals and procedure. [Madras:Madras Library Association.Ranganathan, S. R. (1950b). Library development plan : thirty-year programme for Indiawith draft library bills for the Union and the constituent states. Delhi: University of Delhi.Ranganathan, S. R. (1951a). Classification and communication. Delhi: University of Delhi.Ranganathan, S. R. (1951b). Philosophy of library classification. Copenhagen; New York: E.Munksgaard; Hafner.Ranganathan, S. R. (1951c). Public library provision and documentation problems : papersfor discussion at the ninth All-India Library Conference, , 11-14 May 1951. Delhi;London: Indian Library Association ; G. Blunt & Sons.Ranganathan, S. R. (1952). Dictionary catalogue code. Madras: Madras Library Association.Ranganathan, S. R. (1953). Rendering of South Asian names : a report. S.l.: s.n.].Ranganathan, S. R. (1955). Heading and canons; comparative study of five catalogue codes.Madras: S. Viswanathan.Ranganathan, S. R. (1957a). Library science and the resilience of its laws. London: North-western Polytechnic, School of Librarianship. Powerpoint Templates Free

 17. PublicationsRanganathan, S. R. (1957b). Prolegomena to library classification. London: The LibraryAssociation.Ranganathan, S. R. (1959b). Elements of library classificaton : based on lectures delivered atthe University of Bombay in December 1944 and in the Schools of Librarianship in GreatBritain in December 1956. London: Association of Assistant Librarians.Ranganathan, S. R. (1959c). Library administration. Bombay: Asia Pub. House.Ranganathan, S. R. (1959d). Retrospective bibliography of Asian learned periodicals. Paris:Service photographique, UNESCO.Ranganathan, S. R. (1960). Library manual, for library authorities, librarians, and honorarylibrary workers. New York: Asia Pub. House.Ranganathan, S. R. (1961a). Education for leisure. New York: Asia Pub. House.Ranganathan, S. R. (1961b). Reference service. London: Asia Pub. House.Ranganathan, S. R. (1963b). Documentation and its facets : being a symposium of seventypapers by thirty-two authors. New York: Asia Pub. House. Free Powerpoint Templates

 18. PublicationsRanganathan, S. R. (1963d). Documentation periodicals: coverage, arrangement, scatter,seepage, compilation. : Documentation Research and Training Centre.Ranganathan, S. R. (1963f). Library week souvenir. Bangalore: Mysore Library AssociationRanganathan, S. R. (1963g). The organization of libraries. London: Oxford University Press.Ranganathan, S. R. (1964). Comments on Model Public Libraries Bill prepared by the CentralMinistry of Education : an evaluation. : Si. Ra. Satkara Samiti.Ranganathan, S. R. (1966a). Library development plan with a draft library bill for KeralaState. Trivandrum: S.G.P., Govt. Press.Ranganathan, S. R. (1966b). Seminar technique. New Delhi: Indian Adult EducationAssociation.Ranganathan, S. R. (1967a). A descriptive account of the colon classification. Bombay; NewYork: Asia Pub. House. Free Powerpoint Templates

 19. PublicationsRanganathan, S. R. (1967b). Ramanujan : the man and the mathematician. Bangalore:Sarada Ranganathan Endowment for Library Science.Ranganathan, S. R. (1968). Free book service for all. Bombay: Pub. for the Mysore LibraryAssoc. by Asia Pub. House.Ranganathan, S. R. (1971). Education and library system of the nation. Bangalore: MysoreLibrary Association.Ranganathan, S. R. (1972). Difficulties of government documents, James Childs, GilbertMudge Award (1971). Bangalore: Sarada Ranganathan Endowment for Library Science.Ranganathan, S. R. (1973). Documentation: genesis and development. Delhi: Vikas Pub.House.Ranganathan, S. R. (1988). Library manual : for library authorities, librarians and libraryworkers. Bangalore; New Delhi: Sarada Ranganathan Endowment for Library Science ;Distributors UBS Publishers Distributors Ltd.Ranganathan, S. R. (1990). Indian library manifesto. New Delhi: ABC Pub. House.Ranganathan, S. R., & All India Library, C. (1953). Depth classification and reference service& reference material : papers for discussion at the tenth All-India Library Conference,Hyderabad, 1-4 June 1953, Delhi. Free Powerpoint Templates

 20. PublicationsRanganathan, S. R., & Bhattacharyya, G. (1970). Conflict of authorship; corporate body vscorporate body. Bangalore: Sarada Ranganathan Endowment for Library Science.Ranganathan, S. R., & Bhattacharyya, G. (1974). Cataloguing practice : [by] S.R.Ranganathan. London: Asia Pub. House.Ranganathan, S. R., & Conference, I. (1963). Documentation and the spiral of library service: IASLIC Conference, presidential address, 5, Poona, 1963. Poona?: s.n.].Ranganathan, S. R., & Dobrowolski, Z. (1964). Classification research 1957-1963 : Trendreport (India). Copenhagen: Danish Centre of Documentation.Ranganathan, S. R., Donker Duyvis, F., & Kaula, P. N. (1965). Library science today :Ranganathan Festschrift. London: Asia Publ. House.Ranganathan, S. R., & Girja, K. (1960). Social science research and libraries : papers andsummary proceedings ot the library seminar on research in the social sciences, New Delhi,2-4 Jan 1959. Bombay: Asia Publishing House. Free Powerpoint Templates

 21. PublicationsRanganathan, S. R., & Gopinath, M. A. (1966). Library book selection. Bombay; New York:Asia Publishing House.Ranganathan, S. R., & Indian Adult Education, A. (1953). Literature for neo-literates beingreport of the 3rd National Seminar of the Indian Adult Education Association held at JamaiMillia, Okhla, 20 to 26 December, 1952. Delhi: Atma Ram.Ranganathan, S. R., & Indian National Scientific Documentation, C. (1954). Annals of libraryscience. Annals of library science.Ranganathan, S. R., & Kaula, P. N. (1965). Library science today : papers contributed on the71st birthday of S.R. Ranganathan, 12 August 1962. Bombay: Asia Publishing House.Ranganathan, S. R., & Kaula, P. N. (1992). A Librarian looks back : an autobiography of Dr.S.R. Ranganathan. New Delhi: ABC Pub. Hosue : Exclusive distributors, UBS PublishersDistributors.Ranganathan, S. R., Kaula, P. N., & Das Gupta, A. K. (1965). Ranganathan festschrift. NewYork: Asia Pub. House.Ranganathan, S. R., & Kumar, G. (1960). Social science research and libraries. Bombay: AsiaPublishing House. Free Powerpoint Templates

 22. PublicationsRanganathan, S. R., & Muthukumaraswamy, R. (1961). Commemoration bibliography of thefirst 1008 books published by the South India Saiva Siddhanta Works Publishing Society,Tinnevelly, Limited. Madras: South India Saiva Siddhanta Works Publishing Society,Tinnevelly, Ltd.Ranganathan, S. R., & National, L. (1993). Dr. S.R. Ranganathan : a tribute : on the occasionof his centenary celebrations. Calcutta: National Library.Ranganathan, S. R., Navalani, K., & Satija, M. P. (1993). Petits petales : a tribute to S.R.Ranganathan. New Delhi: ABC Pub. House.Ranganathan, S. R., & Neelameghan, A. (1966). Library service for all. Bangalore: MysoreLibrary Association.Ranganathan, S. R., & Neelameghan, A. (1975). Physical bibliography for librarians. NewYork: Asia Pub. House. Free Powerpoint Templates  23. PublicationsRanganathan, S. R., Neelameghan, A., & All-India Seminar on Public Library, S. (1972).Public library system: India, Sri Lanka, U.K., U.S.A.; comparative library legislation based onthe papers and proceedings of the All-India Seminar on Public Library System, Bangalore,28 to 20, April, 1972. Bangalore: Sarada Ranganathan Endowment for Library Science.Ranganathan, S. R., Neelameghan, A., & Gupta, A. K. (1968). Free book service for all; aninternational survey. Bombay; New York: Published for the Mysore Library Association byAsia Pub. House.Ranganathan, S. R., & Palmer, B. I. (1972a). Impact of growth in the universe ofclassification / view through a bibliography / by Bernard I. Palmer. Copenhagen: DanishCentre for Documentation.Ranganathan, S. R., & Palmer, B. I. (1972b). Ranganathan memorial issue. Copenhagen:Danish Centre for Documentation.Ranganathan, S. R., & Quayyum, Z. (1993). New horizons for jute. Ahmedabad, India:National Information Centre for Textile and Allied Subjects.Ranganathan, S. R., & Sivaraman, K. M. (1951). Library manual. Delhi: Indian LibraryAssociation. Free Powerpoint Templates

 24. PublicationsRanganathan, S. R., Sivaraman, K. M., & Sundaram, C. (1940). Reference service andbibliography. With a foreword by Sir Maurice Linford Gwyer. Madras; London: The Madraslibrary association; E. Goldston.Ranganathan, S. R., Social Science Documentation, C., & International Conference onRanganathans, P. (1985). Dr S.R. Ranganathan : a bibliography. New Delhi: Social ScienceDocumentation Centre, Indian Council of Social Science Research.Ranganathan, S. R., & Sundaram, C. (1940). Reference service and bibliography. Madras;London: The Madras Library Association ; E. Goldston.Ranganathan, S. R., & Tamil Nadu Librarians, C. (1969). Library-science-based libraryservice. Madras: New Century Book House.Ranganathan, S. R., & Unesco. (1950). Classification, coding and machinery for search.Paris: UNESCO.Ranganathan, S. R., & Unesco. Field Science Cooperation Office for South, A. (1953). Unioncatalogue of learned periodical publications in South Asia. London: Indian LibraryAssociation. Tennintiya Caivacittanta Nurpatippuk, K., Ranganathan, S. R., &Muthukumaraswamy, R. (1961). Commemoration bibliography of the first 1008 bookspublished by the South India Saiva Siddhanta Works Publishing Society, Tinnevelly, Limited. Free Powerpoint TemplatesTirunelveli.

 25. Notable ContributionsImage source: Image source:http://tower.com Free Powerpoint Templates http://openlibrary.org

 26. Image source: http://vulpeslibris.wordpress.com Free Powerpoint Templates

 27. Law No. 1 Books are for use Free Powerpoint Templates

 28. Law No. 1: Books are for use• S.R.R. observed that books were often chained to prevent their removal and that the emphasis was on storage and preservation rather than use.• He asserted that the purpose of such activities was to promote the use of them. Without the use of materials, there is little value in the item.• By emphasizing use, Ranganathan refocused the attention of the field to access-related issues, such as the librarys location, loan policies, hours and days of operation, as well as such mundanities as library furniture and the quality of staffing. Free Powerpoint Templates

 29. Law No. 2 Every reader his [or her] book Free Powerpoint Templates

 30. Law No. 2: Every reader his [or her] book• This law suggests that every member of the community should be able to obtain materials needed.• Librarians should have excellent first-hand knowledge of the people to be served.• Collections should meet the special interests of the community, and libraries should promote and advertise their services extensively to attract a wide range of users. Free Powerpoint Templates

 31. Law No. 3 Every book its reader Free Powerpoint Templates

 32. Law No. 3: Every book its reader• Each item in a library has an individual or individuals who would find that item useful.• Ranganathan argued that the library could devise many methods to ensure that each item finds it appropriate reader.• One method involved the basic rules for access to the collection, most notably the need for open shelving. Free Powerpoint Templates

 33. Law No. 4 Save the time of the reader Free Powerpoint Templates

 34. Law No. 4: Save the time of the reader• This law is a recognition that part of the excellence of library service is its ability to meet the needs of the library user efficiently.• Ranganathan recommended the use of appropriate business methods to improve library management.• Centralizing the library collection in one location provided distinct advantages.• Excellent staff would not only include those who possess strong reference skills, but also strong technical skills in cataloging, cross-referencing, ordering, accessioning, and the circulation of materials Free Powerpoint Templates

 35. Law No. 5 The library is a growing organism Free Powerpoint Templates

 36. Law No. 5: The library is a growing organism• This law focused more on the need for internal change than on changes in the environment itself.• Library organizations must accommodate growth in staff, the physical collection, and patron use.• Allowing for growth in the physical building, reading areas, shelving, and in space for the catalog. Free Powerpoint Templates

 37. Literature about S.R.R. & his five laws Free Powerpoint Templates

 38. Relevance of the Five Laws today Free Powerpoint Templates

 39. Relevance of the Five Laws today• Ranganathan sees the library as an institution that is active in a constantly changing environment, and according that, the institute should change and adapt itself with spirit of time so it can serve best those who need it.• Even in the 1930s, Ranganathan realized the importance of placing the readers and their needs at the center, making him ahead of his time.• This understanding is not new to academic libraries, but although an effort is being made to satisfy users information needs, there is still more to be done in this critical field. Free Powerpoint Templates

 40. Relevance of the Five Laws today• In order to do that the academic library must expand its boundaries and position itself as a significant player in the new information environment, as an important aid in the creation and distribution of academic information and knowledge, to create a reality in which the library is indeed a living, growing organism.• Innovation and creativity is needed for pro-activism. Success in such initiative is a road in which the academic library can turn Ranganathans vision into the evolutionary reality. Free Powerpoint Templates

 41. References Bates, M. J., & Maack, M. N. (2010). Encyclopedia of library and information sciences: Boca Raton, FL : CRC Press, c2010. 3rd ed. / Marcia J. Bates, editor-in-chief ; Mary Niles Maack, associate editor. Gorman, M. (1998). The five laws of library science then & now. [Article]. School Library Journal, 44(7), 20. Kuronen, T., & Pekkarinen, P. (1999). Ranganathan revisited: a review article. [Feature Article]. supplements to the five laws of library science, 31(1), 45-48. McMenemy, D. (2007). Ranganathans relevance in the 21st century. [Article]. Library Review, 56(2), 97-101. doi: Free Powerpoint Templates 10.1108/00242530710730268

 42. References Ranganathan, S. R. (1988). The five laws of library science / by S.R. Ranganathan: Bangalore : Sarada Ranganathan Endowment for Library Science ; New Delhi : Exclusive distributors, UBS Publishers Distributors, 1988. Ed. 2 reprinted. Satija, M. P. (1987). Sources of research on Ranganathan bibliographical essay (Vol. 19, pp. 311-320). Images source: Krishnamurthy, M. Dr. S. R. Ranganathan : access portal to works by and on him. Retrieved 1st April, 2012, from http://www.isibang.ac.in/~library/portal/ Free Powerpoint Templates

Melvil Dewey Melville Louis Kossuth (Melvil) Dewey (December 10, 1851 – December 26, 1931) was an American librarian and educator, inventor of the Dewey Decimal system of library classification, and a founder of the Lake Placid Club.

Melvil Dewey

Born Melville Louis Kossuth Dewey

December 10, 1851

Adams Center, New York

Died December 26, 1931 (aged 80)

Lake Placid, Florida

Nationality American

Other names Melvil Dewey

Melvil Dui

Education Amherst College

Occupation librarian, resort developer, reformer

Known for Dewey Decimal Classification

Religion Christianity

Spouse(s) Annie R. Godfrey (1878)

Emily McKay Beal (1924)

Relatives Godfrey Dewey (son)

Signature

Joan S. Mitchell, editor in chief of the DDC since 1993, retired from OCLC on 18 January 2013. She is the ninth editor of the DDC since 1876. Under Joan’s editorship, OCLC published DDC 21 (1996), DDC 22 (2003), and DDC 23 (2011), plus the corresponding abridged editions and 200 Religion Class publications accompanying each full edition. In addition, Joan expanded the DDC’s electronic publications, including Dewey for Windows and WebDewey. Most recently, the DDC has been released as linked data at Dewey.info. Joan oversaw development of various mappings and crosswalks to the system, including mappings from Library of Congress Subject Headings. She oversaw the translation of various versions of the DDC into 18 languages. She started the annual Dewey Translators Meetings held in conjunction with the World Library and Information Conference (IFLA), and those meetings became the International Dewey Users Meetings at IFLA. Joan has been a tireless advocate for Dewey and librarianship, and visited 30 countries on six continents on behalf of Dewey. Under her guidance, input from the worldwide Dewey community often shaped the proposals and conversation at meetings of the Dewey editorial team and meetings of the Decimal Classification Editorial Policy Committee (EPC). While at OCLC, she coauthored two books, wrote 30 scholarly papers for publication, and gave over 120 presentations in venues around the world. In 2005, the American Library Association awarded her the Melvil Dewey Medal, which recognizes distinguished service to the profession of librarianship.

Almanacs, yearbooks and handbooks

Almanacs, yearbooks and handbooks are often single volumes which summarize large amounts of facts about things like people and organizations, current and historical events, countries, statistics, and popular culture items like sports, entertainment, zip codes. They can frequently provide quick answers to factual questions, but aren't useful for extensive research. Yearbooks are issued by encyclopedia companies and provide a quick update to events occurring during that year. Handbooks usually are focused on a particular subject, while almanacs are broader in scope.

Britannica Book of the Year.

Chicago: Encyclopaedia Britannica, 1938- . Annual.

Issued every year, this update to Encyclopaedia Britannica has an overview of the year's important events. Your library may subscribe to E.B. online so that you can get the entire encyclopedia and its current events coverage on the Web from the library's computers.

Facts on File: World News Digest with Index.

New York: Facts on File, 1940- . Weekly.

Current events are indexed by person's name, place names and subjects. Because it's issued weekly, you can often find very up-to-date information, whereas yearbooks and almanacs are only issued annually at most. May also be online on NEXUS or on CD-ROM in your library.

Information Please Almanac: Atlas and Yearbook.

New York: Houghton Mifflin, 1947- . Annual.

Facts, tables of statistics, information about popular culture and events, with detailed table of contents and index.

McGraw-Hill Yearbook of Science and Technology.

New York: McGraw-Hill, 1962- . Annual.

Subject-based yearbook of current events in science and technology.

The Oxford Companion to American Literature.

James D. Hart. 5th ed. New York: Oxford University Press, 1983. 896 p.

This handbook serves as a comprehensive guide to American literature, including historical aspects, writers' biographies, awards, societies and trends.

The Statesman's Year Book.

Edited by John Paxton. New York: St. Martin's Press, 1864- . Annual.

A section on international organizations, then a listing for individual countries containing statistical information and facts about political and economic aspects of the country (like welfare and education systems, financial institutions, diplomatic missions and so on).

The World Almanac and Book of Facts.

New York: Funk & Wagnalls, World Almanac, 1868-1976, 1886- . Annual.

Similar to Information Please Almanac but presented in a more formal style - facts, tables of statistics, information about popular culture and events, with detailed table of contents and index. May also be on CD-ROM in your library. Biographical sources

Reference sources with biographical information may provide a brief summary of data about a person, fairly detailed information about a person, or references (citations) to other short or full-length biographies written about the person. Brief summaries are usually found in biographical dictionaries, while other biographical sources and some encyclopedias may have more detailed information. Some cover living people and some dead people, a few cover both.

Biography and Genealogy Master Index.

2d ed. Detroit: Gale, 1980- . Annual. [Also on CD-ROM]

There are no actual biographies here but citations telling where to find biographies, whether short summaries or full-length books.

McGraw-Hill Encyclopedia of World Biography.

12 vols. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1973.

Specifically designed to meet the needs of high school and college students by choosing to cover people who are frequently featured in the curriculum. Features people who are living as well as dead, and the biographical information is quite detailed. Study guides in the last volume identify important people who were associated with particular historical events or issues.

Webster's New Biographical Dictionary.

Springfield, Mass.: Merriam-Webster, 1988. 1130 p.

Summarized biographies of important people of the past, source for quick facts.

Who's Who.

London: Adam and Charles Black, 1894- . Annual.

International version with brief biographical information for living people.

Who's Who in America.

Chicago: Marquis Who's Who, 1899/1900- . Annual.

One of many "Who's Who" and "Who Was Who" sources offered by several different publishing houses. Some focus on ethnic groups, some on historical figures, some on groups such as artists or politicians. Check your library to see which sources are available. Dictionaries

Standard dictionaries give an alphabetical list of words and their definitions, but there are several useful variations also classified as dictionaries. Thesauri contain synonyms and antonyms (opposites) but usually don't define the words. Dialect and slang dictionaries present words and definitions not necessarily found in standard dictionaries. There are also dictionaries of abbreviations and acronyms and dictionaries of quotations. We haven't listed specific examples here, because you'll probably just want to browse your library's collection. These general dictionaries are usually shelved near each other in the reference room. There are also quite a few dictionaries available in CD-ROM and on the Web. Encyclopedias

Encyclopedias traditionally provide comprehensive coverage of an entire area of knowledge. There are general encyclopedias and subject encyclopedias, and they differ as to the level of detail provided and the complexity of the writing. Encyclopedias are good for fact-finding, getting general background information about a subject or starting a research project. The many CD-ROM encyclopedias contain much of the same information as the print volumes, as well as being searchable and giving you the ability to print out text and pictures. The CD-ROM versions and the many subject-based encyclopedias are not separately listed here—check with your library's reference department to see what they have available.

Academic American Encyclopedia.

21 vols. Danbury, Conn.: Grolier, 1998.

Presents fairly brief articles on specific topics, with a clear, concise writing style. More factual information than broad overviews of large subject areas.

Collier's Encyclopedia.

24 vols. New York: Macmillan, 1997.

One of the "big three" adult encyclopedias typically found in public and academic libraries. Scholarly and comprehensive coverage.

Encyclopedia Americana.

International ed. 30 vols. Danbury, Conn.: Grolier, 2002.

Another of the "big three" mixes shorter articles with long articles broad in scope. In length and scholarship, compares toBritannica.

New Encyclopaedia Britannica.

15th ed. 32 vols. Chicago: Encyclopaedia Britannica, 2002.

Considered by many to be the premier English-language general encyclopedia. The writing is scholarly and therefore sometimes difficult to understand in a subject area with which you're unfamiliar. Articles in the Micropaedia are short and fact-filled, while theMacropaedia has long articles surveying broad aspects of a topic. Very extensive list of bibliographic references at the end of each article so you can find additional information.

World Book Encyclopedia.

22 vols. Chicago: World Book, 2002.

Aimed at students, this is very widely used in both public and school libraries. Coverage is provided for all subjects in the U.S. school curriculum, and articles have lots of cross- references to other articles within the encyclopedia and to outside sources. Study guides help to organize research on various topics. This is an excellent place to start when you're totally unfamiliar with a subject area. Indexes and abstracts

Indexes and abstracts supplement the library catalog as described by Bopp and Smith (1995): Users may come into a library, consult the main catalog, and falsely assume they have searched the entire contents of the library. The catalog may confirm the holdings of a periodical [magazine or journal] but not its contents; a poetry collection but not individual poems; the title of an author's collected works but not the individual work; newspapers but not individual news stories. Indexes and abstracts are created and become extremely useful tools to more fully reveal detailed resources not covered in the more general catalog.

For most research papers at the college level, you'll want to look for scholarly journal articles about your chosen topic. Indexes are the tools you'll use for this purpose, and if you're lucky, your library will have some indexes either loaded in the online library catalog or available on CD-ROM. Searching indexes is different than searching the library catalog, however, because indexes don't use the same subject classifications as the library catalog. Some indexes provide books of "descriptors" to help you search for key words and key concepts by which the items have been indexed.

Be aware that indexes will contain items not held at your library, because they are prepared by commercial companies that index a particular group of periodicals or works regardless of where they may be held. A periodical index is most useful if it contains abstracts—brief summaries of the articles. Abstracts make it easier to tell if the article is relevant to the subject of your research.

Other reference tools

Statistics and Government documents

Government documents are available free of copyright and certain publishers compile and index them for use by libraries and other researchers. The volume of documents produced every day by the U.S. government is almost beyond imagining, and the system of numbering documents is unique and unlike the rest of the library's classification system. In addition to laws, regulations and agency documents, the government produces a lot of statistics for public release.

Many academic and public libraries have a lot of government documents and statistics and the various indexing tools you need to be able to locate and retrieve them. A lot of these are available on CD-ROM or in online databases within the library. Quite of bit of this information is being made available on the Web as well. Finding both government documents and statistical information can be a real challenge. A trip to the reference desk is probably the quickest way to zero in on what you need.

Geographic information

Atlases and maps are the main sources of geographical information in libraries, though many encyclopedias and dictionaries have maps which may be sufficient for your purpose. There are different kinds of specialized atlases much as there are different kinds of dictionaries. Some atlases contain statistics such as population, economic factors, weather, and other facts. There are historical or thematic atlases which show the world at certain dates or during certain events, such as wars.

Bibliographies

Bibliographies are lists of works—books or shorter works—which help identify sources where information can be found. You might want to find additional works by a certain author or works on a certain subject. There are hundreds of different kinds of bibliographies compiled for different purposes, and your reference librarian can let you know which ones might be useful in the topic area of your research. Remember that a bibliography will tell you a work exists, but it may not be held by your library. If you find an interesting item in a bibliography, consult your library's catalog to see if it's available in the collection.

UGC-NET-FIRST PAPER

Compiled by

VISHWANATH PRATAP SINGH LIBRARY ASSISTANT

Guru Ghasidas Vishwavidyalaya Bilaspur, Chhatisgarh

UGC Information Technology II

INTERNET The term Internet stands for Internet work Systems. It is a global network of networks. It consists of thousands of interconnected computer networks. TIle growth of the Internet is phenomenal. The Internet is being viewed as a phenomenon unparalleled since the invention of the printing press that ushered in a revolution in the production, circulation and exchange of information. The technical foundation of the Internet allows it to keep expanding almost indefinitely. The Internet has been compared with a tidal wave that will wash over the computer industry snd many others and drowning those who don't learn to swim in its waves. As the computer has become a part and parcel of modern offices the Internet will force itself into the very texture of our life by the turn of the century. For millions of users the world over, Internet has become a means of cross-border transfer of information. It facilitates direct contact between researchers from different countries. It is an exceptional means of communication. It offers an opportunity to every individual to exercise power in a way that no information structure has ever provided. Information put on the Internet becomes instantaneously available and which can be accessible to millions of individuals. No single individual or organisation owns the Internet. Its management is completely decentralised. It is entirely managed by individual and organisational volunteers. Each network meets the expenditure for the installation and operating costs as well as those of connecting up with the other networks_

USES OF THE INTERNET: The list of services available on the Internet is expanding everyday. It has come to be the single unparalleled dt!vice for rmding solutions to all sorts of problems. Image, sound and text travel easily on the Internet. Users from all over the world can discuss back and forth. The Internet can arrange a round table conference at much lower cost. It has already become a new medium of business. Some important applications of the Internet are: E-mail: E-mail is the most widely used Internet service and it has abolished the notion of distance. To send a message through E-mail one has to type a message and it would travel instantly over the network to whomever one wishes. An electronic mailbox that is an address, which specifies the source or destination of an electronic mail message, is the essence of electronic mail. This mailbox,. A storage area that keeps the message until the user reads it. An e-mail message can include text, graphics, voice and video.

FTP: File Transfer Protocol (FTP), a client· server protocol allows a user on one computer system to t.ransfer files to and from another computer system over a TeptIP network regardless of the platforms the users or the host. (remote) site are using provided the user knows the address of the host computer and has some kind of idea of the information stored there. Usenet: Usenet originally implemented in 1979-80 has grown to develop as the largest decentralised information utility in existence. It encompasses government agencies, universities, high schools, business houses of all denominations and individuals. Usenet has emerged 8S one of the important segments of the Internet. There are innumerable topics. A typical Use net message may contain plain text andlor encoded binary information. Each message has a series of headlines which defme the source bfthe messagc, its destination, time and location of posting, what route it has taken over the network and 80 on. Chatting interactively in real time: It is possible to speak (VOICE) in real time on the Internet provided one uses the right kind of software. The quality of the audio depends on the application, the speed of the computer and the compression method used. Standard compression protocols are: CSM, CVSD AND RTP. In a full duplex conversation, one can speak and hear the other person at the same time. In half duplex, only one person can speak at a time.

TelNet: One can access other computers via the Internet by using TeLNet· one of the most important protocols of the Internet. TelNet provides the user an opportunity to be on one computer system and do work on another· which may be very near or thousands of kilometers away. Acquiring .software ; The Internet is the world's biggest software library and it is possible to acquire software from the Internet. The software which are available free from the Internet are known as freeware a nd another kind is known as shareware software which is available for nominal charge. World Wide Web (WWW): There is an incredible amount of inform.ation on the Internet and it is growing exponentially. As any individual or organisation does not control the Internet there is no master record of its information resources. WWW,aproductofthe continuous search for innovative ways of searching information, is a mecha nism that links together information stored on many computers throughout the world. One of the important characteri stics of the WWW documents is their hypertext structure created by Hyper Text Markup Language (HTML) a simple data format. HTML lets one easily link words or pictures in one document to other documents and the resulting bypertext documents are portable from one platform to another. HTML works on matter where the documents are stored - whether in the same computer or elsewhere on the Net. One will just have to click on a phrase or icon in t he first document with one's mouse for the Internet to fetch the related documents on the computer's screen. The system requirements for running a WWW server are minimal. WWW provides a way to interconnect computers running different operating systems. The simplicity of the HTML used for interactive documents allows a user to contribute to the expanding database of documents. The possibilities for hypertext in the WWW environment are endless.

ISSUES OF CONCERN * As the Internet is growing 80 are host ofethical concerns abo ut it. Certainly researchers and scholars - the early users of the Internet - would like to protect the Internet from censorsh ip. But law· enfol' cingage ncies particularly in those countries where the Internet is widely used are considering means to curb impersonators, pirates and other improper users. At present censorship is mainly intended to protect children against indecent material. * Advertisement on the Net is another thorny issue. By its interactive nature it is more persuasive. * In the beginning, everything that was available on the Net was free. It was intended to provide help to researchers around the world. But as the popularity of the Internet is growing a number of pay - service networks are appearing. * Problems of copyright and security have already surfaced. * The continuation of the Internet as a democratic information infrastructure seems to be threatenerl by the notorious web-based terrorists who attempt to spread disinformation and the software giants who are trying to define the Webonomics. * Some people think that Internet may eventually end up in being a medium of ideological propaganda. However, such concerns do not seem to he well founded unlike other technologies of the past it is diversifying rather than a centralizing force. * The rising popularity of the Internet is creating traffic jams and at certain times of the day the networks are so crowded that it is practically impossible to connect with certain server. The In~rnet is still evolving. The real Internet of the future may bear very little resemblance to today's Internet. The growth of the Internet has not followed any planned path in the past. But one thing about its future can be said with certainty that it is poised to be much bigger and exponentially faster.

SPACE SCIENCE AND COMMUNICATION MILESTONES 1962 : Indian National Committee for Space Research (INCOSPAR) formed by the Department of Atomic Energy and work on establishing Thumba Equatorial Rocket Launching Station (TERLS) started. 1963 : First sounding rocket laUIlched from TERLS (November 21, ] 963). 1965 : Space Science & Technology Centre (SSTC) established in Thumba. 1967 : Satellite Telecommunication Earth Station set up at Ahmedabad. 1968: TERLS dedicated to the United Nations (February 2, 1968). 1969: Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) formed under Department of Atomic Energy (August 15, 1969). 1972 : Space Commission and Department of Space set up. ISRO brought UIlder DOS (June I, 1972). 1972-76 : Air-borne remote sensing experiments. 1975 : ISRO becomes Government Organisation (Ap,il1, 1975). First Indian Satellite, Aryabhata, launched (Ap,il19, 1975). 1975-76 SateUite Instructional Television Experiment (SITE) conducted. 1977 Satellite Telecommunication Experiments Project (STEP) carried out. 1979: Bhaskara-I, an experimental satellite for earth observations, launched (JUIle 7, 1979). First Expel'imental launch of SLV-3 with Rahini Technology Payload on board (August 10, 1979). Satellite could not be placed in orbit. 1980: Second Experimental launch ofSLV·3. Rohinisatellite successfully placed in ol'bit. (July 18,1980). 1981 : First developmental launch of SLV-3. RS-Dl placed in orbit (May 31,1981) APPLE, an experimental geo-stationary communication satellite successfully launched (June 19, 1981). Bhaskara·II launched (November 20, 1981). 1982: INSAT·lA laUIlch~d (April 10, 1982). Deactivated on September 6,1982. 1983 : Second developmental launch ofSLV·3. RS-D2 placed in orbit (April 17 , 1983). INSAT·IB, launched (August 30, 1983). 139 1984 : Indo-Soviet manned space mission (April 1984). 1987 : First developmental launch of ASLV with SROSS-] satellite on board (March 24, 1987). Satellite could not be placed in orbit. 1988 : Launch of first operational Indian Remote Sensing Satellite, lRS-lA (March 17, 1988). INSAT-IC launched (July 21, 1988). Abandoned in November 1989. Second developmental launch· of ASLV with SROSS·2 on board (July 13, 1988). Satellite could not be placed in orbit. 1990: INSAT·I0 launched (June 12, 1990). 1991 : Launch of second operational Remote Sensing satellite, IRS·LB (August 29, 1991). 1992 : Third developmental launch of ASLV with SROSS-C on board (May 20, 1992). Satellite placed in orbit.. INSAT-2A, the ft.rst satellite of the indigenously built. second· generat.ion INSAT series. launched (July 10, 1992). 1993 : INSAT·2B, the second sateUite in the I NSAT·2 series, launched (July 23,1993). First developmental launch ofPSLV with IRS·IE on board (September 20, L993). Satellite could not. be placed in orbit. 1994 : Fourth developmentallaunc.b of ASLV with SROSS-C2 on board (May 4, 199--1). Satellite placed in orbit. Second developmental launch of PSLV with IRS·P2 on board (October 15, 1994). Satellite successfully placed in polar sun synchronous orbit. 1995 : I NSAT·2C, the third satellite m the INSAT·2 series, launched (December 7,1995). Launch of third operational Indian Remote Sensing Satellite, IRS·IC (December 28, 1995). 1996: Third developmental launch of PSLV with IRS·P3 on board (March 21. 1996). Satellite placed in polar sun synchronous orbit. 1997: INSAT·20, fourth sateUite in the INSAT series. launched (June 4. 1997). Becomes inoperable on October 4. 1997. (An in-orbit satellite,ARABSAT·IC, since renamed INSAT. 2DT, was acquired in November 1997 to partly augment the INSAT system). First operational launch otPSLV with IRS·] D on board (September 29, 1997). Satellite placed in orbit. 1998: INSAT system capacity augmented With the readiness of INSAT-2DT acquired from ARABSAT(January 1998). 1999 : INSAT·2E, the last satel lite In the multipurpose INSAT-2 series, launched by Ariane from I{Ourali French Guyana (April 3. 1999). fndian Remote Sensing Satellite, IRS·P4 (OCEANSAT), launched by_ Polar Satellite Launch Vehicle (pSLV·C2) along with Korean KITSAT-3 and German OLR·TUBSAT from Sriharikotn (May 26, 1999). 2000: I NSAT-3B, the first satellite in the third generation INSAT·3 series. launched by Artane from KQurou French Guyana (March 22, 2000). 2001: Successfulllight test ofGeosynch..ronolis Satelhte Launch Vehicle (OSLV). (April 18, 2001) with an experimental satellite GSAT·} on board. Successful launch of PSLV·C3 (October 22, 2001) placing three satellites India's TES, Belgian PROBA and German BI RD. in to Polar sunsynchronous orbit. 2002 : Successful launch of INSAT-3C by Ariane from Kourou. French Guyana (January 24,2002). ISRO's Polar Satell.tte Launch Vehicle, PSLV· C4, s uccessfully launched KALPANA·l satellite from Sriharikota (September 12, 2002). Succcssfullaunch ofINSAT-3A by Arlane from Kourou French Guyana, (April 10, 2003). The Second developmental launch ofGSLV-02 with GSAT-2 on board from Sriharikota (May 8, 2003). Successful launch of INSAT -3E by Ariane from Kourou French Guyana, (September 28, 2003). ISRO's Polar Satellite Launch Vehicle, PSLV. C5, successfully launched RESOURCESAT·! (lRS-P6) satellite from Srihankota (October 17, 2003). India launchesEOUSAT. exclusive satellite for educatitma1services. (September 2004) India recognised the potential of space science and technology for the socio-economic developmentofthe society soon after the launch of Sputnik by erstwhile USSR in 1957. The Indian space efforts started in the sixties with the establishment of Thumba Equatorial Rocket Launching Station near Thiruvananthapuram for the investigation of ionosphere using sounding rockets. The Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO), was established in 1969 under the Department of Atomic Energy. The Government of India gave fillip to the space activities by formally setting up t.'le Space Commission and the Department of Space (DOS) in June 1972 and ISRO was also brought under Department of Space. Over the last three decades, India has achieved an enviable progress in the design, development and operation of space systems, as well as using the systems for vital seryices like telecommunication, television broadcasting, meteorology, disaster warning and natural resources survey and management. The space programme has become largely self-reliant with capability to design and build its own satellites for providing space services and to launch them using indigenously designed and developed launch vehicles. The successful first test flight of Geosrynchronous Satellite Launch Vehicle (GSLV) from Sriharikota on April 18, 2001 was the most significant milestone of the Indian space programme. The launch unequivocally demonstrated India's capability to place satellites into geo-synchronous transfer orbits. India is among the si" nations in the world to achieve such a capability. The launch of OS LV is the culmination of efforts of several DOS centres and other institutions that involved complex interfaces between scientific and technological disciplines, industries and research institutions. Another important milestone during the year was the succeasfulflight of PSLV-C3 on October 22, 2001 from Sriharikota. In this fifth consecutively successful flight, PSLV placed three satellites - India's Technology Experiment Satellite, TES, Belgian PROBA and German BIRD into their intended polar sun· synchronous orbit. The requircment of a higher orbit for the Belgian PROBA compared to other two satellites was successfully met by a flight. manoeuvre. Both German and Belgian satellites were launched under commcrcial agreements. The flight has clearly established the reliabil\ty of PSLV for launching not onJy the Indian remote sensing satellites, but also, multiple satellites thus making it an attractive vehicle for the international space community to launch their satellites. PSLV is also used for a geo-synchronous transfer orbit mission for launching India's l\1ETSAT in 2002·03. The INSAT system for telecommunication, television broadcasting and meteorology has received further boost during the year with t.he successful launch ofINSAT·3C on January 24, 2002. INSAT·3C will not only augment the present INSAT system but also continue the services of some of the satellites that need to be phased out at the end of their mission life. INSAT is one of the largest domestic communication satellite systems in the world with five satellites, INSAT·2C, INSAT·2DT, INSAT·2E, INSAT·3B and INSAT·3C. The INSAT system also includes a few transponders leased Crom other agencies for meeting the current demands. Planning of IN SAT -4 series of satellites has been initiated based on detailed discussions with the various users. Seven satellites are proposed in the INSAT-4 series. Experimental communication satellites, OSATa, are built, which are launched during the developmental test flights of GSLV. Besides the use of INSAT for telecommunication, broadcasting and meteorological s~rvices, emphasis is being given for using the system for grassroots level applications like developmental communication and satellite·based training. New initiatives' have been taken for using INSAT fOI" introduction of tele·medicine to make speciality treatment accessible to the population an remote areas. The Indian remote sensing satellite system, IRS, which has the biggest constellation of satellites, continues to provide space-based remote sensing data for 8 number of applications in India and abroad. IRS system, at present, has five satellites, namely, LRS-lC, IRS·1D, IRS·P3, fRS·P4 (OCEANSAT) and Technology Experiment Satellite (TES). The TES has given further fillip to advance the tecbnolo~ of remote sensing in India. It has enabled testing new satellite hardware and demonstrating newer remote sensing techniques. It incorporates a panchromatic camera providing a spatial resolution of up to 1 m. Remote sensing satellites like RESOURCESAT, CARTOSAT·I and CARTOSAT·2, is progressing well. They will not only continue the services of the present IRS satellites but 8.lso enhance the service capabilities. CARTOSAT·l is already in service. The remote sensing applications continue to expand to several new areas; the data has been used to assess damage due to floods, earthquakes, etc. and for helping in relief operations. Remote Sensing Data Policy (RSDP) was announced which helps in streamline the availability of remote sensing data from Indian and-foreign satellites to users in India. The launch of two satellites . one of Belgium and another of Germany - on board PSLV marks an important event during the year under commercial marketing of India's space capabilities. Data from IRS satellites continue to be received by several ground stations worldwide. The lease agreement of transponders on board INSAT·2E to INTELSAT has continued.

SPACE TRANSPORTATION:

Space Transportation system includes the satellite launch vehicles to place satellites like INSAT and IRS Band scie ntific satellites in the requisite orbits as well as the sounding rockets for carrying out short duration scientific experiments. India made a modest beginning in this area with the launch of a 75 mm diameter sounding rocket in 1963 for investigation of ionosphere over the gee-magnetic equator over Thumba, near Thiruvananthapuram. Since then, India has established a s ubstantial capability in the design, development and operationalisation of a series of sounding rockets for scientific investigations, Polar Satellite Launch Vehicle, PSLV, for launching Indian remote sensing satellites and Geosynchronous Satellite Launch Vehicle, GSLV, for launching geo.stationary communication satellites.

EARTH OBSERVATIONS SYSTEM:- Earth Observations System (EOS) is an important space infrastructure that has been established by the Department of Space (DOS). The system, which was commissioned in 1988 with the launch of Indian Remote Sensing SatelHte, IRS· lA, has the world's largest constellation of five satellites (IRS·} C, fRS·l D. IRS-P3, IRS-P4 and TES) presently in 'operation. It provides space-based remote sensing data in a variety of spatial resolutions and spectral bands meeting the needs of various applications. The EOS definition, development, operation and ita application are co·ordinated by the National Natural Resources Management System (NNRMS), for which DOS is the nodal agency. NNRMS is an integrated resource management system a imed at optimal utilisation of country's natllral resources by a proper and systematic inventory of resource availability using EOS data in conjunction with conventional techniques. NNRMS is supported at the national leve l by the Planning Committee of NNRMS (pC·NNRMS), which provides guidelines for implementation of the system and also oversees the progress of remote sensing applications for natural resources management in the country. The NNRMS activities are guided by ten Standing Committees, namely, (i) Agriculture & Soils, (ii) Bio-Resources (iii) Geology and Mineral Resources (iv) Water Resources (v) Ocean Resources (vi) Cartography & Mapping (vii) Urban Management (viii) Rural Development (ix) Technology & Training and (x) Meteorology. Each of the Standing Committee is chaired by Secretaries of the re spective Government departments and includes experts from major Modular Opto- electronic Scanner (MOS) user departments. Ground reIOiullOl'l (m) 1S69x139fi 623,11.523 523lCfi44 SPACE SEGMENT No. of 8p«:tU.l bliimls Satellites in Operation: There are 5 spectral (nm) 765-768 log·IOto U;00-1700 Indian Remote Sensing (IRS) satellites in Swath (km) operational at.. present· IRS·lC, IRS-lD,IRS·P3, IRS-P4 and Technology Experiment Satellite X-ray Payload (TES). IRS-IB, which was launched in August - Three Pointed Proportional Counters (PPC) 1991. was decommissioned during the year in Energy range of2-20 keY after it served for more than 10 years, even . X·ray Sky Monitor (XSM) 10 Energy though it was designed for only three years life. range 2-8 ke V IRS-1C and IRS-1D: IRS-IC and IRS-ID. IRS-P4 (OCEANSAT).· IRS·P4 spacecraft was which .r. identical, were launched in launched on board PSLV-C2 10 May 1999. It December 1995 .nd September L997 carries the following payloads: respectively. They carry three cameras. Ocean Colour Monitor (OCM) Panchromatic Camera (PAN), Linear Imaging Sensor Parameters Specifications Self Scanner (LISS-III) and Wide Field Sensor Spatial Resolution (m) 360 (WiFS) with foUowing specifications: Swath {km) 1'120 PAN ~ WLl~S Repetitivity (days) 2 VNIR " SWIR Local time of equator 12 nool1 1 ~lIa ,. 23,1) 70.5 ". Crossing (bra) ReaoIuUon {mJ SV0'8lh (\on) 7. '" , .. 81. Spectral Bands (nm) 402-422; 433·453; Speroal Band 0.6·0.76 0.62·0.159 1.~1.7 0.62·0.68 480-500; 500-520; (MlCI'OMJ 0.62·0.68 0.77-0.86 545-565: 660-680; 0,77·0.86 745-785: 845-885 IRS-PS IRS·P3 w8s1aunched Multi-frequency Scanning Microwave 10 March L996 on board India's PSLV. It carries n Wide Field Sensor Radiometer (MSMR) (Wi.FS), Modular Opto-electronics Scanner Frequency (Gflr.) 6.G 10.6 '8 21 (MOS) developed by the German Space Agency. SIl8tJ.a1 Re80lubon (kro) '20 80 40 40 DLR, and an X·ray astronomy instrument. The Swath (km) 1360 details of the payload are as follows: Temp. Resolution 1,0 dCR K IRS-P3 is operated in earth pointing mode for the operation ofWiFS and MOS and Dynamic Temp. Range 330 dog J.: In the sky· pointmg mode for the operation of the X-ray Technology Experiment Satellite (TES) instrument. TES was launched on board PSLV - C3 on October Wide Field Sensors (WiFS) 22, 2001. The satellite, weighing lL08 kg, is an llond ·3 0.62·0.68 micron~ experimental satellite to demonstrate and Bond-'I 0.77·0.86 microns validate, in orbit, technologies that could be Band·~ I.M-1.70 microns used in the future satellites of ISRO. Some of Ground nllJOlution 182xl66 (red .. d the technologies that are being demonstrated m m near TES are attitude and orbit control system, high mfn- red); 246xl86 m (shorlwo\'1! Infratorque reaction wheels, new reaction control red) system with optimised thrusters and a single SWBth 810 km propellant tank, light woi!ight spacecraft structure, solid state recorder, X- band phased 143 array antenna, improved satellite positioning system, miniaturised TIC and power system and, two·mirror·on·a:'cis camera optics. TES also carries a panchromatic camera with a spatial resolution of 1 m. FOLLOW-ON SATELLITES FOR EARTH OBSERVATION IRS-P6 (RESOURCESAT-l), IRS·P6 (RESOURCESAT·l) is launched by PSLV in 2002·03. It will carry the following payloads: (i) a multi·spectral camera USS·3 providing 23.5 m spatial resolution in four spectral bands with a swath of 140 km, (ii) a high resolution multi·spectral camera LISS·4 providing 5.8 m spatial resolution operating in three spectral bands and (iii) an Advanced Wide Field Sensor (A WiFS) with a spatial resolution better than 70 m in three spectral bands and providing a swath of 740 km. IRS·P6 will not.only provide service continuity to IRS·1C and IRS·IO but also enhance the service capa,bilities in the areas of agriculture, disaster management, land and water resources, with better resolution imageries. mS-P5 (CARTOSAT -1), lRS·P5 is launched by PSLV in 2003·04. The satellite is primarily intended for advanced cartographic applications. IRS·P5 will have two panchromatic cameras on board with 2.5 m resolution with a swath of 30 km each. These cameras are mounted with a tilt of +26 deg and -5 deg along the track with respect to nadir to provide stereo pairs of images needed for the generation of Digital Terrain Model (OTM)/ Digital Elevation Models (OEM) of the required regions. The data products will be used for cartographic applications, cadastral mapping and updating, land use and other GIS applications. The satellite has a revisit capability of 5 days, which can be realised by steering the spacecraft about roll axis by 26 degrees. During tbe year tbe equipment panel design bas been finalised. Various components are under development and testing. Ground Segment: The ISRO Telemetry, Tracking and Command Network (lSTRAC) monitors and controls aU the IRS satellites besides other low earth orbit satellites. ISTRAC has a ni!twork of ground stations located at Bangalore, Sriharikota, Port Blair. Thiruvanantbapuram, Mauritius and Bearslake witb multi·mission Spacecraft Control Centre at Bangalore. TIC stations at Brunei and Biak have a]so been added recently. ISTRAC. at present tra.cks, monitors and controls IRS·IC,IRS·ID, IRS·P3, JRS·P4 and TES. ISTRAC was extensively used for conducting various demonstrations on TES. The payload operations on IRS·IC and IRS·ID are carried out over the Inman stations at Shadnagar in India as wp.ll as foreign data reception stations at Fairbank (USA), Seoul, Korea, Cotopaxy (Ecuador), Dubai, NeustraJitz (Germar.y), Norman (USA), Tokai (Japan) and Riyad (Saudi Arabia). On an average abou~ 350 to 400 payload operations a.re being carried out per month. IRS·P3 payload operations are being carried out for about 250 times per month over Shadnagar in India, Neustralitz and Wallops (Germany) and Maspolamas (Spain). SATELLITE DATA ACQUISiTION, PROCESSING AND DISSEMINATION The Nap.onal Remote Sensing Agency (NRSA), Hyderabad, oontinues to receive remote sensing data from the Indian satellites, IRS·IC, IRS·lO, IRS·PS, IRS·P4 and the TES as well as the US NOAA·14, Landsat·5 and European ERS·2. The Data Reception Station (ORS) of NRSA at Shadnagar, has been further augmented to receive data from TRS·P5 (CARTOSAT) and IRS·P6 (RESOURCESAT). Aerial Remote Sensing: NR5A operates two aircraft that have been modified for multi· sensor operation with high performance work station and digital photogrammetry system to generate data products. Aerial remote sensing services provided by NRSA is availed by several agencies for aerial photography, mapping, infrastructure planning, aeromagnetic surveys,large scale base maps and topographic and cadastral mapping. Some of the aerial surveys carried out include aerial photography of nine towns of Gujarat that were affected by the earthquake in January 2001, twenty seven towns in Andhra Pradesh, seven districts in , three towns of Rajasthan, Bangalore peripheral areas and flood affected areas of Orissa. Low altitude flightR for airborne geophysical survey for Atomic Mineral Division and nights carrying Synthetic Aperture Radar have also been carried out. Re mote Sensing Data Policy: The Govcrnmen~ has announced, a Remote Sensing Data Policy (RSDP) in order to streamline the availability of remote sensing data from Indian and foreign satellites to users in India. As per the RSDP. Government's permission will be required for operating remote sensing satellites in India and for distribution of satellite images in India. The NRSA, Hyderabad, will be the national acquisition and distribution aeeney for all satellite data within India. NRSA can enter into agreements for distribution of data from foreign satellite in India. Antrix Corporation, the commercial agency under the Department of Space, will license the use of IRS capacities outside India. The announcement of RSDP is an important step towards making transparent. the procedures of satellite data distribution, including those from high·resolution imaging systems. I t would help to regulate the process of image distribution so that Indian users are not denied access to valuable satellite based imageries, which can be used in the development of natural resources. Remote Sensing Applications: Space-based remote sensing, because of its synoptic and repetitive coverage of large areas as well as providing data in a quantifiable manner has enabled monitoring and assessment of various natural resources. Today space· based remote sensing is used for several areas of resources, survey and management. Projects of national relevance in different application themes are being carried out with the involvement of user agencies at central and state levels. Some of the major applications to which remote sensing is being used in the country are highlighted in the following paragraphs. Crop Acreage llnd Production Estimation (CAPE): CAPE was initiated in 1995 with the sponsorship of the Department of Agriculture and Cooperation. Under this project, multi·date lRS satellite data are used for pre-harvest acreage and production estimation for major food crops as well as cotton. The estimates are provided far kharif rice in Bihar. rabi dee in Orissa, mustard in , Gujarat, Haryana, Rajasthan and West Bengal, wheat in Bihar, , Gujarat, Madhya Pradesh, Rajasthan and Uttar Pradesh and sorghum in Maharashtra. FASAL: Based on the success of CAPE. An enlarged and comprehensive scheme known as Forecasting Agricultural output using Space, Agrometeorology and Land based observations (FASAL) bas been taken up. FASAL now covers kharif rice in Orissa as a pilot project as well as forecasting kharif rice production at the national level. It is proposed to set up a FASALNCCF (National Centre for Crop Forecasting) under the aegis of the Ministry of Agriculture. DroughtAssessmentand Monitoring: Based on the data collected by the satellites on the vegetation indices and ground based information, fortnightly bulletins on crop conditions depicting ag,ricultural drought are being issued for eleven slates, and at sub· district level for sb: stales during kharifseason. Flood Mapping: The Flood Mapping. Using satellite imageries are being undertaken since 1987 to help Department of Agriculture and Cooperation and State Relief Agencies and Central Water Commission. Under this, flood prone river basins of Brahmaputra, Kosi, Ganga, Indus, Godavari and Mahanadi are covered and near real time inundation and damage estimation maps are generated. Forest Monitoring: The Forest Survey of India carries out the forest cover mapping on 1:250,000 scale on a biennial basis. Karnataka, Andhra Pradesh and Mo.harashtra have used satellite based dala for preparation of forest working plans. A biodiversity characterization at landscape level has also been taken up in four regions of the country, namely, North·Eastern Himalaya, Western Himabya, Western Ghats and Andaman and Nicobar Islands. The activities related to preparation ofbiome level ecological zone maps and topographical details are nearing completion. The project is being undertaken with the sponsorship of the Department of Biotechnology. A few medicinal plant colonies in the Himalayas like Hyppophae rhamnoides, Ephedra gerardiana and Taxus baccata have been mapped. Irrigatron Command Areas: Under the sponsorship of the Central Water Commission, 14 large irrigated commands covering five states (Andhra Pradesh, Assam, Maharashtra, Rajasthan and West Bengal) extending to an area of 3.12 Mha (million hectare) have been taken up for monitoring using satellite data. So far evaluation of seven command areas has been complete·d. Snow-melt Run otl'Prediction: Forecasting and monitoring of Snow-melt Run-off for the Satellite River Basin is being carried out since 1994 with the sponsorship of Bhakra-Beas Management Board. The forecast is made every year by the first week of April, which is further updated subsequently. Integrated Land and Water Resources Development: Generation of data for Integrated Mission for Sustainable Development (IMSD) for 84 Mha area covering 175 districts located in 28 States have been completed and similar work has been extended to Koraput- Bolangir-Kalahandi (KBK) region of Orissa. The Department of Land Resources under the Ministry of Rural Development is now working towards institutionalising IMSD for implementation. Wasteland Mapping: The Wasteland Mapping has been carried out in five phases during 1986-2000 on a 1:50,000 scale under the sponsorship of the Department of Land Resources under the Ministry of Rural Development. 13 categories of wastelands in three broad categories have been identified - (A) Barren rockylsheet rock.; (B) Gullied areal ravines; and (C) Minmglindustrial wastelands. A wasteland atlas of India has been generated and the information is used for planning several developmental programmes. A digital data base is also now being created . National Drinking Watel' Mission: Under the sponsorship of the Department of Drinking Water of the Ministry of Rural Development, maps showing prospective zones of ground water occurrence and recharge are being prepared on 1:50,000 scale ill six states (Andhra Pradesh, Karnataka, Madhya Pradesh, Chattisgarh, Kerala and Rajasthan). So far 930 maps have been prepared out of the 1800 maps required. The maps are integrated with GIS data base and identify areas and sites for locating borewells. Coastal Studies: Information on Coastal wet lands, land forms, land use, shore line changes, etc, have been mapped on 1:250,00011 :50,000 scales for the Ministry of Environment and Forests. Coral reef maps on 1:50,000 scale for Gulf of Kutch, Gulf of Mannar, Palk's Bay, and Andaman & Nicobar islands have been generated. Mapping of features between High Tide Line (HTL) nnd Low Tide Line (LTL) and land use feaLures for a strip of 500 m from HTL, on 1:25,000 scale, under Coastal Regulation Zone has also been carried out. The maps are used for preparing coastal zone management plans and for formulating regulations on construction along HTL. Use ofIRS-P4 (OCEANSAT) Data: An endto- end task of using IRS·P4 data for oceanographic, marine-atmospheric and coastal environmental applications has been taken up. Several agencies like Department of Ocean Development, Indian Meteorological Department, National Institute of Oceanography, Central Ma.rine Fisheries Research Institute, etc., besides several State Departments are participating in this task. The Ocean Colour Monitor (OCM) of IRS-P4 provides data on Chlorophyll distribution and primary productivity for locating potential fish zones, sea surface velocities,suspended sediment movement, coastal landforms, coral reefs, etc. The Multi-frequency Scanning Microwave Radiometer (MSMR) on board the satellite provides data on humidity over oceans, water vapour content, winds, rain rate, fluxes, sea ice, etc. Disaster Management: Landslide Hazard Zonation (LHZ) Mapping: Landslide Hazard Zonation (LHZ) mapping on 1:25,000 scale is being carried out for all major pilgrim and tourist routes in the Himalayan region in Uttaranchal and Himachal Pradesh. Database has been created for the entire 2000 km long corridor and LHZ maps have been prepared. The routes covered include: RishikeshRudraprayag- Chamoli- Badrinath, RishikeshGaumukh, Rudraprayag-OkhimathKe darnath ,Chamoli-Okhimath and Pithoragarh-Malpa, all in Uttarancha1; ShimlaManali, -Sumdo and Dalhousie Brahmaur in Himachal Pradesh. The maps are used by State Public Works Departments (PWD), Border Roads Organisation and some NOOs. Gujarat Earthquake: The space based imagery along with aerial remote sensing provided inputs to the Gujarat State Administration during the Earthquake in January 2001 in terms of locating the worst affected towns, to assess the changes in the terrain features and damage assessment. The satellite news gathering terminal was also moved from the Space Applications Centre and set up at Bhuj which was the only link till February 2, 2001 to co-ordinate rescue and relief operation. National (Natural) kesources Information System: A spatial information infrastructure organised around GIS for facilitating developmental planning and decision making at DistrictJStatelNational level is being implemented for the Planning Authorities. Already NRIS has been implemented for 30 districts and four state nodes. The NRrs comprises 22 spatial layers and 8 non-spatial layers pertaining to natural resources as well as socio-economics.

Computer UGC Research Aptitude Part II

QUESTIONS 1. Central Processing Unit (CPU) - A. The computer's primary QUESTIONS I processing hardware wh,ich 1. Who said that members of the interprets and execute program same species are not alike? instructions and manages the (a) Darwin (b) Herbert Spencer function of input, output and storage (c) Best (d) Good devices. 2. A st;:ttistical measure based upon the entire population is called B. is considered to be heart of the parameter while measure based upon computer. a sample is known as C. may reside on a single chip on the (a) sample parameter (b) inference computer's motherboard, or on a (c) statistic (d) none of these larger card inserted into a special slot 3. Generalized conclusion on the on the motherboard basis of a sample is technically D. All the above known as. 2. The Arithmetic and Logic Unit (a) Statistical inference of external (ALU)- validity of the research A. is the component of CPU. (b) data analysis and interpretation B. performs arithmetic and logical (c) parameter inference operations. (d) · all of the above C. Both A and B 4. A researcher selects a probability D. None of the above sample of 100 out of the total 3. Data population. It is A. A a collection of unorganized- (a) a cluster sample items that can include letters, (b) a random sample .. numbers, symbols, images and (c) a stratified sample sounds that computer process and (d) a systematic sample organize it into meaningful 5. Aresearcher divides the information. populations into PG, graduates and B. is a set or-standards for 10 + 2 students and using the random controlling the transfer of business digit table he selects some of them dOCUID€nte, such as purchase from. Each. This is technically called orders and invoices, between (a) stratified sarp.pling computers. (b) stratified random sampling ' C. Both A and B (c) representative sampling D. None of the above (d) none ofthese 4. E-MAIL 6. The final result of a study will be A. stands for electronic mail more accurate if the sample drawn is B. stores purchase orders and (a) taken randomly invoices, between computers. (b) fixed by quota C. Both A and B (c) representative to the population D. None ofthe above (d) purpOSIVe 5. ED! 7. A researcher selects only 10 A stands for Electronic Data members as a sample from the total Interchange (ED!) population of 5000 and considers it B. is a set of standards for good because controlling the transfer of business (a) he was a good researcher documents, such as purchase orders (b) he was guided by his supervisor and invoices, between computers. (c) the populations was C. Both A and B homogeneous (d) all ofthese D. None of the above 8. Area (cluster) sampling t echnique 6. Hardware is used when A. The physical components ofa (a) popul~tion is scattered and large computer size of the sample is to be drawn B. includes-processors, memory (b) population is heterogeneous chips, input/output devices, tapes, (c) long survey is needed disks, cables, modems. (d) (a) and (c) C. Both A and B 9. A researcher divides his D. None of the above population into certain groups and 7. Input fixes the size of the sample from A. A data or iJlljtruction ~hat you each group. It is called enter into tne memory of a (a) stratified sample (b) quota sample l.UDJPU(,t;L (c) cluster sample (d) all of the above B. hardware components that result 10. Which ofthe following is a non- in the transfer of data. 147 probability sample ? C. Both A and B (a) Quota sample D. None of the above (b) Simple random sample 8. Four types ofInput are (c) Purposive sample A. data, programs, commands and (d) (a) and (c) both user responses. 11. Which t echnique is generally B. hardware components that result followed when the population is in the transfer of data. finite ? C. Both A and B (a) Area sampling technique D. None ofthe above (b) Purposive sllmpling technique 9. The input devices are the (c) Systematic sampling technique A. computer hardware that accepts (d) None ofthe above data and instructions from user. 12. Validity of a research can be B. communication between hardware improved by components that result in the transfer (a) eliminating extraneous factors of data. (b) taking the true representative C. Both A and B sample ofthe population D. None of the above (c) both of the above measures 10. Input/Output devices(llO) (d) none ofthese A. Communications between the user 13. Field study is related to and the computer that results in (a) real life situations transfer of data (b) experimental situations B. Communication between (c) laboratory situations hardware components that result in (d) none of the above the transfer of data. 14. Independent variables are not C. Both A and B marupulated in D. None of the above (a) normative researches 11. Microsoft office (b) ex-post facto researches A. is .8 suite of Microsoft primary (c) both ofthe above application for window and (d) none ofthe above Macintosh. 15. The research antagonistic to ex- B. includes some combination of post facto research is word, Excel, Powerpoint, Access and (a) experimental studies schedule along with a host ofinternel (b) normati~e researches and other utilities. (c) library researches C. Both A and B (d) all ofthe above D. None of the above 16. Who is regarded the father of 12. Modem: scientific social surveys? A. Abbreviation for (a) Darwin (b) Booth modulator/demodulator. (c) Best (d) None oft.hese B. It is an InputJOutput device that 17. Attributes of objects, events or allows computer to communicate things which can be measured are through telephone lines. called C. converts outgoing digital data into (a) qualitative measure analog signals that can be transmitted (b) data over phone lines and converts (c) variables incoming audio signals into digital (d) none ofthe above data that can be processed by the 18. The process not nE;ededin computer. D. All the above experimental researches is 13. Multimedia (a) observation A. refers to the integration of (b) controlling multiple media such a8 visual (c) manipulation and replication imagery, text, vide.o, sound, and (d) . reference collection animation. 19. The experimental study is based B. often associated with the on the law of information superhighway, or with (d) single variable interactive T.V-that can prODuce (b) replication videos (informaion on demand) or (c) occupation with hypermedia. (d) interest ofthe subject C. is a combinatlOn of software and 20. All are example of qualitative hardware, both. variables except D. All the above (a) religion and castes 14. Multimedia (b) sex A. is a very powerful form of (c) observation communicating ideas, searching for (d) interest of the subject information and experiencing new 21. An example of scientific concepts of common media. knowledge is B. enhance business presentations (a) authority ofthe Prophet or great C. Both A and B men D. None of the above (b) social traditions and customs 15. Motherboard (c) religious scriptures A. is the main circuit board, also (d) laboratory and field experiments called system board, in an 22. A teacher encounters various electrOniC device which consists of problems during his professional sockets that accepts additional experiences. He should boards. (a) resign from his post ' in . such B. is a very powerful form of situations communicating ideas (b) do research onthat problem and C. The interactive feature of network find a solution D. None of the above (c) avoid the problematic situations , 16. Printers (d) take the help of head ofthe A. is an output device that produce institution text and graphics on a physical 23. A research problem is feasible medium such as paper or only when transparency film. (a) it is researchable B. are classifieds into the following (b) it is new and adds something to categories-Impact printers and knowledge Nonlmpact printers. (c) it has utility and relevance C. Both A and B (d) all of these O. None of the above 24. Formulation of hypothesis may 17. A program not be necessary A. is a sequence of instructions or (a) survey studies actions (b) fact finding (historical) studies B. must have mechanisms for (c) normative studies carrying out processing operations (d) experimental studies (like arithmetical operations or 25. Studying the social status of a moving information around) and for population a researcher concluded handling input and output. that Mr. X is socially backward. His C. Both A and B conclusion is D. None of the above (aJ wrong (b) right 18. Output (c) inaccurate (d) biased A. The data that has been processed Note: Such studies are conducted m into a useful form and can be scen on relative terms. VDU 01' can be taken on paper by 26. A good hypothesis should be using printer or listen to it through (a) precise, specific and conslstent speakers or a headset. with most known facts B. can be saved on a floppy disk or (b) formulated in such a way that it CD for future use. can be tested by the data C. can be generated in the form of- (c) of limited scope and should not text. graphics, audio, video. have global significance D. All the above '(d) all of these 19. Office Automation System 27. Hypothesis can not be stated in A. Autou ;ate routine office tasks. (a) null and question form terms 148 (b) declarative terms B. are classifieds into the following (c) general terms categories- Impact and Non-Impact (d) directional terms C. Both A and B 28. Logic of induction is very close D. None of the above to 20. The Information System (IS) (a) the logic of sampling department- (b) the logic of observation A. Supports organization's (c) the logic of the controlled information systems and also support variable (d) none of the above organization's overall mission. 29. In order to augment the acc~acy B. The IS department provide of the study a researcher technical support for hardware and (a) should increase the size of the software, but may be involved in the sample design and implementation of an (b) should be honest and unbiased organization's entire information (c) should keep the variance high system. (d) all of these C. IS professionals also ensure that 30. All causes n?n ,sampling errors systems generate all the appropriate except 19 types of information and reports (a) faulty tools of measurement required by the organization's (b) inadequate sample manager and workers. (c) non response D. All the above (d) defect in data collection 21. Programming language 31. Total error in a research is equal A. is a higher level language than to machine code for writing programs. (a) sampling error + non-sampling B. use a variety of basic English. error C. Both A and B (b) [(sampling error) + (non - D. None of the above sampling error)t 22. Low level languages (c) only samp'ling error A. are machine dependent, i.e they (d) sampling error x 100 are designed to run on a particular 32. The probability of a head and a computer and in the form of D's and tail of tossing four coins 1's. simultaneously is B. are also easier to learn and are not (a) 118 (b) 116 dependent on a particular type of (c) 114 (d) 1164 computer. 33. Which of the fQl10wing is a C. need interpreter or compiler to primary source of data? ' convert into low level language so (a) Personal records, letters, diaries, that computer can understand. autobio-graphies, wills, etc. D. All the above (b) Official records-governments' 23. High level languages documents, information preserved by A. are English type languages where social-religious organizations etc. a single statement may correspond to (c) Oral testimony of traditions and several instructions in machine customs language and human being can (d) Allofthe ahove understand easily. 34. For doing external criticism (for B. are also easier to learn and are not establishing the authenticity of data) dependent on a particular type of a researcher must verify: computer. (a) the signature and handwriting of C. need interpreter or compiler to the author convert into low level language so (b) the paper and ink used in that that computer can understand. period whicltis under study D. All the above (c) style of prose writing of that 24. Pipelining period A. is a technique that enable a (d) all of the above processor to execute more 35. The validity and reliability of a instructions in a given time. research will be at stake when- B. the control unit begins executing a (a) The author wh,o is the source of new instruction before the current information is biased, . incompetent instruction is completed. or dishonest C. Both A and B (b) The incident was reported after a D. None of the above long period of time from that of its 25. Ports: occurrence A External devices such as a (c) T4e researcher himself is not keyboard, monitor, printer, mouse competent enough to draw logical and microphone often are attached conclusions by a cable to the system unit the (d) All ofthe above interface 36. While writing research report a B. point of attachment to the system researcher unit is called a port. Most of the time (a) must riot use the numerical ports are located on the back of the figures in numbers in the beginning system unit, but they also can be of sentences placed on the front. (b) must arrange it in lpgical, topical C. AorB and chronological order D. None of the above (c) must compare his results with 26. Application software those of the other studies A. any computer program used to (d) all of the above create or process data such as text 37. A researcher wants to study the documents, spreadsheets, graphic future of the Congress I in India .. etc. For the study which tool is most B. programs to operate only mouse appropriate for him? functions (a) Questionnaire (b) SchedUle C. a type of program designed to (c) Interview (d) Rating scale handle very small instruction sets. 38. Survey study aims at: D. None of the above (i) knowing facts about the l!Xisting 27. Desktop Publishing programs situation A. belongs to Application software (ii) comparing the present status with B. used to literate individuals 10 the standard norms computing (iii) criticising the existing situation C. a type of program designed to (iv) identifying the means of handle very small instruction sets. improving the existing situation D. None ofthe above (a) (i) and (ii) only 28. ABell (b) (i), (ii), and (iii) A. is 7 bit binary code (c) (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) B. developed by American National (d) (ii) and (iii) only Standards Institute (ANSI) 39. Seeing a very big rally it was C. represent symbolic, numeric and reported that JD will win the alphanumeric characters election, the conclusion was based D. All the above on : 29. Assembler (a) random sampling A is a computer program that (b) cluster sampling ' converts assembly language (c) systematic sampling instructions into machine language. (d) purposive sampling B. developed by American National 40. The per capita income of India Standards Institute (ANSn from 1950 to 1990 is four times. This C. represent symbolic, numeric and study is alphanumeric characters, voice (a) social (b) horizontal D. All the above (c) longitudinal (d) factorial 30. ATM 41. It is an example of negative A stands for Asynchronous Transfer correlation: Mode (a) an increase iiI population will B. is a network protocol designed to lead to a shortage of food grains send voice, video and data (b) poor intelligence means poor transmission over a single network achievement in school C. provides differtent kinds of (c) corruption in India is increasin·g connections and bandwidth on (d) poor working condition retards demand. Depending on the type of output data being transmitted 45.If you are doing experiment on a D. All the above large group of sample which method 31. Backup means of controlling will you adopt? A. To create a duplicate set of progra (a) matching m or data files in case the originals (b) randomization become damaged. (c) elimination and matching both B. Provides difi'ertent kinds of (d) elimination . connections and bandwidth in The other name of independent computers variable for an experimental research C. the type of data transmission is/are O. None 'ofthe above (a) treatment variable 32. Computers are now used in (b) experimental variable A. restaurants, automobile (c) manipulated variable companies (d) all of the above B. offices and homes 46.The historical research is different C. research areas from experimental research in the D. All the above process of 33. Information (a) replication A is the summarization of data (b) the formulation of the hypothesis B. implies data that is organized and (c) the hypothesis testing is meaningful to the person who is (d) all of the above receiving it 47.The reVIew of the related study . C. should be meaningful, brief, is important while undertaking a accurate and help us to our research because knowledge and decision making (a) it avoids repetition or duplication D. All the above (b) it helps in understanding the gaps 34. Data. (c) it helps the researcher not to draw A. can be defined 8S fact, illogical conclusions observation, assumption or (d) all of the above occurrence and is 8 plural of "datum" 48. Which of the following is not the B. in general refers to raw facts characteristic of a researcher? gathered from different sources. (a) He is a specialist rather than a C. denotes any or all facts, num bers, generalist letters. symbols etc that can be (b) He is industrious and persistent processed or manipulated by a on the trial of discovery computer (c) He is not inspirational to his D. All the above chosen field but accepts the reality 35. Data and Information is (d) He is not versatile in his interest A. often used interchangeably and even in his native abilities B. not .used interchangt:ably (e) He is versatile in his interest, C. not used by people to make even in his native abilities decisions (f) he is objective D. None of the above 49. Collective psychology of the 36. Logical data refers whole period is a theory which A. to the way in which the data are (a) can explain all phase of historical recorded on the storage medium 21 development B. in general refers to processed facts (b) means the psychology of the gathered from different80urces whole society C. can be defined as fact. (e) means psychological approach of observation, assumption or data collection occurrence and is a plural of "datum" (d) all oftl1.e above D. None ofthe above 50. Bibliography given in a research 37. Data item report A is a basic or indjvidual element of (a) helps those interested in further data research and studying the problem B. is identified by 8 name and is from another angle assigned a value (b) makes the report authentic C. is something referred to a8 a field (e) shows the vastknowledge of the D. All the above researcher 38. Smallest addressable unit in (d) none ofthe above computer 51. If the sample drawn does not A. Byte-an arbitrary set of eight bits specify any condition about the that represents a character parameter of the population, it is B.FM called C.TPM (a) selected statistics D. None of the above (b) distribution free statistics 39. File (c) census A is a collection of related records (d) none of the above B. is a automated proccS8ing system C.TDM ANSWERSI D. None of the above 1 · 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 40. In electronic form, data refers to (a) (e) (a) (b) (b) (e) (e) (d) (b) (d) A. data fields. records, files and 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 databases le) (e) (a) (e) (a) (b) (e) (d) (a) (d) B. word processing documentB, 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 graphics, images (d) (b) (d) (b) (e) (d) (e) (a) (d) (b) C. digitally coded voice and video 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 D. All the above (b) (b) (d) (d) (d) (d) (a) (b) (b) (e) 41. Data processing is the 41 42 · 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 A process of converting data from (a) (b) (e) (b) (d) (d) (d) (d) (a) (a) physical format to logical format 51 B. digitally coded voice and video (b) C. Both A and B D. None of the above EXPLANATORY ANSWERS I 42. Electronic mail is the 12. (c): When we study about an A transmission of letters, messages event by 5. (b): Division of and memos over a communications population on the basis of network taking a sample from the population B. Distribution of all information it class, income, education level etc functions in the office is is cal.led · statistic and a group . of C. Both A. and B. called stratification and every D. None of the above member statistical measures is called 43. The back bone of an E·mail statistics. of ea~h stratum has equal system is a communication network chance of that connects remote terminals to a 4. (b): In random sampling technique A. central system or local area every being selected by the network that interconnect personal researcher. In number of the computers population has equal this way B. digitally coded voice and video characteristics of various chance of C. Both A and B being selected. strata are identified D. None of the above 44. FAX or Facsimile and studied. A. is the communication of a printed page between remote locations . 6. (c): The more the sample B. terminals scan a paper form and represents the converts its image into analog code population the more accurate are the [or transmission over private results of the study. Sample can be lines/public dial·up telephone system made more representative either by C. receiving terminal reconverts the increasing the size of the sample or codes150 into images and prints a by following more rellable method of "facsimile" of the original page sampling. D. All the above 7. (c): If characteristics of the 46. Data processing cycle consists of population is homogeneous a small A. three basic steps-Input cycle, sample may be enough for study Processing cycle, Output cycle because it may represent the whole B. terrqinals which scan a paper form population easily. and converts its image into analog 8. (d): When long survey is being code for transmission done and population is scattered over C. receiving terminal reconverts the a large area then researcher selects codes into images and prints a various groups from the whole area. "facsimile" of the original page The selection of these groups is D. All the above bailed on the discretion 46. An Input operation performs two ofthe researcher. functions, they are 14. (c): In normative researches only A. It causes an mput device to data are collected from the survey physically read data, and transmits and after analysing them results are the data from the Input device to an declared. Thus there is no need of Input area of CPU manipulating independent variables. B. It causes an input device to In ex-post facto research effects are transmits the data, convert into already known and researcher studies image form the. causes lying behind these ' C. It causes an input device to effects. Here too independent physical read data, transmits the data variable are not manipulated. to printer 15. (a): Studies opposite to ex-post D. None ofthe above facto are experi-mental ones where 47. During processing cycle, a various causes are first presented and computer performs operations of their effects due to manipulation of A. data transfer, ALU operations that the single variable are seen. . operate on Input data 16. (b): Reference collection is not B. sends data to an output area lies needed in experimental studies within the CPU (which is setup by because a researcher relies only on each program) his own results which may be C. Both A and B different from the previous studies. D. None of the above 22. (b): It is but natural to face 48. An output operation causes various problems in life and seeking A. information to be transmitted solutions to these problems is a must. from the output area lies within the A true teacher always tries to get CPU to an output device such as solution of his problem by doing printer formal or informal researches. B. CPU to record/display 25. (c): Such type of studies are information on some medium always comparative in nature. He C. Both A and B should say that Mr. X is socially or D. None ofthe above economically backward as compared 49. Computers to Mr Y. A. help you with your banking by 32. (b): If there is only one coin the using automatic teller machines probability of its being head and tail (ATM) used to deposit or withdraw is 50% - 50%. If coins are two then money each will have 25% chance of getting B. are present in every aspect of down head and tail. Now if coins are daily living· in workplace, home and four this chance will be 12Y2% each in the class room and so on. C. an electrOnIC machine operating 37. (a): Questionnaire is most under the control of instructions appropriate technique for studying stored in its own memory that can such problems because a large accept data (Input), manipulate the sample of the population can be data according to specified rules covered in a short period by mailing (process), produce results(output) it to the respondants. and store this rcsu.ll for future use 41. (a): When one variable is D. All the above increasing and the other one is 50. A person that commUnIcates decreasing then correlation will be wIth a computer or uses the negative, zero correlation means mformation It generates is called variables are independent of each A. user other and in positive correlations B. processor direct relationship is seen in both the C. commentator variables D. None of these 42. (b): In cross-sectional studies 51. Primary memory of computer population of various ages, sex or A. stores the necessary programs of religions is taken and their attributes system software are collected. Then which attribute is B. determines the size and the common to a particular group is number of programs that can be held with in the computer at same time identified by averaging the attributes. C. Both A and B D. None of the above UGC Environment VI 52. As technology advances and computer extend into every facet of QUESTIONS daily living, it 1. Sericulture is: A. is essential for everybody to gain A. science of the various kinds of some level of computer literacy serum B. is not essential for everybody to B. a r tificia l rearing offish gain some level of computer literacy C. art of silkworm breeding C. can create problems D. study of various cultu res of a D. None of the above community 6S. The main memory of computer 2. Tides in the oceans are caused by: A. can be divided in two parts-RAM A Gravitational pull of the moon on and ROM the earth's suCrace including sea B. is not essential for computer water C. can be loaded from storage media B. Gravitational pull of the sun on D. None of the Ilbove the earth's surface only and not on 54. RAM the sea water A. stands for RANDOM ACCESS C. Gravitational pull of the moon and MEMORY the sun on the earth's surface B. is volatile, which means item including the sea water stored in RAM are lost when the O. None of these power to computer is turned off 3. Nagarjunasagar Project is situated C. Both A and B on the rIver: D. None of the above A Tungabhadra B. Cauvery 65. Computers C. 0 ', Godavari A. USdS :;ache memory to improve 4. The diffe r e nce between t he t.heir processing times Indian Standard Time and the B. uses main memory for temporary Greenwich mean Time is: storage A - 3~ hours B. + 3Yz hours C. uses secondary memory, which is C. - 3~ hours D. + 5~ hours non volatile to store bulk data 6. Which of the foUowing dams is D. All tho above not. On Narmada river? 56. Videoconferencing is a meeting A. Indira·Sagar Project between two or more geographically B. Maheshwar Hydel Power P roject separated individuals who C. J obat. Project A. use a network or the Internet to D. Koyna Power Project transmit audio and video data 6. Which of the following statements B. use a sattelite to transmit audio is no true about the availability of and video data water on the earth, the crisis for C. Both A and B which is going to increase in the O. None of the above years to come? 57. CD·ROM A About 97.5 per cent of the total A. stands for Compact Disk Read volume of water av8.ilable on the Only Memory earth is salty B. is a silver coloured compact disk B. 80 per cent of the water available that uses the laser technology to us for use comes in bursts as C. Both A and B monsoons O. None of the above C. About 2.5 per cent of t.he total 58. UNIX water available on the earth is A. is a inultiuser, multitasking polluted water and cannot he used operating system for human activities B. was developed in early 1970s by D. Possibility is that some big scientists at Bell Laboratories glaciers will melt in the coming C. Both A and B ten·ftfteen years and sealevel will D. None of the above rise by 3--4 meters all over the earth 59. Virus 7. Through which States does A. is a computer program that copies Cauvery River Dow? itself into other programs and A. Gujarat. M.P. Tamil Nadu spreads through multiple computers B. Karnataka, Kerala, Tamil Nadu B. are often designed to damage a C. Karnataka, Kerala, Andhra computer intentionally by destroying Pradesh or corrupting its data D. M.P., Maharashtra, Tamil Nadu C. Both A and B 8. The biggest reserves of thorium D. None of the above are in: 60. A template A. India B.China A. is a document that formatting C. The Soviet Union D. U.S.A. necessary document type 9. Photosphere is described as the: contains the for a specific A. Lower layer of atmosphere B. usually exists for documents such B. Visible surface of the sun from as memos, fax cover sheets and which radiation emanates letters C. Wavelength of solar spectrum C. Both A and B D. None of the above O. None of the above 10. Different seasons are formed 61. The drawing tools available in becau~ MS WORD A. Sun is moving around the earth A. line, rectangle, ellipse, text box, B. of revolution of the earth around fill color the Sun on its orbit B. line style and select drawing C. of rotation of the earth around its objects axis C. Both A and B D. All of the above D. None ofthe above 11. The world is divided into: 62. In MS WORD a title bar A 12 time zones B. 20 lime zones A. is a bar displayed at the top of the C. 24 time zones O. 36 time zones document that displays the name of 12. The term 'Hegur' refers to: the current document A. Laterite soils B. locate below the menu bar 8. Black Cotton soils C. Both A and B C. Redsoils O. None of the above D. Deltaic Alluvial soils 63. Themail merge in MS word 13. Location of sugar industry in A. automatically creates unique, India is shifting from north to south multiple versions of a customized because of: form letter, when sending out a A. cheap labour specific letter to a different person B. expanding regional market B. merges two cell contents in one C. cheap and abundant supply of cell power C. Both A and B D. high yield and high sugar content D. None of the above in sugarcane 64. MS Excel 14. Consider the following A. is a replacement for the statements: accountants columnar pad, sharp 1. Ozone is found mostly in the pencil and calculator Stratosphere. B. allows users to create colorful 2. Ozone layer lies 55·75 km above charts. print transparancies or bard the surface of the earth. copy reports, add clip arts and 3. Ozone absorbs ultraviolet company logo etc. radiation from the Sun. C. Both A and B 4. Ozone layer has no significance D. None of the above for life on the earth. Which of the 65. The difference between SORT correct? above statements ar.E;'" and INDEX command A. 1 and 3 A. Sort after sorting generates output C. 2and3 file whereas Index does not B. 2 and 4 B. Sort cannot sort on expressions D. 1 and 4 whereas Index can 15. Atmosphere exists because: C. Both A and B A. The Gravitational force of the D. None of the above Earth B. Revolution of the Earth 66. Operating System is a C. Rotation of the Earth D. Weight of the gases of A. collection of hardware atmosphere components 16. Where are most of the earth's B. A collection of input-output active volcanoes concentrated? devices A. Europe B. Pacific Ocean C. A collection of software routines C. Africa D. South America D. All of the above 17. The area covered by forest in E. None of the above India is about: 67. Backups should be done A. 46% B. 33% A daily for most installations C. 23% D. 19'% B. weekly for most installations 18. The natural vegetation of Sa van C. as several image copies. followed a consists of: by an incremental O. ~ several A. Tall grass B. Scrub jungle incrementals, followed by an C. Short grass D. Trees unagecopy 19. The zone of excessively dry E. None of the above climate with very cold temperature 68. DOS etc. are called disk throughout the year correspond to: operating systems because A. Arctic deserts B. Tundra A. they are memory resident C. Alpine meadouss D. Antarctica B. they are initially stored on disk 20. The fertility of the soil can be C. they are available on magnetic increased by growmg: tapes A. Cereals B. Fibre Crops D. they are partly in primary memory C. Legumes D. Root Crops and partly on disk 21. India's Oil bearing areas are E. None of the above mostly associated with the: 69. Whicq of the following is not an A. Plutonic rocks oper&ting system B. Volcanic rocks A. UNIX B. MS·DOS C. Sedimentary rocks C. PASCAL D. CPIM D. Metamorphic rocks E. None of the above 22. The much discussed Tehri Dam 70. User-Friendly Systems are: Project is located in which of the A. required for object.oriented following states? programming A. Madhya Pradesh B. Rajasthan B. easy to develop C. Haryana D. Uttaranchal C. common among traditional main- 23. Laterite soil develop as a result frame operating system of: D. becoming more common A. deposits of alluvial E. None ofthe above B. deposition of loess 71. Address Bus is C. leaching A A set of wires connecting the D. continued vegetation cover computer's CPU and RAM, across ~4. The coldest place on the earth is: wbich memory addresses are A. Halifax B. Chicago transmitted. The amount of memory C. Siachen D. Verkhoyansk that can be addressed at one time 25. Which one of the following pairs depends on the number of wires used is not correctly matched? in the bus. A. Kota - Chambal B. A set of nooes connecting the B. Bhubaneshwar - Mahanadi computer network C. - Narmada C. A or B D. Surat - Tapti O. None of the above 26. Which of the following is the 72. Algorithm is biggest fresh water lake in India? A A set of ordprcd steps or A. Dal Lake B. Sukhna Lake procedures needed to solve a specific C. LoktakLake D. None of these problem. 152 27. Which of the following rivers is B. A set of circuit helps in not a tributory of the Indus? connecting the A. Sutlej B. Jhelum computer network C. Bhagirathi D. Chenab C. A or B 28. Which of the following pairs of D. None of the above the river dam project and the State in 73. Coprocessors which it is A. is a special processor chip or located, is not correct? circuit board designed to assist the A Gandhi Sagar-Madhya Pradesh processor in performing specific B. Tungabhadra - Tamilnadu tasks. C. Bhakra Nangal- Punjab B. can be used to increase the D. Hirakud - Orissa performance of the computer. 29. Match List I and List II and C. Both A and B select the D. None of the above correct answer using the codes given 74. Control Unit (CU)- below A. The component of the CPU that the Lists: contains the instruction set. List I S. gives the computer its ability to (Rivers) decode and then execute a stored (a) Cauvery program. (b) Krishna C. directs the flow of data throughout (c) Narmada the computer system. (d) Chambal D. All the above Codes: 76. Transaction Processing systems - (a) (h) (e) (d) A. Store information about A.I 4 2 3 individual events B. 2 I 4 3 B. pro~ide information that is useful C.2 I 3 4 in running an organization, such as D. I 3 4 2 inventory status, billing etc List II C. Both A and B (D ams) D. None of the above 1. Alamatti 76. Management Information 2. Mettur Systems 3. Gandhi Sagar A. Produce reports for different types 4. Sardar Sarovar of managers. 30. What is approximately the B. Automate routine office tasks. percentage of C. Both A and B forest cover in India? D. None of the above A. 10 per cent B. 8.5 per cent 77. Decision Support systems- C. 25 per cent D. 19.5 per cent A. Produce highly detruled, 31. When does the moon come customized reports based on the between the information in an organization's sun and the earth? transaction processing A Lunareclipse B. Solar eclipse system and based on information C. Sidereal day D. Full moon day from other sources. 32. The latitude of a place is B. These systems are used to assist expressed by its managers in making mission critical angular distance in relation to: decisions. A. Equator C. Both A and B B. South Pole O. None of the above C. Axis of the Earth 78. Expert systems D. North Pole A. include the knowledge of human 33. The southern tip of India is: experts in a specific subject area in a A. Cape Comorin knowledge base. B. Point Cali mere B. They analyze requests from users C. Indira Point in Nicobar Islands and assist. the users in developing a D. Kovalam in Trivandrum course of action. 34. During winter, the northern half C. Both A and B of India D. None of the above is warmer than areas of similar 79. A large 1S department include latitudinal location by 30 to 80 A lS managers, computer scientists, because: system analysts , programmers, A. India is essentially a tropical database specialists country B. user assistance architects, B. The surface wind blows in a purchasing ageots, technical writers, particular system or network managers direction in one season C. trainers, hardware maintenance C. The Great Himalayas check the technicians. penetration of cold polar air into D. All the above India 80. Automated machine tools effectively. A. operate from instructions in a D. Dfwinte'r rains program through numerical control 35. Turpentine oil used III medicine' B. digitally coded voice and video IS C. Both A and B obtained from: D. None of the above A Acacia B. Chir pin 81. E-mail programs often C. Myrobalans O. Kusum A. come with local area network 36. Which country IS known for the software most Qr add-on options or they are frequent earthquakes? independent programs designed to A. Italy B. Japan work with a specific network C. China. D. Iran B. operate as dependent programs 37. In determining the Indian designed to work with a specific climate, major network role played by Himalayas is/are: C. Both A. and B A. The east· west extension of the D. None ofthe above GreatHimalayas 82. Public Data Service cPOS) is a does not permit the service bureau, is an organization summer monsoon to cross it and thus that keeps its sojourn restricted to India A. provides data processing snd time B. The direct the summer monsoon sharing services to its customers and towards the north·west customers pay for their processing C. During the winter they stop the B. offers wide variety of software southward penetration of the cold packages, 88 well as customized and programming dry polar air C. charge a monthly rental for each D. All of the above byte of online disk storage reserved 38. Which river is flowing near for 153 customer's programs and Ayodhya? databases A. Ganga B. Yamuna D. All the above C. Saryu D. Krishna 83. Two basic types of RAM exists: 39. Which of the following is cold A. dynamic RAM, static RAM stream? B. natl!Ial RAM, static RAM A. Curasia B. Labrador, C. dynamic RAM, virtual RAM C. Gulf of Stream D. Hakuna Hatata D. None ofthe above 40. High velds are the temperate 84. The SORT command in grasslands FOXPRO of: A. is used to sort the records of a A. Africa B. South Australia database file in ascending or C. EuropeandAsia D. SouthAmerica descending order 41. The rock material carried by a B. takes records foreorting from glacier is currently opened database rue and called the sorted records are written in A alluvium B. meanders another fileoutput file C. nodules D. moraines C. physically rearranges the records 42. Match List I and List IT and find in the database in a new file and new out the file occupies the same amount of correct answer from the codes given space as unsorted file occupies below D. All the above the Lists: 85. The INDEX command in List I List II DBASE III plus (Thermal (wcations) A. is used to index the records of a Power Plants) database file and contains only the (a) Kahalgaon 1. West Bengal key values and record numbers (b) Farakka 2. Bihar B. takes records for indexing from (c) Ramagundam 3. Gujarat currenLly opened database file but (d) Gandhar 4. Andhra Pradesh no output file is generated Codes: C. Both A and B (a) (b) (e) (d) D. None of the above A 1 2 3 4 86. Presentation graphi.cslsoftwares 8.4 3 1 2 A. allow you to create presentations C.2 1 4 3 to communicate ideas, messages and D.3 2 1 4 other information to a group 43. Solar eclipse takes place when: B. incorporates some of the features A. The moon comes between the sun of word processing software and C. can incorporate slides with text, the earth graphics, movie, sound etc B. The earth comes between the sun D. All the above and 87. Powerpoint the moon A. has tools with which you can use C. The sun comes between the moon drawing tools to add these objects on and a slide the earth B. allows you to insert sound, music, D. None of the above video clips on a slide 44. The Suez Canal connects: C. allows you to give animation A Baltic Sea and the Caspian Sea effect to each object introduced in B. Mediterranean Sea and the Red the slide Sea D. All the above C. Red Sea and the Caspian Sea 88. To maXimize a Window D. Mediterranean Sea and North Sea A. click on the Maximize button in 45. Krishna Raja Sagar Dam is built the window you want to maximize across B. double click on the Maximize the river: button in the window you want to A. Cauvery B. Tungabhadra maximize C. Krishna D. Godavari C. A or B 46. Which of the following States D. None of the above has rich UGC-JRF (Paper 1}-20 forests of sandalwood? 89. You can lise scroll bar A. Andhra Pradesh B. Karnataka A to browse through the information C. Kerala D. Madhya Pradesh in the window 47. Which of the following is the B. when window is not large enough smallest to display all information it-contains ocean of the world? c. Both A and B A. Pacific D. None oBbe above C. Atlantic 90. When you have finished working B. lndian with a window, you can D. Arctic A. close the window to remove it 48. Light Year is a unit of: from your screen. '1'0 do so click on A Intensity of light (x) in the window you want to close B. Distance B. scan the window. To do so click C. Time on (x) in the window you want to D. Planetary motion close 205 C. Both A and B 49. Match List t and List 11 and D. None ofthe above select. t.he 91. Frame correct answer using the codes given A. is the part of an on-screen below window (title t.he Lists : bar and other e lements) that is List I controlled by operating system rather (a) Troposphere than by the application running in (b) Stratosphere t.he window (e) Ionosphere B. is used when window is not large (d) Exosphere enough to display all information it Codes.' contains (a) (b) (e) (d) C. Both A and B A I 2 4 3 D. None of the above 6. I 2 3 92. Start button C.2 4 A. provides quick access to 0.2 3 programs, files and help with 4 Windows 3 B. provides slow access to programs, 4 files and help with Windows List IT C. is not used now-a-days 1. Dust particles D. None of the above 2. Ozone layer 93. Recycle bin 3. Meteors A. stores deleted files and allows you 4. Aurora to recover them later 50. The Nagarjunsagar project is on B. provides slow access to programs, the river: files and help with Windows A. Sutlej S. Narmada C. is not used now-a·days C. Krishna D. Kaveri D. None of the above 51. The planets are kept is motion in 94. Memory protection is normally their done by respective orbits by the: A. the processor and the associa ted A. Rotation of the sun on its axis hardware S. Gravitation and centrifugal forces B. the operating system C. Great size and spherical shape C. the compiler D. Rotation and the density of the D. the user program planets 95. The size of the virtual memory 52. AU vitalalmospheric processes depends on leading to A. the size of the data bus various Cli018tic and weather B. the size of the main memory conditions C. the size of the address bus take place in the: D. none of the above A. Troposphere S. Ionosphere 96. Which of the following types of C. Exosphere D. Stratosphere software should you use if you often 53. The greatest diversit.y of animal need to create, edit, and print and documents? plants species occurs in: A. Word processing B. Spreadsheet A. temperate deciduous forests C. UNIX' D. Desktoppublishing S. tropical moist forests E. None of the above C. heavily poUuted rivers 97. Which are t.he most important O. desert lands features of Microsoft Windows 54. The cold oceanic current passing program? through the coast. of North America is known A Windows B. Pull·down menus as: C. Irons D. All of the above A. Kuroshio Current E. None of the above S. Gulf Stream 98. Whlch of the following requires a C. Labrador Current device driver?' O. Falkland Current A. Register B. Cache 55. Which of the following soil is C. Main memory D. Disk very hard to E. None of the above cultivate? 99. What is the name of the A Alluvial B. Red operating system that read and reacts C. Black o. Sandy ih terms of actual time. 56. The Hirakud Project is on which A Batch system of the B. Quick response system foUowing rivers? C. Real time system A. Godavari B. Mahanadi O. Time sharing system C. Damodar D. Kosi E. None of the above 57. What is meant by the term 100. The term "operating system" "cirrusH? means A. A low cloud A. a set of programs which controls B. A rain·bearing cloud romputer working C. A high-cloud B. the way a computer operator D. A hail-hearing cloud works 58. Most of the w~athel' phenomena C. conversIOn of high level language take place into machine code in the: D. the way a floppy disk drive A. stratosphere S. troposphere operates C. tropopause D. ionosphere E. None of the above 59. Atmospheric pressure exerted on 101. Data encryption earth is A. is m.ostly used by public due to: networks A. rotation of earth B. is mostly used by fmanciaI B. revolution of earth networks C. gravitational pull C. cannot be used by private D. uneven heating of earth installations GO. The circulation of ocean water D. is not necessary, since data can occurs: not be intercepted A. only laterally E. None of the above B. only vertically 102. A communication network C. both laterally and vertically which is used by large organlsstion D. neither laterally nor vertically over regional, national or global area 61. Match List I and List U and is called select the A. LAN B. WAN correct answer using the codes given C. MAN D. VAN below the Lists: 103. If you want to execute more List I than one program at a time, the (Storm) systems software you are using must (a) Cyclone be capable of: (b) Hurricane A. word processing B. virtual (e) Typhoon memory C.compiling D. multitasking (d) Willy· Willy E. None of the above Codes: 104. UNIX operating system (a) (b) (e) (d) A. is multiuser B. is multitasking A.3 4 2 1 C. can r un on PCs and larger 6.4 3 2 1 systems D. All of above C.3 4 2 1 105. Can you name of the major 0.4 3 I 2 Operating System used incomputers? List II A. MS DOS B. OS/2 1. China C. UNIX D. All the above 2. Australia E. None of the above 3. India 106. Which of the follow 109 is 4. U.S.A. always reSIdent? In machinery? 62. Which is called the "Tiger State-- A. Batch System ? B. Time Sharing System A Rajasthan C. Operating system B. Madhya Pradesh D. Controlling system C. Uttar Pradesh E. None oftbe above D. Jammu & Kashmir 107. Paging 206 A. is a method of memory allocation 63. Which one of the following by which the program 18 subdivided rivers is known into equal portions or page and core as "Sorow of Bihar"? IS subdivided into equal portions or A. Damodar B. Gandak blocks C. Kosi O. Sone B. consists of those addresses that 64. Given below are two statements. may be generated by a processor one during execution (If a computation labelled as Assertion (A) and the C. is a-method of allocating other processor time lebelled as Reason (R): D. al lows multiple programs to Assertion (A) : One of the reside in p parate areas of core at the movements of time the su rface water of ocea n is known E. one oftbe above as 108. Which of the following is ocean current. necessary to work on a computer Reason (R) : Ocean cu rrents are A. compiler caused B. Operating system mainly due to planetary winds ancl C. assembly the D. interpreter of the above difference in temperature and density E. None of the above of 109. Advantage(s) of using assembly water. language rather than machine In the context of the above two language is (are): statements, A It is mnemonic and p,asy to read which one the following is correct? B Addresses any symbolic, not A. Both A and R are true and R is the absolute correct explanation of A. C. Introduction of data to program is B. Both A and R are true but. R is easier not a D. All of the above correct explanation of A. E. None oftbe above C. A is true but R is false. 110. With round-robin CPU O. A is false but R is t rue scheduling in a time-shared system: 65. Tsunamis are huge sea waves A. Using very large t.ime slices caused by: (quantas) degenerates into FCFS A. Earthquakes B. Volcanoes (First· Come First·Served) algorithm C. Winds D. Icebergs B. Using very small time slices 66. Through which of the following (quantas) degenerates into LIFO) countries Last-Tn First· Out) algorithm does the river Tigris flow? C. Using extremely small time s lices A. Egypt B. ira n improves performance C. Italy D. Iraq D. Using medium sized time slices 67. Imaginary lines drawn on a leads to SRTF (Shortest Remaining global map Time First) scbeduling poHcy from pole to pole and from the E. None of the abo'le 155 perpendicular to the equator are 111. A sequence of InsLructJ.o ns ~ called in 8 computer language, to get the A. Contours B. Isobars desired result. Is known as C. Meridians D. Steppes A. Algorithm B. Decision Table 68. The 23South latitude is known as C. Program D. All the above A. The Tropic of Cancer E. None of the above B. The Tropic of Capricorn 112. A characteristic of an on- line C. The Equator real-time system is D. The Prime Meridian A. More than one CPU 69. 'Equinox' means B. No delay in processing A. Days are longer than nights C. Off line batch processing B. Days and nights are equal D. All of the above C. Days a re shorter than nights E. None of the above O. None of these 113. DOS is 70. Summer solstice occu rs on A. a software A. March 21 B. April 21 B. a hardware C. May 21 D. June 21 C. a data organisation system 71. A lunar eclipse occurs when D. None of the above A. Sun, Moon and Earth are not in 114. Which' of the following perform the s modulation and demodulation? same line A. fiber optic B. satellite B. Earth comes between the Sun and C. coaxial cable D. modern t he E. none of the above Moon 115. A local area network C. Moon comes between the Sun and A. that connects thirty pe r sonal the computers can provide more Earth computing power than a D. Sun comes between the Earth and minicomputer the B. cannot become bogged down like Moon mainframe would if the load is too 72. The sky appears blue because high A. It is actually blue C. both A and B B. The atmosphere scatters blue light D. all of the above more than the others E. none of the above C. All colours interfere to produce 116. Which class of the software blue packages allow D. In white light. blue colour people to send electronic mail along dominates a network of computer and 73. International Date Line passes workstations? through A. Memory resident package A. 0° Greenwich B. 1BOoGreenwich B. Project management package C. 90° Greenwich O. 270" C. Data communication package Greenwich D. Electronic mail package 74. Port Blair is situated in 117. We can receive data either A. North Anclaman B. South through our television aerial or down Andaman our telephone lines and display this C. MlddleAndaman D. Little data on our television screen. What is Andaman the general name given to this 75. Which of the following passes purpose? through A. View data B. Tele text Lnrna? C. Tele software D, Video text A. Tropic of Capricorn 118. The economics of computing B. Tropic of Cancer data is C. Equator A. sharing peripherals and O. 0° Longitude B. giving processorS"lo processing 76. At the Equator, the duration of a time C. both A and B day is O. all of the above A. 10 hrs B. 12 bes E. none of the above C. 14 hrs D. 16 hrs 119. The word telematics is a 77. Suez navigati on ca nal links up combination of Mediterranean Sea with the A. computer B. telecommunication A. Atlantic Ocean B. Pacific Ocean C. informatics D. Band C C. North Sea D. Red Sea E. none of the above 78. Teak and Sal are the principal 120. The application layer of a trees in the network forests known as A. establishes, maintains. and A. Tropical moist evergreen terminates virtual circuits B. Dry deciduous B. defines the uaer's port into the C. Tropical moist deciduous network D. Dry evergreen C. consists of software bcmg run on 79. When a ship crosses the the computer connected to the International network D. all of the above Date Line from west to East E. none of the above A. ltlosesone day B. It gains one day 121. What was the ftrst Network that C. It.loseshalf·a-day D. ltgainshalf·a- was made available day A. DEeNe' 1980 B. Novell Netwarc SO. Siachen is C. IBMm Token Ring 1985 A. Limiting glacier zone between D.IBM PC Network 198·1 India 122. What does the acronym (ISDN) and Pakistan stand for? B. Limiting desert zone between A. Indian Standard Digital Network India and B. Integrated Services Digital Pakistan Network C. Limiting zone between China lind C. Intelligent Services Digital Pakistan Network 207 D. Integrated Se rvices Data D. Limiting zone between India and Network Myanmar 128. Internet is 81. Which oft.he following people A. network run by the US are related Government to T.E. Lawrence? B. a network run by the United A. The people of China Nations Organisation B.lnhabitantsofMangole C. a loose network not owned by C. The people of Afghanistan anybody but used by all unive rs ities D. The people of Arab and governments around the globe 82. For which of the following D. a commercial information service reasons, clouds run by Ziff Davis Co., in US do not min in desert.? 124. What is the name of the device A. Maximum air velocity that connects two computers by B. Minimum temperature means of a telephone line? C. Minimum air velocity A. tape B. modem D. Minimum humidity C. bus D. cable 83. Which countries are joined by the 125. Working of the WAN generally Palk involves Strait? A. telephone lines B. microwaves A. India & Sri Lanka C. satellites D. all of the above B. North & South Korea E. noneof tbeabove C. Pakistan & China 126. Video is a combination of D. Britain & France A. television B. communication 84. The smallest Continent is C. axllPuter~ D. all of the above A. Europe B. Australia E. none of the above C. Antarctica D. South America 127. Communication between 85. The longest dam in India is computers is almost always A. Bhakra Dam A. serial B. parallel B. Nagarjuna Sagar Dam C. series parallel D. direct C. Hirakud Dam 128. Error detection at a data link D. Kosi Dam level is achieved by? 86. Jawahar Tunnel, the largest in A. Bit stuffing India, is B. Hamming codes located in the state of C. Cyclic redundancy code A. Himachal Pradesh D. Equali7.8tion B. Rajasthan E. none of the above C. West Bengal 129. The hnking of computers with a D.J&K communication system is called 87. 'Jog' the highest waterfall In A. networking B. pairing India IS C. interfacing D. assembling located in the state of 130. Which of the foUowing items is A. Uttar Pradesh B. West Bengal not used in Local Area Networks C. Karnataka D. Maharashtra (LANs)? 156 88. Where is the Siachin Glacier A. Computer B. Mcxlem situated in C. Printer D. Cable India? 131. During networking, the A. Uttar Pradesh processor of the CPU asking each B. Himachal Pr~desh terminal whether it wants to send a C. Jammu & Kashmir message is caUed D. A. querying B. sharing 89. The standard time of India is the C. communicating D. polling local 132. Who invented the modem? time of A Wang Laboratories Ltd A. 81 a East longitude B. At & T Information System, USA B. East longitude C. Apple Computers Inc C. 84" East longitude D. Digital Equipment Corpn. D. 86" East longitude 133. All the parts in a computer talk 90. In which South American to each other by sending country does A. digital signal B. analog signals one find the Atacama desert? C. smoothly varying signal waves A. Chile B. Peru D. both Band C E. none of the above C. Brazil D. Columbia 134. What is going 'on·line'? 91. Which of the following ports has A. Buying a MODEM and a free connecting it to your computer trade zone? B. Getting 8 PTI or REUTERS news A. Kandla B. Cochin wire connectton C. Madras D. 1'uticorin C. Connecting your computer to a 92. Which one of the following LAN mountain D. Getting access to the various peaks of the Himalayas is not in commercial and other information India services over the dial-up lines or I- A. Annapurna B. Nanda Devi Net connection C. Mt. Kamel D. Kanchenjunga 135. Which of the following is an 93. Match List I (Types of Natur':l.l important characteristic of LAN? Regions) A. application independent interfaces with List II ( Areas Associated with B. unlimited expansion the C. low cost access for bandwidth Regions) and select the correct channels answer D. none of the above using the codes given below the lists: List I List II (Typ es of Natural (Areas Associated Regions) with the Natru'(Jl ANSWERS Regions) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (I) Dry continental 1. Brazil D C A A A C A A A C (11) Humid Subtropics 2. British 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Isles C D D C A C C D A D (III) Marine West Coast 3. Canada 21 22 28 2. 25 26 27 28 29 30 (IV) Subarctics 4. China C A D C C A A D A D Codes: 5. Mangolia 81 32 33 3. 35 36 37 38 39 40 A. I - 5, fl - 4, IfI - 2. IV - 3 A D D D A A D A A D B. 1- 2, III - 3. 11 - I, IV - 5 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 c. 1- 2, II - 4, 111- I, IV-:-J'o, A A A D A A A A D A D. I - 5, II - 3, 1II - 2, IV - 4 51 52 53 5. 55 56 57 58 59 60 94. Winter rains in north and C A A D D A C C C C north·west 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 india are generally associated with C A A C C D A B C D the 71 72 73 74 7. 76 77 78 79 80 phenomenon of A A C D C A C C D A A. Retreating monsoon 81 82 88 8. 85 86 87 88 89 90 B. Temperate cyclones A D A D C D D A C A C. Local thunderstorms 91 92 93 9. 95 96 97 98 99 100 D. Shift in Jet stream movement A A A A C A D D C A 95. When the moon is near the 101 102 103 10. 105 10. 107 108 109 horizon, then 110 it appears bigger because of B B D D D C A B D A A. Atmospheric refraction 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 B. Scattering of light 119 120 C. Diffraction C B A D A C D C D C D. Total internal reflection 121 122 123 l24 125 126 127 128 96. Savanna grasslands are found in 129 130 A. Australia B. Africa A B C B D D A C A B C. East Asia D. SmIth America 131 132 133 134 135 208 D B A D A 97. Life expectancy is highest in the world in A. Canada B. Germany C. J apan D. Norway 9S. Israe l has common borders with A. Lebanon. Syria. J ordan and Egypt B. Lebanon. Syria. Turkey and J

ordan C. Cyprus, Turkey. Jordan a nd Egypt D. Turkey, Syria. iraq and Yemen 99. What is the correct sequence of UGC Teaching Aptitude Part 11 the rivers-Godavari, Mahanadi, Narmada and Tapi in the descending order of their QUESTIONS lengths? 1. If majority of students in your A. Godavari-Mahanadi-Narmada-Ta class are weak you should pi (a) not care about the intelligent B. Godavo.ri-Narmada-Mahanadi- students Tapi (b) keep your speed of teaching fast C. Narmada-Godavari·Tapi- so that students comprehension level Mahanadi may increase D. Narmada-Tapi·Godavari- (c) keep your teaching slow Mahanadi (d) keep your teaching slow along 100. Among t he following cities, with some extra guidance to bright which one is pupils nearest to the Tropic of Cancer? 2. If some ,o f your pupils misbehave A. Delhi B. Kolkata with you in the college campus you C. D. must 101. Among the following which (a) report to the principal planet takes (b) report to their parents maximum time for one revolution (c) improve their behaviour by your around own character and scholarship the Sun? (d) mobilize other teachers against A. Earth B. Jupiter these guys C. Mars D. Venus 3. A teacher in the class should keep 102. Which one among the following the pitch of his voice languages (a) high enough (b) low has largest number of speakers in t (c) moderate he (d) sometime low and somtime high world? 4. If some students fail in the A. Bengali B. French examination it is the fault of C. Japanese D. Portuguese (a) the teacher (b) the principal 103. Which one of the fo llowing is (c) pupils themselves (d) text books the longest 5. A teacher who is not able to draw glacier of India? the attention of his students should A. Pinda ri B. Gangotri (a) evaluate hIS teaching method and C. Siachen D. Zem\1 improve it 104. In wha t regions can the sun be (b) resign from the post seen at (c) find fault in his pupils midnight? (d) start dictating A. The tropical zone 6. Itback-benchers are always talking B. Warm temperate regions in the classroom a teacher should C. The Arctic and Antarctic regions (a) let them do what they are doing D. Anywhere at the time of lunar (b) punish them eclipse (c) ask them to sit on the front 105. Match the rivers flowing benches through the (d) none of the above cities below: 7. A teacher Cities (a) should introduce the lesson A Baghdad before he starts teaching B. Cairo (b) should have command over his C. New York language D. Rotterdam (c) should have command over his Rivers subject (I) Rhine (d) all of the above (II) Hudson 8. If a teacher is not able to answer (llI) Nile the question of a pupil he should (IV) Tigris (a) say that he will answer after A B C D consultation A IV 1U II I (b) rebuke the pupil B. I II ill IV (c) say that the question is wrong C. n I IV ill (d) feel shy of his ignorance D. ill IV I II 9. Arrange the following teaching 106. Where was electricity supply process in order . first (i) relating the present knowledge introduced in India? with the preVious knowledge A Kolkata B. Darjeeling (ii) evaluation C. Mumhai D. Chennai (iii) reteaching . 107. Which of the following is the (iv) . formulating objectives highest (v) preseritation of materials waterfa ll in the world? (a) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv), (v) A Angel B. Ribbin (b) (ii), (i), (iii), (iv), (v) C. Hungela D. Quecanag (c) (v), (iv), (iii), (i), (ii) lOS. Which among the following (d) (iv), (i),(v), (ii), (iii) planets 10. Use oftelecast materials intersects the orbit of Neptune? (a) enhances concentration and A. Mercury B. Pluto learning C. Earth D. Uranus (b) reduces the burden ofthe teacher 109. Nubian desen is in (c) increases retention power A. Ethiopia (d) all of the above C. Sudan 11. If students are not able to follow, 110. The capital of Laos is you should B. Egypl (a) give them prompt D. Somalia (b) make the matter easy A. Vientiane B. Ankara (c) illustrate with examples C. Abu Dhabi D. Hanoi (d) All ofthe above 111. Peso is the currency of 12. Micro teaching is useful to A. Cuba B. Bermuda students of C. Grenada D. Jamaica (a) . primary classes only 112. Which oflhe following countries (b) junior classe~ only is called (c) 10 + 2 classes only the "Country of white elephants"? (d) higher classes and primary A. Thailand B. Kuwait classes both C. South Africa D. India 13. If remarks are passed by students 113. The longest highway in India on you, runs from as a teacher, you will A. Kolkata toJammu (a) punish them B. Jammu to Kanya Kumari (b) expel them from the college C. Ambala La Nagercoii (c) take revenge while evaluating D. to Kanys Kumari internal test copies 114. Which strait separates India (d) be impartial at the time of from Sri evaluation Lanka? 14. Ma.ximum participation of . A. Malldeb B. Magellan students IS C. Malacca I). Palk possible in teaching through 115. Which city was known as the (a) lecture method 'Manchester (b) discussion method of India'? (c) textbook method A. Mumbai B. Surat (d) audio-visual aids C. Ahmeda,bad D. Ludhiana 15. Which of the following IS the 116. Where is the fa m Olls shore most important single factor in temple located? underlying-the A. Puri B. Visakhapalnalll success of beginning a teacher? C. Mamallapuram D. Chennai (a) scholarship 117. The new alluvial del.osits found (b) communicative ability i'n Lhi (c) personality and its abi~ity to Gangetic plain are known as I relate to 209 UGC-JRF (Paper 1)-27 the class and to the pupils A. Bhabar (d) organisational ability C. Khadar 16. The greatest important cause of B. Bhangar failure in O. Terai beginning for a teacher lies in the 118. Which of the area·of island? (a) inter-personal relationship following is the largest (b) verbal ability A. Sumatra (c) know ledge oJ the teacher B. Madagascar (d) tight handling of the students C, Honshu 17. All ofthe following are the D. Cuba characteristic 119. Kodaikanal, the famous hill- features of an effective teacher station of except South India is situated on: (a) emphasis upon standard A. Palni Hills (b) emphasizing group discussion for B. Anaimalai Mountain the C. Nilgiri Mount-ain purpose of clarifying the objectives D. Cardamon Hills (c) emphasis upon the quick control 120. The largest continent in the of world is: the problematic situation A. North America B. Africa (d) differential treatment meted out C. Asia O. Europe to 121. Which water body separates students of his class Aust.ralia 18. An effective-teachirig means all from New Zealand? of the following A. Cook Straits except B. Tasman Sea (a) a teacher teaches with enthusiasm C. McMunro Sound (b) a teacher finds fault in his D. Great Barrier Reef students 122. 'Radcliff Line' is a boundary (c) a teacher puts emphasis more on line between teachi.ng than on class control A. India and Bangladesh (d) a teacher is interested in making B. India and Bhutan the C. India and China subject . matter understood rather D. India and Pakistan than on completing the course 123. The samallest continent of the 19. The field of education is world isA. permeated by Europe B. Antarctica conflicts and misconception because C, South America D. Australia (a) problems In education call for 124. J og waterfall, the highest subjectivity of interpretation waterfaU in (b) problems encountered in teaching India, is located in- are A. Kerala B. Karnataka not amenable to rigorous scientific C. Maharashtra D. Madhya Pradesh investi -gation 125. Which of the following district (c) there are not good teaching is on the methods international border of India and procedures A. Gor-akhpur B. West Khasi Hills (d) teachers are not worthy of dOIng C. Kinnaur D. rigorous scientific investigation 126. Which of the following pairs is 20. The introduction of career not courses in correctly matched? schools and colleges aims at A. Panna: Diamond (a) developing the ability to make the B. Neyveli: Lignite intelligent C. Mysore: Marb!e choice of jobs D. Sambhar: Salt (b) providing professional 127. The earthquake waves which knowledge to have students transverse movements are known as (c) increasing G.K. in students A. Primary waves (d) All ofthe above B. Secondary waves 21. The main role of education C. Surface waves according to D. None of the above Plato was' 128. The first man to reach the South (a) to develop the power of Pole on contemplation December 14. 1911 was (b) to develop the personality of each A. Commander Robert, E. Peary of individual U.S. (e) to strengthen the state Navy (d) All of the above B. Racald Amundsen from Norway 22. Teachers should study C. The Navigator Ferdinand educational Magellan philosophy because D. Sir Francis Drake of England (a) they do not know it 129. Which one of the following is (b) they do not have their own not t.he philosophy ' vegetalion in Selva forests? (c) philosophy' is the backbone of all A. Epiphytes disciplines B. Xerophytes (d) they may improve their work by C. Llanas clarifying D. Hydrophyr.es their own philosophy 130. Where does the primitive 23. Kindergarten (KG.) system cOl)'lmunity of o(education Bushman live? means garden of small kids ;which A. Sahara desert B. Thar desert IS C. Kalahari desert D. Attacama indebted to desert (a) Dewey (b) Froebel 131. Which region of India receives (c) Plato (d) Spencer rainfall due 24. John Locke's phrase oftabula rl:!- to western disturbance in wint.er? sa means A. Western region (a) Tal and Ras B. Central region (b) free education C. Eastern region (c) mind its eli is a result ofthe D. North·Western region process of 132. Freely suspended magnetic evolution needle stands (d) All of the above in which direction? 25. A democratic society is one A. North-West direction which B. North-South direction (a) follows the principles of equality, C. North-Eastdirection free dom, D. South·Westdirection fraternity and justice . 133. How far the axis of earth is (b) respects the enlightened inclined of its individuals orbital surface? (c) believes Ill ' equal educational A. 23 opportunity B.66 (d) All of the above C. 1800 26. An effective teacher adopts the D. It is not inclined norms of 134. Difference of longitudinal of the two places on (a) democratic society the earth is 15°. What will be the (b) leizes faire society difference in its local time? (c) autocratic society A. No difference (d) all of the above according to the B. 1 hour situation C. 2 hours 27. While dealing with juvenile D. 15 hours delinquents a 135. Which of the roHowing is only teacher should star? (a) play them with filthy sex jokes A. Moon 8. Venus (b) talk with them frankly and guide C. Earth D. Sun and channelize their potentialities in ANSWERS constructive 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ways C C C D D D B A B B (e) complain to .the principal against 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 them . C B D A A B D A A C UGC-JRF (Paper 1)- 2 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 (d) none ofthe above C D C D A D C B B D 28. TV is superior-to radio as 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 teaching aid B A C C B B D C B A because it 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 (a) is costly D C A B C B B B B C (b) invites two senses-hearing and . 51 52 53 54 65 66 57 58 59 60 vision simultaneously leading to B A B C B B C B C C more 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 accurate form of learning C B C C A D C B B D (c) is generally liked by pupils 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 60 (d) all of the above B B B B B B D C A C 29. The major responsibility with 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 which the D A A B C D C C B A school personnels have been 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 entrusted is A A A A A B C A B B that 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 I (a) it harmonizes the needs of th~ 109 110 child B A C C A B A D C A and demands of the society for the III 112 113 114 115 116 117 ]]8 119 benefit of both 120 (b) it makes the child able to get job A A D D D C C B A C (e) ,it prepares the school programme 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 according J29 130 . to the need of the child B D D B C C B B B C (d) all oftheabove . 131 132 133 134 135 30. The best educatiQnal programme C B A B D is one which is according to the Memory Based Questions (2007) (a) need of the child (b) ability of the child Teaching Aptitude (c) interest of child (d) all of these along with the need ofthe society 1. Which of the following is the main 31. While delivering leeture if there objective of teaching? is some (a) To give information related to the disturbance in the class, then a syllabus. teacher (b) To develop thinking power of should students. (a) keep quite for a while and then go (c) To dictate notes to students. on (d) To prepare students to pass the (b) . n0t bother of what is happening examination. in the class 2. Which one of the following is a (e) punish those causing disturbance good method of teaching? (d) all ofthe ~ove (a) Lecture and Dictation 32. On which of the following (b) Seminar and Project statements (c) Seminar and Dictation there is consensus among educators? (d) Dictation and Assignment (a) Disciplinary cases should be sent to 3. Which of the following is not the principal only when other means characteristic of a good question have failed paper? (b) Disciplinary cases should never (a) Objectivity be (b) Subjectivity sent to the principal's office (c) No use of vague words (e) Disciplinary cases should be (d) Reliable totally neglected in the class 4. Teacher uses teaching aids for (d) None of the above (a) Making teaching interesting. 33. Classroom discipline can be (b) Making teaching within maintained understanding level of students. effectively by . (c) Making students attentive. (a) knowing the cause of indiscipline (d) The sake of its use. and handling it with stern hand 5. Effectiveness of teaching depends (b). providing a programme which on isaccording (a) Qualification of teacher. to the need and interest of the (b) Personality of teacher. pupils (c) Handwriting of teacher. (e) by putting on fancy clothes in the (d) Subject understanding of teacher. classroom Memory Based Questions (2007) (d) none of the above 34. The most appropriate meaning Research Aptitude oflearning is 1. A researcher is generally expected (a) inculcation of knowledge '. to: (b) modification of behaviour (a) Study the existing literature in a (c) personal adjustment field (d) acquisition of skills (b) Generate new principles and 35. In the final analysis, teaching theories must be (c) Synthesize the ideas given by thought of mainly as a process of . others (a) asking questions and evaluating (d) Evaluate the findings of a study the learning 2. The Government of India conducts (b) directing the activities ofthe Census after every 10 years. The pupils medthod of research used in this le) hearing the lrecitation of pupils process is: (d) all ofthe above (a) Case study 36. The functions of a teacher is in (b) Developmental the order (c) Survey of (d) Experimental (a) guiding the child, helping him towards progress and evaluation 3. An academic association (b) checking homework, guiding him assembled at one place to discuss the and progress of its work and future plans. assigning further task Such an assembly is known as (c) Both of these (a) Conference (d) None of the above (b) Seminar 37. A teacher in the class is (c) Workshop (a) the president ofthe group (d) Symposium (b) a director of the group (c) a leader and guide of the group 4. One of the essential characteristic (d) all of the above of research is: 38. Teachers primary responsibilIty (a) Replicability lies in (b) Generalizability (a) planning educational experiences (c) Usability (b) implementing policies (d) Objectivity (e) keeping students records (d) all of the above 5. An investigator studied the census 39. A teacher is expected to d0,all data for a given area and prepared a except write-up based on them. Such a (a) participation in community write-up is called: activities (a) Research paper (b) help pupils to solve their (b) Article problems (c) Thesis (c) taking interest in politics (d) Research report (d) sponsor clubs and other school Memory Based Questions (2007) affairs (e) keeping students'records Communication 40. In order ' to develop rapport with your 1. Informal communication network pupils you should within the organization is known as (a) guide them (a) Interpersonal communication (b) behave them in a democratic ray (b) Intrapersonal communication (c) have communicative ability , (c) Mass communication (d) all ofthe above I (d) Grapevine communication 41.Verbal guidance is least effective m ' 2. In which state the maximum teaching number of periodicals are brought (a) attitude (b) concept and facts out for public information: (c) relationship (d) skills (a) Uttar Pradesh 42.A teacher meeting his students for (b) Tamil Nadu the (c) Kerala first time should (d) Punjab (a) start teaching without caring the students likes and dislikes. 3. TV Channel launched for covering (b) develop rapport with the class only Engineering and Technology (e) give a broad outline of the whole subjects is known as subject (a) Gyan Darshan (d) (b) and (c) both (b) Vyas 43: Before starting instruction a (c) Eklavya teacher (d) Kisan should (a) know the existing knowledge of 4. The main objective of public his broadcasting system i.e. Prasar students and their background Bharti is knowledge (a) Inform, Entertainment & (b) be aware of the environmental Education variables acting on the mind of the (b) Entertain, Information & pupils Interaction (c) be competent enough to arouse (c) Educate, Interact & Entertain the (d) Entertainment only curiosity of his pupils (d) all of the above 5. The competency of an effective 44. Observable behaviours which a communicator can be judged on the teacher basis of: can use in the class to bring home to (a) Personality of communicator the (b) Experience in the field pupil an idea or point is technically (c) Interactivity with target audience called (d) Meeting the needs of target (a) teaching skills . audience (b) communication facilities (c) demonstration Memory Based Questions (2007) (d) none of these 45. Quality of education in a school/college can be measured through Reasoning (Including (a) infra structural facilities available Mathematics) (b) manpower, teachers arid principal available (c) students'achievement 1. which one of the following (d) all of the above belongs to the category of 46. Which of the following homogeneous data: statement~ (a) Multi-storeyed houses in a regarding motivation is correct? colony. (a) Freewill, intellect and reason are (b) Trees in a garden the (c) Vehicular traffic on a highway motivating factors ac,cording to (d) Student population in a class Plato (b) Inborn, unlearned tendencies, 2. In which of the following ways a called theory is not different from a belief? instincts are the motivating forces (a) Antecedent – consequent according to James Burt (b) Acceptability (c) Curiosity and level of aspiration (c) Verifiability are (d) Demonstratability the motivating factors according to Berlyne 3. The state – ―Honesty is the best (d) All ofthe above policy‖ is 47. An effective teacher is expected (a) A fact to (b) A value (a) encourage the students to make (c) An opinion initiative (b) reduce the anxiety level of (d) A value judgement students to moderate leyel 4. Of the following statements, there (c) to make students feel that are two statements both of which education cannot be true but both can be false. is their need Which are these two statements? (d) all ofthe above , (i) All machines make noise 48. The professional requirements of (ii) Some machines are noisy a (iii) No machine makes noise teacher as explained in the UNESCO (iv) Some machines are not noisy publication is/are (a) mastery over the subject and (a) (i) and (ii) competency for teaching (b) (iii) and (iv) (b) Innovativeness ill approach and (c) (i) and (iii) teaching strategies (d) (ii) and (iv) (c) justice to the profession (d) All of the above 5. In the following question a 49. Effective teaching means statement is followed by two (a) Love, cooperation, sympathy, assumptions (i) and (ii). An affection and encouragement given assumption is something supposed or to taken for granted. Consider the students . statement andthe following (b) Corporal punishment given to assumptions and decide which of the students at the time of moral following assumptions is implicit in offences the statement. (c) Individualized instruction and open Statement: We need not worry about classroom discussion errors but must try to learn from our (d) both (a) and (c) errors. 50. All ofthe following statements Assumptions: regarding a i) Errors may take place when we are teacher are correct except):hat he carrying out certain work. islhe ii) We are capable of benefiting from (a) a friend, guide and philosopher the past and improve our chances of 51. error-free work. (b) teaches what the students do not know (a) Only assumption (i) is implicit (c) the leader of the Class (b) Only assumption (ii) is implicit (d) changes his attitudes and (c) Either assumption (i) or (ii) is behaviour implicit ac~ordi~g to the need of the society (d) Both the assumptions are implicit Drop outs are more likely to be (a) unemployed 6. The question below is followed by (b) vulnerable to the. requirement of two arguments numbered (i) and (ii). public assistance Decide which of the arguments is (c) engaged in antisocial behaviour ‗strong‘ and which is ‗weak‘. Choose (d) all ofthese the correct answer from the given 52. Teacher's professionalism means below: (a) the extent to which a teacher subscribes to a professional code (a) (b) (c) (d) (b) a teacher has to teach for the sakI;! of Should the press exercise some self- getting salaries restraint? (c) a teacher must have completed i) Yes, they should not publish news professional item which may incite the readers to teachers training course before indulge in wrong practices. his appointment ii) No, it is the responsibility of the (d) all of the above press to present the truth irrespective 53. Teachers' professionalism may be of the consequences. assessed in terms of all of the following (a) Only the argument (i) is strong. commitments except .. (b) Only the argument (ii) is strong. (a) commitment to the profession and (c) Neither argument (i) nor students argument (ii) is strong. (b) commitment to the colleagues (d) Both the arguments (i) and (ii) and are strong. employer (c) commitment to the religion and 7. Study the argument and the castes inference drawn from that argument, (d) commitment to the parents and given below carefully. community 54. The first important step in Argument: Anything that goes up teaching is definitely falls down. Helicopter (a) planning before }land . goes up. (b) organizing material to be taught Inference: So the helicopter will (c) knowing the background of definitely fall down. students (d) non~ ofthe above What in your opinion is the inference 55. Suppose .you are an ambitious drawn from the argument? teacher. (a) Valid You have high ideals for class room (b) Invaid teaching but your hard labour goes In (c) Doubtful vain. The reason underlying this (d) Long drawn one problem maybe 8. Which one is like pillar, pole and (a) Your teaching level is above the standard ability level of students (a) Beam (b) Individual differences among (b) Plank students (c) Shaft make your efforts futile (d) Timber (c) both ofthese (d) none ofthc above 9. Following incomplete series is 56. If a student becomes unconscious presented. Find out the number in the which should come at class what will you do first? the place of question mark which (a) Rushing to theprincipal's office will complete the series: 4, 16, 36, 64 and ? con vas sing for help impatiently (a) 300 (b) Telephoning student's parents and (b) 200 waiting for them (c) 100 (c) Giving first aid to him and trying (d) 150 to contact any nearby doctor Memory Based Questions (2007) (d) making arrangement to send him to his home Data Interpretation 57.If you come across to teach a blind student Four students W, X, Y, Z appeared along with the normal students what in four papers, I, II, III and IV in a type test. Their scores out of 1000 are of behaviour you are expected·to given below: exhibit? Papers (a) Take care of him with sympathy (b) Don't give any extra attention Students w x y z because majority of students may suffer I 60 59 74 72 (c) Arrange the seat in the front row II 81 43 A 76 and III 45 51 71 A try to keep your teaching pace IV 55 A 65 68 according to him without making the other students suffer Where ‗A‘ stands for Absent (d) none of the above , , Read the above table and answer 58. A new comer teacher w:ho is below mentioned questions 1-5. maltreated in his class will deal with the students 1. Which candidate has secured by between 60-65% marks in (a) applying punitive measures aggregate? (b) improving his qualities and (a) W expressing it before them in a good (b) X way (c) Y (c) changing his class after (d) Z consultation with the principal 2. Who has obtained the lowest (d) giving them a threat of expulsion average in aggregate 59. If a child is a back bencher and is (a) W unable (b) X to watch the black board cleariy, As (c) Y a (d) Z result he stands, sees and sits repeatedly. 3. Who has obtained the highest What inference will you draw average regarding (a) W the case? ' (b) X (a) The child is of short height as (c) Y compared to his class mates (d) Z (b) The blackboard is under shining effect 4. In which paper the lowest marks oflight were obtained by the candidates (c) The child has defective-vision (a) I (d) both (a) and (c) " (b) II 60.A child may have hearing (c) III impairment if (d) IV (a) he speaks loudly unusually (b) he comes nearer to the speaker 5. Which candidate has secured the during highest percentage in the papers conversation ' appeared (c) he generally says, "Please repeat" (a) W to (b) X the teacher (c) Y (d) all of the above - (d) Z If a girl student requests you to collect her UGC Paper Information posts at your address what would Communication you like to do in this case ? ( a) You would not gIve permission as it is 1. Informal communication network against your own principles within the organization is known as (b) You will never give her your own (a) Interpersonal communication address suspecting a foul game (b) Intrapersonal communication (c) You will permit the girl to collect (c) Mass communication the (d) Grapevine communication 12 posts at your address because as a teacher you should do it 2. TV Channel launched for covering (d) You will permit her bec'ause you only Engineering and Technology have subjects is known as some attachment with her (a) Gyan Darshan 62: Suppose you are teaching in a (b) Vyas minority - (c) Eklavya college where casteism and narrow (d) Kisan mindedness victimize you, for better adjustment there you should (a) uplift the humanistic values beyond 3. In which state the maximum these narrow wall and develop number of periodicals are brought scientific temper in your students out for public information: (b) be submissive there and save (a) Uttar Pradesh your job (b) Tamil Nadu at all costs (c) Kerala (c) rebel against such attitudes as it is (d) Punjab against the norms of the Indian society 4. The main objective of public (d) none ofthe above broadcasting system i.e. Prasar 63.' If a high 'caste teacher adopts a Bharti is discriminatory attitude toward a low (a) Inform, Entertainment & caste Education students his behaviour is (b) Entertain, Information & (a) correct according to his religion Interaction (bj against the national spirit, and (c) Educate, Interact & Entertain need (d) Entertainment only of the hour (c) not against the constitutiOnal provisions (d) not against the code of teacher's 5. The competency of an effective professionalism communicator can be judged on the of UNESCO basis of: 64. If a student is-constantly rubbing (a) Personality of communicator his eyes (b) Experience in the field and is 'unattentive during blackboard (c) Interactivity with target audience work he is having (d) Meeting the needs of target (a) adjustment problem audience (b) ' hearing problem (c) visual problem Memory Based Questions (2007) (d) all of the above

65. If you are irritated and show rashness People and Environment because of the inadequate behaviours shown by others what'do you think about your own behaviour 1. Sunderban in Hooghly dalta is (a) it is justified because behaviours known for are (a) Grasslands echo lime (b) Conifers (b) your behaviour is not good (c) Mangroves because (d) Arid forests elders have the right to qehave you in this way (c) your behaviour is also the sign of maladjustment and so try to control 2. It is believed that our globe is youselfwhen you are maltreated warming progressively. This global (d) none' ofthese warming will eventually result in. 66. Suppose the teachers are busy in (a) increase in availability of usable cracking (b) live in isolation or land. change the group (b) uniformity of climate at equator filthy jokes and you are also there and poles but you (c) instruct them to mind (c) fall in the sea level their language (d) melting of polar ice. are unable to stop them you should while passing leisure time (a) persuade them decently not to 3. In which parts of India ground waste (d) be critical and remind them water is affected with arsenic "for the contamination? their time-in-fifthy jokes nobility of (a) Haryana their jobs (b) Andhra Pradesh (c) Sikkim ANSWERS (d) West Bengal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (d) (c) (a) . (c) (a) (c) (d) (a) (d) (a) 4. Sardar Sarover dam is located on 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 the river (c) (d) (d) (b) (c) (a) (c) (b) (b) (a) (a) Ganga 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 , (b) Godavari (a) (d) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (b) (a) (d) (c) Mahanadi 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 (d) Narmada (a) (a) (b) (b) (b) (a) (c) (a) (c) (d) 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 5. Which one of the following trees (d) (d) (d) (a) (d) (d) (d) (d) (d) (b) has medicinal value? 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 (a) Pine (d) (a) (e) (c) (c) (c) (c) (b) (d) (d) (b) Teak 61 62 63 64 65 66 (c) Neem (a) (a) (b) (c) (c) (a) (d) Oak Note: Steps in teaching 1. Planning before hand 5. Analysis Memory Based Questions (2007) and Synthesis 2. Knowing the background 6. Evaluation 3. Organizing the material to be Higher Education System: taught 7. Recapitulation Governance, Polity And 4. Presentation of material Administration

Communication: 1. Which one of the following is not QUESTIONS I considered a part of technical 1. Following are the experimental education in India: learning _. (a) Medical activities adopted by a teacher. (b) Management Arrange (c) Pharmaceutical them in cyclic order. (d) Aeronautical (f) Avoid teaching when pupils are not in 2. Identify the main Principle on proper mood which the Parliamentary System (g) All of these operates (i) Accommodation (a) Responsibility of Executive to (ii) Converging Legislature (iii) Assimilation (b) Supremacy of Parliament (iv) Diverging (c) Supremacy of Judiciary (a) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) (b) (iv), (iii), (d) Theory of Separation of Power (ii), (i) (c) . (ii), (iii), (iv), (i) (d) (iii), (i), 3. The reservation of seats for (ii), (iv) women in the Panchayat Raj 2; Which of the following methods Institutions is: ofcommunication (a) 30% of the total seats is the most effective? (b) 33% of the total seats (a) presenting written material (c) 33% of the total population (b) presenting written material (d) In proportion to their population (c)alongwith film projector (d)multi-media method (e)can not be determined 3. Better classroom management 4. Which of the following is a means Central university (a) per group work and better (a) Mumbai University interaction (b) Calcutta University among pupils . (c) Delhi University (b) prior preparation of teacher in the (d) Madras University making of suitable aids (c) punctuality of ·the teachers in 5. Match list I with the list II and comming in the class and finishing select the correct answer from the the course in time . code given below: (d) getting the attention and LIST I (Institutions) LIST II cooperation (Locations) of all the students befo:re starting the 1) Indian Veterinary Research class/task Institute i) Pune (e) moving around the room to 2) Institute of Armament Technology identify ii) Izaat Nagar pupils having 0.1' creating problems 3) Indian Institute of Science iii) 4. Arrange the following activities of Delhi interaction in logical order 4) National Institute of Educational (i) Analysis of the work done Pannesi iv) Banglore (ii) Plarining and preparation And Administrators (iii) Presentation of material (iv) Modification and improvement Key: (a) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) (b) (ii), (iii), (i), (a) 1(ii), 2(i), 3(iv), 4(iii) (iv) (b) 1(ii), 2(iv), 3(ii), 4(iv) (c) (iv), (i), (ii), (iii) (d) (i), (iii), (iv), (c) 1(ii), 2(iii), 3(i), 4(iv) (ii) (d) 1(iv), 2(iii), 3(ii), 4(i) 5. Which of the following skills has the UGC Governance V largest share in communication time in QUESTIONS schoolS/college? 1. India is a: (a) Listening (b) Reading A. Secular Slate B. Bilingual Slate (c) Writing (d) Speaking C. CommuniBt State D. 6. All are the components of CapitalistState listening except 2. What is the literal meaning of (a) hearing secularism? (b) attending-being attentive A. Freedom to worship any God (c) answenng B. Death ofreligion (d) understanding and remembering C. Separation of religion from the Note: These four components are state used in D. None of these the order of hearing, atten~ing, S. The Tenth Schedule to the understanding Constitution of and remembering. India relates to: 7. Listening is badly affected by A. Panchayati Raj Institutions (a) message overload-excess of B. Anti-defectionAct listened C. List of languages recognised by material the (b) high speed of speaking Constitution (c) a sizable hearing loss- D. Procedure for amendment to the physiological Constitution problem 4. The real powers in the Central (d) all ofthe above Government are enjoyed, according 8. The most important aspect of to the communication- Constitution of India by the: listening, can be improved by A. President of India (a) making the attention fully paid B. Vice-President of India (b) making the communicated C. Prime Minister ofIndia material D. CouncllofMinisters novel-interes~ing and need based. 5. The Council of Ministers is (c) making voice effective and responsible to impressive the: (d) all of these A. President B. Lok Sabha 9. Listening to a lecture is C. Vice-President D. Supreme Court (a) informational listening 6. The Prime Minister is: (b) evaluative listening A. nominated by the President (c) emphatic listening B. elected by the Chief Ministers of (d) none of these States 10. The main purpose of evaluative C. is the leader of the majority party listening is of (a) to accept or reject an idea given LokSabha to the D. is not elected; it is a hereditary listener post (b) to evaluate the speaker's 7. The quorum of the Parliament is credibility fixed at: and personality A one-tenth of the membership of (c) ' both of above the (d) none of these House 11. A student helps a teacher to solve B. one-third of the membership of the the problem while the teacher was House delivering C. one-half of the membership of the the lecture. He was House (a) an emphatic listener D. four-fifths of the membership' of (b) an evaluative listener the (c) a realistic listener House (d) an informational listener 8. Why are the Fundamental Rights 12. The process of communication considered fundamental? enhances A. Necessary for the successful through: working of (a) belongingness democratic institution (b) security and freedom to make B. Basic to the welfare, dignity and choices happiness of the individ ual (c) informality of meeting and C. Constitution is based on these avoidance D. All of these of pressure E. Only A and B (d) all ofthese 9. The judges of the Supreme Court 13. Software computer can not be are used appointed by the: (a) for demonstration A. Prime Minister ofIndia (b) for reading and writing B. Speaker of the Lok Sabha (c) as a systematic programmed C. President of India learning D. Ministry of Law & Justice techniques 10. The President's Rule is imposed (d) as a machine for evaluating in a State students or in a Union Territory when the: progress A. Governor of a State or the Chief 14. Which of the following can not Commissioner or a Lt Governor be a good advises way of communication in promoting the President to do so because the literacy among villagers? Government in that StatefI'erritory (a) Demonstration cannot be carried on in accordance (b) Reading and writing with (c) providing material on TV and the provisions of the Constitution film B. Chief Minister of a State requests projector to (d) Large group discussion this effect 15. All are the examples of the media C. Chief Justice of the State High of two Court way communication except recommends through the Governor (a) public meeting D. President knows best (b) padyatra E. Elections are being held there (c) streetplays 11. The Directive Principles: (d) procession and rallies A. aim at establishing welfare state 16. The latest development in the of hardware Gandhian conception technology is the introduction of B. aim at giving ideals to be (a) FM channels (b) Z channels incorporated (c) M channels (d) Star channel at a later stage 17. CHEER stand for C. aim at giving support to the (a) Children Enrichment Education Fundamental Rights Through Radio D. A and B only (b) Child Health Education 12. Agriculture, including research Electronic Recording and (c) Children for Engineers and education, falls in: Energy A. State List B. Union List Requirement C. ConcurrentList D. None of the (d) None of the above above 18. Educational TV was first 13. Which of the following are the introduced in ideals set India in forth in the Preamble? (a) 1961 (b) 1959 A. Social, economic and political (c) 1968 (d) 1961 Justice 19. SITE stands for B. Equality of status and of (a) System for International opportunity Technology C. Liberty of thought, expression, and Engineering belief, (b) Satellite Instructional Television faith and worship Experiment D. All of these (c) South Indian Trade Estate 14. Fundamental Rights of the (d) None ofthese citizens are: 20. Visualization in the instructional A. non-justiciable process B. justiciable can not increase C. justiciable if the highest court fee (a) interest and motivation ls it (b) retention and adaptation should be (c) stress and boredom D. Some rights are justiciable while (d) curiosity and concentration others 21. Which of the following teachers are not will you 15. In India the executive is like most? responsible (a) On~ who uses board occasionally directly to the: (b) One who uses chart and maps A. Legislature B. President (c) One who uses film projector C. Judiciary D. People alongwith 16. Fundamental Rights of the Indian the proper use of the board citizens (d) One who uses motion picture as a are contained 10 ...... of the 'Indian last Constitution'. resort A. Part I 22. Overhead projector is superior to C. Part III short B. Part II circuit TV In a classroom teaching D. Part IV because 17. Of which fundamental right is a (a) it is cheap and self devised foreigner (b) pictures in it may be shown in a in India deprived of? desired sequence and with a A. To seek justice in court minimum oflost motion (material) B. To seek security of life (c) information presented though it is C. To criticise policies of easily retained government (d) it is easy to use . D. To. vote at the time Which of the following groups of of'Parliamentary students election can be most benefited computer 18. Freedom of the Press as such: based A. has been guaranteed by the education programme? Constitution (a) Small group of low IQ B. bas not been expressly guaranteed (b) Large group of moderate by intelligence the Constitution (c) Heterogeneous groups in IQ C. has been given only to selected (d) All of the above institutions 24. Closed circuit televisIon is useful D. None of the above 25. 19. The Rajya Sabha is: 26.(a) only for a restricted audience A. dissolved once in two years residing B. dissolved after every four years at a particular place C. adjourned every six months (b) for large group communication D. not subject to dissolution (c) only for poor students of the class 20. Administrative Law means: (d) none of the above A. law passed by the Union Televised educational programme is B. law or rules made by the useful because executive (a) it can present the natural C. laws relating to administration of phenomenon nonGovernmental of the world in natural form institutions (b) it can magnify the microscopic D. all the above forms 21. The Legislative Council of a of life and can be presented on TV State is a: (c) it affords the opportunity for A. temporary body large audience B. permanent body in the same auditorium or in C. semi-permanent body different locations to view it clearly D. chamber of the nominatt:d (d) all ofthese members Teaching on TV is superior to class 22. The Lok Sabha and the Rajya room Sabha sit .... instruction because jointly when: (a) very large classes are made A tl

ANSWERS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A C B C B C A E C A 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 D A D B A C D B D B 21 22 23 24 25 26 'l:I 28 29 30 B B C A D D C C D C 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 411 A B C C A D D C D C 41 42 43 44 .., 46 47 48 49 50 A C C A D D B A B A 51 52 53 54 65 56 57 68 59 60 D C B A A B C A B A 61 62 63 54 65 66 In 68 69 70 C D B A C A B C A A 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 B A A B C D D A D B 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 D A D C A B A A A A 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 D B D C C C A C C D 101 102 103 104 105 lOG 107 108 109 110 B A A D D A B D B C 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 C B C C C D D B A A 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 B C C B B D C B C D 131 . 132 133 134 135 B A C B D

MODEL UGC -NET PAPER I

This sample paper in for Paper I of the UGC NET Exam which is common for all streams.

1. Which one of the following is the main objective of teaching?

(A) To give information related to the syllabus. (B) To develop thinking power of students. (C) To dictate notes to students. (D) To prepare students to pass the examination.

2. Which one of the following is a good method of teaching?

(A) Lecture and Dictation (B) Seminar and Project (C) Seminar and Dictation

(D) Dictation and Assignment

3. Teacher uses teaching aids for

(A) Making teaching interesting (B) Making teaching within understanding level of students

(C) Making students attentive. (D) The sake of its use.

4. Effectiveness of teaching depends on

(A) Qualification of teacher (B) Personality of teacher

(C) Handwriting of teacher (D) Subject understanding of teacher

5. Which of the following is not characteristic of a good question paper?

(A) Objectivity (B) Subjectivity (C) No use of vague words (D) Reliable. 6. A researcher is generally expected to:

(A) Study the existing literature in a field (B) Generate new principles and theories

(C) Synthesize the idea given by others (D) Evaluate the findings of a study

7. One of the essential characteristics of research is:

(A) Replicability (B) Generalizability (C) Usability (D) Objectivity

8. The Government of India conducts Census after every 10 years. The method of research used in this process is:

(A) Case Study (B) Developmental (C) Survey (D) Experimental

9. An academic association assembled at one place to discuss the progress of its work and future plans. Such an assembly is known as a

(A) Conference (B) Seminar (C) Workshop (D) Symposium

10. An investigator studied the census date for a given area and prepared a write-up based on them. Such a write-up is called

(A) Research paper (B) Article (C) Thesis (D) Research report

Read the following passage and answer the Question Nos. 11 to 15

The constitution guarantees every citizen the fundamental right to equality. Yet after 50 years of independence, just one perusal of the female infant mortality figures, the literacy rates and the employment opportunities for women is sufficient evidence that discrimination exists. Almost predictably, this gender, bias is evident in our political system as well. In the 13th Lok Sabha, there were only 43 women MPs out of total of 543; it is not a surprising figure, for never has women's representation in Parliament been more than 10 per cent.

Historically, the manifestos of major political have always encouraged women's participation. It has been merely a charade. So, women's organizations, denied a place on merit, opted for the last resort; a reservation of seats for women in parliament and State Assemblies. Parties, which look at everything with a vote bank in mind, seemed to endorse this. Alas, this too was a mirage.

But there is another aspect also. At a time when caste is the trump card, some politicians want the bill to include further quotas fro women from among minorities and backward castes. There is more to it. A survey shows that there is a general antipathy towards the bill. It is actually a classic case of doublespeak: in public, politicians were endorsing women's reservation but in the backrooms of Parliament, they were busy sabotaging it. The reasons are clear: Men just don't want to vacate their seats of power.

11. The problem raised in the passage reflects badly on our

(A) Political system (B) Social behaviour (C) Individual behaviour

(D) Behaviour of a group of people

12. According to the passage, political parties have mostly in mind

(A) Economic prosperity (B) Vote bank (C) People' welfare (D) Patriotism

13. "Trump Card" means

(A) Trying to move a dead horse (B) Playing the card cautiously

(C) Sabotaging all the moves by others (D) Making the final jolt for success

14. The sentence "Men just don't want to vacate their seats of power" implies

(A) Lust for power (B) Desire to serve the nation

(C) Conviction in one's own political abilities (D) Political corruption

15. What is the percentage of women in the Lok Sabha

(A) 10 (B) 7. 91 (C) 43 (D) 9. 1

16. Informal communication network within the organization is knows as

(A) Interpersonal communication (B) Intrapersonal Communication

(C) Mass Communication (D) Grapevine Communication

17. TV Channel launched fro covering only Engineering and Technology subject is known as

(A) Gyan Darshan (B) Vyas (C) Eklavya (D) Kisan

18. In which state the maximum number of periodicals are brought out for public information:

(A) Uttar Pradesh (B) Tamil Nadu (C) Kerala (D) Punjab

19. The main objective of public broadcasting system i. e Prasar Bharti is (A) Inform, Entertainment & Education (B) Entertain, Information & Interaction

(C) Educate, Interact & entertain (D) Entertainment only

20. The competerrcy of an effective communicator can be judged on the basis of:

(A) Personality of communicator (B) Experience in the field

(C) Interactivity with target audience (D) Meeting the needs of target audience.

21. Which one of the following belongs to the category of homogeneous date:

(A) Multi-storeyed houses in a colony (B) Trees in a garden

(C) Vehicular traffic on a highway (D) Student population in a class

22. In which of the following ways a theory is not different from a belief?

(A) Antecedent – consequent (B) Acceptability

(C) Verifiability (D) Demonstratability

23. The state - "Honesty is the best policy" is

(A) A fact (B) An value (C) An opinion (D) A value judgement

24. Which one is like pillar, pole and standard?

(A) Beam (B) Plank (C) Shaft (D) Timber

25. Following incomplete series is presented. Find out the number which should come at the place of question mark which will complete the series: 4, 16, 36, 64, ?

(A) 300 (B) 200 (C) 100 (D) 150

26. The following question is based on the diagram given below. If the two big circles represent animals living on soil and those living in water, and the small circle stands for the animals who both live on soil and in water, which figure represents the relationships among them.

27. Of the following statement, there are two statements both of which cannot be true but both can be false. Which are these two statements?

(i) All machines make noise (ii) Some machines are noisy

(iii) No machine makes noise (iv) Some machines are not noisy (A) (i) and (ii) (B) (iii) and (iv) (C) (i) and (iii) (D) (ii) and (iv)

28. In the following question a statement is followed by two assumptions.

(i) and (ii) . An assumption is something supposed or taken for granted.

Consider the statement and the following assumptions and decide which of the following assumptions is implicit in the statement.

Statement: We need not worry about errors but must try to learn from our errors.

Assumptions:

(i) Errors may take place when we are carrying out certain work.

(ii) We are capable of benefiting from the past and improve our chances of error-free work.

(A) Only assumption (i) is implicit (B) Only assumption (ii) is implicit

(C) Either assumption (i) or (ii) is implicit (D) Both the assumptions are implicit

29. The question below is followed by two arguments numbered (i) and (ii) Decide which of the arguments is 'strong' and which is 'weak'. Choose the correct answer from the given below Should the press exercise some self-restraint?

(i) Yes, they should not publish new items which may incite the readers to indulge in wrong practices.

(ii) No. it is the responsibility of the press to present the truth irrespective of the consequences.

(A) Only the argument (i) is strong (B) Only the argument (ii) is strong

(C) Neither argument (i) nor (ii) is strong (D) Both the arguments (i) and (ii) are strong

30. Study the argument and the inference drawn from that argument. Given below carefully.

Argument: Anything that goes up definitely falls down. Helicopter goes up. Inference: So the helicopter will definitely fall down.

What in your opinion is the inference drawn from the argument?

(A) Valid (B) Invalid (C) Doubtful (D) Long drawn one Four students W, X, Y, Z appeared in four papers, I, II, III and IV in a test. Their scores out of 100 are given below.

Papers Students I II III IV W 60 81 45 55 X 59 43 51 A Y 74 A 71 65 Z 72 76 A 68 Where 'A' stands for absent

Where 'A' stands for absent

Read the above table and answer below mentioned Questions 31 to 35

31. Which candidate has secured between 60-65% marks in aggregate

(A) W (B) X (C) Y (D) Z

32. Who has obtained the lowest average in aggregate.

(A) W (B) X (C) Y (D) Z

33. Who has obtained the highest average

(A) W (B) X (C) Y (D) Z

34. In which paper the lowest marks were obtained by thecandiates

(A) I (B) II (C) III (D) IV

35. Which candidate has secured the highest percentage in the papers appeared

(A) W (B) X (C) Y (D) Z

36. ICT stands for

(A) Information common technology (B) Information & communication technology

(C) Information and computer technology (D) Inter connected technology

37. Computer Can

(A) Process both quantitative and qualitative information (B) Store huge information (C) Process information and fast accurately (D) All the above.

38. Satellite Communication works through

(A) Rader (B) Transponder (C) Receptor (D) Transmitter

39. A Computer is that machine which works more like a human brain. This definition of computer is

(A) Correct (B) Incorrect (C) Partially correct (D) None of the above.

40. Information and communication technology includes

(A) E-mail (B) Internet (C) Education television (D) All the above.

41. It is believed that our globe is warming progressively. This global warming will eventually result in.

(A) Increase in availability of usable land. (B) Uniformity of climate at equator and poles. (C) Fall in the sea level (D) melting of polar ice.

42. In which parts of India ground water is affected with arsenic contamination?

(A) Haryana (B) Andhra Pradesh (C) Sikkim (D) West Bengal

43. Sunderban in Hooghly delta is known for

(A) Grasslands (B) Conifers (C) Mangroves (D) Arid forests

44. Sardar Sarover dam is located on the river

(A) Ganga (B) Godavari (C) Mahanadi (D) Narmada

45. Which one of the following trees has medicinal value?

(A) Pine (B) Teak (C) Neem (D) Oak

46. Which one of the following is not considered a part of technical education in India:

(A) Medical (B) Management (C) Pharmaceutical (D) Aeronautical

47. Which of the following is a Central university

(A) Mumbai University (B) Calcutta University

(C) Delhi University (D) Madras University 48. Identify the main Principle on which the Parliamentary System Operates

(A) Responsibility of Executive to Legislature (B) Supremacy of Parliament

(C) Supremacy of Judiciary (D) Theory of Separation of Power

49. The reservation of seats for women in the Panchayat Raj Institutions is:

(A) 30 % of the total seats (B) 33 % of the total seate

(C) 33% of the total population (D) In Proportion to their population

50. Match list I with list II and select the correct answer from the code given below:

LIST ( Institutions) LIST II( Locations)

1. Indian Veterinary Research Institute (i) Pune

2. Institute of Armament Technology (ii) Izat Nagar

3. Indian Institute of Science (iii) Delhi

4. National Institute for Educational Pannesi (iv) Bangalore and Administrators

(A) 1(ii), 2(i), 3(iv), 4(iii) (B) 1(ii), 2(iv), 3(ii), 4(iii)

(C) 1(ii), 2(iii), 3(i), 4(iv) (D) 1(iv), 2(iii), 3(ii), 4(i)

Source: Sample Paper based on questions provided by UGC Model Paper.

Answer Key:

1. B 2. B 3. B 4. D 5. B 6. B 7. D 8. C 9. A 10. B 11. B 12. B 13. D 14. A 15. B 16. D 17. C 18. C 19. A 20. D 21. A 22. B 23. D 24. A 25. A 26. D 27. C 28. D 29. A 30. D 31. A 32. B 33. A 34. B 35. D 36. B 37. D 38. B 39. A 40. D 41. D 42. D 43. C 44. D 45. C 46. A 47. C 48. A 49. B 50. A

UGC December 2002 (Memory Based Paper I)

Note. This paper contains fifty(50) multiple-choice questions, each question carrying two (2) marks. Attempt all of them.

1.There are six villages A, B, C, D, E and F. F is 1 km west of D, B is 1 km east of E , A is 2 km north of E , C is 1 km east of A D is 1 km south of A Which of these villages are in a line? a) A, C and B b) A, D and E c) C, Band F d) E, Band D

2.Consider the Table given. On the basis of this Table, one could conclude that 'X' is proportional to a) (Y + Z) b) YIZ c) (Y - Z) dY'YZ

3.Four persons. A, B, C and D had fruits from an open-air fruit stall. 'A' took grapes and pineapple; 'B' ate grapes and oranges; 'C' took orange, pineapple and apple; 'D' ate grapes, apple and pineapple. After taking fruits, B and C were taken ill. The most likely cause of illness of B and C is the consumption of a) apple bj pineapple c) grapes d) orange

4.The given histogram shows the frequency distribution of height (the number of students in the given height range) of 30 students in a class. Which of the following statements based on this histogram is/are correct? X 1 Y Z 20 10 5 30 25 3 45 15 15/2 120 125 130 -' 35 140 145 150 Height in cm 10 he height of most of the students is between 135 cm and 140 cm. 2.There are only two students whose heights are between 120 cm and 125 CM 3.Fifty percent of the students have their heights between 130 cm and 140 cm.Select the correct answer using the codes given below: a) 1 and 2 b) 2 and 3 c) 1 and 3 d) 2 alone

5. Two one-rupee coins are placed flat on a table. One coin `A' is rotated around the periphery of the other coin 'B' without slipping, till the original point of contact between the coins returns to its initial position The number of rotations made by coin 'A' in a fixed friction is a) 2 b) 4 c) 3 d) 1

6.Five persons, a professor (A), an IAS Officer (B), an Engineer (C), a Politician (D) and a Doctor (E) live in five flats. The flats are built in such a manner that one is on top of another, as one would see in a five-storey building 'A' has to go up to meet his friend 'B'. 'E' is friendly with everyone and has to go up as frequently as to go down. 'C' above whose flat lives 'A's friend. From the ground floor upwards, the correct sequence of the location of the flats of these persons is a) C, A, B, E, D b} A, C, E, B, D c) B,C, A, E, D d) A, D, E, C, B

7. Consider the following statements regarding cars parked at a parking lot: 1. All the Maruti cars parked here are white. 2. Some of these cars have radial tyres. 3. All Maruti cars manufactured after 1986 have radial tyres. 4. All cars are not Marutis. Which one of the following inferences can be drawn from the statements given above? A) Only white Maruti cars with radial tyres are parked here B) Some white Maruti cars with radial tyres are parked here C) Cars other than Maruti do not have radial tyres D) Most of the Maruti cars parked here were manufactured before 1986.

8. The graph shown in the figure relates to sales figures in thousands of TV sets of a particular company for the period 1990-97. On the basis of this graph, which of the following inferences would be valid? 1. TV sales increased constantly from '90 to'93. 2. Sales did not improve in `93-'95. 3. There was a sharp drop in sales in `95-96 4. Sales are not likely to improve from '97 onwards. Select the correct answer using the codes given below: a) 1, 2, 3 and 4 B) 2 and 4 c)1,3 and 4 d) 1,2 and 3

9. The monthly income of a family is Rs. 3000. 20% of it is spent on children's education. Out of the balance, 15% is spent on house rent and from what is left, 50% is spEjnt on provisions. Then which of the following statements would be true? 1. The amount spent on children's education is Rs. 600. 2. The amount spent on house rent is Rs. 450. 3. The amount spent on provisions is Rs. 1020 4. The family has Rs. 1020 per month for other expenses. Select the correct answer using the codes given below: a) 1, 2, 3 and 4 b) 1,3 and 4 c) 2 and 4 d) 1 and 3

10.Who is legally competent under the Indian Constitution to declare war or conclude peace? a} The President b) The Prime Minister The Council of Ministers d) The Parliament

11. The Road Ahead' is a book written by a) Jyoti Basu b) L. K. Advani c) Bill Clinton d} Bill Gates

12. Which year shows the maximum percentage of export with respect of production? a) 1992 b) 1993 c) 1996 d) 1995

13. The population of India in 1993 was a) 800 million b) 1080 million c) 985 million d) 900 million

14. If the area under tea production was less by 10% in 1994 than 1993, then the approximate rate of increase in productivity of tea in 1994 was a) 97.22 b) 3 c) 35 d) Cannot be determined

15. The average proportion of tea exported to the tea produced over the period is a) 0.87 b) 0.47 c) 0.48 d) 0.66

16. What is the first half decade's average per capita availability of tea? a) 457 gms b) 535 gms c) 446 gms d) 430 gms

17.In which year was the per capita availability of tea minimum? a) 1996 b) 1994 c) 1991 d) None of these

18. In which year was there minimum percentage explosion can make a rapid progress. of export with respect to production? a) 1991 b) 1992 c) 1993 d) 1994

19. In which year we had maximum quantity of tea for domestic consumption? a) 1994 b) 1991 population explosion can make a rapid c) 1993 d) 1996 proqress. Directions for questions 20 to 23: All India Monsoon Rainfall (1990 to 1999) June -September

20. The normal rainfall during the period 1990-1999 was experienced in the year(s) a) 1994 b) 1993 & 1995 c) 1996-97 d) 1990

21. The year ..... witnessed the least rainfall. a) 1991 b} 1999 c) 1992 d) 1993

22. Out of the 10 years studied, how many had above normal rainfall? a} 3 b) 7 c) 5 d) 6 Directions for questions 23 to 27: Each of the following incomplete arguments is followed by four sentences. One of the four completes the argument in order to justify the conclusion. Pick that out.

23. India cannot make a rapid progress because India has a problem of population explosion. a) No country with population explosion can make a rapid progress. b) Only a country without population c) Some countries with population problem cannot make a rapid progress. d) All countries which have a problem ofpopulation explosion can make a rapid proqress.

24. Man learns through experience as he has initiative by nature. a) Some persons who take initiative by nature learn through experience. b) All who have initiative by nature learn through experience. c) None who has initiative by nature learns through experience. d) Only few with initiative learn through experience.

25.We have now to fight for peace with some courage and determination as we fought against aggression. a) Many are fighting for peace who have fought against aggression. b) All those who have fought against aggression should fight for peace c) Some who are fighting for peace have fought against aggression. d) None is fighting for peace who have fought for aggression.

26. Whom the gods love dies young. a) Many die young who are gods. b) Few die young who are gods c) some who are loved by the gods die young d) all those who love the gods die young

27. Education has produce a vast population able to read but unable to distinguish what is worth readlng

28.If the ratio of boys to girls in a class is B and the ratio of girls to boys is G, then 3 (B + G) is a) equal to 3 b) less than 3 c) more than 3 d) less than 1/3

29. Tea worth Rs. 126 per kg and Rs. 135 per kg are mixed with a third variety in the ratio 1 : 1 : 2. If the mixture is worth Rs. 153 per kg the price of the third variety per kg will be a) Rs. 169.50 b) Rs. 170 c) Rs. 175.50 d) Rs. 180

30. The average of 11 numbers is 10.9. If the average of the first six numbers is 10.5 and that of the last six numbers is 11.4, then the middle (61") number is a) 11.5 b) 11.4 c) 11.3 d) 11.0

31. there are 30 students in a class . the average are of the first 10 student is 12.5 years. the average are of the next 20 student is 13.1 years. the average age of the whole class is. a) 12.5 years b)12.7 c) 12.8 d) 12.9 years

32. the perimeter of one face of cube is 20 cm. its volume must be a) 8000 cm3 b) 100 cm3 c) 125cm3 d) 400 cm3

33.the number of revolutions made by a wheel of diameter 56 cm in covering a distance of 1.1 km is (use p=22/7) a) 31.25 b) 56.25 c) 625 d) 62.5

Direction: Read the passages below and answer the question based on them : Passage 1 the world of computer enthusiasts is in the grip of an ethical crisis. should copmuter viruses be classified as a life form? will consensus-building agencies take up the case for virus rights, protest the death penalty, demand that their clents be set apart in enclaves ? None of this is beyond the bound of probabilty, considering the pitch of the debates that rage on the internet, the global computer network set up 30 years ago by the U.S. defence research establishment. A new society is coming to birth in virtual reality; one is easily seduced into forgetting that these bizarre events are taking place inside a Xerox corporation computer at Palo Alto, California. If the science fiction of the '30s gave the world the concept of the Cyborg, a creature half human and half-computer, the Internet today seems poised on the verge of the Cyborg. If a recent case is any indication, the simple etiquette which has so far governed social behaviour among Internet users will no longer suffice to administer this electronic Wild West. That solecisms in the world's latest frontier of society have attained a real-world level of scandal is obvious from the manner in which, earlier this year, an electronic intruder broke into a conversation among female users and aimed obscene visuals at them. This raised a storm of outrage. Internet users first bombarded his electronic mail box with rebukes and then had him expelled. The issue leads into uncharted philosophical territory: in virtual space, can one deterenine where the body ends and mind begins? At what point do word and image translate as act? Human society seems to possess a reverse Midas touch, contaminating every system it comes into contact with. The day is not distant when all the vicious impulses of the real world will have colonised virtuality, and another Utopia will have gone down the chute.

34. The central idea being followed in the passage is: (a) the danger posed by viruses to Internetusers (b) the status of sanctity of computer information routes. (c) the degrading moral standards of our Society (d) the role of morality it-, !he formation of computer information high-ways,

35. The term chute' in the passage specifically refers to: (a) the concept of the Cyborg (b) the science fiction of the `30s. (c) a creature half human and half computer of the science fiction of the 30s. (d) none of the above.

36. The term "solecisms" is used to highlight: (a) the basic codes of ethical conduct (b) breach of protocol (c) the role of virus affected information (d) none of the above Passage - 2 The difference between different kinds of writing lies not so much in the writing itself, but in the way we look at it (and, of course, in the way the author wished us to look at it; but we often know very little about that). Literary forms do not exist outside our own minds. When we read anything, no matter what - a description of a scientific experiment, a history book, a ballad, or a novel -- in so far as we pay attention only to what things are happening one after another to something or somebody, it is a story; in so far as we read it only to learn the way in which something or someone behaves in certain circumstances, it is science; in so far as we read it only to find out what has actually happened in the past, it is history People often ask what is the difference beaween poetry and prose. The only difference is :-,l the way the writer looks at things. For instance, the novelist starts with a general idea in his mind; say, that people are always trying to escape from their responsibilities, and that escape only leaves them in a worse mess. Then he writes a story about what happened to Mr. and Mrs. Smith. He may never say, in so many words, that they tried to escape, never mention his idea, but this idea is the force that drives the story along. The poet, on the other hand, hears people talking in his club about the sad story of Mr. and Mrs Smith. He thinks, 'There is now, that's very interesting. They are just like everybody else; trying to get around life. It's like those sailors who tried to get to India by the Northwest Passage On they go, getting farther and farther into the ice, miles from home. Why, that's a good idea `or a poem.' He writes a poem about explorers, he may never mention Mr. and Mrs. Smith at ail. The novelist then goes from the general to the particular, the poet from the particular to the general, and you can see this also in the way they use words. The novelist uses words with their general meaning, and uses a whole lot of them to build up a particular effect: his character. The poet uses words with their particular meanings and puts them together to give a general effect: his ideas. Actually, of course, nearly all novels and all poems except very short ones have both ways of looking at things in them (e.g. Chaucer's Canterbury Tales is more like a novel in verse; Mefville's Moby Dick is more like a poem in prose). All you can say is that one way is typical of the novelist and the other of the poet.

37.An appropriate title of this passage be, (a) Of Poets and Novelists (b) Of Poetry (c) Of Novels (d) Of Literature

38.According to the author, a) Each person reads a particular piece readers'of writing with the same motive. b) Every person has a different motive in reading a particular piece of writing. c) Some pieces of writing are not read by people at all. d) None of the above.

39. One piece of writing can be distinguished from the other by. i) the difference in the author's style of writing. ii) the difference in the reader view toward the writings. III. the way the meaning has been used. (a) I only (b) II only (c) III only (d) I & II 40.The essential difference in the approaches of a novelist and a poet is that, (a) The novelist moves from particular general. (b) The poet moves from general to particular. (c) The poet general.difference. both (d) There in no and the same.

41. The novelist builds up, (a) characters (b) ideas (c) Both (a) and (b) (d) Neither (a) nor (b)

42. The poet builds up (a) characters (b) ideas (c) Both (a) and (b) (d) Neither (a) nor (b)

Directions Q. 43 to 47, Choose the pair of words which best expresses the relationship similar to that expressed in the capitalised pairs.

43. ADJACENT: OBJECTS (a) modern : times (b) gradual : degrees c) contemporary : events d) repetitive : steps

44. FACILITATE: HAMPER (a) animate : feed (b) conventional : naive (c) urbane : remote (d) birth : demise

45. DENOUNCE : CONDONE a) endure : imagine b) antithetical : supportive c) unnatural : noncommittal d) natural : committal

46. SALUBRIOUS: BANEFUL (a) contemplate : intimidate (b) alleviate : exacerbate (c) probity : fallacy (d) susceptible : desultory

47. LANDSLIDE : PEBBLE (a) deluge : droplet (b) beach : wave (c) desert : oasis (d) rain : puddle

Directions for Q. 48 to 50: Choose the ORDERED pair of statements, where the first statement implies the second, and the two are logically consistent with the main statement.

48. If our ancestors were monkeys, we would be anthropoids today. A .We are not anthropoids B. Our ancestors were monkeys C. We are anthropoids D. Our ancestors were not monkeys (a) DA (b) CB (c) AB (d) AD

49. Task A, if ever accomplished; can transform our lives. A Our lives have been transformed B. Our lives have not been transformed C. Task A has not been accomplished D. Task A has been accomplished (a) CB (b) BC (c) AC (d) AD

50. Press either of the buttons X and Y and the drink will come out. A The drink has come out B. Either X or Y has been pressed C. The drink has not come out D. Button Y has been pressed (a) AB (b) AD (c) DA (d) DC

UGC JUNE 2003 (Memory Based Questions)

UGC JUNE 2003-Paper-I

Note. This paper contains fifty (50) multiple-choice questions; each question carrying two (2) marks. Attempt all of them. 1. Anand is related to Binod and Cinderella; Deepa is Cinderella's mother Also Deepa is Binod's sister and Ela is Binod's sister. How is Cinderella related to Ela? a) Niece b) Cousin (c) Sister d) Aunt

2. In a confidential code, 'GET AWAY. FIRE BACKWARDS, MOVE SLOW' is coded as BEN CDCI, QHOE PCTLDCOXU, ZMWE UFMD'. In this code, which of the following could be a possible code for the world METHOD? (a) ZENTMX (b) ZENDMX (c) ZENKMX (d) ZENHMX

Directions Q 3-4: The letters of the English alphabet are numbered 26 to 1. A is 26, B is 25, C is 24 and so on. 3. Which of the following sequences denotes a valid word? (a) 6-12-17-23 (b) 5-11-18-22 (c) 5-12-18-23 (d) 5-12-17-23

4. The following sequence with some arithmetic operations has been used to denote the letters in a word. What will be the next term to make it a valid word? 9, 22, 11, 12, 8, ..... a) 21 b) 22 C) 23 d) 24

5. In a military code, the data are communicated as per one of the following rules: a) Multiply by 2 and divide by 3 b) Square and add one c) Divide by 2 and add 3 d) Divide by 2 and multiply by 3 Which rule has been used to communicate data in the series? 33, 333, 393, 1266

6. Sanjay is Sarita's brother. "I have as many sisters as brothers", tells Sarita to one of her friends. Sanjay says, "Each of us brothers has only half as many brothers as sisters". How many brothers and sisters does the family have? a) 4 sisters and 5 brothers b) 5 sisters and 3 brothers c) 3 sisters and 4 brothers d) None of these

7. If DCF means BAD in a particular language code. then which of the following is a valid word in this code.? a) PCOR b) PYKC c; AY t'C d) None of these

8.A queen has five diamond rings, each weighing differently. Her jeweler gives her the following information: I. Ring D weighs twice as much as ring E II. Ring E weighs four and a half times as much as ring F III. Ring F weighs half as much as ring G IV. Ring G weighs half as much as ring H V Ring H weighs less than ring D but more than ring F As per the above data, which of the following statements is correct? a)Ali the information is needed to determine the order of weights of the rings b) Ring G is the lightest in weight c) Ring H is heavier than both D & F d) Both rings D & E are heavier in weight than ring H

9. P + Q means P is wife of Q; P - Q means P is son of O: and P " Q means P is sister of Q. Following this relationship, Prashant - Rakesh ` Ronit will certainly mean all of these except a) Rakesh is a lady b) Prashant is son of Rakesh c) Ronit is father of Prashant d) None of these

10. As per the rule of coding, RYHKYFYJ is the code for TAJ MAHAL. According to the same rule QUTAB MINAR will be coded as: a) RVUVCNJOBS b) OSRSZKGLYP c) OSRSCKJLBP d) None of these

11. Which of the following will replace the '?' sign in the series below: 151, 150, 142, ?, 105 a) 125 b) 134 c) 132 d) 127

12. A hunter has just returned after a day's bird shooting. His wife asked, how many birds he had in his bag. He says, "They are all sparrows but six, Gli pigeons but six and all doves but six". How many minimum number of bir~is could he have in his bag? a) 18 b) 6 c) Cannot be determined d) None of these

13. Perception, retention and rccall are: a) source variables . b) message variables c) receiver variables d) channel variables

Directions Q 14-15: In each question below are given a statement followed by three assumptions numbered l, ll and 111. An assumption is something supposed or taken for granted. You have to consider the statement and the following assumptions and decide which of the assumptions is implicit in the statement, then decide which of the answers is the correct answer.

14. Statement: India's economic growth has come at a terrible price of increased industrial and vehicular pollution. Assumptions: I. Pollution is a part of industrial society. II. Indian economic growth is based on only industrial growth. III. A country desires economics growth with manageable side-effects. a) Only I b) Only II c) Only I and III d) Only III

15. Statement: Efforts to develop technologies more appropriate to the needs of the poorest sections of society need to be further intensified. Assumptions: I. Nothing is impossible it proper efforts are made. II. Technology needs are different for different sections of society. al Only I b) Only III C) Only II d) Both II and III

Directions (Qs 16 to 25): Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow: Awong the natural resources which can be called upon in nationai plans for development, possibly the most important is human labour. Since the English language suffers from a cerrtain weakness in its ability to describe as composed of both male and female members, this is usually described as ‗manpower‘. Without a productive labour force, including effective leadership and intelligent middle management, no amount of foreign assistance or of natural wealth can ensure successful development and modernization. The manpower for development during the next quarter-century will come from the world's present population of infants, children and adolescents. But we are not sure that they will be equal to the task. Will they have the health, the education. The skills the socio-cultural attitudes essential for the responsibilities of development. For far too many of them the answer is no. The reason is basic. A child's most critical years, with regard to physicai, intellectual, social and emotional development, are before he reaches five years of age. Curing those critical formative years he is cared for almost exclusively by his mother, and in many parts of the world the mother may not have-the capacity to raise a superior child. She is incapable of doing so by reason ;if her own poor health, her ignorance and her lack of status and recognition of social and legal rights, of economic; parity of independence. One essential factor has been overlooked or ignored. The forgotten factor is the role of women. Development will be handicapped as long as women remain second-class citizens, uneducated, without any voice in family or community decisions, without legal or economic status, married when they are still practically children, and henceforth producing one baby after another, often only to see half of them die before they are school age.

Directions (Qs 22 to 25): Read the passage carefully and answer these questions:

Many of the underdeveloped countries will promote the growth of their economies in One way or another no matter whether they receive substantial outside aid in the process or not. The character of that development, however is likely to be strongly influenced by the tied amounts of aid available. The outcome is much more likely to be favorable, from the objectives for successful (level r) set up previously, if there is substantial' international aid than if there is not. By substantial aid I mean not only large amounts of technical assistance but also of capital. Initially, the capacity of an underdeveloped country to use capital productively may be surprisingly small-limited by lack of organization, trained personnel, and other social obstacles. At this stage technical assistance is its main need from outside, with comparatively small amounts of capital, much of which may have to be in the fonrin of grants for non-self-liquidating projects in education, health, access roads to rural areas, and the like. if, at this stage, substantial capital available from outside to supplement that can be formed internally (and to stimulate internal capital formation, for it does that too) the rate of economic growth can be considerably increased, and the strains and frustrations and political risks of the development process are likely to be considerably less. It is possible for underdeveloped economies to modernize themselves with very little capital from outside. Japan's imports of capital were small. Though some of it came at crucial times. The contribution of foreign direct investment to of technical know-how, also was greater than would be indicated merely by the 71‘s of investment. The Soviet Union industrialize economy with practically no aid from FDI capital except for the 'owned installations confiscated after the revolution, though it imported machinery in the early days on short-term or intermediate-term credits and hired services of foreign experts. Both Japan and Russia achieved their development in an authoritarian political and social framework. The outcome in both cases, from standpoint of the peace of the world and democratic ideals, were highly unfavorable. In the absence of outside aid, the only way accumulate capital is to increase production without taking much of the benefit in more consumption, or even while pushing consumption standards down. Where the people are already near the subsistence level this may mean extreme hardship. Somehow the people must be motivated to change their accustomed ways quickly, to work hard, and to forego present consumption so that capital investment can be made.

22. The passage says: Without foreign aid to under-developed country can grow; (2) Underdeveloped countries must refrain from seeking foreign aid;The economies of underdeveloped countries are more likely to grow faster with substantial foreign aid than without; (4) Underdeveloped countries are economically backward because their governments have not got their priorities right.

23. Substantial aid in this context means: (1) technical assistance in the form of trained personnel; (2) capital, in the form of bank loans and overdrafts; (3) large amount of technical assistance and capital (4) a cheap and plentiful supply of labour.

24. The availability of substantial capital from outside: (1) can help to stimulate internal capital formation; (2) does encourage wasteful tendencies; (3) seldom helps to accelerate the rate of internal growth; (4) tends to discourage local capitalformation. c) allow the mistakes to be committed and explains how to minimise those mistakes d) is a perfectionist and never allows any mistakes to be committed.

25. The passage says that: (1) Japan imported substantial capital before it became modernised; (2) the Soviet Union industrialized its economy with plenty of foreign investment capital; (3)Japan rejected offers of substantial foreign capital investment in the early stages of its economic development; (4) In the early days of the economic development the Soviet Union imported machinery on short-term or intermediate-term credits and hired foreign experts.

Directions: Questions are independent of each other 26. To find out whether learning has taken place, psychologists would consider the criterion of: a) social pressures b) habit formation c) motivation d) Speed of reaction

27. What should be the teacher's response towards mistakes? a) take all precautions so that students never commit mistakes b) should mildly punish students if they make mistakes b) it was too difficult for him to remember c) it was lost as a result of learning something else subsequently d) one can hardly remember what is not used daily

28. When a student cannot recall something he had learnt some time back, we can assume that:

29. How should a teacher introduce a new subject in class for the first time? a) begin the first chapter without delay b) give a broad outline of what is going to be done c) divide the class into groups for discussing the topic d) give a preface and start the lesson

30. The development of a person's desirable characteristics is largely because of: a) learning b) Increased sensitivity to appropriate stimuli c) Increased understanding d) Improved behavior

31. If each side of a square is increased by 50%, the ratio of the area of the new square to the area of the old square is a) 5:4 b) 9:4 c) 4:5 d) 4:9 32. The ratio of three numbers is 3 : 4 : 5 and the sum of their squares is 1250. The sum of the numbers is a) 60 b) 90 c) 30 d) 50

33. If two numbers are in the ratio (3 : 13 and their least common multiple is 312, then the larger number is a) 12 c) 24 b) 26 d) 52

34. A, B, C and D have Rs. 40, 50. 60 end 7C respectively when they go to visit a fair. A spends Rs 18, B spends, P,.s. 21, C spends Rs. 24 and D spends Rs. 27. Who has done the highest expenditure proportionate to his resources? a) A b) B c) C d) D

35. A journey of 260 km. between two cities takes 3 hours less by train than the car. If the average speed of the car is 6 km/hr less than the speed of the train, the average speed of the train is a) 26 km/hr b) 52 km/hr c) 10 km/hr d) 13 km/hr

36. What is the average of Rural Male Population in millions? a) 36.1 b) 39.7 c) 37,9 d) 30.3

37. In which category of population, is there the lowest percentage of children in the school? Urban males 5 - 9 Rural males 5 - 9 Urban females 5 - 9 Rural females 10 - 14

38. What is the approximate percentage of children of all categories not in school? a) 40.8 b) 31.5 c) 30.5 d) 31.13

39. What is the approximate number of children in millions who are working? a) 17 b) 18 c) 19 d) 16

40. What percent is the ratio between urban males and rural males not in school? a) 16 b) 18 c) 15.33 d) None of these

41. Directions 36 to 40: The following table gives Population and Activities of Indian Children (1993-94), Study the table carefully and answer these questions. Total Population Not in school and Not in school and Child Population Age/Gender Group (million) in School working not working not in school million Rural males 5-9 39,7 67 2 1 3 31.5 13.02I Rural females 5-9 35,7 56,2 3.0 40.8 15.63 Urban males 5-9 11.~ 84 1 0.3 15.2 1.79 Urban females 5-9 10.2 80.1 1.3 18.6 2.02 Rural males 10-14 36 1 76 6 12.8 10.6 8.44 Rural females i0-14 55.7 30.3 14.0 13.42 Urban males 10-14 11_7 87 2 7.0 5.8 1.50 Urban females 10-1 1 G .~i 81.6 13.1 5.3 1.93 Total er- r 57.75

Directions 41 to 46: The following table gives the enrolment in Higher Secondary Schools in 1978.Study the table carefully and answer these questions. Enrolment No. of Schools 41. what is the approximate percentage of schools, where the enrolment was below 120? a) 59.16 b) 59.27 c) 60 d) 61

42. What is the approximate percentage of schools, where the enrolment was above 79 but below 180? a) 56 c)- 57 b) 56.39 d) 55

43. Under which class do the maximum of schools fall? a) 100-119 b) 80-99 c) 60-79 d) None of these

44. What is the approximate percentage of the least number of schools for the classes of enrolment? a) 8 b) 9.5 c) 9 d) 10

45. What is the approximate percentage of the least number of schools for the classes of enrolment? a) 8 b) 9.5 c) 9 d) 10

46. What is the average enrolment per H.S.school 1833 School? a) 107.87 b) 217.60 c) 109.5 d) 129.5

47 . Directions for questions 47 to 50: In these questions, two statements are given, followed by two inferences A and B. Assume the statements to be true, mark your answer as: a) If only inference A follows, b) If only inference B follows, c) If both A and B fallow, d) If neither A nor B follows

47. All mothers are aunts. All aunts are ladies. So, A: All mothers are ladies, B: All aunts are mothers.

48. Some doctors are fools. Some fools are rich. So, A: Some doctors are rich. B: Some rich are doctors.

49. All goats are cows. Some goats are lambs. So, A: All goats are lambs. B: Some lambs are cows

50. All pedestrians are poor. All poor are honest. So, A: All honest are pedestrians. B: All pedestrians are honest.

ANSWERS 1. a 2. c 3. c 4. b 5. d 6. d 7 d 8. d 9. c 10. d 11. d 12. d 13. c 14. c 15. d 16. 2 17. 4 18. 2 19. 3 20. 4 21. 1 22. 3 23. 3 24. 1 25. 4 26. a 27. c 28. c 29. b 30. c 31. b 32. a 33. d 34. a 35. a 36. c 37. d 38. d 39. c 40. b 41. a 42. b 43. b 44. b 45.c 46.a 47.a 48.d 49. b 50. b

UGC-DECEMBER 2003 Paper-I (Memory Based Questions)

Note. This paper contains fifty multiple-choice questions, each question carrying two marks. Attempt all of them.

1. Cause celebre. It is only the latest term to circulate with alarming regularity. Have cause, will espouse, happens to be the latest mantra of high society. The beautiful people may not know much about housing problems, encroachment etc. but will oppose slum demolitions. They may not know about the drought problems in Saurashtra, but will rant against the Sardar Sarovar project. In my opinion they are……. a) anti-poor b) celebrities such as authors or movies stars c) by and large unaware of ground realities and only involved in a ―cause‖ for the sake of doing so. d) by and large aware of the situation at ground zero but not of the ramifications of supporting a particular cause.

2. The former soviet union built up the world‘s largest standing army. Its military industrial complex fabricated a whopping 45,000 nuclear warheads at the height of the cold war its sphere of influence extended from Vietnam to cuba. Yet the ―soviet structure‖ was challenged from within……without considering history as we it, which of the following statements would give credence to the above view. a) the soviet union was too large to govern. b) despite the soviet union‘s military might, it failed to raise the standard of living of its citizens thereby fuelling economic and more dangerously political discontent of the system. c) The soviet union was not strong militarily with respect to the other major power of the world. d) The system of governance in the soviet union was non-sustainable.

3. The Hizb-ul-Mujahideen has just declared a three-month long cease fire. The news has come as a pleasant surprise for pundits who have long been predicting that since it has already been a decade of full-scale militancy, Kashmir, like Punjab would too turn the corner. Which of the follwing examples follows a similar logic. a) Lawyer- ―I have won a lot of cases, but of late certain hostile judges have sullied my record.‖ b) Cop- ―I have arrested a lot of people, but none have ever had political connections.‖ c) Scientist- ―I have discovered 6 new plants in 6 months alone, so by the time I retire, I probably would have discovered many more.‖ d) Aeronautical engineer- ―The prithvi missile was handed over to army after 3 successful test flights. Today we are about to test Agni-II for the third time and then we will hand it over to the army.‖

4.The glory days of hindi cinema are long over. Remember the time when movies such as Jagte Raho, Do Bigha Zameen, Mother India, Kaagaz ke Phool made animpact. Today, all that bollywood has to offer are muscle men and bimbos, teamed up for lewd songs! Which of the following if true would weaken the author‘s argument? a) All hindi movies churned out by bollywood today cannot be categorized as bad movies b) We get the movies we deserve. c) The examples which the author cites to prove his point are not reflective of all the movies of the putative ―glory days‖ and ―muscle men and bimbos in lewd songs‖ have always been a part of bollywood since its inception. d) The movies of today are more commercialized and have to cater to the lowest common denominator.

5. Mr. Jacob works for coffee plantation in Coorg. He gets paid Rs. 30 per hour subject to the fact that the beans are retrieved from at least 10 plants in the same time. Otherwise he gets paid Rs.15 for the same duration. What does this say about Mr. Jacob or his company? a) Mr. Jacob is assured o a regular income till he retires. b) The company in question nas not adapted to the new market scenario that dictates that labour must be paid scle!y on the basis of productivity. c) Mr. Jacob does not meet his targets oflen. d) The company in question links a part of the wages it pays to the productivity of its Employees

6. Richard Branson gets off a Virg in-Atlantic flight dressed in a Bhangra outfit. He reaks into a Jig with the local dancers at New Delhi's international airport (India). He wan's to promote his air service to London and hence the "bhangra naach (bhar?gra dance)" Branson does all !his because. a) he wants his airline to knock British Airways out of the picture, b) because he knows that there if a large Sikh community which nnay want to use the service. c) to entice Indians into trying out his airline by "doing in Rome as the Romans do" principle d) by dancing his way into Indian hearts.

Read the passage given below and answer the question nos. 7 and 8 :

Everyone wants to go the United States, it's all very well to give the GRE and ail but it's quite another to get adjusted to the "American Culture‖. For starters America is not the land of promiscuity, at least as far as Asians students are concerned .Asian students score amazing marks in examinations but probably never attend a fart part.

7. Asian American are…………. a) Prosperous but not social b) prosperous but putatively social c) sybarite d) None of the above

8. Asian students are academically far superior vis-a-vis American students in the realm of academia. Which of the following is also true ot the indian students. a) the. Indian students are promiscuous. b) the Indian students are not promiscuous. c) the Indian students are not invited to frat party. d) none et the above Directions: Read the following passage and answer the questions based on them. As a human enterprise, research involves ethical questions, not in terms of the questions we address but in terms of how we address these questions and report our results. Over the past two decades a number of studies have brought into sharp focus some of the issues involved. For example, in one research effort that won a prize from the American Association for the Advancement of Science, subjects were told to teach other subjects ("learners") a list of paired associate words and to punish then with an electric shock when an error was made. The issue in Vitiated was obedience to authority. Although actual shocks were not used, the subjects believed that it was being used and often "administered" high levels despite pleas from the "learners" that it was painful. In another research effort in which a prison environment was simulated, subjects took on the roles of guards and prisoners. Subject "guards' were found to be verbally and physically aggressive to subject "prisoners," who allowed themselves to be-treated in a dehumanized way. Finally, we are all probably aware of one behavior modification program or another that has been used to shape the behavior children or patients without their consent or voluntary participation. Such programs are dramatic in the issues they raise, hut the underlying question concerning ethical principles of research is fundamental, Do experimenters have the right to require participation? To deceive subjects? That are the ethical responsibilities of researchers to subjects and to psychology as a science? The former has been an issue of concern to the American Psychological Association, and it has adopted a list ofrelevant ethical principles. The essence of these principles is that "the psychologist carries out the investigation with respect and concern for the dignity and welfare of the people who participate." This includes, evaluating the ethical acceptability of the research, determining whether subjects in the study will be at risk in any way, and establishing a clear and fair agreement with research participants concerning the obligations and responsibilities of each. Although the use of concealment or deception is recognised as necessary in some case, strict guidelines are presented. It is recognized as the responsibility of the investigator to protect participants from physical and mental discomfort, harm and danger. The ethical responsibility of psychologists includes the interpretation and presentation of results as well as the conduct of the research. Of late there has been serious concern in science generally with "the spreading stain of fraud". Some concern with this issue began with charges that Sir Cyril Burt, a once prominent British psychologist, intentionally misrepresented data in his research on the inheritance of intelligence. In other fields of science there have been reports of investigators intentionally manipulating data to enhance their chances of publication, grant funding, promotion, and public recognition. Recently, there was an investigation whether psychologists working in the area of alcoholism had intentionally misrepresented their data. The issue of fraud is one that scientists do not like to recognise or talk about because it goes against the very fabric of the scientific enterprise. Although fraudulent data and falsified conclusions are very rare, the profession of psychologists is beginning to face up to their existence and to take constructive steps in solving the problem. Much more subtle than fraud, and undoubtedly of much broader significance, is the issue of the effects of personal and social bias on the ways in which issues are developed and the kinds of data that are accepted as evidence in support for one or another kind of enterprise. In considering sex differences, for example, to what extent are research projects developed in a way that is free from bias and to what extent is evidence for or against the existence of sex differences equally likely to be accepted? To what extent do our own social and political values influence not only what is studied but how it is studied and the kinds of conclusions we are prepared to reach? As noted, although scientists make every effort to be objective and remove all possible sources of error and bias from their research, this remains a human enterprise with the potential for personal, social, cultural, and political influence. Finally, we may note in a related way the role of research in the formulation of public policy. Though still in an early stage of development as a science, psychology does relate to fundamental human concerns and psychologists are often called on to suggest the relevance of this research for public policy. This has happened with intelligence tests and immigration policy, child development and the effects of early enrichment programs; and the effects of television violence on aggression in everyday life. Recently, Seligman's work has been related to societal functioning, with the suggestion that some social programs may operate to increase learned helplessness. For example, many Scandinavian countries have served as a model for social reform and social welfare. While praising these accomplishments, one Swedish psychologist has warned that a potential side effect of overly extensive programs in this area may be the development of a broad earned helplessness phenomenon in the population. !n sum, among the issues that concern us as researchers and as consumers of research is that of how the results may be interpreted to direct, support, or refute various social policies

9. The passage says that, (A) Researchers need to be free from all kinds of bias and they always are. (B) Researchers need to be free from all kinds of bias and they never are. (C) Researchers need to be free from all kinds of bias and they sometimes are not. (D) Researchers need not to be free from all kinds of bias and still they always are.

10. All the following are the reasons for scientists misrepresenting data except (A) to receive acclaim (B) to get research papers published (C) to intentionally harm competitor colleagues (D) to facilitate faster flow of funding.

11. It can be inferred from the passage that (A) psychology is in its nascent stage of being evolved into a science. (B) psychology has evolved fully as a science. (C) psychology can never evolve into a complete science. (D). psychology will have to struggle if it wants to evolve into a complete science.

12. The psychological research findings, a). can never be used practically for the purposes of social policy support. b) can and should be used for the purposes of social policy support. c) can but should not be used for the purposes of social policy support. d) the passage does not mention any connection between research and social policy.

13. One can assume that, a) If people are told that a certain thing would happen they tend to believe that it has happened even if it actually has not. b)If people are told that a certain thing would happen they never tend to believe that it has happened if it actually has not. c) If people are told that a certain thing would happen they never tend to believe that it has happened even if it actually has d) None of the above.

14. The author is against: a) all psychological research. b) all research c) all research in which the subject is treated badly d) all of the above.

15. "Subjects" could be, (a) the topics under discussion for psychological research. (b) the people who volunteer for psychological experiments to be carried out on them. (c) the animals which are used to carry out experiments. (d) Both (b) and (c)

16. The American Psychological Association does all the following except; a) give guidelines to carry out research using subjects. b) evaluate if a research is ethically acceptable. c) decide the responsibilities of all the research participants. d) penalize the researcher if his experiment is in any way harmful.

Q. 17-18. A and B are mothers-in-law of C and D, not necessarily in that order. B is daughter of A. C is the only male member in the group. 17. How is C related to D? a) spouse b) siblings c) father d) can't be determined

18. If B is the only daughter of A and B is the mother in law of D then C is ...... of D a). Husband b) father in law c) brother d) brother in law

19. In a software company where every person knows at least one language, 50% know poha language 60% know kova language 70% know vada language. 20% know poha and kova language, 30% know kova and vada language, 30% know vada and poha language. How many people know all the three language. a) 30% b) 25% c) 0% d) 10%

20. A toothpaste manufacturer is giving two different offers on its 100g tube. The first one is giving 30% extra at the same price, and the second one is giving 30% off on the marked price. By what percentage is the first offer costlier than the second one? a) 4.2% b) 2.4% c) 9.88% d) 0%

21. Train A takes 4.5 hours to go form, Station X to Station Y. Train B takes 6 hours to go from Station Y to Station X. If train A starts from X at 12:OOpm and train B starts from Y at 1:304)m, when will they meet? a) 3:12 b) 3:32 c) 1:52 d) 2:42

22. 5762 =? a) 331776 b) 271774 c) 271786 d) 312566

Q 23-24 : Six persons Ana, Bana, Cana, Dana, Ena and Fana were playing a game of cards. Ana's father, mother and uncle were in the group. There were two women. Bana, the mother of Ana gets more points than her husband. Dana got more point Ena but less than Fana. Niece of Ena got lowest points. Father of Ana got more points than Fana but could not win the game?

23. Who won the game? a) Bana b) Cana c) Aria d) Fana

24. If Bana was me of the ladies, who was the other lady? a) Fana b) Ana c) Dana d) Ena Q. 25 to 30: Consider the first 135 multiples of 6

25. What is the sum of the numbers? a) 55070 b) 55080 c) 54540 d) 56080

26. What will be the average of the numbers? a) 357 b) 358 c) 408 d) 407

27. If in place of 6, a student takes 135 multiples of 7, what will be the ratio of averages? a) 6/7 b) 3/. c) 4/7 d) 43/35

28. In a school 30% of students are boys and rest, girls. 60% of the students are tall and the rest are short. If 10% of the students are short boys and 60 students are girls and are tall. How many of the students are tall boys? a) 40 b) 20 c) 45 d) 30

29. If Raja cannot count, he can spell. If Purnima does not pay, Taru.n goes on strike. If Purnima pays, Raja can spell.Therefore if Tarun does not go on strike a) Purnima does not pay b) Raja can count c) Raja cannot count d) none of the above

30. Either Pakistan will test the Ghauri missileor India will conduct a nuclear test. Either the United States will not lift sanctions on India or Clinton will visit India. Which of the following is necessary to ensure that India conducts a nuclear test and Clinton will visit India. a) Pakistan will not test the Ghaurimissile and the United States will not lift sanctions. b) Pakistan will test the Ghauri missile and the United States will lift sanctions. c) Pakistan will not test the Ghauri missile. d) Pakistan will not test the Ghauri missile and the United States will lift sanctions.

31 to 34: The following pie charts give the break-up of the expenditures and revenues for an automobile manufacturing firm, Jalopy Motors, for the first 8 months of the year '98. Rs 1400 crore Rs 1600 crore Code A B C D Entity_ Wages Raw mat. _ Power bill Sourced Ports Code E F G Entit Frei ht Taxes Misc. Entity Scooterettes Scooters Bikes Cars SUVs

31. What is the power bill of the company for the given period? (in crore) a) 40 b) 48 c) 58 d) 70

32. If the shares of the different expenditures don't change, and the expenditures are proportional to time, what would be the difference between the wage bill and taxes for the year'98? (in cr.) a) 35 b) 56 c) 78 d) 84

33. What are the revenues from bikes as a percentage of that from cars for the given period? a) 75% b) 80°6 cy 120~~ d) 140;0

34. If the shares of the different sources of revenues remain constant and the revenues keep coming at the same rate, what would be the difference between the revenues from cars and SUVs for the year '98'? (in cr.) a) 160 b) 180 c) 220 d) 240

Q. 35 to 39: Following are the results of the survey of five villages conducted by the agricultural department. The table gives details about the different crops grown and the irrigation facilities available. A village is given standard aid if less than 35% of the arable land is under irrigation. If the land under irrigation is between 35% and 50%, but the village grows rice on more than 50% of its arable land, then it is given partial aid. The village that has least area under irrigation among the unaided (partial or otherwise) ones would be eligible for special water grant. Rice I wheat Others irrigated Nagaon 120 40 100 25% Hatigaon 230 80 90 38% GaUripUr 160 140 100 45% 80 14G 100 66% Bangaon 180 60 120 30%

35. How many villages are eligible for standard aid? a) 1 b) 2 ci 3 d) 4

36. Which of the following viliuyes are eligible for partial aid? a) Nagaon b) Hatigaon c) Gauripur d) Eanyaon

37. Which village got the speoal v.,a±pr grant'? a) Nagaon b) Hatigaon c) Gauripur d) Bangaon

38. What percentage of the total arable land of the villages is eligible for standard aid is under irrigation? a) 28% b) 33% c) 24% d) 42%

39, if the average production of wheat per hectare is 150 tons, what is the production of wheat by Nagoan and Hatigaon? (in '000 tons) a) 18 b) 29 c) 34 d) 30

40. Which of the following statements is NOT correct (a) Audio-visual media is the strongest form of effective teaching (b) Cable TV, E-mail, Internet are not forms of mass media (c) Radio is an effective medium of propaganda (d) The earliest form of audio-visual was cinema.

41. `Television as a medium of visual communication offers immense possibilities to overcome illiteracy barrier. This statement is (a) true (b) partially true (c) false (d) absurd

42. The radio is (a) a source of enjoyment only (b) a visual aid (c) both an audio and a visual aid (d) an audio media.

43. Which of the following measures could optimize effectiveness of the 'Visuals'? (a) Preparing a colourful visual (b) Preparing an attractive visual (c) By explaining what is to be observed in the visual (d) Asking students to prepare notes.

44. Which of these develop imagination among learners? (a) Radio (b) Books (c) Educational films (d) Pictures.

45. Communication can be (a) Intra (B) A personal (C) Inter (D) All of the above.

46. A teacher must have a character (a) for the students try to imbibe the way of life of the teacher (b) so that the parents of the school students are impressed (c) so that the managing committee likes him (d) so that he can lead his life well.

47. A man starting at a point walks 1 km east, then 2 km north, then 1 km east, then 1 km north, then 1 km east and then 1 km north to arrive at his destination. What is the shortest distance between the starting point and his destination? a) 8 km b) 7 km c) 6 km d) 5 km

48. Of the three numbers the first is twice the second and half of the third. If the average of the three numbers is 56, the three numbers in order are: a) 96, 24, 48 c) 48, 24, 96 c) 48, 96, 24 d) 96, 48, 24

49. A building contractor employs 20 males, 15 female and some child workers. He pays Rs. 25 per day to a male worker, Rs. 20 per day to a female worker and Rs. 8 per day to a child worker. If the average wage per day paid by the contractor is Rs. 21, how many child workers did the contractor employ? a) 4 b) 5 c) 7 d) 8

50. What is the smallest number, which when divided by 3, 8 and 15 leaves the remainder 1,6 and 13 respectively? a)121 b) 242 c)118 d) 239

ANSWERS 1. c 2. b 3. d 4. a 5. d 6. c 7. d 8. c 9. c 10.c 11. a 12.b 13.a 14. c 15.b 16.d 17.d 18. a 19. c 20.c 21.a 22.a 23.a 24.b 25. b 26. c 27. c 28. d 29. a 30. b 31.d 32.d 33.c 34.d 35. b 36.b 37.c 38.a 39. a 40.a 41.a 42.d 43. c 44. d 45. d 46. a 47. d 48. c 49. b 50. c

Memory Based Questions for UGC NET JRF Exam : Paper-I

1. Which of the following is not a research method? a. Philosophy b. Observation c. Interview d. Discussion

2. Research can be grouped as the following kinds, except (options gave types of research) a. Action method. b. Philosophical & historical method. c. Introspection d. Analytical methods.

3. What is necessary to become a researcher? a. A post-graduation degree. b. Analytical and reasoning mind. c. Discipline

D. Hard Work.

4. Which of the following is am not instructional tool? a. Overhead projector. b. Transparency. c. Cassette. d. Printed material.

5. Which of the following about lecture method is not correct? a. It is passive. b. It can give knowledge. c. It can develop reasoning. d. It is a one way process.

6. What is the aim of higher education; to enable students to? a. Take decisions. b. Pass exams. c. Ask questions in lecture. d. To make career.

7. Which of the following is incorrect? a. Sharmila Tagore is the Chairperson of National Films Development Corporation. b. Preity Zinta, Yash Chopra are recipients of Dada Sahib Phalke award. c. Yash Chopra is a member of Certification Board. d. Hema Malini is the Chairperson of Children‘s Film Society of India.

8. Which of the following statements about computers is correct: a. Fast and accurate processing of qualitative and qualitative data. b. Processing quantitative data only. c. Processing qualitative data only. d. Processing images.

9. ―Because you deserve to know‖ is the punch-line of which newspaper? a. The Hindu. b. The Times of India. c. The Indian Express. d. The Hindustan Times.

10. Which Article of the Constitution of India protects the rights of minorities to establish and administer educational institutions of their own choice? a. Article 29. b. Article 26. c. Article 30. d. Article 46

11. Which of the following pair is incorrectly matched? a. N. Ram : The Hindu. b. Barkha Dutt : Zee News. c. Pranav Roy : NDTV 24×7. d. Prabhu Chawla : Aaj Tak.

12. Which is the following is a 24 hours English business news channel? a. CNBC. b. Zee News. c. India News. d. NDTV 24×7.

13. Which number will come in the series 8, 24, 12, ? , 18, 54: a. 26. b. 32. c. 36. d. 40

14. What is a modem? a. Operating System. b. Digital to analog signal converter. c. a TV accessory d. Kitchen equipment

15. Gave a series of pH values 4, 5, 7 and 8 and asked each pH to be correctly matched with the correct comments - moderate acid, alkaline, neutral, dangerous.

16. Absorption of carbon dioxide in seawater leads to: a. Salinity. b. Raising sea level. c. Increased plankton growth. d. pollution

17. What is largest contributor to carbon dioxide emission in India? a. Burning coal. b. Firewood. c. coal d. cooking gas

18. In which year was the United Nations established? a.1944. b.1945. c. 1946. d. 1947

19. What word could Yash Chopra not pronounce?

20. What was the costume of the heroine in Veer Zarra?

21 .Which is the latest Yash Chopra movie?

22. Who made the movie Lamhe?

23. With which movie is associated?: Desh Ki Dharti

24.What dooes LAN stand for? Ans. Local Area Network

25. What is the URL of an email? a. [email protected] b. [email protected] c. www_mail.com d. www.mail.com

TEACHING AND RESEARCH POTENTIAL

• Navodaya Vidyalaya Samiti was registered as a society on –15 August 1950 • Who was the Chairman of the first Indian Education Commission –Sir John Hunter • Who organizes the National Talent Search Competitive Test –N.C.E.R.T. • When was Central Advisory Board of Education set up –1956 • Navodaya Vidyalayas have been set up –In Rural Areas • The programme Gyan Vani is broadcasted by –AIR • When was N.C.E.R.T. Established –2nd Oct. 1971 • In 1936-37 who submitted the report on technical Education –Abbot • Who conducts the admission test for Novdaya Vidyalayas –N.C.E.R.T. • Who was the chairperson of Wardha Scheme – • National law school of India is situated at –Bangalor • A.I.C.T.E. stands for –All India Council of Technical Education • In which year University Grants Commission Act was passed –1956 A.D. • The central Institude of Indian Languages is located at –Mysore • Which Organization was established during Bengal Partition –National Council of Education • Which was the first University to be opened in Britishers time ? –Calcutta University • To whom did Lord Macaulay present the famous Macaulay‘s minute ? – Lord Bentinck • In which year C.B.S.E. set up open school ? –1985 • What was the other name for hunter commission –Indian Education Commission • What amount was sanctioned by Charter Act of 1813 to be spent on education ? –One Lakh • Reshtriya Sanskrit Sansthan has its head quarters at –New Delhi • Which is the first open University of India ? –Indira Gandhi open University New Delhi • What is the Minimum qualification requird to appear in any examination of the Open University ? –No Minimum qulification • Regional College of Education for the Northern region is located at –Ajmer • Where is situated the Regional College of Education for the eastem region ? –Bhuvaneshwar • Where is Regional College of Education for Western region ? –Ujjain • Regional College of Education for the Southern region is at –Mysore • The Regional Colleges of Education were set up by the N.C.E.R.T. with the co-operation of –Planning Commission of India • Generally the medium of instruction in Public School is –English • The famous Doon Public School is located at –Dehra Dun • The famous Doon Public School Bishop Cotton is situated at –Shimla • The famous Lawrence Public School is at –Sanawar • The famous Shivaji Public School is at –Pune • The famous Air Force Central School is situated at –Delhi Cantt • Tamil Nadu has a Sainik School at –Amrauathinagar • The Sainik School in Orissa is at –Bhuvaneshwar • The Sainik School in Karnataka is at –Bijapur • Gandhi had which Educational Degree ? –Law • Gandhi got his law Degree from –England • Where did Gandhi as a teacher ? –South Africa • Who said ―A cowardly teacher cannot make his students valiant ? –M.K. Gandhi • Effective teaching is a function of -Teacher‘s methodology • What should be the attitude of the teacher towards school authorities ? – Cordial • The attitude of teacher towards new idea should be –Receptive • Teachers should be made accountable for –Teaching • An excellent teacher must be –Good guide • As a teacher, you are never supposed to be angry –I am a human and can also be angry • What is your Prime duty as a teacher ? –To help the student in understanding Physical and Social Environment • What is the best Quality of the teacher ? –good human subject being • The enthusiastic teachers generally ? –involve the students in learning– teaching process • A teacher has better chances of succeeding if ? –he is properly trained for the profession • Does the teachers enjoy the freedom to make their syllabus flexible ? – False • A good teacher can overcome the defects of ? –System • A quality teacher always reaches the school ? –Before the morning assembly is over • Why you want to make teaching as a career ? –it make you eligible for the profession in ten months • Generally a good number of students do not like to go to the class rooms because- the curriculum is dull • What is attitude –feeling • A good teacher priority in school is his –students • People‘s attitude towards teaching is becoming positive because – perceiving teaching as a profession • Who can be creative teacher- develop thinking ability among the students • Among the students faith in the human values can be generated through – Moral Education • If as teacher you give too much liberty to students what will be result – indiscipline in the class room • If some one does not agree with you what will you do – polite explain your view point to him • As a teacher what means of recreation will you like to prefer – literary magazines and news papers • A teacher always learns and he learns from – Students • What enhances the status and respect of a teacher – community service • Why a teacher fails in maintaining discipline in the class – because he lacks consistency in his approach to discipline • What type behavior is expected from a teacher in the class room – calm, dignified and composed • Why a teacher should be lover of sports – it encourages the students to take part in sports

Important Facts to Know: General Studies

1.The study of bones is called ostelogy -Total no of bones 206 -Smallest bone-Stapes(ear boe) -Longest bone-Femus(Thigh bone) -Strongest bone-Tibia(leg bone) -Total no of muscles-639 -Largest grand-liver -Longest gland-thyroid -Longest nerve-Sciatic -Hardest bone-Tooth enamal -Tolal amount of blood in the body is (1/15 of body weight) -Normal body Temperature-98.6F(37C)

2.Govt.of India banned the student Islamic movement of India (SIMI)because it had linked with Osama Bin Laden‘s a1-Qaeda Group 3.The Salary of member of parliament and higher perks is ehanced from Rs.4000 to 12,000 per month and constituency allowance from Rs.8000 to 10,000 per month and daily allowance of Rs.400 to Rs. 500 for a period of five year 4.Competition bill to replace MRTPC (Monopolies and Restrictive Trade Practice Act.) 5.Supreme court ruled on August 2,2001 that a public servant convicted in corruption case should not hold office till he was cleared of the charges by a superior court 6.Number of amendments in constitution is 8 till now 7.The terrorist out fit that brought the WTC and destroyed part of Pantagon in Washington is A1-Queda.the network association with Osama Bin Laden 8. ISI-Inter Service Intelligence 9.Durent line boundary between India and Afghanistan 11.Mc Mohan Line:-boundary between India and china 12.Redcliff Line:- boundary between India and Pakistan 13.Palk Strait:- boundary between India and Sri Lanka 14.Prithvi:-Surface to surface missile.It has a range 250km 15.Agni:- Is Surface to surface missile.it has a range1500-2000km 16.Akash:- Is Surface to surface missile.it has a range of 25km 17 Nag: It is an anti tank missile having range of 4km 18.Bank rate is the rate at which the reserve Bank of India gives credit to commercial Banks 19.Amicus Curiae-Lawyer appointment by the court to represent a poor person.it means friend of court 20.C.R.R- Cash Reserve Ratio 21.Medico Legal case-Accidental Case 22.The most important influence of the moon on the earth is the effect on ocean tides 23.Ranthambore:- Ranthambore National park in Rajasthan(410 sq.km)was ones the private tiger reserve of the Maharaja of 24.Ghana Bird Sanctuary-Bharatpur Rajasthan 25.Standerd Deduction in income tax-30,000/- 26.Maximum income not liable to tax-50,000/- 27.American‘s Robinson Walton(Bill gates)is the richest person in the world 28.Bio terrorism:-It refer to the use of disease causing micro oganism as terroist weapons to cause devastating ipack on the people.for example.Anthrax 29.Public University founded in 1982 at Lahore.After partition in was re- established in India on 1st of October 1947.the University moved to Chandigarh in 1956,vice chancellor of Punjab university is –K.N.Pathak 30.Kapil Dev has been chosen the wisdom Indian cricketer of the century. 31.Akshardham Temple is in Gandhi Nagar (Gujrat 35 people were killed by terrorist ) 32.Metro rail Delhi 24 Dec,2002(Shahdra to is Hagari –8.3km) 33.CAG- V.N.Kaul 34.Chairman of SBI-A.K.Purwar 35.Guru Nanak born in Talwandi now called ‗Nankana Sahib‘ in 1469 .He died in 1539.Guru was founder of Sikhism 36. Guru Angad Dev- introduced langer system 37. Guru Amar Das- social reformer and discarded sati pratha 38. Guru Ram Das- founded city of 40. Guru Arjun Deb- Built GoldenTemple and compiled Aadi Granph or Guru Granth Sahib. Guru Arjun Deb compled Granth Sahib in 1604 with the of bhai Gurdas Bhalla ji. Guru Arjun Dev was executed by Jahangir on the advice of Chandu Singh. Guru Arjun Dev got the foundation of Harmandir Sahib laid down by a Muslim Faqir main mir. 41.Guru hargobind singh – stared the system of Akal takht and miri,piri 42.Guru Har Rai 43.Guru Harkishan 44.Guru Teg Bahadur-Guru Teg Bahadur executed by Aurangzeb 45. Guru Gobind Singh –Founder of Khalsa 13th April,1699,Baisakhi, Khalsa means military brotherhood Zafarnama :- This is Letter written by Guru Gobind Singh to Mughal Emperor Aurangzeb. This letter was written because Aurangzeb was committed many atrocities on people.Guru Gobind Singh asked Aurangzeb to give up the policy at Anandpur Sahib on the 1st Baisakh 13th April,1699 A..D 46.Dasam Granth was compiled by a devoted sikh mani singh after passing away Of Guru Gobind Singh . 47.Guru Ki kashi-Takhat Damdma Sahib. It is famous Gurudwara, Which is situated at Talwandi Sabo. It is called Guru Ki Kashi 48.Guru Ki Wadali – it is Birth place of Guru Hargobind Ji . it is famous Gurudwara of Punjab 49.Banda Bahadur- Was born on 27th October, 1670. His real name was Lachaman Das. Once, during hunting an arrow of Banda Bahadur stuck a pregnant she deer; Banda Bahadur was greatly pained to see the tragic death of the deer and its two kids. He renounced the world and become a Bairagi. Banda Bahadur adopted the name Madho Das after becoming a Bairagi. Madho Das (Banda Bahadur) met Guru Sahib. He said ―I am your Banda (Servant)‖. Thus Madho Das become Banda. Guru Gobind Sahib called him Banda the brave. Thus acquired the name Banda Bahadur 50. Sharomani Gurdawara Prabandhak Committee was established on 15th Nov. 1990, at Akal Takhat Amritsar. 51.Aklis launched a non-movement in 1921 with the aim of –Librating Sikh Guru Gurudwara from Mahants.

Important Facts to Know: General Studies

Literature:

52.Creator of Asa-di-war,Japuji sahib-Guru Nanak Dev ji. 53.Creator of Bachittar Natak- Guru Gobind Singh 54.Creator of Jab Sahibh- Guru Gobind Singh 55.Creator of Anand Sahib- Guru Amar Das ji 56.Creator of Sukhmani Sahib –Guru Arjan Dev ji 57. Compiler of Guru Granth Sahib – Guru Arjan Dev ji 58.Writer of Adhi Granth at the time of its compilation of – Bahi Gurdas Bhalla ji 59.Creator of Bani written in Dasam Granth-Guru Gobind singh ji 60.Most famous writer of Qisa Puran Bhagat –Fazal Shah. Maharaja Ranjit Singh and his Administration:- 61.Date of Birth of Maharaja Ranjit Singh-Nov.2,1780. 62.Name of the parents of Maharaja Ranjit Singh- Father name:-Maha singh ,Mother name :-Raj Kaur 63.Time of treaty of Amritsar between Maharaja Ranjit Singh and British – 25th April,1809 64.Name of the Foreign minister of Maharaja Ranjit Singh-Faqir Azizudeen 65.Head of Finance minister at the the time of Maharaja Ranjit Singh- Deewan Kaura Mal 66.Most famous prime minister of Maharaja Ranjit Singh- Dhian Singh Dogra 67.Meaning of Kankut system started by Maharaja Ranjit Singh- Tax on standing crop in the field 68.‘Nazim Adalat‘ at the time of Maharaja Ranjit Singh state level- Court 69.Capital city of maharaja Ranjit Singh- Lahore 70.First war between Sikh and British – 1845 A.D. 71.Second Anglo Sikh War-1848-1849 A.D. 72. Ranjit Singh (Thein) Dam has been constructed on the river- Ravi 73.Which Dam is built on Beas near Talwara- Pong Dam. 74. Dam built on the river Satluj- Bhakrha Dam 75.The Dusi dam has been constructed on the river Beas 76.The old name of the Amritser –Ramdas nagar 77.Which Guru got constructor Akal Takhat –GuruHargobind Sahib 78The real Granth Sahib has been placed at –Kartarpur 79.Guru Nanak Dav Ji was enlightenment at- Sultan Pur 80.Which Guru built Buraj Baba Atal- Guru Hargobind Sahib 81. The old name Punjab- Sapat Sindhu 82.The Gurudwara situated at present where foundation of Khalsa Panth was laid –Gurudwara Kesgarh Sahib. 83.The other name of Harmandir Sahib is-Darbar Sahib. 84.The Guru;who founded Anandpur Sahib was –Guru Teg Bahadur 85.Bhagat Singh was hanged on-23rd March, 1931 86.Number of district in Punjab-17, Lok Sabha seats-13 87. Highest Gallantry Award-Param Vir Chakra 88.NOBLE PRIZES;-The Honors of Wining the Noble Prizes go to the Following 7 Indians (i)Rabinder Nath Tagore win the noble prizes from literature in 1913. (ii)C.V. Raman win the noble prizes from physics in 1930. (iii)Hargobind Khurana win the noble prizes from medicine in 1968. (iv)Mother Teresa win the noble price from peace in 1979. (vi) S. chandrashekher win the noble prize from physics in 1986. (vii) Prof. Amaritya Sen win the noble prizes from Economics in 1998. (viii) V.S.Naipal win the noble prizes from Literature in 2001.

90.Highest Gallantry Award- ParamVir Chakra 91.Highest Civilian Award- Bharat Ratana 92.First Olympic Game held at Athens in 1896 93.First Deputy Prime Minister of India-Sardar Patel 94.2nd deputy Prime Minister of India-Morarzi Desai 95. 3hd Deputy Prime Minister of India – Choudhari Charan Singh 96. 5th Deputy Prime Minister of India – Y.V.Chauan. 97.6th Deputy Prime Minister of India –Dev Lal 98. 7th Deputy Prime Minister of India- Lal Krishan Advani 99. AIDS:Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome 100.HIV: Human Immunodeficiency Virus 101.AIDS:Is caused by Virus Aids is due to Human Immunodeficiency Virus 102.Classical Dances of India -Manipur of Manipur -Oddisi of Orissa -Katha-Kali of Kerala -Kuchi-Pudi of Andhra Pradesh -Bharat Natyam of Tamil Nadu -Kathak of Utter Pradesh -Bihu of Assam

103.Legal Service Clinic:-A Legal Service Clinic open 24 hours on all days, has been established in Ahemdabad to provide free service of retired high court judge and reputed lawyear. 105.The State of Haryana-:Came into begin on , Nov.1,1966 as result of the re- organizations of the old Punjab state into two separate seats.It consist of the Hind speaking area of Punjab,secong language status has been given to Punjab(1996) 106.Book and Author:- -Life Diving -Ain-I-Akbari -Aourbinbo Ghosh -Panchtantra -Abdul Fazal -Mahabharta -Vishnu Sharma -India wins Freedom -Ved Vyas -Discovery of India -Maulana Abdul Kalam -My Experiment with Truth -Gandhi -Madhushala -Harivansh Rai Bachan -Prisoner‘s Scorapbook -L.K.Advani

107.Sports:- -Agha Khan Cup -Hockey -Durant Cup -Football(India) -Duleep/renjit Trophyre -Cricket -Santosh Trophy -National Football -Thomas Cup -World Bedminton(Men) -Davis Cup -Lawn Tennis

108.Buddhism:Buddhism was founded by Gautam Buddha. His Original name was Gautam Siddhartha , A Kashatriya, Boran in 563 B.C at Lumbini in Nepal . He attended enlightenment at Bodhgaya under papal tree.Budha died at the age of 80 years in 483 B.C at Kushinagar (District Utter Pradesh).He gave 8 fold paths to control the desire.1st sermon was delivered by him at Srnarth at Banaras .The Language used by Buddhist people was pali.

Important facts to Know for General Studies

109.Red cross was founded by-J.H. Durant , Established in 1864 World red Cross day iscelebrated on May 8,The Birthday its founder J.H. Durant. 110.Sir Robert S.S Baden Powell is the founder of scouting 111.Who gave the call go back to Vedas-Dayanand 112.The construction of Qutab Minar was begun by Quatab-ud-din Aibak but it was complateed by lltutumish. 113.Who built the Sanchi Stupa- Agratala. 114.Who founded slave dynasty in 1206 A.D.- Quatab-ud-din Aibak. 115.The Capital of is Agratala. 116. The Capital of Mizoram is . 117. The Capital of Australia is –Canberra. 118.Spring tides occurs on- Full moon day as well on new moon day. 119.Tides in the oceans are caused by-Attraction of the moon. 201.Buddhism place of worship is-Pongda. 121.Jews place of worship is-Synagogue. 122.Holish book of Jews-Talmud. 123.Malguddi days written by –R.K. Naraynan 124.Das capital-Karl Marx 125.The father of Economics- Adam smith. 126.The Chipko Movement was associated with-preventing felling of trees. 127.Pashmina is a breed of -Sheep. 128.What is the meaning of Buddha –An enlightened one. 129.Which is the holy book of Parsis- Jorah 130.Parliament of U.S.A is known as- Congress 131. Parliament of Afghanistan- Shoora 132. Parliament of Russia-Duma. 133. Parliament of Japan –Diet. 134.SARS:-It Stands for Severe Acute Respiratory Syndrome. SARS is caused by viruses from the corona and paramyxo virus family. 136.LCA(Light Combat Aircraft)is named as ―Tejas‖ 137. Lakshva is Pilot Less target Aircraft 138.Kalpna Chawla: She was an Indian born American Astronaut. She died with other six astronauts in the Columbia shuttle crash on feb.1,2003. She embarked on her second Voyage in the United State space shuttle Columbia on Jan 16,earlier.She was an Indian born American Astronaut.She died with other six astronauts in the Columbia shuttle Columbia on jan 16,earlier.She was one of the six astronaut crew that flew the Columbia Flight STS-87in nov.1997 Chawla who had her schooling in (Haryana)and college education in Punjab did her Masters in Aerospase Engineering from the university of Taxes in in 1984 and Doctorate from Colorado University two year later. An avid flier, she held certified flight instructor‘s license with Airplane and Gladder ratings, commercial Pilot L icense for single and multi-engine land and seaplanes 139.Jan. 9,the day Mahatma Gandhi return from South Agrica in 1915-was chosen to celebrate the Pravasi Bharatiya Divas 140.The five day 90th session of the Lndian science congress conclude in Bangalore on Jan.7,2003.The focal theme of the congress was Vision for the global Space community. 141.Sriska and Ranthambore are the reserve for lion. 142.International Criminal court was launched formally in the mid march in the Hauge . The first eighteen judges took Oath in the grand ceremony. The court has been set up to handle genocide and the Worst case of war crime or mass atrocities against civilians when no national court is able or willing to do so. 143.Right to Education:-article 21A provides the free and compulsory education to all children of the age of six to fourteen. 144.Freedom of information bill:- The parliament approved the ―Freedom of information bill‖.Now it is statutory right of the citizen to access information from the Government. 145.Right to Education :- article21A provides the free and compulsory education to all children of the age of six to fourteen 146.Freedom of information bill:- The Parliament approved the ―freedom of information bill‖. Now it is statutory right of the citizen to access information from the Government.

149. Sapan is not a member of G-8 group. 150. APSARA is the name of the India‘s first Nuclear Reactor. 151.The world environment day is celebrated on june 5. 152.Jainism:-Founded by (Rishabha)Varhamana Mahavira. He was a great 24th Triathankras (Pathfinder).Or prophet of Jainism .Mahavir was a greast Kshtiya ,born at Kundagram (Vaishali) in bihar. He came to be known as Mahavir of jina. The conqueror of passing; his following are known as Janis. He passed away at age 72 in 462 B. C at Pavapuri, a place near modern . Mahavira Teaching are known as the ―Tri Ratna‖ or the three jewels of Jainisn,which lead to the attainment of salvation . They are (I) Right Knowledge and (II) Right Action .The Janis used and developed Prakrit,The language of the common people .Their religious literature was written in Ardhamagadhi. 153.Vasco da Gama landed in Calicut in 1498. 154.Ist Chinese traveler, Fahein came to India during the period of chandra Gupta-II(Vikramaditya) 155.2nd Chinese traveler Hieun Tsang came to India during the region of Harshvardhana 156.Who is the Napoleon of India –Samundra Gupta for his military exploits. 157.Harshvardhana written three books-1.Priya Darshika 2.Rattanavali 3.Naga Nanda. The official poet of harshvardhana was bana bhatt .Bana bhatta composed harsha chirtra and kadambari 158.First battle of panipat in 1526 and founded the Mugahal dynasty in India 159.Second battle of Panipat was fought between Akbar and Ibrahim Lodhi at Panipat in 1556 Akbar Defeated Himu and became the ruled of Delhi and Agra 160 Third battle of Panipat fought between Ahmed Shah Abdali of Afghanistan and Marathas in 1761.In this third battle of Panipat Marathas were completely routed by Ahmed Shah Abdali. 161.Indian National Army was founded by Subash Chander Bose in 1943 in Singapore alongwith Rasbihari Bose. The main aim of Azad Hind Fauz was to liberation of India. 162.The Brahmo Samaj was established by Raja Ram Mohan Roy in 1828 whose leadership was later taken by Debendernath tagore and Keshub Chande Sen. 163.The Arya Samaj founded by Swami Dayananda Saraswati in 1875 attempted to reform the Hindu religion from its decadence. 164.The Ramakrishana Mission was founded by Swami Vevekananda in 1896 . 165.Annie besant:- Founded Theosophical society started home rule league in 1916. She was the first woman president of Indian National Congress.Indian National Congress Founded by A.O.Hume in 1885. However first President of Indian national congress was W.C. Banerjee. 166.Swadeshi movement was started in 1905. 167.Gadder party was founded by lala Hardayal singh in 1913 at Francisco. 168.Home rule league founded by Annie Besant and Bal Ganga Dhar Tilak in 1916. 169.Rowlatt Act. Passed in 1919. 170.Non-Co-Operation movement started in 1920 by Gandhi ji. This movement ended in 1922 after Chauri Chaura incident. 171.Simons commission –1928 172.Civil Disobedience movement-1930 173. ―Do or die‖ –Mahatma Gandhi 174. ―Nightingale of India‖-Saorjini Naidu. 175. ―Father of Indian Unrest‖-Bal Ganga Dhar Tilak. 176. ―Architect of India‖- Pandit Nehru. 177. ―Man of Peace‖-Lal Bhadur Shastri. 178. ―Iron Man of India‖-Sardar. 179. ―jai hind‖ –subash chander bose 180. ―Grand old man of India‖ –Dada Bhai Naroji

Important Facts to Know for General Studies

181.Mughal Dynasty (1526-1540and 1555-1857) 1.Babur (1526-1530) 2.Humayum 3.Sher Shah Suri (1540-45) 4.Akber (1556-1605) 5.Jahangir (1605-1627) 6.Shah Jahan (1628-1658) 7.Aurangzeb (1658-1707)

182.BABUR: -Founder of Mughal Empire -1st battle of panipat between Babur and Ibrahim lodhi 183.HUMAYUN: -Son of Babur -Humayun Tomb at Delhi-1st Mughal Monument 184.SHER SHAH SURI: -He was an Afghan -Introduced a brilliant administration -Issued a coin called ‗Rupia‘ -Build Grand Trunk Road Linking Peshawar to Calcatta 185.AKBAR: a. Eldest son of Humayun b. Real founded of Mughal empire c. Good works done by him d. Popular for his toleration e. Foundation of Din-e-illahi(code of conduct) f. Akbar Tomb –Sikandria g. Largest building built called ‗Agra Forte‘ h. Abdul Fazal was a famous Poat who has written Aaine –Akbari ,Akbar – Name 186.JAHANGIR: a. Real name Salim b. Son of Akbar c. He is known for his strict administration of Justice d. He married Mehr-un-nissa or Nurjahan in 1661. e. Jahangir‘s Tomb built at Lohore f. Exeecuted Guru Arjun Dev at the advice of Chand Singh 187.SHAH JAHAN: a. Son of jahangir b. His wife Mumtaz Mahal died in 1631 c. Built Taj Mahal in her memory in Agra d. Known for promotion of Art e. ‗Red Fort‘ and ‗Jama Masjid‘ got built by him f. Shah Jahan was imprisoned by his third son Aurangzeb till he died in 1666 188.AURANGZEB: a. Third son of shah jahan b. Ruled for 50 years and he was a cruel king c. Banned all religious festival and demolished Hindu Temples d. Executed Guru Teg Bahadur Ji (9th Guru) when he refused to embrace Islam 189. NADIR SHAH: a. A Persian King during the region of Mohamd Shah took the ‗Kohinoor‘ diamond to Afghanistan 190.Who was the first Governor of free India –Lord Mountbatten 191. Who was the first Governor General of free India – C Rajagopalchari 192. Who was the first Governor of free British India –Warren Hasting(1772-1793) 193. Who was the first father of Civil Service in India-Lord Cornwallis (1786-1793) 194. Who abolished sati Pratha and other cruel rites –Lord W.Bentick (with the help of Raja ram Mohan Rai in 1829 195.Who introduced Widow remarriage Act.In 1856 –Lord Dalhousie 196.TRAI -Telecom Regulatory Authority of India 197.VAS-Voluntary Retirement Scheme 198.VAT-Value Added Tex 199.STD-Subscriber‘s Trunk Dialing 200.ISD-Internationl Subscriber‘ s Dialing 201.PAN – Permanent Account Number 202.PIN – 203. NATO-North Atlantic treaty Organization 204.SAARC –South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation. 205.C.R.R.-Cash Reserve Ratio. 206. I.S.R.O. -Indian Space Research Organization. 207.NASA-National Aeronautics and Space Administration. 208.V.D.I.S. –Voluntary Disclosure Income Scheme 209. P.C.O. –Public Call Office 210. L.P.G. –Liquefied Petroleum gas 211.C.T.B.T. –Comprehensive Test Ban Treaty 212. V.P.P. –Value Payable Post 213. L.C.A. – Light Combat Aircraft. 214. P.O.W. – Prisoner of War. 215. T.E.L.E.X – Teleprint Exchange. 216 L.C.C –Line of Actual Control. 217. CNG-Compressed Natural Gas. 218. SMS –Short Messaging Service. 219. OAPEC -Organization of Arab Peteoleum Exporting Copuriers. 220.OPEC -Organization of Petroleum Exporting Countries 221.Interpol-International Crimunal Police Organisatiom it‘s headquarter is in Lyons (Paris) 222.Who was the first man go to space- Yuri Gagran 223.Who was the first Indian go to in Space- Rakesh 224. Who was the first Indian woman go to in Space –Kalpna Chawla. 225. Who was the first man land on moon –Neil Armstrong on 21, July , 1969. 226. Bangalore is the Silicon City of the India. 227. Hyderabad is the hil – Tec.City of India. 228. 2004 Olympics to be held in Athens. 229. Misslie man of the India –A.P.J.Abdul Kalam Azad. 230. Capital of Fiji – Suva. 231. World‘s largest river in South America‘s Amazon which flows into South Atlantic. The source is Glacier –Fed- Lakes. 232. Which of the first Indian state to be recognized on the basis of language – Andhra Pardesh. 233. When were the Indian states re-organized on linguist basis – 1956. 234. Which scheduled deals with matters relating to anti defection – 10th 235. Which scientist laid the foundation of atomic energy research in India – Homi J. Bhabha. 236. Which branch of science studies the relationship between matter and energy – Physics. 237. Which planet have no atmosphere –Mercury 238. Convex lenses are used for correction of –Short Sightedness 239. Which mirror is used as a rear view mirror in vehicles –Conves 240. Filament of an electric bulb is maid of –Tungsten 241. The oil in the wick of an oil lamp rises up due to –Capillary action 242. The best conductor of heat –Silver 243. A radar which defects the presence of an enemy air craft uses –Radio Waves 244. Velocity of round is maximum in –Steel 245. The terminal colure of Rainbow are –Rd & Blue 245. The gas extinguish fire is –Carbon Monoxide 246. The purest form of carbon is-Diamond.

Important Issues: Current Affairs

1. Which movie has won the best motion picture of the year award at Oscars, 2005-Million Dollar Baby 2 . Which political party has won the maximum number of seats in the recently held assembly elections in Bihar - Janta Dal –United 3. Jamie fox has won the best actor award in the Oscars, 2005. For which movie, He has been awarded – Ray 4. 77th Oscars, 2005 has awarded ―Best actress award in a leading Role‖ To – Hilary swank 5. President of Afghanistan was on a visit to India during February – March, 2005. His name is -Mr. Hamid Karzai 6. Who is the richest Indian as per ‗Forbes‘ list – Lakshmi Niwas Mittal 7. Which film has won the 51st National Film Awards, 2005 in the category of Best Feature film on National Integration also called ‗Nargis Dutt Award‘ – Pinjar (Hindi) 8. Who has won Dada Saheb Falke Award, 2003 declared in the National Film Award ceremony, 2005 -Ashok Kumar (Posthumously) 9. Dr. A.P.J Abdul Kalam, the President of India is the author of the book – The Wings of Fire and Ignited Minds 10. Nanavathi Commission relates to - Terrorists attack in Indian Parliament 11. A.D. stands for – Anno Domini 12. Tony Blair, Prime minister of Britain, belongs to – Labour Party 13. RSVP stands for - Respondez S‘il Vous Plait 14. The first Nobel Peace Prize was awarded to ……. in 1901 – J.H.Dunant 15.Which French Engineer designed the structure of the statute of liberty – 16.Which of the following is called the Mother of all Parliaments – The British Parliaments . 17. As per Human Development Report of 2004, what is full form of HDI – Human Development Index. 18. Alagh Committee relates to – Civil Services Examination. 19.. Treaty on ‗Ozone depletion‘ – Montreal Treaty. 20.. First Chief Election Commissioner of India was – Sukumar Sen. 21.. East Timor received independence in 2002 from – Indonesia 22. First woman Prime Minister in the world was of – Sri Lanka. 23. Gratuity is paid at the rate of 15 Days wages for each completed year of service . 24. Postal service in India was opened to the public in 1837. 25. The person was facilitated with ‗Nishan-e-Pakistan‘ – Dilip Kumar 26. The author of the book ‗Harry Potter and the Half Blood Prince‘is – J.K.Rowling. 27. ‗Fallujah‘ city, which was recently in news, is in -Iraq 28. The Government of India recently announced a special development package of Rs. 250 crode for the development of –Manipur 29. M.S. Subbalakshmi who died recently was a famous –Classical Singer. 30. In Which country a non-resident Indian Mr. Bobby Jindal recently won the Parliamentary elections? –US 31. Where is Halebid–a place Which is well Knon for its elaboratedly sculptured temples of the Hoysala eriod?-Karnataka 32.Where is Meenakshi-a famous Hindu temple? –Madurai 33. Where is Sriharikota , India‘s satellite launching centre? Andhra Pradesh 34. The Tower of Victory‘ is Iocated in- Rajasthan.exander 35.Alexander Graham bell is credited with the invention of-Telephone. 36. ‗The Television‘ was invented by-J.L.Baird. 37.where is the longest railway playtform in the world - Kharagpur 38. which of the following countries is called the land of white elephant - Thailand 39. The capital of Greece is – Athens 40.The Headquarters of United Nations Educational, scientific and cultural organization (UNESCO) are located in-Paris. 41.Who is the first Indian recipient of the Olympic Gold Order-Indira Gandhi…` 42.The Largest monument in the world Quetzalcoatl Pyramid is in-Cairo 43.Which planets of our solar system do not have moons-Mercury and Venus. 44. Two of Ashoka‘ s lion pillars built in the 3rd century B.C. stand perfectly preserved even today at their original location. One is at Lauriya Nandangarh. Where is the other?- Sarnath 45.Which article of the constitution of India provides for the post of Governor of state?-Article153 46.In which State is the Sun Temple Suryan Kovil located? –Tamil Nadu 47.At which of the following Olympic Games did the lndian Hockey team win its first gold medal?-Amsterdam 48. First Chief Election Commissioner of India was – Sukumar Sen. 49. East Timor received independence in 2002 from – Indonesia. 50. First woman Prime Minister in the world was of – Sri Lanka. 51. Deficiency disease Vitamin A-Night Blindness, Vitamin B –beriberi, Vitamin C – scurvy Vitamin D –Rickets, Vitamin E-Skin and hair disease, Vitamin K – Clotting of Blood. 52. Rich sources of Vitamin A- Carrots, PEM- Protein Energy Malnutrients. 53..Disease due to deficiency of Iron – Anemia, Life time of RBC – 120 Days

UGC Environment I

PEOPLE AND ENVIRONMENT At present the most prominent problem in front of us is of environmental degradation and depletion of natural reeources. The problem is basically due to the fact that our society is fiercely intent on producing and consuming 8S much as possible, and increasing the volume as fast 88 possible every year, without any limit in sight. We are already far beyond sustainable per capita levels of resource use and environmental impact, but our supreme goal is economic growth; i.e., to increase production and consumption and the GDP all the time and without limit! Most people and all governments refuse to face up to the nlimits to growth analysis" of our situation. We can only have an ecologically sustainable society if we move to The Simpler Way, i.e., to a society in which we have materially simple lifestyles, in highly selfsufficient local economies that are run mostly through cooperative arrangements, in a quite new economy; one that is not driven by the profit motive and market forces and has no economic growth.

THE BASIC CAUSE OF THE ENVIRONMENT PROBLEM

Our way of life in rich countries like Australia. involves consumption of huge volumes of resources, and consequently it involves dumping vast amounts of wastes into the environment. To provide a US lifestyle to one person, about 80 tonnes of materials have to be processed every year, much of it mining waste. Energy equal to 7 tonnes of oil has to be used. For each kilo offood-eaten some 10 kgofsoil are lost. At least 4.5 ha of productive land are needed just to provide one person living in a rich world city with their food, water, living space and energy. If all the world's people were to live as we do, productive land equal to 3.5 times all the world's productive land would be needed, and world population is very likely going to almost double before it stabilises around 9·10 billion. In other words the way we live is not just somewhat unsustainable; it is far beyond a sustainable level of re so urce use and" environmental impact. U all the people we are to have on earth soon were to have the Australian average per capita energy use then world energy production would have to be 9 -10 times what it is today. Yet tbe top priority in our society is to increase production , consumption, living standards and tbe G DP, all the time and without limit. We cannot reduce these demands for re80tll"CeS from nature and the dumping of wastes into nature unless we change to a very different society, one in which all can live 'Vell on very low material living standards.

AIR POLLUTION Air pollution refers to the degradation of air quality as measured by biological, chemical, or physical criteria. Air pollution occurs when the concentrations of certain substances become high enough to make our atmospheric environment toxic. Air pollutants can be gaseous, liquid or solid in form, and can come from natural as well as human sources. Examples of natural sources of air pollution include forest flres, pollen, volcanic emissions, and dust. Human sources of air pollutants include emissions from industry, agriculture, forestry, transportation, power generation, aud space beating_

TYPES OF AIR POLLUTION In general, two types of air pollutants bave been recognized: Primary Pollutants: Primary pollutants are oonsist of materials (dust, gases, liquids and other solids) that enter the atmosphere through natural and human-made events. The main primary pollutants influencing our atmosphere in order of emission (by weight) are carbon monoxide, sulfur oxides, nitrogen oxides, volatile organic compounds, and particulate matter. Volatile organic compounds are organic molecules that 8.re mainly composed of carbon and hydrogen atoms (hydrocarbons). The most common volatile organic compound release into the atmosphere is methane. Methane poses no drrect danger to human bealth; however, It does contribute to global warming through the greenhouse effect. Other volatile organic compounds releases Into the atmosphere include benzene. forrn.sldehyde, and chlorofluorocarbons. Of these chemicals, benzene and formald ehyde are the most dangerous to human health because they are carcmogeruc. Particulate matter consists of liquid or solid particles that are small enough to remain suspended in the atmosphere for extended periods of time . Ind ustrial activity and transportation are the major source of this type of air pollut.ion. Particulate matter includes common irritants like smoke, pollen, and dust, which can affect the human re spiratory system. In cities, particulate matter may also include particles composed of iron, copper, nickel, and lead. These particles influence the respll'atory system Immediately, and make breathing difficult for people with chronic respiratory disorders. Airborne lead, formed by the burning of lead gasoline, can accumulate in the tissues and boncs of humans and other living organisms. At high levels lead can cause nervous system damage, convulsions, and even death. It is especially dangerous to children and the unborn. Secondary Pollutants: Secondary pollutanta are consist .of primary pollutants that have reacted with each other or with the ba.sic components of the atmosphere to form new toxic substa.nces. In cities, the emissions from cars and industries combine with the help of light energy from the sun to produce photochemical smog. Photochemica1smog is extremely toxic to arumal and plant life. and damages paint, rubber, and plastics. Finally, air pollution can also occur indoors. In buildings, about 150 different indoor pollutants have been identified. Some of the more common indoor air polJutants include smoke from cigarettes and cooking, radon. formaldehyde, and asbestos. At high concentrations, these pollutants can cause dizziness. headaches, coughing. sneezing. nausea, burning eyes, chronic fatigue, and Ou like symptoms. Some indoor pollutants, like asbestos and smoke, can cause disease and premature death.

AIR POLLUTION CONTROL Several different strategies have been used to reduce atmospheric pollution. Some polluters have used a number of techniques to redistribute pollutanta to areas not occupied by humans or other forms of life. Smelters and power plants use tall smoke stacks to disperse pollutants at higher levels within t.he atmosphere. Other atmospheric polluters have relocated their particular industry to remote locations. However, it is very difficult to dilute pollution in finite atmosphere. Sooner or later residual amounts of pollution reach levels that. are hazardous to some form of life. Humans have developed a number of technologica l soluti ons to atmospheric pollution. Filters have been used to stop particles from reaching the atmosphere. Some power plants use electrostatic precipitators to redure pollution output by as much as 99%. 'I'he addition of limestone with coal in specialized burners can reduce sulfur emissions from this fossil fuel by up to 90%. CatalytiC converters in cars and other forms of transportation have been used to reduce emIssions or mtrogen oxides. hydrocarbons. and carbon monOXide by'At. Many automobile oompanies are now working on t he development of hydrogen powered or electric vehicles to reduce emissions of several pollutants. One of the quickest and most common approachos car companies have used to reduce engine emissions is to increase fuel efficiency. In different. countries, cars must be inspected frequently to insure emissions controls are working properly. I ndoor pollution can be reduced by the modIfication of building codes. These modifications can be used to control materials used in construction and to ensure proper ventilation is set up in the building. Finally, the s urest way to control atmospheric pollution is to avoid the creation of the pollutants. Fuel switching; and fuel cleaning can reduce the emissions of sulfur and heavy metals from so ca lled 'diTty' IOssil fuels like soft coal. The movement to conserving our fossil fuel energy resources, which began in the 1970s, has been very effective in reducing emissions per pereon. In conclusion, the following general recommendations for developing a cleaner atmosphere should be adopted by ali nations: * Preventing pollution emission rather than controlling it. Improve the energy efficiencies. * Use cleaner fuels. * Den!iop nonpolluting energy sources like solar energy, wind power. And hydropower. * Encourage mass transit and less polluting forms of transportation (e.g., switch from air travel to rail travel). * Slow population growth. * Include environmental costs in the pricing of energy resources and other activities that prOduce atmospheric pollution.

KYOTO AND THE CLrMATE CHANGE CONVENTION The problem of global climate change because of increasing greenhouse gas concentrations can only be properly addressed by the united cooperation of our planet's nations. Consequently, the United Nations has set up the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) to help mediate this process (see link below). One important partner organization that provides scientific advice to the United Nations is the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (lPCC). At a United Nations sponsored meeting of industrialized countries in Kyoto, Japan, in December 1997, Canada agreed to reduce its greenhouse gas emissions by 6 % below 1990 levels between the years 2008 and 2012. However, as of 2000 greenhouse emissions are still rising in Canada and the federal government of this nation still has not formulated a plan to reach its reduction targets. WATER POLLUTION Water pollution refers to the degradation of water quality as measured by biological. chemical, or physical criteria. Degradation of water is generally judged m terms of the intended use, departure from the norm, effects on public health or ecological impacts. There are many different matermls that may pollute surface water or groundwater. The following list describes some of the major forms of water pollution: (a) The addition of organic matter to water usually initiates the process of decomposition. Most decompose;s require oxygen to complete this process. As a result. oxygen levels in the water decline with activity. Humans commonly use water bodies, like rivers, lakes and ocean, as a means of disposing of organic wastes. However, adding too much organic matter to a water body can cause it to becom" polluted because of a reduction in oxygen content. Low levels of oxygen can kill off fish , plants, and other organisms. Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD) is a measure of the amount of oxygen consumed in water by bacteria activity. BOD is measured as milligrams per Ilter ofo:x)'gen oonsumed over 5 days at 20 degrees Celsius. All water bodies have some capability to degrade organic waste. Problems result when the water bpdy is overloaded with BOD· demanding W3ste. (b) Fecal coliform bacteria and other disease carrying microorganisms are important biological pollutants. Many of these organisms increase in numbers when water is polluted with organic matter and waste. Among the major waterborne human diseases are cholera and typhoid, which are common in many poor developing countries. (c) Nutrients (like nitrogen and phosphorus) released by human activity can cause lake eutrophication and nitrite contammation of drinking water. Excess nitrogen and phosphorous from farm animal waste and agricultural fertilizers is causing a major pollution problem in streams, lakes, and the coastal marine environment in many nations. 160 (d) Oil discharge into surface water, usually ocea n, haa cauaed major pollution problems. (e) Heavy metals such as mercury, zinc, and cadmium are dangerous pollutants and are often deposited with natural sediment in the bottoms of streams. (f) The hot-water emission from industrial and power plants causee thermal pollution. Many industries cool machinery and products with water drawn from rivers, lakes, or the ocean. After the heat is dissipated into the water, the water is returned to its source. Heated water changes the nature of the aquatic system by reducing its ability to hold dissolved oxygen and by favoring species offauna and flora that are adapted to warmer conditions. (g) Radioactive materials in water may be dangerous pollutants. Of particular concern are possible effects to people, other animals and plants to long-term exposure to low doses of radioactivity. (h) By volume, sediment is the greatest water pollutant. In many areas, sediment is choking streams and filling lakes, reservoirs, ponds, canals, drainage ditches, and harbors. Human activity has increased the amount of sediment entering the hydrologic system mainly through the disturbance of natural habitats, agriculture, and forestry. All of these activities enhance the process of erosion either through the removal of vegetation or via processes that disturb the soil surface layer (soil cultivation).

WATER CONSERVATION TECHNIQUES A number of techniques and technologies can be used to make agricultural, industrial and domestic water use more efficient. Reductions can easily occur in the following areas: Reducing Agricultural Waste ~ lrrigation accounts for about 70 % of the world's water use. Most irrigation systems deliver water to crops by flooding the land surface, diverting water to fields via open channels, or by sprinkler systems that apply water to the field surface. In general, these methods are very inefficient as only 50 % of the water applied is absorbed by the plants. The rest is lost to the atmosphere by evaporation. Microirrigation techniques can reduce the amount of water applied to crops by 40 to 60%. Other strategies that can be used to reduce agricultural water waste include: * The cultivation of food crops that require less water for growth. * The use of lined or covered irrigation canals to reduce infiltration and evaporation losses. * Irrigating crops at night or early morning when evaporation potentials are low. * Reduce water subsidies and encourage the proper pricing of this resource. Reducing Industrial Waste -Industry is the second largest user of water supplies. ReduClng the amount of water used in industry not only makes more water available for other purposes but it can also reduce the volume ofpollution. Industry used water reductions can be achieved by: * Designing industrial processes to recycle water. For example, water used for industrial cooling purposes can be cooled down in a cooling tower and then reused. * Increasing the cost of water to induet.ries to encourage water recycling. * Recycling materials themselves can also greatly reduce water demand. For example, manufacturing a ton of aluminum from scrap rather than from virgin ore can reduce the volume of water used by 97%. Reducing Domestic Waste -Some'strate,gies for reducing domesticconsunlption include: * Replace lawns in semiarid and arid urban areas with xeriscsped surfaces. * Encourage the use of efficient irrigation systems for home garden and lawn use. * Manufacture and legislate the use of more efficient dishwashers, washing machines, and bathroom showers and toilets. * Encourage leak detection and repair for distribution systems. Distribution systems in many of the world's urban areas are losing between 25 and 50% of their water supplies due to leaks in pipes. * Properly price water for domestic u se. This pnce must reflect the environmental cost of over consumption and resource degradation. Many studies have shown that higher prices for water provide motivation for people to conserve. The introduction of water meters in Boulder, Colorado reiluced water use by about 30%. In Canada, water is metered in approximately two-thirds of the municipalities.

Apart from these educations can encourage people to reduce the amount of personal consumption.

NOISE POLLUTION Noise as a Pollutant ''AnY sound, that has the potential to call,se disturbance, discomfort or psychological stress to a. subject e:xposed to it, or any sound, that could cause actual physiological harm to a subject exposed to it, or physical damage to any structure exposed to it, is known as noise. " Hannfnl effects are defined as "negative effects on human health ". Noise sensitive locations are defined as: . "Any dwelling house, hotel or hostel, health building, educational establishment, place of worship or entertainment, or any other facility or other area of high amenity which affords proper enjoyment requires the absence of noise at nuisance levels." Noise is almost ubiquitous. Many normal everyday activities lead to the prodt:ction of sounds, some of which are regarded as noise. Noise from traffic, lawnmowers, household appliances, concerts, and industrial activities and so on, are considered commonplace. In most cases the majority of people scarcely notice these noises and are not bothered by them, but in some cases people can perceive noise as a nuisance. Such people may be more sensitive than others, or may find themselves in particularly nOISY situations, or may be annoyed by noise because they want to sleep, or relax in a quiet atmosphere. In some cases, noise may present such a nuisance as to actually bring about a negative effect on the health ofthose exposed to it. Noise Measuring The EPA goes on to explain that in order to assess whether intervention is needed to preve nt, control or minimise noise, it is necessary to be able to quantify it. and ascribe a scale ofmeasul'ement to it. It is not a8 simple a science as one might think. Noise is usually measured on the decibel scale, which is a logarithmic scale of sound intensity. For human noise response, the decibel scale is adjusted slightly to compensate for slight aberrations in the way the human ear "hears" sound along the scale. This edjusted scale is known as the A weighted decibeJ scale, and the units of the scale are d BA. The EPA has produced a table, which describes how various decibel levels might sounds as follows: DBA Description o Absolute silence. 25 Very quiet room. 35 Rural night-time setting. No wind. 55 Day-time, busy roadway 0.5 km away. 70 Busy restaurant. 85 Very busy pub. Voice has to be raised to be heard . 100 Disco or rock concert. 120 Uncomfortably loud. Conversation impossible. 140 Noise causing pain in ears. LAND POLLUTION Also known as soil pollution, land pollution involves the following mechanism: * Deposition of solid waste * Accumulation of... non· biodegradable materials * Toxification of chemicals into poisons * Alteration of soil chemical composition (imbalance of chemical equilib.riulll to soil medium) By as much, land pollution of this has amass globally, everyday threatening the very foundation and mechanical support of every matter on earth. Statistically, it has been shown that: * 108s of 6 million hectares of land per year * loss of 24 billion tons of topsoil per year * 108s of minimum 15 million acres prime agricultural land to overuse and mismanagement * desertification ofland results in the lost of 16 million per square miles of world's landsurface The causes for such devastation are generally due to two forms of malpractices: Unhealthy soil management methods; improper tillage of soil in which excessive tillage result in the deterioration of soil structure * non-maintenance of a proper supply of organic matter in the soil from the imbalance composition of the reserves of organic matter especially nitrogen, phosphorus and sulfur unplenished supply after cultivation of vegetation, living the soil prone to soil infertility, unable to stabilize the soil physicality which ultimately let to desertification. * irregular maintenance ofa proper nutrient supply of trace elements gives rise to the use of excessive synthetic fertilizers, which are non biodegradable and accumulate in t he soil system which eventually destroys useful organisms such as bacteria, fungi and other organisms. * improper maintenance' of the correct soil ocidity which ultimately disrupt the adaptation of various crops and native vegetation of different soils as the solubility of minerals present will be affected. [n a more acidic soil, minerals tend to be more soluble and washed away during rainfall while alkaline soil, minerals are more insoluble which form complex minerals unable to be absorbed into the flora system physiological usage. Imprope r irrigation practices;*poorly drained soil result in salt deposits leading to high soil salinity that inhibit plant growth and may lead to crop failure. * unirrigated land giving rise to stagnation of agriculture waste products which accumulates and increases land toxicity. * irregular irrigation leads to decreasing moisturization ofland for soil medium and replenishments of solvents for minerals.

UGC Environment II

SOURCES AND METHODS Agriculture accumulation of animal manures, excessive input of chemical fertilizers and illicit dumping of tainted crops on land. . Mining and Quarrying using of explosives to blow up mines and using of machineries which emits toxic byproducts and leaks to the ground. Sewage sludge improper sanitation system causes sludge to leak at surrounding soil. Dredged spoils improper method of dredging at fertile land causes soil infertility, leaving the soil more prone to external pollution. Household improper waste disposal system and improper sanitation system. Demolition and construction non biodegradable rubbles or debris which are not cleared settled in the soil undergo chemical reactions and increase soil toxicity. Industrial poisonous/toxic emissions of gases which are not filtered or neutrali zed. RADIOACTrvE POLLUTION Nuclear energy is a form of energy that's released by the splitting of atoms. Since scientists have found a way to make use of the energy, it has also been used to generate electricity. Nuclear energy has been recognized as a clean energy because it doesn't release pollutants such BS CO2 to the atmosphere after its reaction that could damage our environment. It's also known that nuclear energy has reduced the amount of greenhouse gas emission, reducing emissions of CO2 for about 500 million metric tons of carbon. Despite the advantage of nuclear as a clean energy, the big concern is the waste resulted from nuclear reaction, which is a form of pollution, called radioactivity. Radioactivity is a form of radiation (a form o(energy that travels through space). Some elements in this world are naturally radioactive while Bome Qthers are made to be. Radioactivity is emitted when a radioactive element become WlStable and begin to decay in the attempt to regain their molecular stability. When an element decays, it emits energy and small particles. [f it's still radioactive, it will repeat the proceas, until it finally regains its molecular stability and stop decaying. The time that it takes for halfway of decaying process is called half-life, and this differs for each radioactive element. It p0S8ibly takes up to 4.5 billion years (Uranium 238) and as short as 8 days (Iodine 131). This process constantly remains, not coABi~:t:ing e)(te.rnal factors such as pressure or tempe..ratur.e. This process is expressed ill units calle..d.b:e:cque:r.e.ls. One becquerel is equal to on.e di.s.in.t:4tgratio,n.oi nuclei per second. There are commonly three types of :t:ad.i.a.tion. namely: . * Alpha particles, can be blocked by a piece of paper and human skin. * Beta particles can penetrate through skin, which can be blockedby some pieces of glass and metal * Gamma rays can penetrate easily to human skin and damage cells on its way through, reaching far, and can only beblocked by a very thick, strong, massive piece of concrete.

Sources and Methods We can classify major sources that lead to radioactive pollution to the following categories * nuclear power plants * nuclear weapon transportation *disposal of nuclear waste*uranium mining THERMAL.POLLUTION This has become an increasing and the most current pollution, owing to the increasing call or globalization everywhere. Heat produced from industries is a major contribution to the pollution, much to the operation of the heavy industries which produces high amount of heat energy As we will show a summary to the event of tms pollution happening: * Raw materials for productivity (organic and inorganic products) * Undergo different chemical reactions with several process * Excess heat energy is produced as a waste PrOOuct * Heat is released into atmosphere (vapor) and riverine system (liquid). * Increase of temperature of environmental system and view of the pollution, global temperature had increased significa ntly. Measurements of atmospheric temperature are done by met~rol ogical center of the weather fo~t annually, and the gi'aph to detect the temperature trend from a pel'iod of 10 years will be CQDlpared with the previous batch of period. Thus we may be able to know the rate of tempe.rature increa se overa ll and make reference to the standard level of heat that shouldbe maintain in the atmosphere to avoid large deviation of heat in the system. Sources and Methods Wit can classify major sources that Jead to thermal pollution to the following categories: * power plants creating electricity from fossil fuel * water as a cooling agent in ind ustrial facilities * deforestation of the shoreline * soil erosion

THE GREENHOUSE PROBLEM A number of the gases we are putting into the atmosphere have the effect of trapping energy that co.mes to the earth as sunlight but which would otherwise be radiated back into space. The main contributor is carbon dioxide, accounting for about half the greenhouse effect. Humans generate about 24 billion tonnes of carbon dioxide each year, mostly from the burning of fossil fuels (coal, oil and gas) in rich countries. The carbon dioxide content of the atmosphere has inCI'eased by about 25% since humans began to use fossil fuels in large quantities 150 years ago. The concentration is now around 350 ppm and increasing by abou t 1.5% p.a. The effects can't be predicted with confidence but this increase could result in a 1-2 degree rise in average global temperature by 2030. The expected rise at the poles is much greater. If the greenhouse effect continues into the 22nd century then polar ice would begin to melt eventually bring about a sea rise of perhaps a hundred metres. Even a half metre rise would cause huge problems for the many people who live on low lying islands and in coastal regions. Probably the most undesirable effects will be hotter and drier climates in many Third World regions such as the African Sahel, where millions of people even now have difficulty growing enough food , and more frequent occurrence of extreme climatic events such 98 storms, floods, droughts and cyclones. These can devastate food production. It is possible that positive feedback effects from several sources could suddenly produce a catastrophic runaway greenhouse effect. For example, * As the warming dries out the Arctic tundra it begins to rot, releasing greenhouse gases. * As the tropical rainforest is destroyed we lose the cloud, t heir moisture generates. That cloud presently reflects much solar energy back into space, cooling the earth.*As the warming reduces the formation of polar ice each year less salt is separated to fall to the bottom causing the huge currents that take carbon-rich water down. * As these currents diminish less nutrients are brought up to feed the plankton which take in much carbon. * As the oceans warm and become more poliuted coral reefs dissolve, ceasing to take carbon from the atmosphere and releasing their carbon to the ocean. It seems that the global atmospheric system can flip from one state to another fairly quiclly. Some ice ages have come and gone relatively suddenly. The worry is that human activity could tip the system into a new state, for example, bringing on a new ice age. Nature moves 100 times as much carbon into and out of the atmosphere as humans do, so we might trigger or lever huge shifts and runaway effec:ts in nature's processes. PLANT MANY TREES It doesn't take long to realise that there is no realistic chance of solving the greenhouse problem by planting trees to remove carbon dioxide from t he atmosphere. Firstly we'd have to plant something like the a rea of Australia, and secondly this would only take carbon from the atmosphere while the trees were growing. Similarly, increasing the use of nuclear energy in order to cut coal use would not make much difference. Burning coal to prod uce electricity contributes only a small fraction of the carbon input, carbon constitutes only ahout half of the greenhouse problem, ~nd to build all the reactors needed would reqwre a great deal of energy and would therefore help to make the greenhouse problem worse for possibly 50 years. ... AND ENERGY GROWTH If the CO2 content of the atmosphere continues to increase at the present rate then late next century it will probably have risen to around 8 times the present level. World energy consumption is growing at about 2% p.a. Remember that the Third World is trying to catch up the developed world in energy consumption and use. In fact half the wc:-Id's people average only 1117 the r ich world average per capita usc. !fall the people likely on earth late next century were to rise to the present per capita use levels in rich countries world energy use would be about 8 times its present amount. If India and China insist on pursuing the Western development model they will have to burn their large r esources of dirty coal, causing a far worse greenhouse problem than we have now. We should be trying to convince them that it is a mistake to think of satisfactory development in terms of high levels of industrialisation and oonsumption. But there is little chance of them listening to UB unless they could see that we in rich oountries were making a big effort to reduce OUl' use of fossil fuel s. The atmospheric scientists have been telling us for years that if we are to stop the level of carbon in the atmosphere from nsmg any higher.lt carbon inputs by 60-80%. If we were to cut them by 60% and share the quantity of energy between all the people we would have on earth by 2060 you and I would have to get by on only 1/18 of the energy we use now. Most people have no idea of the magnitude of the overshoot and therefore the magnitude of the reductions in resource use and in consumption that will have to be made if the problems are to be solved. The greenhouse problem provides strong support for the "limits to growth" argument. There is no plausible way of solving the problem without accepting drastic reduction in per capita levels of production and consumption and thus shifting to The Simpler Way, including a zero-growth economy.

THE OZONE PROBLEM In the mid 1980s, it was realised that the ozone in the atmosphere is being depleted. There is only a very small quantity ofthia gas. If all the molecules of ozone were brought together at normal pressure they would make up a layer around the earth less than 3 mm thick. Yet ozone performs the extremely important function of blocking out much of the ultraviolet light that comes from the sun and is hal'mful to life. Life on earth was only able to emerge from the seas on to the land after plants had released enough oxygen to create an ozone shield. In the late 1980s scientists observed a large hole forming each year in the ozone over the antarctic. More recently another hole has appeared over the Arctic. By the early 1990's there had been about a 3-5% reduction in the amount of o~ne in the whole atmosphere. The main destr uctive gases, CFC's, remain active in the atmosphere for 100 years. The ozone problem illustrates the most important aspect of the general environment problem, i.e., the damage being done to the life support systems of the planet. Increased ultraviolet light coming to earth will have undesirable effects on various biological systems, including the productivity of broad leaf plants (and therefore agriculture) and the micro-organisms in the sea which account for a considerable proportion of the world's ,oxygen and which take much carbon from the atmosphere. Processes such as these are crucial in maintaining the conditions necessary for the health of the entire planet, and the most worrying aspect of the environment problem is that in many ways human activity is degrading these systems and processes that. make life on earth possible. ACID RAIN In the heavily industrialised areas of North America and Europe the rainfall has become acidic due t.o the amount. of nitrogen and sulphur entering the atmosphere especially from cars and power stations. As a result forests and lakes are dying. This is one more factor reducing the productivity of agricult.ure and more importantly degrading the life support systems of the planet. There will be strong pressure to increase use of foss il fuels and fertilisers in coming decades, increasing the release of acid to the atmosphere.

SOIL DAMAGE All life on earth depends on the earth's fragile "life jacket" made up by the thin layer of topsoil (average depth only 30 cm) from which all living things derive their sllstenance. We are treating this vital resource in a way that cannot continue for many more decades. Our agriculture is one of the most unsustainable aspects of our society. Consider the main damaging effects. For every 1 kg of food we eat, modern agriculture loses at least 5 kg of soil to erosion. Water logging and salinity in irrigated areas are destroying much land. Large areas of good farmland are continually being turned into urban settlements. In America perhaps h alf million ha p.a. are lost this way. Large scale use of pesticides reduces soil fertility. Much land is being lost to the spread of deserts, at a global rate of 6 million ha p.a .. Another 20 million ha became unprofitable to farm each year. Rainfall is increasingly acidic. Soil nutrients are not returned to the soil. We throwaway all our food wastes, and animal and human wastes. These should all be returned to the soil. Modern agricultlure is therefore well described as "soil mining". Soils are becoming more acidic due to use of artificial fertilisers. The Greenhouse and ozone problems will have undesirable effects on agriculture in coming years. Another important reason why our agriculture is unsustainable is that it depends on large quantities of energy. especially oil. In addition to all the energy used in tractor fuel, fertilisers, irrigation and pesticides there are huge transport and packaging energy costs. We will not be able to farm as we do now when much less oil is available in a few decades time. We could not do it now if world oil output were shared equally among all the world's people. We in rich countries can use so much in our agriculture only because we take most of the world's oil production. To produce one glass of qiilk can take energy equal to half a glass of diesel fuel. These trends cannot continue for many more decades. We are destroying our capacity to meet our agricultural needs. Remember that there will probably be twice as many people to feed late next century and it is likely that there will then be much less land than there is now. To solve these problems we must move to a very different form of agriculture in which we mostly depend on small farms and gardens, tree crops, "edible landscapes" throughout cities, local self-sufficiency in food (hence little transport), recycling of nutrients and thus negligible use of ploughing, artificial fertilizers or pesticides. THE POLLUTION OF THE OCEANS Large quantities of wastes are dumped into the world's oceans every year, including the run·off of excess fertiliser from farmland, and 2 million tonnes of oil which affects photosynthesis and the amount of sunlight reflected from the planet. In the early 1980s the North Sea was receiving every year 49 tonnes of cadmium, 20 tonnes of mercury, 12 tonnes of copper, 9 tonnes of lead, 34 tonnes of arsenic, and 20 million cubic metres of sewage. THE LOSS OF FORESTS Around 16·20 million hectares of rainforest are being lost each year and most of the remaining foreetmighthave been destroyed by early in the 21st century. In addition about -4 million ha of other forest types are being lost every year. This destruction not only reduces the rate at which carbon is taken out of the atmosphere, but the rotting of cleared vegetation and exposed soil humus is also putting carbon into the atmosphere, )1ossibly equal to 40% of the input from fossil fuel burning. The loss of the rainforest could also reduce the planet's cloud cover and therefore greatly increase its temperature. Tropical forest loss is the main cause of the loss of species.

THE LOSS OF SPECIES The expansion of human activity is destroying· habitats and causing the extinction of plant and animal species at an accelerating rate. This is probably the most serious of all ecological problems. There are probably 10 to 30 million species in existence, mostly undiscovered as yet. In the 300 years to 1970 humans probably caused the extinction of about 300 species. Some biologists estimate that we are now losing 17500 species every year, about 2 every hour.ln the next 20 years, one million plant and animal species could be made extinct. At this rate, in the next 50 years half of all species could be lost. We have entered a period of rapid extinction unlike any since 60 million years ago when the dinosaurs suddenly died out. The result will be the weakening of the life-support systems of the planet, because it is the diversity and complexity of life forms which maintains these systems, for example recycling nutrients and maintaining the atmosphere. We are also losing many varieties of food plants because it suits corporations to sell mostly the few types which maximise their profits. Becauge the seeds they se ll are "hybrids" the resulting plants will not yield a seed that produces a good crop, meaning that farmers can't save their own seed and have to buy more seed from the big seed companies every year. The seeds sold are the types that thrive only when given many energy- intensive inputs such as fertiliser and water. Because of this trend, within one generation, large numbers of plant varieties that used to be kept in existence by farmers saving their own seed are being lost as farmers all around the world are now mostly buying the same few varieties from the seed corporations.

THE DIMINISHING BIOLOGICAL PRODUCTIVITY OF THE EARTH Tn the last decade evidence has increased that the productivity of the earth's biological systems has begun to decline, despite the everincreasing effort humans are making to raise production. Many agricultural production indices which have been increasing in recent decades now seem to be slowing, stable or falling. Consider the following indicators noted by the Worldwatch Institute. * World cropland area increased to the early 1980s but little increase is likely from here on. * World grain lan~ area has decreased since 1970. * The growth rate for forests is declining. * Annual increases in world grain production have been falling over the last three decades, despite increased fertiliser use. * The rate of increase in world irrigated land area is tapering. * The productivity of land did not rise much in the' second half of the 19808, despite increased inputs. * World fish catch is very likely to decline in the near future. The number of fishing vessels doubled in the 1980s but the catch didn't mcrease. These tapering curves are quite disturbing. The environmental impacts largely responsible for t he declining productivity are accelerating. We are only feeding 1 billion people well, but we will soon have 11 billion, and our capacity to produce food is likely to diminish from here on. EFFECTS ON HUMAN HEALTH Since World War 11 humans have had to live in a new chemical environment, increasingly surrounded by and taking in many pollutants created by our industries. Thousands of new chemicals are invented each year and tonnes of these new substances are released into the environment each year, entering our water, air and food. Only a few are ever tested thoroughly for their long term health effects. Many of these wastes are known to be poisonous. Chemicals leaching from dumps into drinki ng water supplies is a major problem. This increase in the contamination of our environment is probably a major factor responsible for the increasing incidence of cancers. Some people argue that we a re experiencing an epidemic. Two worrying factors here are biological magnification, the way some harmful substances become more concentrated as they move up food chains. and synergism, the way some substances in our envu'ollment can interact with each other to have greater effects. For example, the probabilit.y of an asbestos worker who is a smoker contracting cancer is about 10 times as great as the probability for smokers in general or that for asbestos workers in ge neral. These two factors togethel' interact to produce a much greater risk. We have little idea how t.he many new chem icals we are exposed to could be interacting within us to cause illnesses, but the more we saturate ow' environment with new chemicals the more likely such effects are.

THE ENVIRONMENT PROBLEM IN THE THIRD WORLD Some of the most se r io us environmental damage is taking place in the Third World, especially destruction of forests and the loss of species. The resulting famines, floods, erosion and droughts are taking a rapidly increasing number of lives each year. As the trees are lost rain runs off more rapidly, eroding soils and causing more serious flooding, and more serious droughts later on. When there is less wood people burn more dung, which should be going back to the soil. There are now millions of "environmental refugees"; people fleeing because their environments have become unable to support them. To some extent these increasingly serious environmental problems are due to population increase in the Third World and to corrupt and inefficient governments. But the main causes are the unjust way the global economy functions and the inappropriate approach to development the rich countries have promoted. These have encouraged poor countries to sell otT their forests to purchase goods from rich countries. They have led poor countries into debt and thus obliged them La sell even more logs and ooff'ee to pay their debts. They have led to the use of much land for export cropping and have therefore forced many poor people to clear forests and to overgraze poor lands in order to grow food for themselves. [n other words poverty is a major cause of environmental damage in the Third World. Above all, the "limits to growth" analysis shows that t he Third World must be persuaded not to strive for the rich world's industrialised, urbanised and affluent ways. That would require 10 times as much energy and resource oonsumption as'now occurs in the world every year. WE ARE DESTROYING THE LIFE SUPPORT SYSTEMS OF THE PLANET The most serious environmental concern of all is that we are damaging the biological processes that provide and renew the oonditions all life on earth needs, such as an appropriate climate and a constant supply of nutrients. Every organism depends for its existence on a fairly stable supply of nitrogen, phosphorus, oxygen, etc. Where did the oxygen we just breathed in come from? It was produced by organisms such as trees and phytoplankton on the surface of the sea. But we are clearing trees and we a re allowing ultraviolet rays to damage those micro-organisms. Every major indicator shows a deterioration in natural systems. We only have about 40 years left in which to achieve sustainability . We must see all species and environments as contributing to 8 gigantic system which reproduces the oonditions and the chemicaJs that all need in order to live. We all depend entirely on each other ; any organism on earth can only get the things it must have in order to live because all the others are living normally and making those elements and conditions available. Yet we are damaging the system that provides these vital conditions.

WHAT ABOUT TECHNlCAL ADVANCE IN POLLUTION REDUCTION? Many people just assume that all we need to do to solve the environmental and resource problems is have tighter poUution control, buy products that ate recyclable, and design more 168 energy efficient products, etc. This is what advocates of "Environmentally Sustamable Development" usually believe. They do' not see that we need to change our lifestyles or the economy. The "limits to growth" argument is that there is no chance of solving the major globa'l problems we face unless we go much further and drastically reduce the amount of producing and consuming going on, because the problems are essentially due to the very high levels of resource use and waste involved in our way of Hre. Even if we achieve large reductions in the pollution generation rate, but remain rommitted to economic growth then in a short time we will be polluting 3S much 8S we were or using as much energy as we were before the cuts. If at a point in time we were to cut the rate of pollution per unit of output by 30%, but our economy continued to grow at 3% p.a. then in only 14 years the annual amount of pollution generated would be back up at the pre-cutlevel, and i.n another 23 it would be twice as great. Obvi ously any plausible reduction in envir onmenta l impact will soon be overwhelmed if we insist on growth in output. lfthe Third World is to develop to the levels of affluence of developed world that will mean burning 10 times as much fuel as at present, every year -- pollution control would have to achieve miracles to keep the consequences to anywhere near the present (intolerable) levels. Affluent-industrial-oonsumer society can't be saved by Factor 4 or Factor 10 reductions in the amount of resource use and environmental impact per unit of output, while commitment to growth remains. Such reductions will soon be overwhelmed if we continue to pursue growth in output.

UGC Environment III

"ENVIRONMENTALLY SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT" There is much reference on the part of eCQnomists and governments to the concept of "environmentally Austainable development". However, this is in general only an attempt to take some steps to reduce the environmental impact of economic activity, but there is never any Question of reducing the volume of production and sales, or of eliminating grossly unnecessary or wa steful or luxurious 169 UGC·JRF (Paper 1}-22 production. "Ecologically Sustainable Development" is only about looking for ways of contlUulOg to produce, but. in ways that will have reduce environmentru impact. The crucial point IS that the volume of production and consumption current.ly taking place is far beyond levels that can be kept up, extended to all the world's people, or remedied by technical advances. The inescapable conclusion from the limits to growth analysis of our situation is that. t.here must be drastic reduction in the volume of economic activity taking place in the world at. present.. This is the last thing that economists, corporations. and governments want to year, 80 they opt to pretend that it is sufficient to look for less environmentally damaging ways of conti· nuing to produce and sell as much as possib le.

THE NEAR FUTURE Most of the destruction of the environment has taken place since 1950; i.e., in the short period of rapid economic growth. The rate of impact on the ecosystems of the planet will probably increase greatly in coming decades. * World population will multiply by 1.5. * People in poor countries, who will probably outnumber us by 6 or 8 to 1 late next century, also want the high material living standards we have in rich countries like Australia. * Resources are becoming more scarce, meaning more effort., more . fuel , a nd pollution will be involved in gelling them, and more pressure on untouched nat.ural areas such as Antarctica * Even people in the richest countries insist on endlessly increasing the amount they produce and consume every year. It is therefol'e virtually certain that the present. quite disturbing levels of environment.al impact will become several times as great in coming decades.

THE ECONOMY; BASIC CAUSE OF THE PROBLEM It is essent.ial to realise that it is our economic system that is mainly responsible for the destructive effects we are baving on our environment. The biggest contribution to saving ecosystems would come with t.be elimlOation of our enormous volume of unnecessary proCluction, resource use and the associated ecological disruption, but our economic system will not allow uS to reduce production to levels that are merely sufficient fora reasonable lifestyle. Unless production and consumption increase the economy is in trouble, even though developed countries now produce far more than is necessary. CONCLUSION Are you dark green or only light green? Unfortunate ly most concern about t he environment at present is only devoted to saving areas or species threatened by growth and affiuence society, or to working for less polluting ways or for recycling schemes or more energy efficient transport. etc .. without any thought of changing from a society that is obsessed with growth and affiuence. Such "light green" efforts are important. and admirahle but many people concerned about the environment fail to see that there is no chance of solving the environment problem unless we change to a rad ical conse rver society involving very different lifesty les, pat erns of settlement, levels of cons umption and eco nomic arrangements.

NATURAL HAZARDS AND MITIGATION EARTHQUAKES The shnking of ground is known as earthquake. Earthquakes occur when energy stored in elastically strained rocks is suddenly released. This release of ene,rgy causes intense ground shaking in t.he area near the source of the earthquake and sends waves of elast ic energy, called seismic waves, throughout the Earth. Earthquakes can be generated by bomb blasts, volcanic eruptions, anci sudden slippage along faults. Earthquakes are definitely a geologic hazard for those living in earthquake prone areM, but the seismic waves generated by earthquakes are invaluable for studying the interior of the Earth. ORIGIN OF EARTHQUAKES Most natural earthquakes are caused by sudden slippage a long a fault zone. The elastic reboWld theory suggests that if slippage along a fault is hindered such that elastic strain energy builds up in the deforming rocks on either side of the fault, when the slippage does occur, the energy released causes an earthquake. This theory was discove red by making measurements at a number of points across 8 fault. Prior to an earthquake it was noted that the rocks adjacent to the fault were bending. These bends disappeared after an earthquake suggesting that the energy stored in bending the rocks was suddenly released during the earthquake.

SEISMOLOGY, THE STUDY OF EARTHQUAKES When an earthquake occurs, the elastic energy is released sending out vibrations that travel throughout the Earth. These vibrations are called seismic waves. The study of how seismic waves behave in the Earth is called ~ismoiogy. Seismograms - Seismic waves travel through the Earth as vibrations. A seismometer is an instrument used to record these vibrations, and the resulting graph that shows the vibrations is called a seismogram. The seismometer must be able to move with the vibrations, yet part of it must remain nearly s tationary. This is accomplishe.d by isolating the recording device (like a pen) from the rest of the Earth using the principal of ine rtia . The source of an earthquake is called the focus, which is an exact location within the Earth where seismic waves are generated by sudden release of stored elastic energy. The epicenter is the point on the surface of t he Earth directly above the focus. Seismic waves emanating from the focus can travel in several ways, and thus there are several different kinds of seismic waves. Body Waves - Emanate from the focus and travel in all directions through the body of the Earth. There are two types of body waves: P-waves and S-waves: P-Waves - Primary waves, travel with a velocity that depends on the elastic properties of the rock through which they travel. P-waves are the same thing as sound waves. They move through the material by compressing it, but after it has been compressed it expands, so that the wave moves by compressing and expanding the material as it travels. Thus the velocity of the P·wave depends on how easily the material can be compressed (the incompressibility), how rigid the material is (the rigidity), and the density of the material P-waves have the highest velocity of all seismic waves and thus will reach all seismographs first. S-WaveB - Secondary waves, also called shear waves. Surface Waves - Surface 'waves differ from body waves in that they do not travel through the Earth, but instead travel along paths nearly parallel to the surface of the Earth. Surface waves behave like S-waves in that they cause up and down and side to side movement as they pass, but they travel slower than S-wavcs and do not travel through the body of the Earth. Surface waves are often the cause of the most intense ground motion during an earthquake. These are known as L-waves (Longitudinal Waves). The record of an earthquake, a seismogram, as recorded by a seismometer, will be a plot of vibrations versus time. On the seismograph, time is marked at regular intervals, so that we can determine the time of arrival of the first P-wave and the time of arrival of the first S-wave. Since P-waves have a higher velocity than S- waves, the P-waves arrive at the seismographic station before the S-waves. * Magnitude of Earthquakes -The size of an earthquake is usually given in terms of a scale called the Richter Magnitude. Richter Magnitude is a scale of earthquake size developed by a seismologist named Charles Richter. The Richter Magnitude involvcs measuring the amplitude (height) of the largest recorded wave at 8 specific distance from the earthquake. While it is COl reet to say that for each increase in I in the Richter Magnitude, there is a tenfold increase in amplitude of the wave, it is incorrect to say that each increase of 1 in Richter Magnitude representB a tenfold increase in the size of the Earthquake. * The Richter scale is an open ended scale with no maximum or minimum. The largest earthquakes are probably limited by rock strength. although meteorite impacts could cause even larger earthquakes. The largest earthquakes so ScaJe is shown in the table below. Note that far recorded are the Chile earthquake in correspondence between maximum intensity 1960 with a Richter Magnitude oC8.5, and and Richter Scale magnitude only applies in the the Alaska (Good Friday) earthquake of 1964 with a Richter Magnitude of 8.6. area around the epicenter. * It usually takes more than one * Thus, a given earthquake will have zones seismographic station to calculate the of different intensity all surrounding a zone of magnitude of an earthquake. Thus you maximum intensity. will hear initial estimates of earthquake The Modified Mercalli Scale is shown in the magnitude immediately after an table below. Note that correspondence between earthquake and a final assigned maximum intensity and Richter Scale magnitude for tJ:te same earthquake that magnitude only applies in the area a round the may differ from initial estimates, but is epicenter. assigned after seismologists have had time to evaluate the data from numerous (nte- Characteristic Effects Richter Scale seismographic stations. nsity Equivalent I People do not feel any <3.4 Frequency of Earthquakes of Different Earth movement Magnitude Worldwide IT A few people notice movement Magnitude Number of Description if at rest andlor on upper floor Earthquakes of tall buildings per Year 111 People indoors feel movement. 4.2 > 8.5 0.3 Great Hanging objcet:.

* The MercalJi Scale is very useful on exam ining the effects of an earthquake over a large area, because it is responsive not only to the size of the earthquake as measured by the Richter scale for areas near the epicenter, but will also show the effects of the efficiency that seismic waves are transmitted through different types of material near the Earth's surface. * The Merca\U Scale is also useful fo, determining the size of earthquakes that occurred before t he modern seismog rapruc network was available (before there were seismographic stations, it was not possible to assign a Richter Magnitude). EARTHQUAKE RISK * Many seismologists have said that "earthquakes don't kill people, buildings do", This is because most deaths from earthquakes are caused by buildings or other human construction falling down during an earthquake, * Earthquakes located in isolated areas far from human population rarely cause any deaths. * Thus, eart.hquake hazard risk depends on 1, Population density 2. Construction standards (building codes) EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS * Worst earthquake in recorded history occurred in 1556 in Shaaxi, China, killed 830,000 people, most Hving in caves excavated in poorly consolidated loess (wind deposited silt and clay). * Worst earthquake in the last century also occurred in China (T'ang Shan Province), killed 240,000 in 1976. Occurred at 3:42 AM, magnitude 7.8 earthquake and magnitude 7.1 aftershock. Deaths were due to collapse of masonry (brick) buildings. Contrast- In earthquake prone areas like CaliforOla, in order to reduce earthquake risk, there &restrict building codes requiring the design and construction of buildings and other structures that will withstand a large earthquake. While this program is not always completely successful, one fact stands out to prove its effectiveness. In 1989 an earthquake near San Francisco, California (The Lorna Prieta, or World Series Earthquake) w:th a Richter Magnitude of 7, 1 killed about 62 people. Most were killed when a double decked freeway in Oakland collapsed. About 10 months lat.cr, an earthquake with magnitude 6.9 occurred in Armenia, where no earthquake- proof building codes existed. The death toll in the l!mcr earthquake was about 25,0001 HAzARDS ASSOCIATED WITH EARTHQUAKFS Possible hazards from earthquakes can be classified as follows: Ground Moti.on : Shaking of the ground caused by the passage of seismic waves, especially surface waves, near the epicenter of the earthquake are responaib!e for the most damage during an earthquake. The intensity of ground shaking depends on: * Local geologic conditioll.s ill. the area. In general, loose unconsolidated sediment is subject to more intense shaking than solid bedrock. * Size of the Earthquake. In general, the larger the earthquake, the more intense is Lhe shaking and the duration of the shaking. * Distance from the Epicenter. Shaking is most severe near the epicenter and drops off away from the epicenter. The distance factor depends on the type of material underlying the area. * Damage to structures from shaking depends on the type of construction. o Concrete and masonry structures are brittle and thus more susceptible to damage. o Wood and steel structures are more flexible and thus less susceptible to damage. Faulting and Ground Rupture – Ground rupture generally occurs only along the faulty zone that moves during the earthquake. Thus, structures that are built across faulty zones may collapse, whereas structures built adjacent to, but not crossing the fault may survive. Aftershocks - These are usually smaller earthquakes that occur after a main earthquake, and in most cases there are many of these aftershocks occur because the main earthquake changes the stress pattern in areas around the epicenter, and the crust must adjust to these changes. Aftershocks are vel"y dangerous because they cause further collapse of structures damaged by the main shock. Fire - Fire is a secondary effect of earthquakes. Because pO'Yer lines may be knocked down and because natural gas lines may rupture due to an earthquake, fJ.res are often started closely following an earthquake. The problem is compounded if water lines are also broken during the earthquake since there will not be a supply of water to extinguish the fires once they have started. Landslides - In mountainous regions subjected to earthquakes ground shaking may trigger landslides, rock and debris falls, rock and debris slides, slumps. and debris avalanches. Liquefaction - Liquefaction is a precess thaL occurs in water-saturated unconsolidated sediment due to shaking. In areas underlain by such matel"ial, the ground shaking causes the grains to lose grain to grain contact, and thus the material tends to flow. Changes in Ground Level- A secondary or tertiary effect that is caused by faulting. Earthquakes may cause both uplift and subsidence of the land surface. Tsunamis - Tsunamis are giant oCean waves that can rapidly travel across oceans. Earthquakes that occur beneath sea level and along coastal areas can generate tsunamis, which can cause damage Lhousands of kilometers away on the other side of the ocean. Flooding - Flooding is a secondary effect that may oeew' due to rupture of human made dams, due to tsunamis, and as a result of ground subsidence after an earthquake.

EARTHQUAKE PREDICTION AND CONTROL

Long-Term Forecasting: Long-term forecasting is based mainly on the knowledge of when and where earthquakes have occurred in the past. Thus, knowledge of present tectonic setting, historical records, and geological records are studied to determine locations and recurrence intervals of earthquakes. Two aspects of this are important. Paleoseismology - The study of prehistoric earthquakes. Through study of the offsets in sedimentary layers near fault zones, it is often possible to determine recurrence intervals of major earthquakes prior to historical records. If it is determined that earthquakes have recurrence intervals of say 1 every 100 years, and there are no records of earthquakes in the last 100 years, then a long-term forecast can be made and efforts can be undertaken to reduce seismic risk. SHORT-TERM PREDICTION

Short-term prediction involves monitoring of processes that occur in the vicinity of earthquake prone faults for activity that signify a coming earthquake. Anomalous events or processes that may precede an earthquake are called precursor events and might signal a coming earthquake. Despite the array of possible precursor events that are possible to monitor, successful short· term earthquake prediction has so far been difficult to obtain. This is likely because: the process~s that cause earthquakes occur deep beneath the surface and are difficult to monitor. Earthquakes in different regions or along different faults all behave differently, thus no consistent patterns have so far been recognized. Among the precursor events that may be important are the following: Ground Uplift and Tilting: Measurements taken in the vicinity of active faults sometimes show that prior to an earthquake the ground is uplifted or tilts due to the swelling of rocks caused by strain building on the fault. This may lead to the formation of numerous small cracks (called microcracks). This cracking in the rocks may lead to small earthquakes called foreshocks. Foreshocks : Prior to a 1975 earthquake in China, the observation ofnumerolls foreshocks led to successful prediction of an earthquake and evacuation of the city of the Haicheng. The magnitude 7.3 earthquake that occurred, destroyed half of the city of about 100 million inhabitants, but resulted in only a few hundred deaths because of the successful evacuation. Water Level in Wells : As rocks become strained in the vicinity of a fault, changes in pressure of the groundwater (water existing in the pore spaces and fractures.in rocks) occur. This may force the groundwater to move to higher or lower elevations, causing changes in the water levels in welle. Emission of Radon Gas: Radon is an inert gas that is produced by the radioactive decay of uranium and other elements.in.rocks. Because Radon is inert, it does not combine with other elements to form compounds, and thus remains in a crystal structure until some event forces it out. Deformation resulting from stram may force the Radon out and lead to emissions of Radon that show up in well water. The newly formed microcracks discussed above could serve as pathways for the Radon to escape into groundwater. Increases in the amount of radon emissions have been reported prior to some earthquakes. Cbanges in the Electrical Resistivity of Rocks: Electrical resistivity is the resistance to the flow of electric current. In general rocks are poor conductors of electricit.y, but water is more efficient than conducting electricity. If microcracks develop and groundwater is forced into the cracks, this may cause t.he electrical resistivity to decrease (causing the electricaJ conductivity to increase). In some cases a 5·10% drop in electrical resistivity has been observed prior to an earthquake. Unusual Radio Waves: Just prior to the Lorna Prieta earthq~lUke or 1989. ijome researchers reported observing lmu.suaJ radiO waves. Where these were generated and why, is not yet known, but research is continuing. Strange Animal Behavior : Prior to a magnitude 7.'1 earthquake in Tanjin. China, zookeepers reported unusual animal behavior. Snakes refusing to go into their holes, swans refusing to go near water, pandas screaming, etc. This was the first systematic study of this phenomenon prior to an earthquake. Although other attempts have been made to repeat a prediction based on amtUal behavior, there have been no other successful predictions.

CONTROLLING EARTHQUMffiS

Although no attempts have yet been made to control earthquakes, earthquakes have been known to be induced by human interaction with the Earth. This suggests that in the future earthquake control may be possible.

VOLCANOES, MAGMA, AND VOLCANIC ERUPTIONS

Volcanic eruptions are caused by magma (a I Types of Magma : Types of magma are mixture of ~quid rock, crystals, and dissolved determined by chemical composition of the gas) expelled onto the earth's surface. magma. Three general types are recognized: 175 Summary Table Magma Solidified Chemical Temperature Viscosity Gns Content Typ. Rock Composition Basaltic Basalt 45·55 Si02 %. high in Fe, Mg, 1000 - 1200 ~C Low Low Ca, low in K. No. Andcaitic Andesite 55·65 Si02 %, intermediate Mg, 800 - 1000 ·C Intermediate Intermediate Co., No., K in Fe, Rhyolitic Rhyolite 65·75 SiO2 %, low in Fe, Mg, Ca, high in K, No..

HOW MAGMAS FORM IN THE EARTH

In order for magmas to form, Borne part of the earth must get hot enough to melt the rocks present. Under normal conditions, the geothermal gradient, which is bow the temperature in the earth changes with depth or pressure, is not high enough to melt rocks, and thus with the exception of the outer core, most of the earth is solid. Thus, magmas form only under special circumstances, and thus. volcanoes are only found on the earth's surface in areas above where these special circumstances occur. As pressure increases in the earth, the melting temperature changes as well. For pure minerals, there are two general cases. If the mineral contains no water (H20) or carbon dioxide (C02) and there is no water or carbon dioxide present in the surroundings, then melting occurs at a single temperature at any given pressure and increases with increasing pressure or depth in the earth. This is called dry melting. If water or carbon dioxide are present within or surrounding the mineral, then melting takes place at a single temperature at any given pressure, but first decreases with increasing pressure. Since rocks are mixtures of minerals, they behave somewhat differently. Unlike minerals, rocks do not melt at a single temperatme, but instead melt over a range of temperatures. Thus, it is possible to have partial melts, from which the liquid portion might be extracted to form magma. The two general cases are: 1. Melting of dry rocks is similar to melting of dry minerals, melting temperatures increase with increasing pressure, except there is a range of temperature over which there exists a partial melt. The degree of GSO - 800 ·C High – High partial melting can range from 0 to 100%. 2. Melting of wet rocks is similar to melting of wet mJnerais, except there is range of temperature over which partial melting occurs. Again, the temperature of beginning of melting ftrst decreases with increasing pressure or depth, then at high pressure or depth the melting temperatures again begin to rise.

VOLCANIC ERUPTIONS *

In general, magmas that are generated deep within the Earth begin to rise because they are less dense than the surrounding solid rocks. * As they rise they may encounter a depth or pressure where the dissolved gas no longer can be held in solution in the magma, and the gas begins to form a separate phase. * When a gas bubble forms, it will also continue to grow in size as pressure is reduced and more of the gas comes alit of solution. In other words, the gas bubbles begin to expand. * If the liquid pal'tofthe magma has a low viscosity, then the gas can expand relatively easily. When the magma reaches the earth's surface, the gas bubble will simply burat, the gas will easily expand to atmospheric pressure, and a non-explosive eruption will occur, usually as a lava flow (Lava is the name we give to a magma when it is on the surface ofthe earth). * If the liquid part of the magma has a high viscosity, then the gas will not be able to expand very easily, and thus, pressure will build up inside of the gas bubble(s). When this magma reaches the surface, the gas bubbles will have a high pressme inside, which will cause them to burst explosively on reaching atmospheric pressure. This will cause an explosive volcanic eruption. NON-EXPLOSIVE ERUPTIONS, Nonexplosive eruptions are favored by low gas content and low viscosity magmas (basaltic to andesitic magmas). * If the viscosity is low, non-explosive eruptions usually begin with fire fountains due to release of dissolved gases. * Lava flows are produced on the surface, and these run like liquids down slope, along the lowest areas they can find. * Lava flows produced by eruptions under water are called pillow lavas. * If the viscosity is high, but the gas content is low, then the lava will pile up over the vent to produce a lava dome or volcanic dome.

EXPLOSIVE ERUPTIONS:

Explosive eruptions are favored by high gas content and high viscosity (andesilic to rhyolitic magmas), Explosive bursting of bubbles will fragment the magma into.clots of liquid that will cool as they fall through the air. These solid particles become pyroclasts (meaning - hot fragments) and tephra or volcanic ash, which refer to sandsized or smaller fragments. * Blocks are angular fragments that were solid when ejected. * Bombs have an ae rodynamic shape indicating they were liquid when ejected. * Bombs and lapilli that consist mostly of gas bubbles (vesicles) result in a low density highly vesicular rock fragment called pumice. TEPHRA AND PYROCLASTIC ROCKS Average Pa.rtieie Unconsolidated Pyroclastic Rock Size (nun) lI1a.teriai(Tephra) >64 Bombs or Blocks f\!;"g\omerate 2 - 64 Lapilli Lapilli Tuff <2 Ash Ash Tuff Clouds of gas and tephra that rise above a volcano produce an eruption column that can rise up to 45 km into the atmosphere. Eventually the tephra in the eruption column will be picked up by the wind, carried for some distance, and then fall back to the surface as a tephra fall or ash fall. lf the eruption column collapses a pyroclastic flow will occur, wherein gas and tephra rush down the flanks of the volcano at high speed. This is the most dangerous type of volcanic eruption. The deposits that are produced are called ignimbrites if they contain pumice or pyroclastic flow deposits if they contain non-vesicular blocks. If the gas pressure inside the magma is directed outward instead of upward, a lateral blast can occur. When this occurs on the fla:1ks of a lava dome, a pyroclastic flows called a glowing avalanche or lLUie ardenles (in French) can also result. Directed blasts often result from sudden exposure of the magma by a landslide or collapse of a lava dome.

VOLCANIC HAZARDS

* Ash Falls (tephra falls) * Hot Ash Flows (pyroclastic flows) * Mud.f1ows Qahars) * Volcanic Landslides (debris flows and debris avalanches) * Lava Flows * Volcanic Gases PRIMARY EFFECTS OF VOLCANISM

* Lava Flows Control of lava flows has been attempted with limited success by bombing flow fronts to attempt to divert the flow ,·and by spraying with water to cool the flow. The latter is credited with saving the fishing harbor during a 1973 eruption of Heimaey in Iceland. * Violent Eruptions and Pyroclastic Activity * Poisonous Gas Emissions

SECONDARY AND TERTIARY EFFECTS OF VOLCANISM

* Mudflows (Lahars) * Debris Avalanches and Debris Flows . * Flooding * Tsunamis * Volcanic Earthquakes and Tremors * Atmospheric Effects * Famine and Disease

BENEFICIAL ASPECTS OF VOLCANISM

Volcanism throu ghout Earth history is responsible for outgasing of the Earth to help produce both the atmosphere and hydrosphere. Volcanism helps renew the soil, and soils around active volcanoes are some of the richest on Earth. Hydrothermal processes associated with volcanism produce rich ore deposits, and the heat rising around magma bodies can sometimes be tapped to produce geothermal energy. Predicting Volcanic Eruptions: Before discussing how we can predict volcanic e r uptions, it is important to get some term inology strai ght by defining some commonly used terms. Active Volcano -An active volcano is a volcano that has shown eruptive activity within recorded history. Thus an active volcano need not be in eruption to be considered active. * Currently there are about 600 volcanoes on Earth considered to be active volcanoes. * Each year 50 to GO of volcanoes actually erupt. Extinct Volcano - An extinct volcano is a volca no that has not s hown any historic activity, is usually deeply eroded, and shows no signs of recent activity. How old must a volcano be to be considered extinct depends to a large degree on past activity. * Yellowstone Caldera is about 600,000 years old and is deeply eroded. But fumorolic activity. hot springs, and geysers all point to the fact that magma still exists beneath the surface. Thus, Yellowstone Caldera is not considered extinct. * Other. volcanoes that are deeply eroded. smaller, and much younger than Yellowstone, that show no hydrothermal activity may be considered extinct. Dormant Volcano - A dormant volcano (sleeping volcano) is somewhere between active and extinct. A dormant volcano is one that has not shown eruptive activity within recorded history, but shows geologic evidence of activity within the geologic re~nt past. * Because the lifetime of a volcano may be on the order of a million years, dormant volcanoes ca n become active volcanoes all of sudden. These are perhaps the most dangerous volcanoes because people living in the vicinity of a dormant volcano may not understand the concept of geologic time. and there is no written record of activity. These people are sometimes difficult to convince when a dormant volcano shows signs ofrenewed activity. * Yellowstone Caldera would be considered a dormant volcano. * Mount St. Helens was considered as a dormant volcano, baving not erupted for 123 years, before its reawakening in 1980. * Mount Pinatubo in the Philippines had been dormant for over 400 years before its eruption in 1991. * Mount Vesuvius, near Naples, Italy was considered an extinct volcano prior to its devastatUlg eruption of 79 A.D. LONG : Term Forecas ting and Volcanic Hazards Studies * Studies of the geologic history of a volcano are generally necessary to make an assessment of the types of hazards posed by the volcano and the frequency at which these types of hazards have occurred in the past. * Once this information is avai lable. geologists can then make forecasts concerning what areas surrounding a volcano would be subject to the various kinds of activity should they occur in a future eruption. and also make forecasts about the long·term likelihood or probability of a volcanic eruption in the area. * During such studies, geologists examine sequences of layered deposits and lava flows. Armed with knowledge about the characteristics of deposits left by various types of eruption a, the past behavior of a volcano can be determined. * Using radiometric age dating of the deposits the past frequency of eve nts can be determined. * This information is then combined with knowledge about the present surface aspects of the volcano to make volcanic hazards maps which can aid other scientists, public officials, and the public at large to plan for evacuations. rescue and recovery in the event that. short· term prediction suggests another eruption. ., * Such hazards maps delineate zones of danger expected from the hazards discussed above: lava flow s, pyroclastic flow s, tephra falls, mudflows, flood s, etc.

SHORT-TERM PREDICTION BASED ONVOLCANIC MONITORING

Short-term prediction of volcanic eruptions involves monitoring the volcano to determine when magma is approaching the surface and monitoring for precursor events that. Often signal a forthcoming eruption. * Seismic Exploration and MonitorillgSince seismic waves are generated by both earthquakes and explosions, and since S-waves cannot pass through liquids, a rrays of seismographs can be placed around a volcano and small explosions can be set off to generate seismic waves. If a magma body exists beneath the vclcano, then there will l:.e zone were no S-waves arrive (an S-wave shadow zone) that can be detected. Monitoring the movement of the S-wave shadow zone can delineate the position and movement of the magma body. * Changes in Magnetic Field – Rocks contain minerals such as magnetite that are magnetic. Such magnetic minerals generate a magnetic field. However, above a temperature called the Curie Temperature, these magnetic minerals show no magnetism. Thus, if a magma body enters a volcano, the body itself will show no magnetism, and if it heats the surrounding rocks to temperatures greater than the Curie Temperature (about 500°C for magnetite) the magnetic field over the volcano · will be reduced. Thus, by measuring changes in the magnetic field, the movement of magma can sometimes be tracked. * Changes in Electrical Resistivity - Rocks have resistance to the flow of electrical current which is highly dependent on temperature and water content. As magma moves into a volcano this electrical resistivity will decrease. Making measurements of the electrical resistivity by placing electrodes into the ground, may allow tracking of the movement of magma. * Ground Deformation - As magma moves into a volcano, the structure may inflate. This will cause deformation of the ground, which can be monitored. Instruments like tilt meters measure changes in the angle of the Earth 's surface which are measured in microradians track changes in distance between several points on the ground to monitor deformation. * Changes in Groundwater System –As magma enters a volcano it may cause changes in the groundwater system, causing the water table to rise or fall and causing the temperature of the water to increase. By monitoring the depth to the water table in wells and the temperature of welJ water, spring water, or fum aroles, changes can be detected that many signify a change in the behaVior of the volcaOlc syste m. . Changes in Heat Flow - Heat IS everywhere flowing out of the surface of the Earth. As magma approaches the surface or as the temperature of groundwater increases, the amount of surface heat flow will increase. Although these changes may be smalJ they can be measured using infrared remote sensing. * Changes in Gas Compositions – The composition of gases emitted from volcanic vents and fumaroles often changes just prior to an eruption. In general, increases in the proportions of hydrogen chloride (Hel) and sulfur dioxide (SO2) are seen to increase relative to the proportion of water vapor.

UGC Environment IV

TSUNAMI A tsunami is a very long-wavelength wave of water that is generated by sudden displacement of the seafloor or disruption of any body of standing water. Tsunami are sometimes called "seismic sea waves", although, as we will see, they can be generated by mechanisms other than earthquakes. Tsunami have also been called "tidal waves", but this term should not be used because they are not in any way related to the tides of the Earth. Because tsunami occur suddenly, often without warning, they are extremely dangerous to coastal communities. PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF TSUNAMI All types of waves, including tsunami, have a wavelength, a wave height, an amplitude, a frequency or period, and a velocity. * Wavelength is defined as the distance between two identical points on a wave (i.e. between wave crests or wave troughs). Normal ocean waves have wavelE"ngths of about 100 meters. Tsunami have much longer wavelengths, usualJy measured in kilometers and up to 500 kilometers. * Wave height refers to the distance between the trough of the wave and the crest or peak of the wave, * Wave amplitude refers to the height of the wave above the still water line, usually this is equal to 112 the wave height. Tsunami can have variable wave heieht and amDlitude tha~ depends on water depth as well as moment. Wave frequency 0'" period Is the amount of time it takes for one full wavelength to pass a stationary point. * Wave velocity is the speed of the wave. Velocities of normal ocean waves are about 90 kmlhr while tsunami have velocities up to 950 kmIhr (about as fastasjetairplanes), and thus ' move much more rapidly across ocean basins. Tsunami are characterized as shallowwater waves. These are different from the waves most of us have observed on the beach, which are caused by the wind blowing across the ocean's surface. Wind-generated waves usually have period (time between two successive waves) of five to twenty seconds and a wavelength of 100 to 200 meters. A tsun.ami can have a period in the range often minutes .to two hours and wavelengths greater than 500 km. A wave is characterized as a shallowwater wave when the ratio of the water depth and waveleQ.gth is very small. The rate at which a wave loses its energy is inversely related to its wavelength. Since a tsunami has a very large wavelength, it will lose little energy as it propagates. Thus, in very deep water, a tsunami will travel at high speeds with little loss or energy. For example, when the ocean is 6100 m deep, a tsunami will travel about 890 kmlhr, and thus can travel across the Pacific Ocean in less than one day. As a tsunami leaves the deep water of the open sea and arrives at the shallow waters near the coast, it undergoes a transformation. Since the velocity cf the tsunami is also related to the water depth, as the depth of the water decreases, the velocity of the tsunami decreases. The change of total energy of the tsunami, however, remains constant. Furthermore, the period of the wave remains the same, and thus more water is forced between the wave crests causing the height of the wave to increase. Because of this "shoaling" effect, a tsunami that was imperceptible in deep water may grow to have wave heights of several meters or more. If the trough of the tsunami wave reaches the coast first, this catiSes a phenomenon called drawdown, where it appears that sea level has dropped considerably. Drawdown is followed immediately by the crest of the wave which can catch people observing the drawdown off guard. When the crestofthe wave hits, sea level rises (called run-uf». Run-up is usually expressed in meters above normal high tide. Run-ups frOOl the same tsunami can be variable because of the influence of the shapes of coastlines. One coastal area may see no damaging wave activity while in another area destructive waves can be large and violent. The flooding of an area can extend inland by 300 m or more, covering large areas of land with water and debris. Flooding tsunami waves tend to carry loose objects and people out to sea when they retreat. Tsunami may reach a maximum vertical height on shore above sea level, called a run-up height, of 30 meters. A notable exception is the landslide generated tsunami in Lituya Bay, Alaska in 1958 which produced a 60 meter high wave. HOW TSUNAMl ARE GENERATED? Most of the tsunami are generated by earthquakes that cause displacement of the seafloor, but, as we shall see, tsunami can be generated by volcanic eruptions, landslides, underwater explosions, and meteorite impacts.

EARTHQUAKES Earthquakes cause tsunami by causing a disturbance of the seafloor. Thus, earthquakes that occur along coastlines or anywhere beneath the oceans can generate tsunami. The size of the tsunami is usually related to the size of the earthquake, with larger tsunami generated by larger earthquakes. But the sense of displacement is also important. Tsunami is generally only formed when an earthquake causes vertical displacement of the seafloor. Because of this, most tsunami are generated by earthquakes that occur a long the subduction boundaries of plates, along the oceanic trenches . Since the Pacific Ocean is surrounded by plate boundaries of this type, earthquakes arOlmd the margins of the Pacific Ocean frequently generate tsunamis.

VOLCANIC ERUPTIONS

Volcanoes that occur along coastal wnes, like in Japan and island arcs throughout the world, can cause several effects that might generate a tsunami. Explosive eruptions can rapidly emplace pyroclastic flows into t he water; landslides and debris avalanches produced by eruptions can rapidly move into water, and collapse of volcanoes to form calderas can suddenly diElplace the water.

LANDSLIDES Landslides moving into oceans, bays, or lakes can also generate tsunami. Earthquakes or volcanic eruptions generate most such landslides.

UNDERWATER EXPLOSIONS

Nuclear testing by the United States in the Marshall Islands in the 1940s and 1950s generated tsWlami. METEORITE IMPACTS

While no historic examples of meteorite impacts are known to have produced a tsunami, the apparent impact of a meteorite at the end of the Cretaceous Period, about 65 million years ago near the tip of what is now t he Yucatan Peninsula of Mexico, produced tsunami that left deposits all along the Gulf coast of Mexico and the United States.

MITIGATION OF RISKS AND HAZARDS

The main damage from tsunami comes from the destructive nature of the waves themselves. Secondary effects include the debris acting as projectiles which then run into other objects, erosion that can undermine the foundations of structures built along coastlines, and fires that result from disruption of gas and electrical lines. Tertiary effects include loss of crops and water and electrical systems, which can lead to famine and disease.

PREDICTION AND EARLY WARNING

For areas located at great distances from earthquakes that could potentially generate a tsunami there is usually plenty of time for warnings to be sent and coastal areas evacuated, even though tsunami travel at high velocities across the oceans. Hawaii is a good example of an area located far from most of the sources of tsunami, where early warning is possible and has saved lives. For earthquakes occurring anywhere on the subduction margins of the Pacific Ocean there is a minimum of 4 hours of warning before a tsunami would strike any of the Hawaiian Islands. The National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) has set up a Pacific warning system for areas in the Pacific Ocean, called the Pacific Tsunami Warning Center. MASS- WASTING AND MASSWASTING PROCESSES MASS-WASTING AND ITS HUMAN IMPACTS Mass-Wasting is defined as the down slope movement ofrock and regolith near the Earth's surface mainly due to the force of gravity. Mass-wasting is an important part of the erosional process, as it moves material from higher elevations to lower elevations where transporting agents like streams and glaciers can then pick up the material and move it to even lower elevations. Mass-wasting processes are occurring continuously on all slopes; some mass-wasting processes act very slowly, others occur very suddenly, often with disastrous results. Any perceptible down slope movement ofrock or regolith is often referred to in general terms as a landslide. However, as we will see, landslides can be classified in a much more detailed way that reflects the mechanisms responsible for the movement and the velocity at which the movement occurs. As human populations expand and occupy more and more of the land surface, masswasting processes become more likely to affect humans. Knowledge about the t'elationships between local geology and mass-wasting processes can lead to better planning that can reduce vulnerability to such hazards. Thus, we will look at the various types of mass-wasting processes, their underlying causes, factors that affect slope stability, and what humans can do to reduce vulnerability and risk due to masswasting hazards.

TYPES OF MASS-WASTING PROCESSES

The down-slope movement of material, whether it be bedrock, regolith, or a mixture of these, is commonly referred to as a landslide. All ofthese processes generally grade into one another, so classification of such processes is somewhat difficult. We will use a classification that divides mass-wasting processes into two broad categories. * Slope Failures - a sudden failure of the slope resulting in transport of debris down hill by sliding, rolling, falling, or slumping. * Sediment Flows - debris flows down hill m.ixed with water or air. SLOPE FAILURES * Slumps - types of slides wherein downward rotation of rock or regolith occurs along a concave-upward curved surface (rotational slides). The upper surface of each slump block remains relatively undisturbed, as do the individual blocks. Slumps leave arcuate scars or depressions on the hill slope. Slumps can be isolated or may occur in large complexes covering thousands of square meters. They often form as a result ofhurnan activities, and thus are common along roads where slopes have been oversteepened during construction. They are also common along river banks and sea coasts, where erosion has under-cut the slopes. Heavy rains and earthquakes can also trigger slumps. * Falls - Rock faUs occur when a piece of rock on a steep slope becomes dislodged and fallg down the slope. Debris falls are similar. Except they involve a mixture of soil, regolith, vegetation, .and rocks. A rock fall may be a single rock or a mass of rocks, and the falling rocks can dislodge other rocks as they collide with the cliff. Because this process involves the free fall of material, falls commonly occur where there are steep cliffs_ At the base of most cliffs is an accumulation of fallen material termed talus. * Slides - Rock slides and debris slides result when rocks or debri::; slide down a preexisting surface, such as a bedding plane, foliation surface, or joint surface GointB are regularly spaced fractures in rock that result from expansion during cooling or uplift of the rock maBB). Piles of talus are common at the base of a rock slide or debris slide. Slides differ from slumps in that there is no rotation of the sliding rock mass along a curved surface. * Sediment Flows- Sediment flows occur when sufficient force is applied to rocks and regolith that they begin to flow down slope. A sediment flow is a mixture of rock, and/or regolith with some water or air. They can be broken into two types depending on the amount of water present. 1. Slurry Flows- are sediment flows that contain between abou~ 20 llnd 40% water. As the water content increases above about 40% slurry flows grade inlo streams. Slurry flows are considered as water-saturated flows. 2. Granular 'Flows - are sediment flows that contain between 0 and 20% water. Note that granular flows are possible with little or no water. Fluid-like behavior is given these flows by mixing with air. Granular flows are not. saturated with water. Each of these classes of sediment flows can be further subdivided on the basis of the velocity at which flowage occurs * Slurry Flows o Solifluction - flowage at rates measured on the order of centimeters per year of regolith containing water. Solifluction produces distinctive lobes on hill slopes. These occur in areas where the soil remains saturated with water for long periods of time. o Debris Flows - these occur at higher velocities than solifluction, with velocities between 1 meterlhr and 100 meters/hr and often result from heavy rains causing saturation of the soil and regolith with water. They sometimes start with slumps and then flow down hill forming lobes with an irregular surface consisting of ridges and furrows. o Mudflows - these are a highly fluid, high velocity mixture of sediment and water that has a consistency ranging between soup-like and wet concrete. They move at. velocities greater than 1 kmlhr and tend to travel along valley floor s. These usually result from heavy rains in areas where ther~ is an abundance of unconsolidated sediment that can be picked up by streams. Thus after a heavy rain, streams can turn into mudflows as they pick up more and more loose sediment. Mudflows can travel for long distances over gently sloping stream beds. Because of their high velocity and long distance of travel they are potentially very dangerous. As we have seen, mudflows can also result from volcanic eruptions t hat cause melting of snow or ice on the slopes of volcanoes, or draining of crater lakes on volcanoes. Volcanic mudflows are often referred to as lahars. Some lahars can be quite hot, if they are generated as a result of eruptions of hot tephra. * Granular Flows o Creep - the very slow, usually continuous movement of regolith down slope. Creep occurs on almost all slopes, hut the rates vary. Evidence for creep is often seen in bent trees, offsets in roads and fences, and inclined utility poles. o Em·thflows - are usually associated with heavy rains and move at velocities between several cmlyr and 100s ofm/day. They usually r emain active for long periods of time. They generally tend to be narrow tongue· like features that begin at a scarp or sOl all cliff. o Grain Flows - usually form in relatively dry material, such as a sand dune, on a steep slope. A small disturbance sends the dry unconsolidated grains moving rapidly down slope. o Debris Avalanches - These are very high velocity flows of la rge volume mixtures of rock and regolith that result from complete collapse of a mountainous slope. They move down slope and then can travel for considerable distances along relatively ge ntle slopes. They are often triggered by earthquakes and volcanic eruptions.

MASS-WASTING IN COLD CLIMATES

Mass·wasting in GOld climates is governed by the fact that water is frozen as ice duri.ng long periods of the year. Ice, although it is solid, does have the ability to flow, and freezing and thawing cycles can also contribute to movement. * Frost Heaving - this process is large contributor to creep in cold clim ates. When water saturated soils freeze, they expand, pushing rocks and boulders on the surface upward perpendicular to the slope. When the soil thaws, the boulders move down vertically resulting in a net down slope movement. * Geliflu.ction - Similar to solifluction, this process occurs when the upper layers of soil thaw during the warmer months resulting in water saturated soil that moves down slope. * Roell Glaciers - a lobe of ice·cemented rock debris (mostly rocks with ice between the blocks) that slowly moves downhill. SUBAQUEOUS MASS-WASTING Mass wasting processes also occur on steep slopes in the ocean basins. A slope failure can occur due to over·accumulation of sediment on slope or in a submarine canyon. 01' could occur as a result of a shock like an earthquake. Slumps, debris flows, and landslides are common.

FACTORS THAT INFLUENCE SLOPE STABILITY GRAVITY

The main force responsible for mass wasting is gr avity. Gravity is the force that acts everywhere on the Earth's surface, pulling everything in a direction toward the center of the Earth. On a flat surface the force of gravity acts downward. So long as the material remains on the flat surface it will not move under the force of gravity. On a slope, the force of gravity can be resolved into two components: a component acting perpendicular to the slope and component acting tangential to the slope. THE ROLE OF WATER Although water is not always directly involved as the transporting medium in mass·wasting processes, it does play an important role. Dry unconsolidated grains will form a pile with a slope angle determ ined by the angle of repose. The angle of repose is the steepest angle at which a pile of unconsolidated grains remains stable, and is controlled by the frictional contact between the gr ains. In general. for dry mater ials the angle of repose increases with increasing grain size, but usually lies between about 30° and 37°. Slightly wet unconsolidated materials exhibit a very high angle of repose because surface tension between the water and the solid grains tends to hold the grains in place. When the material becomes saturated with water, the angle of repose is reduced to very small values and the material tends to flow like a fluid. This.is because the water gets between the grains and eliminates ~rain - to-grain frictional contact. Another aspect of water that affects slope stability is fluid pressure. In some cases fluid pressure can build in such a way that water can support the weight of the overlying rock mass. When this occurs, friction is reduced, and thus the shear strength holding the material on the slope is also reduced, resulting in slope failure. TROUBLESOME EARTH MATERIALS * Liquefaction - Liquefaction occurs when loose sediment becomes oversaturated with water and individual grains loose grain to grain contact with one another as water gets between them. * Expansive and Hydrocompacting Soils - These are soils that contain a high proportion of a type of clay mineral called smectites or montmorillinites. Such clay minerals expand when they become wet as water enters the crystal structure and increases the volume of the mineral. When such clays dry out, the loss of water causes the volume to decrease and the clays to shrink or compact (This process is referred to as hydrocompaction). * Sensitive Soils - In some soils the clay minerals are arranged in random fashion, with much pore space between the individual grains. This is often referred to as a "house of cards" structure. Often the grains are held in this position by salts precipitated in the pore space that "glue" the particles together. But this may cause a loss in shear strength of the soil and result in slippage down slope or liquefaction. This is referred to as remolding. Clays that are subject to r.emolding are called quick clays. Some clays, called thixotropic clays, when left undisturbed can strengthen. but wben disturbed they loose their shear strength.

TRIGGERING EVENTS

A mass-wasting event can occur any time a slope becomes unstable. Sometimes, 8S in the case of creep or solifluction. the slope is unstable all of the time and the process is continuous. But other times, triggering events can occur that cause 8 sudden instability to occur. * Shoclls - A sudden shock, such as an earthquake may trigger slope instability. Minor shocks like heavy trucks rambling down the road, trees blowing in the wind, or human made explosions can also trigger mass-wasting events. * Slope Modification - Modification of a slope either by humans or by natural causes can result in changing the slope angle so that it is no longer at the angle of repose. A masswasting event can tben restore the slope to its angle of repose. * Undercutting - Streams eroding their banks or surf action along a coast can undercut a slope making it unstable. * Changes in. Hydrologic Characteristic & Heavy rains can saturate regolith reducing grain to grain contact and reducing the angle of repose, thus triggering a mass-wasting event. Heavy rains can also saturate rock and increase its weight. Changes in the groundwater system can increase or decrease fluid pressure in rock and also trigger masswasting events. * Volcanic Eruptions - Produce shocks like explosions and earthquakes. They can also cause snow to melt or empty crater lakes, rapidly releasing large amounts of water that can be mixed with regolith to reduce grain to grain contact and result in debris flows. mudflows. and landslides.

ASSESSING AND MITIGATING MASSWASTING HAZARDS

As we have seen mass-wasting events can be extremely hazardous and result in extensive loss of life and property. But, in most cases. areas that are prone to such hazards can be recognized with some geologic knowledge. slopes can be stabilized or avoided, and warning systems can be put in place tbat can minimize such hazards. * Because there is usually evidence in the form of distinctive deposits and geologic structures left by recent mass wasting events, it is possible, if resources are available, to construct maps of all areas prone to possible mass-wasting hazards. Planners can use such hazards maps to make decisions about land use policies in such areas or, as will be discussed below, steps can be taken to stabilize slopes to sttempt to prevent a disaster. Short-term prediction of mass-wasting events is somewhat more problematical. For earthquake triggered events, t he same problems that are inherent in earthquake prediction are present. Slope destabilization and undercutting triggered events require the constant attention of those undertaking or observing the slopes, many of whom are not educated in the problems inherent in such processes. Mass-wasting hazards from volcanic eruptions can be predicted with the same degree of certainty that volcanic eruptions can be predicted, but again, the threat has to be realized and warnings need to be heeded. Hydrologic conditions such as heavy precipitation can be forecast with some certainty, and warnings can be issued to areas that might be susceptible to mass-wasting processes caused by such conditions. Still, it is difficult to know exactly which hill slope of the millions that exist will be vulnerable to an event triggered by heavy rainfall. * Prevention and l\Ilitigation All slopes are susceptible to mass-wasting hazards if a triggering event occurs. Thus, all slopes should be asscssed for potential masswasting hazards. Mass-wasting eve nts can sometimes be avoided by employing engineering techniques to make the s lope more stable. Among them are: o Steep slopes can be covered or sprayed with concrete to prevent rock falls. o Retaining walls could be built to stabilize a slope. o Drainage pipes could be inserted into the slope to more easily allow water to get out and avoid increases in fluid pressure, the po88ibility of liquefaction, or increased weight'due to the addition of water. o Oversteepened slopes could be graded to reduce the slope to the natural angle of repose. o In mountain valleys subject to mudflows, plans could be made to rapidly lower levels of water in human-made reservoirs to catch and trap the mudflows. Some slopes, however, cannot be stabilized. In t hese cases, huml).ns should avoid these areas or use them for purposes that will not increase susceptibility of lives or property to mass-wasting hazards.

FLOODING HAZARDS, PREDICTION & HUMAN INTERVENTION HAZARDS ASSOCIATED WITH FLOODING

Hazards associated with flooding can be divided into primary hazards that occur due to contact with water, secondary effects that occur because of the flooding , such as disruption of services, health impacts such as famine and disease, and tertiary effects such as changes in the position of river chaDllels. Throughout the last century flooding has been one of the most. costly disasters in terms of both property damage and human casualties. Primary Effects: Again, the primary effecta of floods are those due to direct contact with the flood waters. Water velocities tend to be high in floods. As discharge increases velocity increases. * With higher velocities, streams are able to transport larger particles as suspended load. Such large particles include not only rocks and sediment, but, during a flood , could include such large objlO'cts as automobiles, houses and bridges. * Massive amounts of erosion can be accomplished by flood waters. Such erosion can undermine bridge structures, levees. And buildings causing their collapse. * Water entering human built structures cause water damage. Even with minor flooding of homes, furniture is ruined, floors and walls are damaged, and anything that comes in 185 UGC~JRF (Paper 1}-24 contact with the water is likely to be damaged or lost. Flooding of automobiles usually resul ts in damage that cannot easily be repaired. * The high velocity of flood waters allows the water to carry more sediment as suspended load. When the flood waters retreat, velocity is generally much lower and sediment is deposited. After retreat of the floodwaters, everything is usually covered with a thick layer of stream deposited mud, including the interior ofbutldings. * Flooding of farmland usually results in crop 10s8. Livestock, pets, and other animals are often carried away and drown. * Humans that get caught in the high velocity flood waters a re often drowned by the water. * Floodwaters can concentrate garbage, debris, and toxic pollutants tbat can cause the secondary effects of health hazal'ds. Secondary and Tertiary Effects: Secondary effects are those that occur because of the primary effects and tertiary effects are the longterm changes that take place. Among the secondary effects or a flood are: * Disruption of serviceso Drinking water supplies may become polluted, especially if sewerage treatment plants are flooded. This delay result in disease and other health effects, especially in under developed countries. o Gas and electrical service may be diarupted. o Transportation systems may be disrupted, resulting in shortages of food and clean-up supplies. In under developed countries food shortages often lead to starvation. * Long - term effects (tertiary effects)- o Location of river channels may change as the result of flooding, new channels develop, leaving the old channels dry. a Sediment deposited by flooding may destroy farm land (although silt deposited by floodwaters could also help to increase agricultural productivity). o Jobs may be lost due to the disruption of services, destruction of business, etc. (although jobs may be gained in the construction industry to help rebuild or repair flood damage). o Insurance rates may increase. o Corruption may result from misuse of relief funds. o Destruction of wildlife habitat. PREDICTING RIVER FLOODING Floods can be such devastating disasters that anyone can be affected at allllost anytime. As we have seen, when water falls on the s\ITface ofthe Earth, it has to go somewhere. In order to reduce the risk due to flood s, three main approaches are taken to flood prediction. Statistical studies can be undertaken to attempt to determine the probability and frequency of high discharges of streams that cause flooding. Floods can be lllodeled and maps can be made to determine the extent of possible flooding when it occurs in the future. And, since the main causes of flooding are abnormal, amounts of rainfall and sudden thawing of snow or ice, storms and snow levels can be monitored to provide short-term flood prediction. Monitoring the Progress of Storms: If factors such as amount of rainfall, degree of ground saturation, degree of permeable soil, and amount of vegetation can be determined, then these can be correlated to give short-term prediction. in this case called a forecast. Of possible flood s. If a forecast is issued, then a flood warning can be communicated to warn the public about the possible extent of the flood, and to give people time to move out of the area. Such forecasts are very useful for flooding that has a long lag time between the storm and the peak disch &...-ge. Flash floods, wpich characteristically have s hort. lag times, are more problematical. Thus, in some areas known to be susceptible to flash floods, a flash flood warning is often issued any time heavy rainfall is expected because there is always the chance of a nash nood accompanying heavy rainfall.

HUMAN INTERVENTION

Humans can modify Lhe landscape in many ways. Sometimes humans attempt to modify drainage systems to prevent flooding, but sometimes these efforts have adverse effects and at:tually help to cause nooding in ether areas. Any modification of the landscape has the potential to cause changes in the drainage system. and such changes can have severe consequences.

CHANNEL MODlFICATIONS

Humans onen decide lhata stream should now along a specified path for such reasons as nood control. enhancement of drainage. control of erosion. increasing access to the floodplain for development, or improvement of the appearance of the channel. uch channel modifications involve measures such as the straightening the channel, deepening or widening the channel, clea ring vegetation from the banks, or lining the channel with concrete. These modifications are referred to as channelization. * Channelization can also interfere with t.he natural habitat of the stream system and decrease the 8csthetic value of the stream. * Channeliz.ntion. or any other modification of a stream system. changes the validity of all historic data collected over the years on that. stream. Effects of Development on Flood Hazard: Whenever humans modify the landscape in any way, changes are to be expected in the way water drains from the land. Unless ca rerul consideration is given to the possible drainage consequences, such landscape modifications can result in higher incidence of flooding. Development on floodplains should therefore be undertaken only with great ca re. Existing developments that have enhanced nooding problems are often costly to fix. Among the fa ctors that enhance the flood potential are: * Channelization - Channelization is undertaken to reduce nood hazards. But, channelization IS a.lso undertaken to allow development on the floodplain. lf the channelization results in decreasing the cross-sectional area of the stream. as in the example above, then the same discharge that may not have produced flooding prior to channelization, may overnow the banks and cause extensive flooding anE'rchannelization. * Subsidence - Subsidence often results in developed areas due to compaction of the sediment. both due to the increasing weight of structures and hydrocompaction associated with the lowering of the water table. Any time the elevation of nn area is lowered. it becomes subject to collection of more water, and in severe cases, could drastically change the drainage pattern. * Storm Sewers- In order to collect run off from streets, parking lots. and buildings. all of which block the inftitration of water into the soi1, storm sewers are installed to provide underground drainage of the surface. While this may prevent local flooding of street.s, it moves water more rapidly to the major stream systems and thus decreases the lag time anel increases the peak discharge of the streams collecting the run off from the storm sewers. * Reduction of infiltration - Any time the surface materials of the Earth are covered with impermeable materials like concrete, asphalt, or buildings. the infiltration of water into the soil is prevented. Urbanization tends to reduce inflitration. and thus water mustoollect in storm sewers and eventually in the main droinage systems. Thus. Extensive urbanization also decreases the lag time and increases the peak dIscharge even further. Urbanization can therefore lead to a higher incidence or flash floods. Organized Response to Flood Hazards: Response to flood hazards can be attempted in two main ways: An engineering approach. lO control nooding, and a regulatory approach designed to decrease vulnerability to flooding. * Engineering Approaches • Channel modifications – As discussed above, channelization can enlarge cross-sectional area and thus create a situation where a higher stage is necessary before flooding. In other words by enlarging the cross-sectional area, higher discharge can be held within the channel. Channelization also increases water velocity, and thus reduces drainage time. • Dams _ Dams can be used to bold water back 80 that discharge downstream can be regulated at a desired rate. Human constructed dams have spillways that can be opened to reduce the level of water in the reservoir behind the dam. Thus, the water lp.vel can be lowered prior to a heavy rain, and more water call·be trapped in the reservoir and released later at a controlled discharge. • Retention ponds - Retention ponds serve a similar purpose to dams. Water can be trapped in a retention pond and then released ata controlled discharge to prevent flooding downstream. • Levees, DOles, and FloodwaUs - These are structures built along side the channel to increase the stage at which the stream floods. Some controversy has developed concerning the use of such structures. • Floodways - Floodways are areas that can be built to provide an outlet to a stream and allow its flood into an area that has been designated as a floodway. Floodways are areas where no construction is allowed, and where the land is used for agricultural or recreational purposes when there is no threat of a nood, but which provide an outlet for flood watera during periods of high discharge.

REDUCTION OF VULNERABILITY

With a better underatanding of the behavior of streams, the probability of flooding, and areas likely to be flooded during high discharge, humans can undertake measures to reduce vulnerability to flooding. Among the non· structural measures a re: • Floodplain zoning • Floodplain building codes • Floodplain buyout programs • Mortgage limitations METEORITES, IMPACTS, AND MASS EXTINCTION METEORITES A Meteorite is a piece of rack from outer space that strikes the surface of the Earth. A Meteoroid is a meteorite before it hits the surface of the Earth. Meteors are glowinglragments of rack matter from outside the Earth's atmosphere that burn and glow upon ente ring the Earth's at.mosphere. They are more commonly known as shooting stara. Some meteors, particularly larger ones, may survive passage thrnugb the atmosphere to become meteorites, but most are small objects that burn up completely in the atmosphere. They a re not, in reality, shooting stars. Fireballs al'e very bright meteers .. Meteor Showers - During certain times oft.he year, the Earth's orbit passcs through a belt of high concentration of cosmic dust and other particles, and many meteors are observed. The Perseid Shower, results from passage through one o(these beltaevery year in mid·August, and Leonid shower occurs in mid-November. Throughout history there have been reports of stones falling (rom the SKY, but the scientific community did n ot recognize t he extraterrestrial origin of meteorites until the 1700s. Within recent history meteorites have even hit humans- * 1938 - a small meteorite crashed t.hrough the roof of a garage in Illinois. * 1954 . a 5kg meteorite fell through the roof of a house in Alabama. * 1992. a small meteorite demolished a car near New York city. 2003· a 20 kg meteorite crashed through a double story house in uptown New Orleans. * 20Q3 . 8 shower of meteorites destroys several houses and injures 20 people in India. Meteorite fragments have been found all over the surface of the Earth. Although most have been found in Antarctica. In Antarctica they are easily seen on the snow covered su rface or embedded in ice. The fall of meteol'ites to the E,arth's surface is part of the continuing process of accretion of the Earth from the dust and rock of space. When these rock fragments come close enough to the Earth to be attracted by its gravity they may fall to the Earth to become part of it. The evolution of life on the Earth has likely been affected by collisions with these space objects, and collisions could affect the Earth in the future as well.

UGC Environment V

COMPOSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF METEORITES

Meteorites can be classified generally into three types: * Stones - Stony meteorites resemble rocks found on and within the Earth. They are the most common type of meteorite, although because they resemble Earth rocks they are not commonly recognized as meteorites unless someone actually witnesses their fall. Stony meteorites are composed mainly of the minerals olivine, and pyroxene. Some have a composition that is roughly equivalent to the Earth's mantle. Two types are recognized: o Chondrites - Chondrites are the most common type of stony- meteorite. They are composed of small round glassy looking spheres, ca lled chondrules, that likely formed from condensation from the gaseous solar nebula early in the history of the formation oft.he solar system. Most. chondrites have radiometric age dates of about. 4.6 billion years. o Achondrites -Achondrites are composed of the same minerals as chondrites, but lack the chondrules. They appear to have been heated, melted. and recrystallized so that the chondrules are no longer present. Most resemble volcanic rocks found on the Earth's su rface. * Irons - Iron meteorit.es are composed of alloys of iron and nickel. They are easily recognized because they hav(l a much higher density than normal crustal rocks. Thus, most. meteorites found by the general populace nrc iron meteorites. When cut and polished, iron meteorites show a distinct texture called a Widmanstatten pat.tern. This pattern results from slow cooling of a once hot solid material. Most researchers suggest that such slow cooling occurred in the core of much larger body that. has since been fragmented. Iron meteorites give us a clue to the composition of the Earth's core. * Stony IrOI1S - Stony iron meteorites consist of a mixture of stony silicate material and iron. Some show the silicates embedded in a matri'( of iron· nickel alloy. Others occur as a breecif', where fragments of stony and iron material have been cemented together by either heat or chemical reactions. Origin of Meteorites: MOSL meteorites appear to be fragments of larger bodies called parent bodies. These t:ouJd have been small planets or' large asteroids that were part of the original solar system. There are several possibilities as to where t.hese parent bodies. Or their fragments. originated. The Aste roid Belt: The asteroid belt is located between the orbits of Mars and Jupiter. It consists of a swarm of aboul 100,000 objects eaBed asteroids. Asteroids are small rocky bodies with irregular shapes t.hat have a cratered surface. About 4.000 of these asteroids have been officially classified and their orbital paths are known. Once they are so classified t.hey are given a name. The asteroids are either remnants of a planet that. formed in the region between Mars and Jupiter but was later broken up by a collision with another planetary body, or are fragments that failed lO accrete into a planet. The latler possibiljty is more likely because the total mass of the asteroids is not even equal to our moon. It does appear that some of the asteroids are large enough to have undergone internal differentiation. Di.!1'erentiation is a process that forms layering in II planetary body (i.e. the Earth has differentiated into a core, man tIe, and crust). If these larger asteroids did in fact undergo djfferentiation, then this could explain the origin of the different types of meteorites. Because of the shapes of the asteroids it also appears that some of them have undergone fragmentation resulting from collisions with other asteroids. Such collisions could have caused the larger bodies to be broken up into the smaller objects we observe as meteorites. The Asteroids as Parent Bodies of Meteorites: Much evidence suggests that the asteroids could be the parent bodies of met.eorit.es. The larger ones could have differentiated into a core, mantle. and crust. Fragmentation of these large bodies wou Id then have done two things: First the fragments would explain the various types of meteorites found on Earth· the st"nes representing the mantle and crust. of the original parent body, the irons representing the cores. and the stony irons the boundary between the core and mantIe of the parent bodies. Second, the collisions thllt caused the fragmentation could send the fragments into Earth·crossing orbits. Some of the asteroids have orbits that bring them close to Earth. These are called Arnor objects. Some have orbital paths that cross the orbital path of the Earth. These are called Earth·crossing asteroids or Apollo objects. All objects that have a close approach to the Earth are often referred to as Near Earth Objects or NEOs. About 150 NEOs with diameters between 1 and 8 km are known, but this is only a fraction of the lOtal number. Many NEOs will eventually collide with the Earth. These objects h&ve unstable orbits because they are under the gravitational influence of both t.he Earth a.nd Mars. The source of these objects is likely the asteroid belt..

COMETS AS PARENT BODIES OF METEORITES

A Comet is a body t.hatorbits around the Sun with an eccentric orbit. These orbits are not circular like those of the planets and are not necessarily within the same plane as the planets. Most comets have elliptical orbits which send them to the far outer reaches of the solar system and back toward a closer approach to the sun. As a comet approaches the sun, solar radiation generates gases from evaporation of the comet's surface. These gases are pushed away "rom the comet and glow in the sun light, thus giving the comet its tail. While the outer surface of comets appear to composed of icy material like water and cal'oon dioxide solids, they likely contain a Illore rocky nucleus. Because of their eccentric orbits, many comets eventually cross the orbit of the Earth. Many meteor showers may be caused by the Earth crossing an orbit of a fragmented comet. The collision of a cometary fragment is thought to have occurred in the Tunguska region of Siberia in 1908. The blast was about the size of a 15 megaton nuclear bomb. It knocked down trees in an area about 850 square miles, but did not leave a crater. The consensus among scientists is that a cometary fragment about 20 to 60 meters in diameter exploded in the Earth's atmosphere just above the Earth's surface. Only small amounts of material similar to meteorites were found embedded in trees at the site. Other Sources: While the asteroid belt seems like the most likely source of meteorites. some meteorites appear to have come from other places. Some meteorites have chemical compositions similar to samples brought back from the moon. Others are thought to have originated on Mars. These types of meteol'ites could have been ejected from the Moon or Mars by collisions with other asteroids. or from Mars by volcanic eruptions.

IMPACT EVENTS

When a large object impacts the surface of the Earth. the rock at the site of the impact. Is deformed and some of it is ejected into the atmosphe re to eventually fall back to the surface. This results in a bowl s haped depression with a raised rim, called an Impact Crater. The s ize of the impact crater de pends on such factors as the size and ve locity of the impacting object and the angle at which it strikes the surface of the Earth. Me te~rite Flux and Size Meteorite flux is the total mass of extraterrestrial objects that strike the Earth. This is currently about 107 to 109 kg/year. Much of this material is dust-sized objects called micrometeorites. The frequency at which meteorites of different sizes strike the Earth depends on the size of the objects. Meteorites of larger sizes s trike the Earth less frequently. If they have a size greater than about 2 or 3 cm, they only partially melt or vaporize on passage through the atmosphere, and thus strike the surface of the Earth. Objects with sizes greater than 1 km a re considered to produce effects that would be catastrophic, because an impact of such an object would produce global effects. Such meteorites strike the Earth relatively infrequently· a 1 km sized object strikes the Earth about once every million years, and 10 km sized objects about once every 100 million years Ve locity and Energy Release of Incoming Objects: The velocities at which small meteorites bave impacted the Earth range from 4 to 40 km/sec. Larger objects would not be slowed down much by the friction associated with passage through the atmosphere, and thus would impact the Earth with high veloci ty. Calculations show that a meteorite with a diameter of 30 m, weighing about 300,000 tons, traveling at a velocity of 15 km/sec (33,500 mileslhour) would re lease energy equivalent to about 20 million tons of TNT. Such a meteorite struck at Meteor Crater, Arizona (the Barringer Crater) about 49,000 years ago leaving a crater 1200 m In diameter and 200 m deep. Cr a tered Surfaces: Looking at the surface of the Moon, one is impressed by the fact that most of the surface features of the moon are shaped by impact craters. The Earth is subject to more than twice the amount of impacting events than the moon because of its larger size and higher gravitational attraction. Yet, the Earth does not show a cratered surface li ke the moon. The reason for this is that the surface of the Earth is continually changing due to processes like erosion, weathering, tectonism, sedimentation. a nd volcanism. Thus, the only craters that are evident on the Eart.h are either very young, very large, or occurred on stable continental areas that have not been subject to intense surface modification processes. Currently, approximately 200 terrestrial impact structures have been ident ified, with the discovet'y rate of new structures in the range of 3-5 per year. The Mechanics of lmpnct Cratering: When a large extraterrestrial object enters the Ea rth's atmosphere the initial impact with the atmosphere will compress the atmosphere, se nding a s hock wave through the ai r. Frictional heating will cause the object to heat and glow. Melting and even vaporization of the outer parts of the object will begin, but if the object is large enough, solid material wil! remain when it impacts the surface of the Earth.

METEORITE IMPACTS AND MASS EXTINCTIONS

The impact of a space object with a size greatet' than about 1 km would be expected to be felt over the entire surface of the Earth. Smaller objects would certainly destroy the ecosystem in the vicinity of the impact. similar to the effects . of a volcanic eruption, but larger impacts could have a worldwide effe<:t on life on the Earth. We will here first consider the possible effects of an impact, and lhen discuss how impacts may have resulted in mass extinction of species on the Earth in the past. Regional and Global Effects: Again, we 8S humans have no firsthand knowledge of what the effects of an impact of a large meteorite or comet would be. Still, calculations can be made and scaled experiments can be conducted to estimate the effects. The general consensus is summarized here. 1. Massive earthquake up to Richter Magnitude 13, and numerous large magnitude, aftershocks would result from the impact of a large object with the Earth. 2. The large quantities of dust put into the atmosphere would block incoming solar radiation. The dust could take mont.hs to settle back to the surface. Meanwhile. The Earth would be in a state of continual darkness. and temperatures would drop throughout. the world, generating global winter like conditions. A similar effect has been postulated for the aftermath of a nuclear war (termed a nuclear winter). Blockage of solar radiation would also diminish the ability of photosynthetic organisms, like plants, to photosynt.hesize. Since photosynthetic organisms are the: base of the food chain, this would seriol1sly disrupt. all ecosystems. 3. Widespread wildfires ignited by radiation from the fireball as the object passed t;hrough the atmosphere would be generated. Smoke from these fires would further block solar radiation to enhance the cooling effect and further disrupt photosynthesis. 4. If the impact occurred in the oceans, a large steam cloud would be produced by the sudden evaporation of the seawater. This water vapor and CO2 would remain in the atmosphere long after the dust settles. Both of these gases are greenhouse gases which scatter solar radiation and create ~ warming effect. Thus, ~fter the initial global cooling, the atmosphere would undergo global warming for many years after the impact. 5. lfthe impact occurred in the oceans. Giant tsunamis would be generated. For a 10 km·diameter object., the leading edge would hit the seafloor of the deep ocean basins before the top of the object had reached sea level. The tsunami from such an impact is estimated to produce waves from 1 to S km high. These could easily flood the interior of continents. 6. Large amounts of n.itrogen oxides would result from combining Nitrogen and Oxygen in the atmoRphere due to the shock produced by the impact. These nitrogen oxides would combine with water in the atmosphere to produce nitric acid which would fall back to the surface as acid rain, resulting in the acidification of surface waters. The Geologic Record of Mass Extinction: It hsslong been known that extinction of large percentages families or species of organisms have occurred at specific times in the history of our planet. Among the mechanisms that have been suggested to have caused these mass extinctions, have been large volcaniceruptions, changes in climatic conditions, changes in sea level, and, more recently, meteorite i.mpacts. While the meteorite impact theory of mass extinctions has become accepted by many scientists for particular extinction events, there is sti ll considerable controversy among scientists. An impact with a large object could have caused at least some of the mass extinction events, as it would certainly seem possible given the effects that an impact could have. Human Hazards: It should be clear that even if an impactofa large space object did not cause the extinction of humans, the effects would cause a natural disaster of proportions never witnessed by the human race. Here we first look at the chances that such an impact could occur, then look at how we can predictor provide warning of such an event, BDd finally discuss ways that we might be able to protect ourselves from such an event. Risk - It is estimated that in any given year the odds that you will die from an impact of an asteroid or comet are about 1 in 20,000. Prediction a n d Warning - It i$ estimated that over 90% of NEOs have not yet been discovered. Because of t.his. with our present knowledge. there is a good chance that the only warning we would have is the flash of light from the fireball as one of these objects ent.ered the Earth's atmosphere. Scientists have proposed the "Spaceguard Survey" to find and track a ll of t.he large NEOs. If such a survey is carried out, we could predict the paths of all NEOs and have years to decades to prepare for an NEO that could impact the Earth. Mitigation -Impacts are the only natural hazard that we ca.n prevent from happening by either deflecting the incoming object or destroying it. Of course, we must first know about such objects and their paths in order to give us sufficient warning to prepare a defense.

FORESTS OF INDIA

The 'jungles' oflnma are ancient in nature and composition. They are rich in variety and shelter a wide range of avifauna and mammals and insects. The fact that they have existed for very long time is proved from the ancient text.s all of which have some mention of the forests. The people revered forests and a large number of religious ceremonies centred on trees and plants. Even today in parts ofIndia the sacred groves exist and are worshipped. During the early part of the British rule, trees were used for timber and forests were cut for paper. Large numbers of trees such as sal. teak. And sandalwood were cut. for export also. The history of modern Indian forestry was a process by which the British gradually appropriated forest resources for revenue generation. Trees could not be felled without prior permission and knowledge of the authority. This step was taken to ensure that they were the sale users of the forest trees. But. after some time, the British began to regulate and conserve. In 1800. a commissioner was appointed to look into the availability of teak in thf' Malabariorests. In 1806, the Madras government appointed Capt. Watson as the commissioner of forests for organizing the production of teak and other timber suitable for the buiJding of ships. In 1855. Lord Dalhousie framed regulations for conservation of forest in the entire country. Teak plantations were raised in the Malabar hills and acacia and eucalyptus in the Niligiri Hills. In Bombay. the conservator of forest, Gibson, tried to introduce rules prohibiting shifting cultivation and plantation of teak forests. From 1865lo 1894. forest reserves were established to secure material for imperial needs. From the 18th century, scientific forest management syst.ems were employed to regenerate and harvest t.he forest to make it sustainable. Between 1926 and 1947 afforestation was carried out on a large scale in the Punjab and Uttar Pradesh. In the early 1930s, people began showing interest in the conservation of wild life. Around the same time the Indian rulers of the States also started conservation of habitats to help conserve the birds and mammals. Though all oft.hem were hunters and between them and t.he British they cleaned at least 5000 tigers if not more. But st.ilI these areas of conservation helped save the species from extinction and formed most of the modern National Parks. The new Forest Policy of 1952 recognized the protective functions of the forest and aimed at maintaining one·third of India's land area under forest. Certain activities were banned and grazing restricted. Much of the original British policy was kept in place, such as the classification of forest land into two broad types. The next. 50 years saw development and change in people's thinking regarding the forest. A constructive attitude was brought about through a number of fiveyear plans. Until 1976, the forest resource was seen as a source of earning money for the state and therefore little was spent in protecting it or looking after it. Today India'S forests are protected in National Parks like Corbett and 193 UGC-JRF (Paper 1}-25 Nagarhole or in Sanctuaries like Pakhui and Little Rann of Katch. The modern way of thinking has resulted in Biosphere Reserves and Biodiversity Hotspots and extensive research on them have resulted in rediscovery of new species of mammals like the Leaf Deer in Arunachal Pradesh or the Hook Nosed Frog in Western Ghats. Supporting more than 14 percent of the wild fauna and a higher percentage of the wild flora of the world the forests of India is an intricate web of life with many surprises to explore. As we proceed to an era of advanced wildlife management and as the pressure on the foreftjts. all over the world increase the need of the hou~ is to Irealize the potentiall'esoul'ce that the forests have both economically and from the natural point of view. A brief description of the wildlife zones of India is given below: THE TRANS- HIMALAYA Stretching from to the Lahul-Spiti the Trans-Himalaya covers an estimated land area of 186.200 sq. km. Trans-Himalaya, means beyond the Himalaya. Outside the Indian region, the Trans·Himalaya is very extensive, covering a total of nearly 2.6 million sq_ km. comprising the Tibetan plateau. Nursery to the Indus, Brahmaputra and Sutlej; decorated by the Zanskar, Ladakh and the Karakoram, the Trans-Himalaya is home to some of best biological grandeur which survive this cold desert conditions through their ability to economise resources. Some rare fauna like the Black Necked Crane breed in the brackish lakes like Tso Morari, Hanle and Chushul. Some parts of the Trans-Himalaya are above the snowline, including the Siachen, a 1,180 sq. km. glacier said to be the largest outside the polar regions! Though the landscape is characterised by a distinct lack of natural forests, along the river banks and valleys, some greenery does exist. with willows, poplars, wild roses and many herbaceous plants' and shrubs which is home to at least eight distinc~' species and/or sub- species of wild sheep includill5 the nayan or great Tibetan sheep (Ovis ammon hodgsoni), the urial or shapu (Ovis orientaiis), the bharal OJ" blue sheep (pseudois nayaur) and the ibex (Capra ibex). On the plateau of the Trans-Himalaya, The Tibetan antelope (Pantholops hodgsoni) or the chiru, and the Tibetan gazelle (Procapra picticaudata) are occasionally s ighted. Smaller animals of the region include pikas. Marmots and Tibetan hares. The mountains are shared by predat.ors like the snow·leopard or ounce. The Pallas cat, Indian wolf and the lynx can also be seen with extreme luck. THE HIMALAYA The world's youngest, loft.iest and most breathtaking mountain chains are home to several tropical Jife forms. Extending some 236,300 sq. km. in the Indian region, the Himalaya accounts for nearly seven per cent of the country's total surface area. The Himalaya has extreme habitat. types, ranging from arid Mediterranean and temperate in the western parts, to warm, moist, evergreen jungles in the east. Currently there are 56 protected areas in this zone and this cover roughly five per cent of the total su rface area. 10 of these protected areas are National Parks where one can qxpect to see the amazing diversity of the flora and fauna that this region supports. In t.he luxuriant eastern parts where the tree-line is higher, animals like the red panda, binturong and several lesser cats can be seen with some effort. Of the existing 56 protected areas in the Himalaya, at least 41 lie in the temperate sector either completely, or partly (the higher reaches of some of these protected areas merge into the third major habitat type, t.he highaltitude sub-alpine). The sub-alpine habitat type, above the middle level temperate sector (higher than 3,500 metres) consists of birch, rhododendrons. junipers, dwarf bamboo and a mixture or open meadows and scrub·doLted grasslands. As habitat types change. A noticeable transformation takes place in the faunal community as weD. T~e higber reaches house several threatened species such as the ibex, shapu, wolf and snow-leopard. Nearly half the 56 protected areas in the Himalaya extend partially or extensively into the high-altitude sub-alpine. This area is supported with protection programmes like Project Hangul, the Himalayan Musk Deer Ecology and Conservation Project, the Snow Leopard Project and several Pheasant Projects. The Himalayas offers fantastic trekking and overIandjourney options to enjoy the fascinating wealth that is nurtures in its icy foldB. THE INDIAN DESERT Spread through the majestic states of Gujarat and Rajasthan the Indian Desert is an amazing place to look for truly fantastic wild flora and fauna. Animals that never drink and plant seeds that can stay alive for years without water are typical of the miracles of this most fragile zone. In the Indian subcontinent, deserts, with an area of about 225,000 sq. km. account for just under seven per cent of the total land area. Divided into two distinct sub-divisions, Thar desert region covering 180,000 sq. kms. In the state of Rajas than and the Rann ofKutchh, covering some 45,000 sq. kms. of western Gujarat. It is a land of grand mirage and miracles. The desert system is characterized not so much by the variety and numbers of animal species but by the adaptations exhibited to tackle the rigours of desert life. The Thar shows a good extent of endemism in its faunal structure. The desert cat, desert fox, the winter· visiting houbara bustard and several ssndgrouse species, as also a few reptiles are found only in the Thar. Blackbuck, chinksra, the Indian wolf, caracal, great Indian bustard can also be seen here. In contrast to the sandy Thar, the Little and the Great Ranns, with very similar vegetation communities, have a high variety of faunal and floral composition. Though the Ranns are predominantly flatlands, they are interspersed with raised mour.ds or islands, locally called bets. Both the Ranns have unique faunal communities. The Great Rann is best known for its huge breeding colony of lesser flamingoes. The Little Rann is the only home of the wild ass in the Indian peninsula, besides playing host to a fair number of houbara bustards, sandgrouse and bther avifauna. THE SEMI-ARID ZONE Between the Indian desert and the Gangetic Plain, the Semi-arid Zone encompasses a total area of 508,000 sq. km. Covering nearly 15 per cent of India's area, with vast grasslands and some fascinating forests home to the Leopard, Tiger and the Asiatic Lion this is a truly wild belt ofIndia. Most ofthis wne houses the flat, alluvial deposits of the Indus river drainage system. The region comprises predominantly cultivated flatlands, interspersed with a network of wetlands-marshes and rivers. Consisting of the Punjab Plains in the North home to the Keoladeo Ghana Bird Sanctuary, Harike and Sultanpur and parts of Madhya Pradesh, and Gujarat in the South the Semi-arid Zone is a vast land-mass. The Aravalli and the Vindhya mou~tain ranges dominate the central portions of this zone. An inY>resting feature of the zone is the heavy rainfall region of Mount Abu in the southern Aravallis. Here several plant and animal species bear close affinity to the Western Ghats. Plants such as those of the genus Acacia, Anogeissus, Balanites, Capparis, Grewia and several others clearly have Aftjcan affinities. What is however, very interesting is the high density of wildlife (mainly ungulates) in the protected areas here, where livestock grazing and other adverse impacts have been controlled. The herbivores in this area include nilgai, blackbuc.k, chowsingha or four horned antelope, chinkara or Indian gazelle, sambar and spotted deer, the last two being more or less restricted to the forested mountain ranges and valleys. The Semi-arid Zone boasts of a good population and variety of predators including the wolf, caracal and the jackal, all of which have close relatives in Africa. Two of the finest tiger rescrvea- RanthaIllborc and Sariska-Bre located in the Aravallis. Amongst the richest of Indian wildlife areas. these two wilderness areas are true showpieces of lndian wildlife. On t.he whole. itcan be stated that while the Semi· arid Zone does not exhibit any gteatendemism, it nevertheless holds viable populations of several species of conservation criticality today. Besides those mentioned above. others include the sloth bear. Lesser' Florican, the Great Indian Bustard. mugger. gharial, several turtles and also waterfowl. both resident and migratory. THE WESTERN GHATS Along the west coast of lndia .. beginning from the Surat Dangs at the western extremity of the Satpuras in south Gujarat, for over 1,500 km. to the southern tip of India in Kerala – stretch the Western Ghats. a mountain range second only to the Himalaya in magnificence. The Ghat.s are the second largest tropical evergreen and semi-evergreen forest belt of the sub· continent. There is a high degree of biological endemism; species desperately in need of preservation. The natural forests and protected areas of Western Ghats still house a biological wealth matched only by the North- east. The famous forests of Silent Valley form a part of this vital forested swatch. A wide climatic (rainfaU and temperature) and geographical (altitude and associated mountain spurs) gradient exists in this zone. This is manifested in a tremendous diversity of vegetal communities and animal associations. From the coastal plains along the western flanks, the zone rises up to a maximum altitude of 2,735 metres in the south. While falling gradually (sharply in a few places) along the eastern side, towards the dry Deccan Peninsula. The Western Ghats Zone covers barely five per cent. of India's area, but. Its biological rich ness can be best understood when one realises t.hat 27 percent of all the species of higher plants recorded in the Indian region are found here (about 4,000 of 15,000 species). Further. almost 1.800 species are endemic to the region. The Nilgiri·Travancore·Anamalai· Palni·Cardamom hill areas in the southern parts of the zone exhibit t.he highest degree of endemism. Further, several interesting plant associations are observed in the evergreen forcsts of the Zonc. There are montane 'sholn' forests, riverine or swamp forests and nearly half 8 dozen ot.her evergreen·specles associations, mostly observed in the southern half of the Zone, where numerous ancillary mountain ranges converge to produce 8 region of exceptional diversit.y. Becduse of the heavy rainfall and healthy soil co nd it..ions that much of the Zone's southern half enjoys. cash crops like coffee. cocoa, ca rdamom, Tubber. Lea and pepper are extens ively grown. setting in their wake additional man·induced habitats. The Western Ghats Zone is also characterised by a series offorestgaps or breaks. that are actually valleys that break the continuity of the mountain ranges a nd accordlOgly of the biological components as well. Some of the major ones are the Palghat Gap, the Moyar Gorge or Gap and the Shencottah Gap. These series of gaps have resulted in preventing the sp read of certain species and have hence, fa cilitated local speciation and endemism. The associated mountain ranges such as the Annamal~is, the Nilgiris and the Agastyamalais are a ll separated by clear-cut barriers and besides the interesting floral speciation, a distinct faunal endemism andlor local speciation, is also found. Areas such as thi s are in urgent need of study and documentation. Though this zone has healthy populations of much of the animal species characteristic of peninsular India (tiger, elephant, gaur, dhole, s loth bear, panther and several species of deer), it also exhibits a fairly good degree of endemism among primates. ungulates. carnivores, rodents, squirrels and several birds. Amongst flmphibia, most of the species and nearly half t.he genera are endemic, while a good degree of endemism is visible also amongst reptiles, fish and insects, most fau nal endemism and restriction being only in the centraJ and and southern parta of the zone. Several of the zone's faunal components are of 196 great interest (&nd importance) in that they have helped provide justification for what is called The Hora Hypothesis. This explains the spread of several species from the Himalaya and North-east along a once continuous central Indian mountain range into the Western Ghats. giving rise to several interesting biological linkages between the Western Ghats. the Himalaya and North-East! More natural history field research would reveal vital clues to the management of sllch areas.

CONSERVATION STATUS

Presently, of all the Bio-geographic Zones, The Western Ghats with 44 Sanctuaries and National Parks, covering some 15,935 sq. km. has the highest percentage of protected areas. However, the two sub divisions of this Zone (viz., the coastal plains and the main Western Ghats) do not enjoy the same extent of protection. The coastal plains, from north to south, cover 60,000 sq. km. (37.5 per cent) of the zone. This is one of t he most highly developed and populated areas of the oountry. It is also the area with the least number of protected areas. Only four sites (three Sanctuaries and one National Park) totalling a mere than 240 sq. km. (less than 0.5 per cent) exist in this section of the Western Ghats. Taking the tremendous pressures on this region into consideration, even by the most conservative estimate the total protected area percentage in this region can barely be extended beyond one per cent. Bombay'S Sanjay Gandhi National Park is the only National Park in this sub-division! In marked contrast to the coastal plains region, the 100,000 sq. km. main Western Ghats region has the largest extent of protected. areas in India. 41 sites (six national parks and 35 sanctuaries) cover 15,695 sq. km. or 15.8 per cent of lhe total area. On paper this might seem to be a considerable area, but taking the exception al biodiversity of this Zone into consideration, not only is this inadequate, but it is not uniformly distributed and some of the vital eco·zones, such as the Coorg, Palnis and the Upper Nilgiris have either been totally overlooked or are barely represented through tiny reserves. To successfully conserve the rich biological wealth reveal vital clues to the managementof such areas of evergreen tropical forest regions, it is imperative that there be large-sized, unbroken protected areas that have a minimum disturbance. The forests in the northern half of the Western Ghats are highly fragmented, as a result of which considering areas for protection is not possible. Hence the emphasis here is on smaller units, with a well spread network to incorporate as much of the diversity as possible. Less than 25 per cent of the protected areas network of the Western Ghats lies in the northern half -- Gujarat, Maharashtra and Goa. Currently t.he largest, contiguous stretch of wilderness exists in the Nagarahole-Bandipur··Mudumalai belt of Karnataka and TamilNadu. and the adjoining W ynaad region of North Kerala. This forms a more or less unbroken protected area conservation unit of over 2.000 sq. km. The significance can be gauged from the fact that the forests hold an estimated 1,500 elephantsIndia's largest protected population of pachyderms. Additionally, this area is home to several other threatened species. The other well-protected portion of the Western Ghats extends over 1.500 sq. km. in the Anamalai Hills region of Kerala and Tamil Nadu. The highest point in mainland India, south of the Himalaya, is to be found here as can some of the finest examples oflowland Dipterocarp forests, which rise up into tho sholas. The presence of extensive moist deciduous forests adds up to the fact that this is undoubtedly peninsular lndia's richest bio-zone. Unfortunately, extensive plantations and related human disturbances threaten much of this region, which is fast losing most of its viable evergreen forest units. The Periyar·Cardamom Hills belt in Kerala and Tamil Nadu is a major elephant conservation area. The grizz led squirrel too is found here. perhaps nowhere else in India. The total protected area unit in this region extends some 1,227 sq. km., much of it under great pressure frO"Q1 all sides. Located more or less at the southernmost end of the Western Ghats Zone are the Agastyamalai Hills in Reraia and Tamil Nadu. Separated from the northern Kerala forests by the Shencottah Gap, the Agastyamalais have an interesting biological commonness with the forests of Sri Lanka. There is great endemism observed here in the floral and lesser faunal (amphibians, insects etc.) communities. Mundanthurai and Kalakad Wildlife Sanctuaries form the southernmost range of the tiger in the sub-continent. The entire protected area unit of this belt works out to just over 1,000 sq. km. It is believed that under the existing conservation programmes in this Zone, much of the end'emic flora l community appears relatively secure. However, the habitat of some of the faunal elements of principal concern, though well-protected in pockets, is under threat from plantation encroachments. Rodgers and Panwar recommend a substantial increase the size of the main conservation units in this zone, particularly in the main Western Ghats region. Almost two dozen more protected areas have been recommended, to offer adequate protection to species in additional areas. However, inspite of this increase in the number of protected areas, the actual network will be reduced by nearly 500 sq. km. This is because much ofthe over 5,000 sq. km. Dandeli Wildlife Sanctuary in Karnataka, being a much disturbed and interfered area, is proposed to be degazetted, for it is realised that it is far more advantageous to have healthy, undisturbed reasonably good-sized areas than a huge, highly d isturbed region where much of the conservation and management programmes cannot even be implemented. Implementation, in fact, is a key factor in the success of all wildlife plans which have invariably sounded good on paper, yet failed in pr actice.

SOILS The soils of India can he classified on the basis of several criteria. Indian Agricultural Research Institute (1ARl) Delhi divides soils into eight groups. (i) Alluvial Soil: The largest and the most important group is alluvial soil, which cover about 24% of India' land surface. This type of soil is composed of sediments deposited by the mighty rivers in the interior parts of India and by the sea wave in the coastal areas of the country. The Great Plains of India running from Punjab to Assam possess rich alluvial soil. It is also found in Narmada and Tapti valleys in Madhya Pradesh and Orissa, Godavari valley in Andhra. Pradesh and Cauvery valley in Tamil Nadu. It also occurs in the deltas of Mahanadi, Godavari, Krishna and Cauvery rivers. Alluvial soils are generally deficient in nitrogen ana humus and thus need repeated use of fertilizers. Such soils are suitable for growing all types of cereals, pulses, sugarcane, vegetables, oilseeds etc. (ii) Black Soil: The second major group is black soil. Ideal for the cultivation of cotton crop, it is frequently referred to as black cotton soil and covers large tracts of the Deccan plateau . This soil is also classified as Chernozem though locally known as regur soil. It covers large areas in Maharashtra, Gujarat, Madhya Pradesh, Karnataka, Andhra Pradesh and in Tamil Nadu. The black colour is due to the presence of compounds of iron and aluminium. The soil is sticky when wet and its level of fertility is well known. Possessing high moisture retention capacity, black soil does not require much irrigation. (iii) Red Soil: The red soil, the third major group occurs mosUy in the southern peninsula and extends up to Jhansi in the north, Kutch in the west and Rajrnahal Hills in the east. This soil is made up of crystalline and metamorphic rocks and is rich in ferromagnese minerals and soluble salts but is deficient in nitrogen ~nd humus and thus needs fertilisers. It has a light texture and a porous structure. Red soil is most suited to growth of rice, ragi, tobacco and vegetables. (iv) Laterite Soil: Laterites and lateritic soil are the fourth group formed through t.he process oflaterisation. They contain tron oxides which import a red to the soil. The soil occurs in the higher reaches of the Sahyadris, Eastern Ghats, Rajmahal Hills and other higher areas in the peninsular region. It can also be found on the lower lands in parts of Maharashtra, Karnataka and in many parts of Kerala, as well as pockets of Orissa, West Bengal and Assam Generally poor in nitrogen and mineral salts due to heavy leaching, it is suitable for rice and ragi cultivation if manured. (v) Forest Soil: Forest soil is rich in organic matter and humus. It is found in t.he Himalayas and other mountain regions of the north, higher summit of the Sahyadris, Eastern Ghats, Karnataka, Tamil Nadu, Kerala, Manipur, Jammu and Kashmir and Himachal Pradesh. Crops like tea, coffee, spices and tropical fruits are grown on t.his type of soil (vi, Arid and Desert Soil: It is found in north western India. It covers the entire area west of the Aravalli's in Rajasthan and parts of Haryana, Punjab and Gujarat. It is rich in phosphates but poor in nitrogen and proves quite fertile if irrigated. (vii) Saline and Alkaline Soil: Soils in many parts of the arid and se mi·arid areas of Rajasthan, Punjab, Haryana and Uttar Pradesh. Bihar have saline and alkaline effervescences mainly of sodium, calcium and magnesium. These soil are called reh or kallar or usar and are infertile. The salts are usually confined to the upper layers and soil can be reclaimed by improving drainage. (viii) Peaty and other Organic Soils: Peaty soils contain large accumulations of humus, organic matter and soluble salts. These soils are highly saline and are deficient phosphorus and potash. Marshy soU occurs in regions of Orissa, West-Bengal and Tamil Nadu. They are also found in central and. North Bihar a nd in Almora district of V.P.

IRRIGATION Water is vital for realising full potential of agriculture sector and country's development. The productivity in fields is severely affected by the vagaries of the 8C8son. Droughts, alternating 'With floods have been a common festure, making irrigat.ion and modern agricultural technology indispensable. A good system of irrigation removes uncertainty about agricultural production by reducing the dependence on rains and assuring regular, continuous and copious water supply at the appropriate time for the crops. It helps in having multiple crops in a year from the field, ensuring full employment for the workers througbout the year. Assured supply of water helps adoption of modem agricultural technology, which in turn helps in increa8in~ productivity. Irrigation helps in more economIcal use of land by bringing in more area, including wastelands under cultivation. The importance of irrigation has been realised in the planning process and a large outlay has been provided for the sector. With sustained and systematic development of irrigation. Its potential has increased from 22.6 mha prior to 1951 to about 95.4 mha at the end of 2000. Against this, the utilisation of irrigation potential at the end of 2000 was about 85.4 mha. Irrigation projects with a Culturable Command Area (CCA) of more than 10,000 hectare are cla8sified as major projects and these with a CCA of more than 2,000 hectare and upto 10,000 hectare a8 medium projects. The irrigation system is ba..sed on three sub· systems, viz., (1) Tapping adequate resources of water; (2) Preservation and conveyance of the water made available; and (3) Optimum utilisation of the water resources called the water mRnagement systems. Types ofIrrigation: Three main types of irrigation are known: (1) Well Irrigation: Open wells, dug wells, dug cum bored wells and tube welle provide an assured supply ofwat.er _Tube·wells are very popular in north India as power operated tube-wells can provide water for a longer period of time and cater to a large area. (2) Tank Irrigation: Tanks provide good storage of rain water for use in the dry season. They are found in different sizes In south India. (3) Canol Irrigation: Canals, carryLng water from major rivers, transfer water to the deficient areas. They form the mllJor means of irrigation in India. accounting for t.bout 40% of the irrigated land. Perennial cauaIs have an assured supply of water throughout the year. While Inundate canale get water only d;rring the rainy season. Storage canals get water from the reservoirs, conatructed specifically to store rain water.

Command Area Development

Programme: It was initiated in 1974·75 with the objective of bridging the gap between potential created and utilised for optimizing agricultural production from irrigated lan~. The main assumption behind the programme IS that the potential for improvement in the utilisation of water is maximum and that the underperformance of irrigation systems is di· rectly linked to the absence of any government. involvement and influence over on-farm devel· opment activities like land shaping and levelling, construction of field channels and drains. realignment. of field boundaries wherever necessary, enforcement of a proper system of warabandi and fair d18tribution of water to individual fields and supply of all inputs and services including credit and strengthening of extension se rvices. The programme Olvera Selection and introduction of suitable cropping pattern; Development of ground water to supplement surface irrigation; Development and maintenance of the main and intermediate drainage system and modernisation, maintenance and efficient operation of the irrigation system. Beginning with 60 major and medium irrigation projects in 1974, the Programme included 236 irrigation projects at the end of 2002 with Culturable Command Area (eCA) of 22.78 million hectare spread over 28 states and two union territories. The performance of CAD programme has been found to be generally disappointing. Farmers' disputes over land consolidations, absence of cooperation among various government departments and the lack of an integrated approach to the problem of soil and water management are the main resources of CAD's poor performances. To make CAD a success, farmers' active involvement and cooperation in development a ctivities is very essential. DrylandfRainfed Farming: Dryland or Rainfed agriculture is practised on about 73 percent of the net cultivated area but its contribution accounts for only about 42 percent of the total foodgrains production. Coarse grains, pulses, cotton and oilseEl,ds are produced in the rainfed areas. The main\constituents of dry farming techniques are soil management, harvesting of water, new crop varieties and new agronomic practices. Soil management includes measures relating to soil structure, soil fertility and correction of alkalinity of the soil. Development of modern water harvesting procedures including the use of Aluminium foil, polymer films and widespread installation of small water reservoirs. The new agronomic practices envisage the proper application of nutrients. I POWER SITUATION IN INDIA I The installed power generation capacity in the country has increased from 1,400 MW in 1947 to 1,12,058.42 MW as on 31 March 2004 comprising 77,968.53 MW thermal, 29,500.23 MW hydro. 1,869.66 MW wind and 2,720 MW nuclear. A capacity addition programme of 5,245.52 MW has been fixed for the year 2004~ 05. Consdiering the fact that a large chunk of proportion of the installed capacity will come from the public sector, the outlay for the power sector has been raised from Rs. 45,591 crore during the Ninth Plan to Rs. 1.43,399 crore in the Tenth Plan. This would include a gross budgetary support of Rs. 25,000 crore and the remaining Rs. 1,18,399 crare would be internal and extra budgetary resources. Power generation during 2003-04 was 558.134 BUs comprising 466.618 BUs thermal, 73.796 BUs hydro and 17.720 BUs nuclear. The target of power generation for 2004-05 has been fied at 566.590 BUs. The plant load factor has shown a steady improvement over the yea rs and has improved from 52.8 per cent in 1990-91 to 72.7 per cent in 2003-04. Most of power in Inwa is generated through· h ydal or thermal conversion. Since the northern and eastern India have perennial rivers, hydal -power generation is more in the area while thermal power plants are more in western and southern India where rivers dry up during summer season. Hydal power projects are sometimes part of multi- purpose projects which also curse flood control, water storage, fishery and irrigation. Damodar valley corporation waS set up to look after first such project on Damodar river. Bhakra Beas Management board has an installed capacity of 2730 MW and caters to the requirements of Northern states. Nevyeli Lignite Corporation uses lignite for power generation in Tamil Nadu. Atomic Energy plants have been set up in Tarapur, Ka lpakkam, Kota and Narora to produce energy from nuclear fission. They contribute about 1400 MW of energy. National Thermal Power Corporation (NTPC) has been set up to construct and manage the thermal plants of central government. National Hydal Power Corporation (NHPC) for hydal projects and Nuclear Power Corporation (NPC) for nuclear plants. North Eastern Electric Power Corporation (NEEPC) implements the power projects in North Eastern region. Power Grid 201 UGC-JRF (Paper 1}-26

RENEWABLE ENERGY POTENTIAL AND ACHlEVEMENTS

Corporation of India was set up to operate interstate and inter-regional transmission system. Rural Electrification Corporation (REC) looks after the electrification of villages and rural areas. To encourage private sector investment in the power sector, major policy changes were initiated in 1991. Procedures for cl~arances of the projects have been simplified a nd streamlined. Liberal environment for private entrepreneur is being provided, with some projects being given counter-guarantee and assured rate of return. Dabhol power project in Maharashtra was the first major power sector plant for which the State Governmentsigned a Power Purchase Agreement and Central Government gave counter-guarantee. ~ides conventional sources of energy, due emphasis has been given on t he nonconventional, renewable energy sources in the country. The main work has been done on harnessing solar, wind, small hydro !lI1d bioenergy_ Photo-voltaic and solar thermal systems have been developed. The Sagar Island in West Bengal has been turned into "Solar Island" as all needs of peopJe living there are met with solar energy. In the field of wind energy development, India is third in world with 900 MW of installed capacity. Farm projects have been set up in parts of the country where wind· velocity is large enough. Small, mini and micro hydal projects have been set up to fit in small budgets and local resources. r n the bio--energy field, technology for conversion of agro - wastes to energy have been developed. The biomass systems and improved chullah can be adopted, even at far flung areas. The rural and far-off areas depend on wood and agre- wastes for their energy requirement and efficient utilisation of these will save wood and hence protect environment alRO over 25 takh biogas plants installed in the country l:telp save 75lakh tonnes of fue l wood every yed In the Ninth Five Year Plan there is proposal' to add additional capacity of 3000 MW through non-conventional sources or energy. Attempts are being made to produce energy from urban and industrial wastee wbch is increasing day by day.

Paper 1 UGC NET 1. ―Because you deserve to know‖ is the punch-line of which newspaper? a. The Hindu. b. The Times of India. c. The Indian Express. d. The Hindustan Times.

(The answer, apparently is The Hindustan Times. Source) 2. Which Article of the Constitution of India protects the rights of minorities to establish and administer educational institutions of their own choice? a. Article 29. b. Article 26. c. Article 30.

3. Which committee‘s recommendation lead to the establishment of the University Grants Commission? a. S Radhakrishnan Committee. b. Mudaliar Committee.

4. Which of the following pair is incorrectly matched? a. N. Ram : The Hindu. b. Barkha Dutt : Zee News. c. Pranav Roy : NDTV 24×7. d. Prabhu Chawla : Aaj Tak.

5. Which is the following is a 24 hours English business news channel? a. CNBC. b. Zee News. c. India News. d. NDTV 24×7.

6. Which number will come in the series 8, 24, 12, ? , 18, 54: a. 26. b. 32. c. 36.

7. What is a modem? a. Operating System. b. Digital to analog signal converter. 8. Gave a series of pH values 4, 5, 7 and 8 and asked each pH to be correctly matched with the correct comments - moderate acid, alkaline, neutral, dangerous.

9. Absorption of carbon dioxide in seawater leads to: a. Salinity. b. Raising sea level. c. Increased plankton growth.

10. What is largest contributor to carbon dioxide emission in India? a. Burning coal. b. Firewood.

11. In which year was the United Nations established? a.1944. b.1945. c. 1946.

12. The sides of triangle are in the ratio of 1/2 : 2/3 : 3/4 . The area of this triangle is 54 cm. What is the length of its shortest side?

[The following three question was based on a graph. The X axis carried the name of companies A, B, C, D, E and F. The Y axis represented their profits; 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 and so on. On this was plotted the lines of profit, one each representing the year 2001 and the year 2001. This was followed by three questions. * Here‘s a rough sketch.]

13. Which company earned maximum profit in the year 2001?

14. Which company earned minimum profit in the year 2000?

15.Which company earned maximum average profit over the years 2000 and 2001?

16. The question provided for five sections of a class, the number of students in each section and the mean of marks for each section.

Section - No. of Students in the Section - Mean marks of the Section # A - 10 - 30 B - 40 - 20 C - 10 - 15 D - 15 - 20 E - 20 - 10

What is the overall mean marks of all the students?

[Next three questions were from a passage on movies followed by three straightforward question. Of course the questions won‘t make any sense here, without the passage itself. Suffice it to say that they were child's play. Remember that the answers were from the passage itself, and not what the candidate thought correct or latest information as a matter of fact.] 17. What word could Yash Chopra not pronounce? a. Zeistgeist.

18. What was the costume of the heroine in Veer Zarra?

19 .Which is the latest Yash Chopra movie?

20. Who made the movie Lamhe?

21. With which movie is associated? a. Desh Ki Dharti

22.What dooes LAN stand for? a. Local Area Network

23. What is the URL of an email? a. [email protected] b. [email protected] c. www_mail.com d. www.mail.com

24. Which of the following is not a research method? a. Philosophy b. Observation

25. Research can be grouped as the following kinds, except (options gave types of research) a. Action method. b. Philosophical & historical method. 26. What is necessary to become a researcher? a. A post-graduation degree. b. Analytical and reasoning mind.

27. Which of the following is am not instructional tool? a. Overhead projector. b. Transparency. c. Cassette. d. Printed material.

28. Which of the following about lecture method is not correct? a. It is passive. b. It can give knowledge. c. It can develop reasoning. d. It is a one way process.

29. What is the aim of higher education; to enable students to? a. Take decisions. b. Pass exams. c. Ask questions in lecture.

30. Which of the following is incorrect? a. Sharmila Tagore is the Chairperson of National Films Development Corporation. b. Preity Zinta, Yash Chopra are recipients of Dada Sahib Phalke award. c. Yash Chopra is a member of Certification Board. d. Hema Malini is the Chairperson of Children‘s Film Society of India.

31. Which of the following statements about computers is correct: a. Fast and accurate processing of qualitative and qualitative data. b. Processing quantitative data only. c. Processing qualitative data only.

MODEL UGC -NET PAPER I

This sample paper in for Paper I of the UGC NET Exam which is common for all streams.

1. Which one of the following is the main objective of teaching?

(A) To give information related to the syllabus. (B) To develop thinking power of students.

(C) To dictate notes to students.

(D) To prepare students to pass the examination.

2. Which one of the following is a good method of teaching?

(A) Lecture and Dictation

(B) Seminar and Project

(C) Seminar and Dictation

(D) Dictation and Assignment

3. Teacher uses teaching aids for

(A) Making teaching interesting

(B) Making teaching within understanding level of students

(C) Making students attentive.

(D) The sake of its use.

4. Effectiveness of teaching depends on

(A) Qualification of teacher

(B) Personality of teacher

(C) Handwriting of teacher

(D) Subject understanding of teacher

5. Which of the following is not characteristic of a good question paper?

(A) Objectivity

(B) Subjectivity (C) No use of vague words

(D) Reliable.

6. A researcher is generally expected to:

(A) Study the existing literature in a field

(B) Generate new principles and theories

(C) Synthesize the idea given by others

(D) Evaluate the findings of a study

7. One of the essential characteristics of research is:

(A) Replicability

(B) Generalizability

(C) Usability

(D) Objectivity

8. The Government of India conducts Census after every 10 years. The method of research used in this process is:

(A) Case Study

(B) Developmental

(C) Survey

(D) Experimental

9. An academic association assembled at one place to discuss the progress of its work and future plans. Such an assembly is known as a

(A) Conference

(B) Seminar (C) Workshop

(D) Symposium

10. An investigator studied the census date for a given area and prepared a write-up based on them. Such a write-up is called

(A) Research paper

(B) Article

(C) Thesis

(D) Research report

Read the following passage and answer the Question Nos. 11 to 15

The constitution guarantees every citizen the fundamental right to equality. Yet after 50 years of independence, just one perusal of the female infant mortality figures, the literacy rates and the employment opportunities for women is sufficient evidence that discrimination exists. Almost predictably, this gender, bias is evident in our political system as well. In the 13th Lok Sabha, there were only 43 women MPs out of total of 543; it is not a surprising figure, for never has women's representation in Parliament been more than 10 per cent.

Historically, the manifestos of major political have always encouraged women's participation. It has been merely a charade. So, women's organizations, denied a place on merit, opted for the last resort; a reservation of seats for women in parliament and State Assemblies. Parties, which look at everything with a vote bank in mind, seemed to endorse this. Alas, this too was a mirage.

But there is another aspect also. At a time when caste is the trump card, some politicians want the bill to include further quotas fro women from among minorities and backward castes. There is more to it. A survey shows that there is a general antipathy towards the bill. It is actually a classic case of doublespeak: in public, politicians were endorsing women's reservation but in the backrooms of Parliament, they were busy sabotaging it. The reasons are clear: Men just don't want to vacate their seats of power. 11. The problem raised in the passage reflects badly on our

(A) Political system

(B) Social behaviour

(C) Individual behaviour

(D) Behaviour of a group of people

12. According to the passage, political parties have mostly in mind

(A) Economic prosperity

(B) Vote bank

(C) People' welfare

(D) Patriotism

13. "Trump Card" means

(A) Trying to move a dead horse

(B) Playing the card cautiously

(C) Sabotaging all the moves by others

(D) Making the final jolt for success

14. The sentence "Men just don't want to vacate their seats of power" implies

(A) Lust for power

(B) Desire to serve the nation

(C) Conviction in one's own political abilities

(D) Political corruption

15. What is the percentage of women in the Lok Sabha (A) 10

(B) 7. 91

(C) 43

(D) 9. 1

16. Informal communication network within the organization is knows as

(A) Interpersonal communication

(B) Intrapersonal Communication

(C) Mass Communication

(D) Grapevine Communication

17. TV Channel launched fro covering only Engineering and Technology subject is known as

(A) Gyan Darshan

(B) Vyas

(C) Eklavya

(D) Kisan

18. In which state the maximum number of periodicals are brought out for public information:

(A) Uttar Pradesh

(B) Tamil Nadu

(C) Kerala

(D) Punjab

19. The main objective of public broadcasting system i. e Prasar Bharti is (A) Inform, Entertainment & Education

(B) Entertain, Information & Interaction

(C) Educate, Interact & entertain

(D) Entertainment only

20. The competerrcy of an effective communicator can be judged on the basis of:

(A) Personality of communicator

(B) Experience in the field

(C) Interactivity with target audience

(D) Meeting the needs of target audience.

21. Which one of the following belongs to the category of homogeneous date:

(A) Multi-storeyed houses in a colony

(B) Trees in a garden

(C) Vehicular traffic on a highway

(D) Student population in a class

22. In which of the following ways a theory is not different from a belief?

(A) Antecedent - consequent

(B) Acceptability

(C) Verifiability

(D) Demonstratability

23. The state - "Honesty is the best policy" is (A) A fact

(B) An value

(C) An opinion

(D) A value judgement

24. Which one is like pillar, pole and standard?

(A) Beam

(B) Plank

(C) Shaft

(D) Timber

25. Following incomplete series is presented. Find out the number which should come at the place of question mark which will complete the series: 4, 16, 36, 64, ?

(A) 300

(B) 200

(C) 100

(D) 150

26. The following question is based on the diagram given below. If the two big circles represent animals living on soil and those living in water, and the small circle stands for the animals who both live on soil and in water, which figure represents the relationships among them.

27. Of the following statement, there are two statements both of which cannot be true but both can be false. Which are these two statements?

(i) All machines make noise

(ii) Some machines are noisy (iii) No machine makes noise

(iv) Some machines are not noisy

(A) (i) and (ii)

(B) (iii) and (iv)

(C) (i) and (iii)

(D) (ii) and (iv)

28. In the following question a statement is followed by two assumptions.

(i) and (ii) . An assumption is something supposed or taken for granted.

Consider the statement and the following assumptions and decide which of the following assumptions is implicit in the statement.

Statement: We need not worry about errors but must try to learn from our errors.

Assumptions:

(i) Errors may take place when we are carrying out certain work.

(ii) We are capable of benefiting from the past and improve our chances of error-free work.

(A) Only assumption (i) is implicit

(B) Only assumption (ii) is implicit

(C) Either assumption (i) or (ii) is implicit

(D) Both the assumptions are implicit

29. The question below is followed by two arguments numbered (i) and (ii) Decide which of the arguments is 'strong' and which is 'weak'. Choose the correct answer from the given below Should the press exercise some self- restraint? (i) Yes, they should not publish new items which may incite the readers to indulge in wrong practices.

(ii) No. it is the responsibility of the press to present the truth irrespective of the consequences.

(A) Only the argument (i) is strong

(B) Only the argument (ii) is strong

(C) Neither argument (i) nor (ii) is strong

(D) Both the arguments (i) and (ii) are strong

30. Study the argument and the inference drawn from that argument. Given below carefully.

Argument: Anything that goes up definitely falls down. Helicopter goes up. Inference: So the helicopter will definitely fall down.

What in your opinion is the inference drawn from the argument?

(A) Valid

(B) Invalid

(C) Doubtful

(D) Long drawn one

Four students W, X, Y, Z appeared in four papers, I, II, III and IV in a test. Their scores out of 100 are given below.

Papers Students I II III IV W 60 81 45 55 X 59 43 51 A Y 74 A 71 65 Z 72 76 A 68 Where 'A' stands for absent

Where 'A' stands for absent

Read the above table and answer below mentioned Questions 31 to 35

31. Which candidate has secured between 60-65% marks in aggregate

(A) W

(B) X

(C) Y

(D) Z

32. Who has obtained the lowest average in aggregate.

(A) W

(B) X

(C) Y

(D) Z

33. Who has obtained the highest average

(A) W

(B) X

(C) Y

(D) Z

34. In which paper the lowest marks were obtained by thecandiates

(A) I

(B) II (C) III

(D) IV

35. Which candidate has secured the highest percentage in the papers appeared

(A) W

(B) X

(C) Y

(D) Z

36. ICT stands for

(A) Information common technology

(B) Information & communication technology

(C) Information and computer technology

(D) Inter connected technology

37. Computer Can

(A) Process both quantitative and qualitative information

(B) Store huge information

(C) Process information and fast accurately

(D) All the above.

38. Satellite Communication works through

(A) Rader

(B) Transponder

(C) Receptor (D) Transmitter

39. A Computer is that machine which works more like a human brain. This definition of computer is

(A) Correct

(B) Incorrect

(C) Partially correct

(D) None of the above.

40. Information and communication technology includes

(A) E-mail

(B) Internet

(C) Education television

(D) All the above.

41. It is believed that our globe is warming progressively. This global warming will eventually result in.

(A) Increase in availability of usable land.

(B) Uniformity of climate at equator and poles.

(C) Fall in the sea level

(D) melting of polar ice.

42. In which parts of India ground water is affected with arsenic contamination?

(A) Haryana

(B) Andhra Pradesh

(C) Sikkim (D) West Bengal

43. Sunderban in Hooghly delta is known for

(A) Grasslands

(B) Conifers

(C) Mangroves

(D) Arid forests

44. Sardar Sarover dam is located on the river

(A) Ganga

(B) Godavari

(C) Mahanadi

(D) Narmada

45. Which one of the following trees has medicinal value?

(A) Pine

(B) Teak

(C) Neem

(D) Oak

46. Which one of the following is not considered a part of technical education in India:

(A) Medical

(B) Management

(C) Pharmaceutical

(D) Aeronautical 47. Which of the following is a Central university

(A) Mumbai University

(B) Calcutta University

(C) Delhi University

(D) Madras University

48. Identify the main Principle on which the Parliamentary System Operates

(A) Responsibility of Executive to Legislature

(B) Supremacy of Parliament

(C) Supremacy of Judiciary

(D) Theory of Separation of Power

49. The reservation of seats for women in the Panchayat Raj Institutions is:

(A) 30 % of the total seats

(B) 33 % of the total seate

(C) 33% of the total population

(D) In Proportion to their population

50. Match list I with list II and select the correct answer from the code given below:

LIST ( Institutions)

LIST II( Locations)

1. Indian Veterinary Research Institute

(i) Pune

2. Institute of Armament Technology (ii) Izat Nagar

3. Indian Institute of Science

(iii) Delhi

4. National Institute for Educational Pannesi

(iv) Bangalore and Administrators

(A) 1(ii), 2(i), 3(iv), 4(iii)

(B) 1(ii), 2(iv), 3(ii), 4(iii)

(C) 1(ii), 2(iii), 3(i), 4(iv)

(D) 1(iv), 2(iii), 3(ii), 4(i)

Source: Sample Paper based on questions provided by UGC Model Paper.

Answer Key:

1. B 2. B 3. B 4. D 5. B 6. B 7. D 8. C 9. A 10. B 11. B 12. B 13. D 14. A 15. B 16. D 17. C 18. C 19. A 20. D 21. A 22. B 23. D 24. A 25. A 26. D 27. C 28. D 29. A 30. D 31. A 32. B 33. A 34. B 35. D 36. B 37. D 38. B 39. A 40. D 41. D 42. D 43. C 44. D 45. C 46. A 47. C 48. A 49. B 50. A

GENERAL SCIENCE

PAPER I (PART ‘A’)

1. If the speed of light (3×108 m/s) and the mean radius of the earth (6×103 km) are taken to be the units of speed and length respectively, then the value of the new unit of acceleration expressed in m/s2 will be 1. 1.5 × 1010

2. 50

3. 0.02

4. 1.2 × 105

2. The minimum number of multiplications required to evaluate the expression

a + bx + cx2 + dx3 + ex4 is

1. 4

2. 5

3. 3

4. 7

3. Consider the function

f (x)= x (1− x) for 0≤ x≤1

The function

1. attains minima at x = ½ and ¾.

2. is discontinuous in the given interval

3. is negative at a few points in the given interval. 4. has a maximum at x = ½.

4. Which of the following distributions has the smallest variance?

5. One way to determine whether a number (n) is prime or not is to divide it by numbers less than itself. The number of divisions required is

1. n/2

2. n − 1

3. 2 n

4. less than n

6. The angular velocity vector of the Earth’s rotation points

1. from east to west

2. from west to east

3. from north to south

4. from south to north

7. The top of a mountain is at an elevation of 45° from one bank of a river and at an elevation of 60° from the other bank. If the river has a width of 1 km, what is the height

[in km] of the mountain?

1. 1 2

2. 3

3. 3

1+ 3

4. 3

3 −1

8. On a cold day, a copper vessel feels colder to touch than a glass bowl. What is the reason for this?

1. Glass does not cool down as easily as copper does.

2. Glass is a poor conductor of heat compared to copper.

3. The specific heat of glass is higher than that of copper.

4. Glass radiates more heat than copper does.

9. If the distance between two bodies of masses m1 and m2 is doubled, the gravitational force between them

1. doubles.

2. halves.

3. becomes one-fourth.

4. remains the same.

10. A cricket ball and a football are dropped simultaneously from the top of Qutub Minar. Which of the following best describes their subsequent behaviour?

1. They touch the ground at the same instant.

2. They touch the ground with the same velocity.

3. The cricket ball reaches before the football.

4. The football reaches before the cricket ball.

11. A mass m (200 g) slides horizontally due to a downward force applied by a 500 g weight (as shown in figure). The velocity of the mass m (ignoring friction)

12.

1. increases as a function of time with constant acceleration.

2. remains constant.

3. changes with time with increasing acceleration.

4. changes with time with decreasing acceleration.

12. The O–H bonds in water molecule are polar. The molecule is symmetric and the H–O–H bond angle is approximately 107°. The dipole moment vector of the molecule is

1. zero

2. along the OH bond

3. randomly oriented

4. along the bisector of the H–O–H angle 13. You wish to observe a small organism closely, using a convex lens. If you wish to avoid distortion of the image, you should keep the object

1. at a distance greater than the focal length

2. less than the focal length

3. at twice the focal length

4. exactly at the focal length

14. A charged particle moving with a constant velocity enters a magnetic field perpendicular to its velocity. In which direction y an electric field should be applied to compensate the magnetic force?

1. Along the initial velocity

2. Perpendicular to the initial velocity and parallel to the magnetic field

3. Perpendicular to both, the initial velocity and the magnetic field

4. Along the magnetic field

15. Two pendula of lengths l1 and l2 (= 2l1) have the same period at two different locations. The accelerations due to gravity at these two locations, g1 and g2, are related by

1. g1 = g2

2. g1 = 2g2

3. g2 = 2g1

4. g2 = 4g1

16. Water rises naturally out of an artesian well because

1. the water has lots of dissolved gases

2. the water table is at the ground level

3. the water table is below the ground level

4. the water table is above the ground level

17. Although, we know from chemical evidence that life on Earth evolved as early as 3.5 billion years ago, the most ancient available fossils are only 0.54 billion years old. This is because

1. acidic ocean dissolved all life forms

2. early life forms were soft bodied

3. rocks older than 0.54 billion years do not exist

4. a large asteroid impact destroyed all earlier records 18. During α-decay of a radioactive atom, the mass number reduces by 4 units and the atomic number decreases by 2 units. How many α-particles will be generated during the decay of a 238

92U atom to a 206

82 Pb atom.

1. 8

2. 16

3. 10

4. 5

19. Depletion of ozone layer and formation of ozone hole in polar regions is a phenomenon occurring in the

1. troposphere.

2. mesosphere.

3. stratosphere.

4. thermosphere.

20. Sea levels are predicted to rise in the near future mainly due to

1. sinking of landmass

2. increased rainfall

3. gravitational pull of the moon 4. melting of glaciers.

21. The pH value of distilled water is always below 7. This is because

1. distillation reduces the ionic product of water.

2. during distillation inorganic salts are removed.

3. nitrogen from air gets dissolved in it.

4. CO2 from air dissolves in it.

22. Photosynthesis in water bodies is restricted to a certain depth. This is mainly because

1. temperature decreases with depth

2. light intensity decreases with depth

3. dissolved CO2 is available only to a certain depth

4. nutrients are available only to a certain depth

23. The velocity of P (pressure) and S (shear) seismic waves depends on the compressibility, shear modulus and density of the medium. The inner core of the Earth is inferred to be liquid using seismic wave travel time. This is because

1. the density of the inner core is the highest.

2. the inner core has a very high compressibility.

3. both P and S waves pass through the inner core. 4. the S wave does not pass through the inner core.

24. One of the following chemicals used as food preservative is

1. sodium benzoate

2. sodium alkylbenzene sulfonate

3. ethylene glycol

4. aspartic acid

25. Qualitative analysis of Al3+ in presence of Fe3+ and Cr3+ is based on

1. reducing nature of Fe3+

2. oxidizing nature of Cr3+

3. amphoteric nature of Fe3+

4. amphoteric nature of Al3+ and Cr3+

26. Hydrolysis of t-butyl chloride in presence of aqueous alkali produces t-butyl alcohol.

The rate of hydrolysis depends on

1. concentration of t-butyl chloride

2. concentration of alkali 3. amount of water

4. concentration of both alkali and t-butyl chloride

27. Which one of the following would give natural rubber upon polymerisation?

1. CH3 – CH2 = CH2

H CH3

| |

2 n-propyl– C = C–CH =CH2

CH3 CH3

| |

3. H3C – C = C – CH = CH2

CH3

|

4. CH2 = C – CH = CH2

28. The ionization potential (IP) of hydrogen atom is 13.6 eV. The estimated second IP of the helium atom (in eV) is

1. 6.8

2. 27.2

3. 54.4

4. 13.6

29. The following molecule has a non-zero dipole moment

1. CH4

2. CO2

3. NH3

4. BF3

30. The oxidation number of Cr in CrO5 is

1. + 6

2. + 3

3. + 10

4. + 5 31.

A B (salt)

Na + H2

(alcohol)

B MeI C (ether)

C Conc. HI MeI

A NaOH/I2 iodoform

heat

The alcohol (A), salt (B) and ether (C), are respectively

1. CH3OH, CH3ONa, CH3-O-CH3

2. CH3OH, C2H5ONa, CH3-O-C2H5

3. C2H5OH, C2H5ONa, C2H5-O-C2H5

4. C2H5OH, C2H5ONa, CH3–O-C2H5

32. In any ecosystem, the primary producers such as photosynthetic plants are the most abundant and predators such as tigers are the least abundant. The fundamental law responsible for this pattern is

1. first law of thermodynamics

2. second law of thermodynamics

3. Mendel's laws of genetics

4. law of conservation of mass

33. In the Siberian forests, carbon fixation is expected to be maximum in

1. January

2. July

3. October

4. April

34. Movement of water in a tree takes place in

1. roots only

2. in the central part of the stem

3. in the peripheral part of the stem

4. leaves only

35. Which of the following is not used as a fertilizer?

1. Ammonium nitrate 2. Ammonium phosphate

3. Urea

4. Sodium chloride

36. In DNA, Adenosine pairs with Thymine, and Guanine pairs with Cytosine. If Adenosine constitutes 18% and Guanine constitutes 24% of all nucleotides in a DNA preparation, it must be a

1. single stranded DNA

2. double stranded DNA

3. very short stretch of double stranded DNA

4. multi-chromosomal DNA

37. A bacterium which is 1 μ in diameter and divides every 20 minutes, forms a 1 mm diameter colony in 24 hours in a growth medium with limited nutrients. The number of cells in the colony is approximately

1. 1000

2 . 109

3. 2 × 72

4. 272

38. Burns caused by steam are more serious than burns caused by boiling water because

1. steam has large latent heat

2. steam has a very large specific heat compared to water

3. steam is hotter than boiling water

4. steam being a gas makes easy contact with skin

39. The largest decimal number that a four byte integer can represent is approximately

1. 105

2. 107

3. 109

4. 1011

40. A modern personal computer is capable of multiplying two numbers in a few

1. picoseconds

2. nanoseconds

3. microseconds

4. milliseconds

UGC Teaching Aptitude Part I

TEACHING APTITUDE

Teaching is a complex process which brings socially desirable behavioural change in a person. Teaching is a part ofteaching-learning process. It is required to bring certain changes in a person according to the need of his society and environment in which he is living. 'Teaching is not an act as it is dynamic in nature so it is termed as process. It is also not a fundamental concept as it is greatly influenced by social and human factors. Teachlng is both artan,d science. It is · an ' activity involving teacher and student with a view to the development of student. The main aim of teaching is to bring about socially desirable behavioural changes in the students and can be achieved only if teaching is effective and based on certain values or principles. Teaching is one of the main parts of the teaching-learning system. So effective teaching is mostly depending on the teacher. It is a common fact that a good teacher is born and not made. Training and research can make a good teacher better and a better teacher best. Teacher should follow various methods of teaching devised from time to time. A teacher encourages the practice of thinking among students. Teacher should give to the students the' freedom and opportunity to express their ideas. . Teaching is required to give education to the students. Edl,lcation may be defined as the process of drawing out least in an individual. We can define education as "the aggregate of all processes by means of which a person develops attributes, attitudes and other forms of behaviour of positive value in the society in 'which he lives". We can also define it as "the 'social process by which people are subjecte.d to tHe influence of a selected and controlled environment, so that they may attain social competence and optimum individual development" . The complete process of education must contain four common factors (i) Educator (teacher) (ll) Educand (Student) (iii) the subject matter (iv) the context (setting). Now, education is the proces~ of developi~g some abilities in an individual. Though abilities are in'born quality, it is also a fact that these can be nurtured and developed in an educand through various means by a n educator. Education must also be relevant and useful to the society in which educand has to live. Since 'every individual is unique in their own way, th~ educator has to adopt strategies and methods suitabl~ to i~dividual ·needs. Educati~n II,u-J-st also be productive. The educational productivity (rate of efficiency of work) can be classified as .qualitative and quantitative. For better education both qualitative and quantitative productivity is required. Quality means here the excellence in the part of textbook, teachets students's· aids, facilities and other teaching aids where as quantity refers the number of teachers, institutions, professionals, etc. Education and teaching are interrelated. Education is a complex social cultural and ethical process designed in a social or cultural content. It is related with social structures, cultural environments, values, and ideas of people, society and government. All these . factors are dynamic in nature. So teaching is also a dynamic process and its definition changes according to place and t ime . Morrison defines it as a disciplined social process in which teacher influences the behaviours of the less experienced pupil and helps him develop according to the needs and ideas ofthe society.

Smith termed it as an organised system of worker. He/she must have proper guts to lead specific activities aimed to help the learner learn by an example at a superior level as he is the something. leader of his pupil. He/she has to exercise An analytical approach makes it clear that neGe!?§.ary influence for bringing the .desired neither of the definition fulfils the purpose. modification in behaviour. A good definition ofteaching should Teacher works to change the behaviour of (i) Tell whether teaching is a process or students according to the need of the society. act. He/she must also creates situation to ·increase (ii) Clearly indicates constitutional factors. the thinking capacity of mind of students. He (iii) Reveals objectives, and give education to the people. Education is a (iv) Say something about its organisational tripolar process involving educator, educant· and 'structural aspect. And social milieu. The educand is deperident Accordirig to' this analysis we can define variable of education whereas educator is teaching as a-tripolar process ~nvol~ing human independent variable. Social milieu is required or material source ' of teaching students and a for the direction of education. Education should set of organi4ed ' activities designed and develop intellectual, moral, aesthetic, manipulated for bringing changes in the democratic, material and economic life to make behavious of the taught. our country a leading force. Hard work and Since teaching is a process and' it is mental alertness should be the rst requisite of dynamic in nature so it changes its concept the educational training. according to time and place. It is a professional . The teacher has to provide intellectual and activity. TeachIng can be ' analysed and. social leadership. He is to follow a curriculum assessed. This analysis and assessm:ent . 'but his task is beyond this. He acts as an ideal provides feedback for further improvement in for his students. He has to follow the way of methods of teaching. Teaching is highly simple life with great thinking, His morale dominated by communicaitcin 'skilL It is should be high. He must be competent. His interactive process carried· with .purpose and efficiency and enthusiasm is also very objectives, Teaching may have various forms as important. He must also possess some other formal, imformal, diiectional,lnstructional . qualities ·as he is . the pivote of educational formational; training, conditioning, talking: system. Such as 'J.se of good means for good showing etc. All these words single handly can't ends, clear thinking no prejudice, ability of be synonym of teaching. Teac41ng is a much critical judgements at the righttime, tolerance broader term, All these activities ariparts of are all needed for a teacher. Teacher m~st be teaching at different leveL' . . ready to impart to their students all Teaching ' has been analysed in seve'ral information geographical, historical, political ways for understanding it, fo r "designing social practical and strategic and scientific. teaching methods and inaterials with a view.to The complete educational process has four reaI is m. g speci' fi c objectives making teaching important common factors more effective .. This modification is based on (i) teacher (ii) student (iii) subject matter feedbacks. Teaching skill is o~e of the'.nlost(iv)setting (context). important thing required 'for it t¢acherhlt itis ' TEACHER not the only requirerrie~t. :Tea:cning involve~ Teacher is -a person, who, due to his rich or interaction. So, communication: ' skill, . unusual experience in education or both in a personality, attitude, .attribute, interest .all . giyen field is able tocontribute ·to the growth these are also countedJor effective teachlng. A and development of the other person who comes teacher cannot be regarded only as a skilled in contact with him. There are four dimensions associated with a teacher, his competence, efficacy, enthusiasm and morale. Teacher's competence : Teacher's competence has been defined as the e~tent to which the teacher has t~ relevant subje~t matter and the pedagogical experties needed to impart the curriculum effectively. Teacher's efficacy: It IS defined as the self belief in his capacity of doing what is expected from them. Teacher's enthusiasm: A teacher must be very enthusiastic. Teacher's Morale : It is very important in maintaining balance in the classroo·m interaction. The various factors contributed to the morale are psychological well being, self esteem; commitment to a cause. Knowledge and identification with the organisational goal. The teachers morale is a combination of psychological, physiological and environmental cause. These four factors 'are seen in process of effective classroom interaction. CLASSROOM INTERACTION : The classroom interaction between a student ~nd a teacher is completely based on the climate created by teacher. He should be able to bring the blendiness of friendship with a definite degree of firmness. The interaction must be smooth and pleasant without any friction for a complete:and fruitful teaching learning process. Normally, verbalism' goes on in the name of teaclfing. Students are merely expected to listen to th~ explanation and lectures. This is known as direct teaching. The effectiveness of direct teaching has been questioned many times and it is found that this type of teaching is not very effective one. For effective teaching the active , participation of students IS very important. This participation IS done through the classroom interaction. 'This interaction consist of thier explanations and lectures with students , suggestions, ideas concepts, and questions,etc. These activ:ities of students make important for making teaching learning process effective, democratic and friendly. Interaction is required for the rectification of the drawbacks of direct teaching. This interactive teaching is known as indirect teaching. Through the interaction; the teacher analyses the· capacity and tequirement of students and can bring subsequent changes in their behaviour according to the requirement and can also change way of teaching. I One of the most important thing ill classroom interaction is the communication. Communication · will be learned in UNIT-IV in details. SUBJECT MATTER : It is also known as curriculum. Curriculum is a "general overall plan of the content or specific material of instruction, that an educational institution should offer to the student by way of qualifying him for graduation or certification". It is also a body of prescribed educational experience under an institutional supervision, designed to provide an individual with the best possible training and experience to fit him foy the society of which he/she is a part, or to qualify him for a trade or profession. It is also defined as "a subject matter, instructional materials, situations o~ experience that may , help to develop understanding, skills, appreciation and attitudes". , Curriculum should be logical, . psychological and according to the needs of the pupil and also the society. It should be objective in approach. Curriculum can be of two types: (i) Teacher oriented curriculum :''In this type of 'curriculum the process of selection of materials content is based on the needs-of the instructor/teacher. The teacher is proficient in , his particular field and is considered superior. (ii) Child/student orient~d cu~riculum : A curriculum in which the criteria for the selection. and sequence of material, activities and experiences for any particular pupil are the needs, maturity, interests and experiential backgrounds ofthe individual child. In our country the NCERT is the main institution authorised for making curriculum. Every state has . his own curriculum making bodies known as SCERT.Some 'states follows the NCERT curriculum. All schools affliated uses. This is the most important step of -teaching learning process. the CBSE boards generally follow NCERT curriculum. At higher _level every university make their own curriculum according to the guidelines of University Grant Commission which acts for the uniformity in curriculum at higher level in our country.

QUALITIES OF TEACHER CONTEXT (SETTING) :

Previously schoolswere not designed to successfully teach all . students. Nowadays their motto have been changed. Their nE;W motto is 'DO LEARN'. This setting is dynamic and flexible. This is changing in view -of making it beneficial to society rather than for an individual. Teaching is a process carried out in .differerit steps. There are five main steps of teaching (i) Preparatioli : This stage is required or - intended for the preparation of both the teacher and the students. The teacher prepare the ~tudent for a new topic or ~ lesson in variety of ways. (ii) Presentation : At this stage the new lesson actually begins. The students know that what they are going to learn. The subject material should be carefully arranged by the teacher. He has to encourage the students to observe, compare and contrast the. facts presented to them. This stage requires mental alertness from the students. The presentation rests in. the principle of selection of the area to be covered. It is not necessary for a· teacher to cover up all areas of the course of study. He. may leave some areas for students self study. (iii) -Comparison : In this section after presentation of subject matter, the student (i) Teacher should be mentally nad physically fit. (ii) Teacher should be keen in his wGrk and should be enthusiastic and anxious to keep his knowledge fresh & update. (iii) He should possess patience and tolerance and try to study the difficulties and problem of students and try to solve them in a quite and calm manner. (iv) He should have feelings of love and sympathy. (v) He must not be superstitious about his students and class. (vi) He should be well dressed and well maintained. (vii) His voice should be sweet, polite and clear. (viii) His language should be understandable to the students. (ix) He must not give any false promise. (x) He/she should have interest in his profession and the knowledge must be updated. (xi) He must not have any bad habits. (xii) Teacher must have a good communication skill and must be a master of his area or field of teaching. (xiii) Teacher should be trained in various methods of teaching. (xiv) He should know the child psychology. (xv) -Teacher should be a good researcher. (xvi) He should have a control over students - to maintain peace and order in,class. (xvii) Teaching should be pupil central rather than subject centres. is given opportunity to compare two or more sets of facts. This enhance the uriderstanding of lesson among students as they compare and observe different facts. (iv) Generalisation: This stage comes after the comparison and observation. Different tyPes of conclusions can be drawn from comparison and generalisation. These conclusions are systemised in a particular (xviii) Teacher should arose interest among students about the subject. / order to give a generalised truth. (v) Appiication : At this stage the generalised facts are applied for various (;dx) .Teacher must be fair in grading and marking. (xx) Teacher -should organise extra curricular activities for –better understanding of subject matter. (xxi) Good interpersonal relationship should be maintained. (xxii) Rewards and punishments should b~ given according to their behaviour but usually punishment should be avoided. (xxiii) Teacher should use modern techniques, methods and gadgets in teaching for better understanding of subject matter. (xxiv) Teacher should evoke curiosity of the pupils by presenting the subject matter in an effective manner with clear explanation leading to better understanding of the matter. (xxv) Teacher should arrange subject matter in a logical way. (xxvi) Teacher should make a lesson plan before presenting the lesson in the class . . (xxvii) Teacher should work as a leader in the class. (xxviii) Teacher should maintain a democratic atmosphere in the class so that every student will be able to put his doubt, questions and ideas with suggestion. (xxix) Teacher should act as a role model for his students with his character and behaviour. He way follow the way of "simple living and great thinking". (xxx) Teacher should inspire his pupil.

UGC Governance I

POLITY AND GOVERNANCE

Making Of The Constitution : The Constituent Assembly which had been elected for undivided India and held its first sitting on 9th Dec.1946, re- assembled un the 14th August 1947, as The Sovereign Constituent Assembly for the dominion of India. In regard to its composition the members were elected by indirect election by the members of The Provisional Legislative Assemblies (lower house only). According to the schemes recommended by the Cabinet, the essentials of the Schemes were as follows: - 1. Each Province and each Indian State or group of States were allotted the total no. of eats proportional to their re spective population, roughly in the ratio of 1:1000000. As a result, The Provinces were to elect 292 members while the Indian States were allotted a minimum of93 seats. 2. The seats in each Province were distributed among the three main communities, Muslims, Sikh and general, in proportion to their respective populations. 3. Members of each community in the Provisional Legislative Assembly elected their own representatives by the method of proportional representations with single transferable vote. 4. The method of selection in the case of representatives of Indian States was to be determined by consultation. Unfortunately as a result of a partition under the plan of June3, 1947, the territories, which fell under Pakistan and those members who were part of'T'ht' ConstituentAssembly, ceased to be members of the Constituent Assembly, which re ·assembled on the 31st Oct.1947. The members of the house was reduced to 299 of these 284 was actually present on the 26th Nov. 1949 and appended their signature to the Constitution as finally passed. Constitutional Background: The constitution was passed by the Constituent Assembly on 26 Nov 1949 and is fully applicable since 26 Jan 1950. Thanks to the help of Prof. K.B. Agrawal, the ICL-Edition of the Constitution now incorporates all amendments until and includin~ e 78th amendment (1995) [30 Aug 1995]; there are no newer amendments until Dec 1996. Amendments after Dec 1996 have not yet been included. India is a federal democratic republic of 25 states and seven Union Territories. Each state is administered by a Governor appointed by the President while each Union Territory is administered by the President through a Minister. The bicameral parliamentiB composed of the Council of States, Rajya Sabha, and the House of the People, Lok Sabha. The Council of States will consist of250 members out of which the President of India will nominate 12 persons having special knowledge or practical experience in respect of literatul"e, art, science and social service. The remaining 238 seats are to be filled in by the persons to be elected by the legislative assemblies of their respective states in staggered re-elections of one-third every second year. The House of People is composed of 550 members, Le., 530 members from the States and 20 members £l'om the Union Territories. The states of Bihar, Jammu and Kashmir, Karnataka, Maharshtra, and Uttar Pradesh have bicameral legislatmes while the other 23 states have unicameral legislatures. Upper houses (Legislative Councils) are re-elected to one-third of thetr members every two years. Legislative Assemblies are chosen by direct election. There are some extraordinary features of the Indian system of government. For example, the Constitution encourages the states to introduce the prohibition. The states of Andhra Pradesh, Manipur, and Haryana have already banned the production, possession. And consumption of alcohol. Commencement: The provisions relating to Citizenship, elections, pl'ovi sional Parliament, temporary and transitional positions were given immediate effect. on The 26th Nov.1949. While the rest of the Constitution came into force on the 26th Jan. 1950. And this date is referred to in the Constitution as The D"lte of its Commencement.

PREAMBLE TO INDIAN CONSTITUTION

The Preamble to the IndIan ConstItutlOn reads thus;"We, the people of India, having solemnly resolved to constitute India into a Sovereign, Socialist, Secular, Democratic Republic and to secure to all its citizens;Justice, social, economic and political:Liberty of thought. expl·ession, belief, faith and worship:Equality of status and of opportunity; and to promote among them all Fraternity assuring the dignity of the individual and the unity and integrity of the Nation: In our Constituent Assembly this twenty-sixth day of November, 1949, do hereby adopt, enact and give to ourselves this Constitution" . The Preamble seeks to establish what Mahatma Gandhi described as The India of my Dreams, " ... an India in which the poorest shall feel that it is their country in whose making they have an effective voice; ... an India ~n which all communities shall leave wIth perfect harmony. There can be no room in such an India for the curse of untouchability or the curse of IntoXicating drinks and drugs. Woman will enjoy as t.he same rights as man."

SALIENT FEATURES OF CONSTITUTION OF INDIA

(1) It makes India Sovereign, Socialist, Secular. Democratic Republic. (2) It is designed to work as Federal Government in normal times and as a Unitary Government in an emergency. (3) It establishes India as a Secular State. (4) It establishes a Parliamentary System of Government in India (5) It introduces adult franchise and the system of Government in India (6) I ndia is a U mon of 28 States and 7 U ruon Territories. (7) It abolishes untouchability in India (8) It guarantees Fundamental Rights to all citizens of India. (9) It lays down Directive Principles of state Policy for the guidance of Legislature and the Executive of the country. (10) It establishes independence of judiciary from the executiVe. (11) It declares Hindi as the National language of India which would rep lace English as early as possible. (12) A Union Public Service Commission has been set up to make recruitment to various services. (13) Provision has been made for amending the constitution. Fundamental Rights: The provisions of Part rn of our Constitution, which enumerates the Fundamental Rights, are more elaborate than those of any other existing written Constitutions of the World and cover a wide range of topics. The Purpose of the Fundamental Rights are to act as limitations not only upon the powers of the Executive but also upon the power of the Legislature. The model haa been taken (rom the Constitutions of The United States, though The Indian Constitutions does not gO so far, and rather affects the compromise between the doctrines of Parliamentary Sovereignty and Judicial Supremacy. The Constitutions itse lf classifies the Fundamental Rights under seven groups as follows: . a. Right to Equality b. Right to Particular freedoms c. Right against Exploitation d. Right to freedom of religion e Cultural and educational rights f. Right to Constitutional l'emedies g. Right to property - has been eliminated by the 44th amendment Act. thus only six freedom now remain. in Article 19 (I ).

Fundamental Duties: A countervailing factor has been introduced by t he 42nd amendment Act of 1976, known as the Fundamental Duties. These duties are mentioned in Art. SlA. Under thie Article, it shall be t.he duty of every citizen of India:· I. To abide by the Constitution and respect the national flag and the nationa l anthem; 11. To che risr. and follow the noble ideals which inspired our national struggle for freedom; III. To protect the Sovereignty, unity and integrity of India; rv. To defend the country; V. To promote the spir it of common brotherhood amongst all the people of India; VI. To preserve the rich heritage of our composite culture; VI[. To protect and improve the natural envtronment; VIII. To develop the scientific temper and spirit of inquiry: IX. To safeguard Public property; X. To strive towards excellence in all spheres of individual and collective activity. These duties are not them serves enforceable in The Courts nor their violation, as such, punishable, nevertheless, if a Court, be fore which a Fundamental Right is sought to be enforced, has to be read all parts of the Constitution, it may refuse to enforce a Fundamental Right at the instance of an individual who has patently violated any ofilie duties specified in Art, 51A. Directive Principles: PART IV of the Constitution Art. (36-51) contains the Directive Principles of State Policy. These Principles are in the nature of instruments of instruction to the govt. of the day to do certain things and to achieve certain ends by their actions, in other words Directive Principles are essentially guidelines to the State. A Directive Principle required to be implemented by legislation and so long as there is no Law carrying out the Policy laid down in a Directive, neither the State nor an individual can violate any existing Law or legal right under the color of a Directive. Further still the Directives ali'e not enforceable in the Courts and do not create any justicable rights in favor of the individuals. In case of a conflict between Directive Principles and Fundamental Rights of the Constitution, the latter shall prevail. These Directive Principles may be classified as follow s: - a) Certain ideals, particularly Economic, which according to the framers of the Constitution, State should strive for. b) Certain directions to the legislature and the executive intended to show in which manner The State should exercise their legislative and executive powers. c) Certain Rights of the citizen shall not. Be enforceable by The Courts (Fundamental Rights) nevertheless The State Gon. Shall aim to secure by regulations of its legislative and administrative policy. It shall be the duty of The State to foUow t hese Principles both in the matter of Administration as well as in the making of Laws.

Differences between Fundamental Rights and Directive Principles (1) Fundamental Rights are enforceable in the courts of law while Directive Principles cannot be enforced. (2) While Fundamental Righ ts constitute limitations upon state action, the Directive Principles are in the nature of instructions to the Government to achieve certain ends by their decisions. (3) Judiciary can declare any law void on the ground that it contravenes any of the Fundamental Rights, while the same is not in the case of Directive Principles. (4) In the case of conflict between the Fundamental Rights and t.he Directive Principles. the former prevail. I PARTS I PART I The Union and Its Territory Art.( 1-4) PART II Citizenship Art.( 5- 11 ) PART TlI Fundamental Rights Art.(12-35) PART IV Directive Principles of State Policy Art. (36-51) PART IVA Fundamental Duties Art.. (51A) PART V The UoionArt.. (52- 151) PART VI The States Art. (152-237) PART VII The States in Part B of The First Schedule Art. (238) PART VI II The Union Territories Art. (239-243) PART IX Panchayats Art. (2.13-243 zg) PART lXA Municipalities Art. (243 243) PART X The Scheduled and Tribal Areas Art. (244-244A) PART XI Relations Between The Union and The States Art. (245-263) PART XU Finance Property, Contracts and Sui .. Art. (264-300A) PART XIII Trade. Commerce and Intercourse within the Territory of Inuis Art. (301·307) 223 PART XlV Services Under The Union and The States Art. (308·323) PART XlVA Tribunals Art. (323A·323B) PART}''V Elections Art. (324·329A) PART XVI Special Provisions Relating To Certain Classes Art. (330-342) PART XVll Official Language Art. (343-35 1) PART XVIII Emergency Provisions Art. (352· 360) PART XIX Miscellaneous Art. (361 ·367) PART XXAmendment of the Constitution Art. (368) :>ART XXI Temporary, Transitional and Special Provisions Art. (369-392) PART XXII Short Title, Commencement, Authoritative Text in Hindi and Repeals I SCHEDULES I FIRST SCHEDULE - [Article, 1 and 4] I. THE STATES II. THE UNION TERRITORIES SECOND SCHEDULE - [Articles 59(3}, 65(3}, 75(6}, 97.125, 148(3}, 158(3}, 164 (5},186 and 22J1 PART A Provisions as to the President and the Governors of States. PART B-[Repealed.) PART C-Provisionsas to the Speaker and the Deputy Spe~er of the House of the People and the Chairman and the Deputy Chairman of the Council of States and the Speaker and the Deputy Speaker of the Legislative Assembly and the Chairman and the Deputy Chairman of the Legislative Council of a State PART D - Provisions as to the Judges of the Supreme Court and of the High Courts PART E - Provisions as to the Comptroller and Auditor-General oflndia THIRD SCHEDULE - Forms of Oaths or Affirmations [Articles 75(4), 99, 124(6), 148(2},164(3}, 188 and 219] FOURTH SCHEDULE -Allocation of seats in the qouncil of States [Articles 4(1) and 80(2}] FIFTH SCHEDULE - Provisions as to the Administration and Control of Scheduled Areas and Scheduled Tribes [Article 244(1)] Part A – General Part B - Administrative and control of Scheduled Areas and Scheduled Tribes Part C - Scheduled Areas Part D - Amendment of the Schedule SIXTH SCHEDULE - Provisions as to the Administration of Tribal Areas in [the States of Assam, , Tripura and MizoramJ [Articles 244(2) and 275(1)J SEVENTH SCHEDULE - (Article 246) List 1-Union List List II-State List List III· Concurrent List EIGH'1'H SCHEDULE - Languages [Articles 344(1} and 351) NINTH SCHEDULE - Validation of certain Acta and Regulations (Article SIB) TENTH SCHED\JLE - Provisions as to disqualification on ground of defection [Articles 102(2} and 191(2}] ELEVENTH SCHEDULE - Powers, authority and responsibilites of Panchayats [Article 243G) TWELTH SCHEDULE - Powers, authority and responsibilites of Municipalities, etc.

UGC Governance II

NATURE OF INDIAN CONSTITUTION

The Constitution of I ndis proVIdes for a Federal System of Government, though the term 'federation' has nowhere been used in the Constitution. For resolving the controversy regarding the nature of the IncUan Federal System, it is desirable to understand as to what is im'plied by a Federal System; what are its special features and how far these features are present in India.

FEDERAL FEATURES OF THE CONSTITUTION

The main federal features of the Indian Constitution are as follows: (1) Written Constitution : The first essential feature of a Federal System is a written Constitution which defines the stxucture, organization and powers of the Central 8S well as the State Governments 80 that the two 'Operate with each other's jurisdiction. The Indian Constitution is a written document which now contains 440 Articles and 12 Schedules. It stands at he top of hierarchy of all laws and all the authorities in India are legally bound to respect it. (2) Rigid Constitution: Another essential feature of our federation is a rigid Constitution which can be amended either by the joint action of the Federal and State Legislatures or by an independent authority. The lndian Constitution is rigid to a large extent. (3) Indep.endent Judiciary: The existence of an independent judiciary is another important feature of the Indian Federal System. The Supreme Court of India, which is the apex court in India, acts 8S the guardian of the Constitution and can declare any law or order ultra vires if it contravenes any provision of the Constitution. The Supreme Court also ensures that the Federal and the State Governments operate witbin the spheres allotted to them by the Constitution. (4) Division of Powers: Another feature of a federation is statutory division of powers between the Federal Government and the State Governments. The Indian Constitution divides the powers on the pattern of the Canadian Constitution. All the powers have been divided into three lists-the Union List, the State List and the Concurrent List. The residuaJ'y powers have been vested by the Constitution in the Central Government. (5) Bicameral Legislature: Like other Federations, the Constitution of India also provides for a bicameral Parliament consisting of the Lok Sabha and the Rajya Sabha. While the Lok Sabha comprises representatives directly elected by the people on the basis of universal adult franchjse, the Rajya Sabha mainly comprises representatives of the units. (6) Supremacy of the Constitution: The supremacy of the Constitution, another feature of federalism, IS also prescnt in India. The Constitution of India stands at tht: top of the hierarchy of all laws both national and state. NON-FEDERAL OR UNITARY FEATURES In addition to the above federal features, the Constitution contains certain non-federal or unitary features, which have led the critics of the Indian Constitution to challenge its federal character and charge that it is merely federal in form but unitary, in,s pirit. Some of the important unitary features of our Constitution are as under: (1) A Strong Centre: In the first instance, the Constitution provides for a very strong Centre, a feature of unitary government. In the division of powers, 99 items have been included in the Union Ust, while the State List contains only 61 items. Further, even on the subjects contained in the Concurrent List (52 items), both the Centre and the States have power to legislate, but the Central Government enjoys an over-nding position. The residuary powers have also been vested in the Centre. In short, the Constitution provides for a very strong Centre. (2) A Single Constitution for Union and States! Unlike ot.her Federations of the world, the States in India have not been given any right to make or unmake their own Constitution. The framers provided a single common and unified Constitution, both for the Centre and the States. Further, the States have not been given any power to initiate amendments to the Constitution. a power which exclusively vests in the Indian Parliament. This has enhanced the power and prestige of the Centre at the cost of the States. (3) Flexibility of the Constitution: In comparison to other federations, amendments to the constitution can be made only with lhe consent and approval of the units. In Indio on the other hand, the parliament can amend most of the provisions of the Constitution singlehandedly. either by single majority or by a two third majority. Only incase of some of the provisions the approval of the legislatures of the majorityofthe states is also required moreover, the states do not possess any power to initiate amendment to the constitution. All this has contrib uted to the strengthening of the centre at the cost of the states. (4) Single Citizenship: Usually in other federation provision for double citizenship exit, viz., each citizen is not only the citizen of the country as such but is also a citizen of a particular State in which he resides. The Indian Constittltion on the other hand. creates a single citizenship of India which is oommon to all the people of various states and Union territories. (5) Inequality of representation in the Rajya Sabha: The Indian Constitution also deviates from the traditional principle of providing equal representation to the States in the Upper House of the federal legislature. Unlike the US Senate, which accords equal representation to all the States irrespective of their size, the Indian Constitution accords representation to the various States in the Rajya Sabhs on the basis of their population. This means lhat the States with larger population send more representatives in comparison to the States with smaller population. This is a clear departure from the federal principle. (6) Existence of Union Te rritories! Another feature, whIch is a clear pointer to the unitary character of the Inclian Constitution , is the existence of administrative units known as the Union Territories. These units are directly governed by the Centr:al Government and do not enjoy any independent powers or autonomy. (7) Special Powers of Rajya Sabha on State Subjects: Under the Indian Constitution, the Rajya Sabha can authorize the Parliament to make laws even on the subjects mentioned in the State List. The existence of this provision in the Constitution implies that the Centre can encroach on the State List at will. (8) Emergency Provisions: The existence of the e mergency provisic.ns in the Constitution also poses a serious challenge to the federal character of the Indian polity. The President of Indin is authorized to proclaim a state of emergency under Articles 352, 356 and 360. During the proclamation of emergency. the Parliament gets the power to legislate for the whole or any part of the temtory of India with respect to any of the matters enumerated in the State List. The Union Government can also issue directions to the States as to the manner in which their executive authority is to be exercised. 226 (9) Appointment of Governors by the President{ The provision regarding the appointment of GovemorsofStat.es by the President is also a clear violation of the federal principles. Under the Indian Constitution, the Governors, who are the administrative heads of the State administration, are appointed by the President and hold office during his pleasure. The States do not have any say in their appointment or removal. Naturally, the Governors act as the agents of the Centre rather than as representatives of the States. This clearly gives power to the Centre to control the administration ofilie States which is contrary to the principles of a true federation. (10) Common All~lndia Services: Another feature, which is a pointer to the unitary character of the Indian Constitution, is the provision of common AlI·India Services like LA.S., IIP.S., etc. The members of these Services are appointed by the President of India on the recommendations of the Union Public Service Commissiotl and are accountable to the Union Government. The States have hardly any control over the members of these Services. (11) Single Unified Judiciary: Unlike other federations, India possesses a single unified judiciary with the Supreme Court at the apex. The Supreme Court not only exercises supervision but also control over the functioning of other Courts. The writs of the Supreme Court are observed throughout the country in all spherescivil, constitutional and criminal. The judges of High Courts are also independent of the States, which do not possess any power with regard to their appointment, removal and service conditions. They are appointed by the President and can be removM by him only after -they are impeached by the Parliament. Further, there are no separate sets oflaws and a single ~ivil and criminal procedure operates throughout the country. AU this is a clear pointer to the unitary character of the Constitution and is incomplete contrast to the position prevailing in the USA, where two separate sets of Courts exist·one for the Centre and the other for the States. (12) Centralised Election Machinery: The Constitution provides for an Election Commission which is responsible for the conduct, supervision, direction and control of the elections not only to the parliament but to the State Legislatures as well. The members of the Election Commission are appointed by the President in consultation with the Prime Minister and the States do not have say in there appointment, removaJ, working or service condition. This is yet another unitary feature of the Indian Constitution. (13) Compt t'oller and Auditor·General: The creation of the office of the ComptroUer and Auditor-General of India. who is responsible for the audit of the accounts of the centre as well as the states, is also a violation of the federal principle. The Comptroller and Auditor· General of [ndia is appointed by the President and the States have no say in his appointment or removal. (14) Inter-State Councils and Boards: The Constitution makes provision for the appointment of Inter·State Councils and Boards the settlement of disputes and differences between the centre and the State, and among the States. The members of these Inter·State Councils and Boards are appointed by the president and make necessary recommendations to the president regarding the settlement of disputes. It is noteworthy that in the appointment of the councils and boards. the stales have no say. This is a clear encroachment on the autonomy of the units of the lndilln fcdcrutioll. 227 (16) Constitution does not Protect Territorial Integrity of States: Unlike other federations, where the territorial integrity of the states is protected by the Constitution. the Constitution of India does not contain any provision to this effect. On the other hand, it specifically denies this righ t to the states' For example, Article 3 of the Constitution aut.horises the President to change the name, lerritory or boundary of any State without ascertaining their wishes. The parliament can also bifurcate an existing State or combine two or more States into one State. In other words, the very existence of the States depends on the sweet will of the Central Government.. Conclusion: It. is evident from the above discussion that t.hough the Indian Constitution outwardly possesses a federal structure, in spirit, it is unitary. The framers of the Constitution deliberately made the Centre st.rong in keeping with the inescapable realities of the situation.

CITIZENSHIP The Constitution of India provides for a single citizenship for the hole oflndia. It does not lay down a permanent law relating to the Indian citizenship but has left the matter entirely to legislation by Parliament. However. it lays down the classes of persons who would be deemed to be citizens of India at the commencement of the Constitution. (I) Domicile: A person domiciled in J ndis at the commencement of the Constit.ution of India is a citizen of India provided: (i) he was born in India; (il) either of his parents was born in India; and (ill) he has ordinarily been resident in India for the last five years immediately preceding the rommencement of the Constitution. (2) Immigrants from Pakistan: Any person who has migrated to India from Pakistan is a citizen of India provided he or either of his parents or grand·parents were born in the pre· partition India. And (a) if he migrated before the 19th July, 1948 and he has been ordinarily resident of Inetia since the date of migration, (b) ifhe migrated on or after the 19th July. 1948, he has been registered as a citizen. (3) Migrants to Pakistan: A migrant to areas now forming Pakista n after the 1st March, 1947 is not a citizen of I.ndia. But if he returned to Inwa undel' a proper permit for resettlement or under the authority of any law and is duly registpred, he is a citizen of India. (4) Residents in Foreign Countries: Any person ordinarily residing out of India is deemed to be a citizen of India ifhe or either of his parents or any of his grand-parents was born in pre-parution India provided that he is registered as a Ci tizen by a diplomatic or consular representative of India.

ACQUISITION OF CITIZENSHIP- According to the Citizenship Act, 1955, the citizenship could be acquired through any of the following five methods: (1) By Birth: All the persons born in India on or after 26th January, 1950, are treated as citizens by birth. However, the children born to foreign diplomats posted in India are not. e ntitled to Indian ciLizenship. (2) By Descent: A person born even outside India shall be treated as citizen of India by descent if at the time of his birlh, his father is a citizen of India. (3) Registration: A person can acquire citizenship of India by registration with the appropriate authority, The persons who could acquire citizenship by registration include (a) persons of Indian origin who have ordinarily been resident in India for SLX months, immediately before making an 228 application for registration. A person is deemed to be of Inctian origin ifhe, or either of his parents, or an) of his grand-parents, was born in the undivided lndia; (b) persons oflnctian origin ordinarily resident outside lndia; (c) women married to Indian citizens; (d) minor children of persons who are citizens of India; (e) persons of adult age and capacity who are citizens of Commonwealth countries or Republic of Ireland. (4) By Natura lisation: A person can acquire citizenship of India by naturalization ifhe fulfils the foUowing qualifications: (a) he belongs to a country where the citizens of India are allowed to become subjects or citizens of that country by naturalization: (b) he renounces the citizenship of his country in accordance with the law of that country and intimates the renunciation to the Government of India; (c) he has been residing in India or serving the Government oi India for at least 12 months immediately preceding the date of application; and (d) he possesses workable knowledge of an Indian language. (5) By Incorporation of Territory: In the event of certain territory being added to the territory of India, the Government can specify the persons or categories of persons who shall be entitled to India.n citizenship, by reasons of their connection with the territory.

LOSS OF CITIZENSHIP- The Act envisages three methods for the loss of the Indian citizenship, which are as foUows: (1) By Renunciation: An Indian citizen, who wants to become the national of another country, can volun tarily renounce his citizenship by ma king a necessa ry declaration to this effect in the prescribed form. It may be noted th at even the minor children of such a person also cease to be citizens of India. (2) By Termination: The citizenship of a person is automatically terminated if he voluntarily acquired the citizenship of nny other country by naturalization, registration or otherwise. However, the utizenship of a person is not terminated if he acquires the citizenship of a country with which India is at war, till such time as normal relations are restored between the two countries. (3) By Deprivation: A person can be deprived of his citizenship under the following conditions: (a) ifhe obtains the certificate of citizenship by fraud, false rep resentation or concealment of any material fact: (b) if he shows disloyalty or disaffection towards the lndian Constitution; (c) ifhe assists a country with whom India is at war; (d) ifhe stays abroad for seven consecutive years without showing any intention to continue as Indian citizen; and (e) if he is sentenced to imprisonment for a period not less than two years within five yea rs of naturalization or registration. It is noteworthy that the citil.el"..ship of a person can be taken from him only if he has acqnirnd Indian citizenship by naturaliultion, pure domicile or registration. The persons. who are citizens of India by birth or descent., cnnnot be deprived of their citizenship in any of the above manner.

UGC Governance III

MACHINERY OF GOVERNMENT OF THE UNION THE EXECUTIVE:-

The Constitution provides for a parliamentary executive which consists of the President. The Vice·President and the Council of Ministers, with the Prime Minister at its head. THE PRESIDENT Election : The President is elected by an electoral coUege composed of elected members of both HOllses of Parliament and elected members of State Legislative Assemblies by a system of proportional representation by means of 8 single transferable vote; the voting shall be by secret ballot. Tenure of Office: The President holds office for a period of five years [rom the day on which he enters upon his office, He is eligible for reo election, Qualifications for Election as President: (1) He should be a citizen of India. (2) Heshould not be less than 35 years of age. (3) He should be qualified for election as ,a member of Lok Sabha. (4) He should not. hold any office of profit under the Government. (5) He should not be a member of either House of Parliament or State Legislature, Powers: (a) Executive Powers: (1) The President is the executive head of the Sovereign, Socialist, Secular. Democratic Republic of India. (2) He is ex·officio Supreme Commander of the defence forces. He can declare wat' and make peace, (3) He makes all important appointments such as those of Governors, Chief Justice, Prime Minister and Ministers. (4) He governs the Union Territories directly through Lieutenant Governors. (b) Legislative Powers: (1) Any Bill passed by the Parliament must receive his assent before it becomes an Act, except in the case of Money Bills on which prior assent is necessary. (2) President can issue Ordinances when the Parliament is not in session. (3) He can nominate 12 members to the Rajya Babha and 2 Anglo-Indian members to the Lok Babha. (4) He can address either House QfParliament. (5) He can dissolve the Lok Sabha and order fresh elections. (c) Financial Powers: (1) No Money BiD can be introduced in Parliament without his prior assent. (2) He can appoint a Finance Commission after every five years. (d) Judicial Powers: (1) He can grant pardon, reprieve or remission of punishment or commute death sentence. (2) He is not answerable to any court.oflaw. (3) He appoints Judges of Supreme COllI't and High Courts. (e) Emergency Powers: Th~ President. can suspend the whole Const.itution or some articles of it under emergency <:onditions arising out of: (i) threat to the security of I.ndia or any part thereof by war, external aggression or armed rebellion; (ii) fa.ilure of constitutional machinery in a State; and (iii) financial emergency Discretionary Powers: (I) If after the gem.ral election, no single party is able to secure a majority or post·electlon splits red uce the majority to minority, the President can use his own discretion to determine which party has the best chances oCforming a Government. Similar is the case in the case of death of a Prime Minister. (2) In case th£! President comes to a conclusion that none -of the parties represented in the Parliament is to a position to form a stable Government, he can dissolve the Lok Sabha and order fresh elections. (3) When an advice is sent by the Council of Ministers to the President for approval, he can once I'eturn the same to the Council of Ministers for reconsideration under Art. 74(1) of the Constitution. However, once an advice is reconsidered by the Council of Ministers and returned to the President of approval, he cannot refuse to it in accordance with it. Impeachme nt: The President may be removed form office by impeachment for the violation of the Constitution. The charge .. for this may be preferred in either House of Parliament. The Resolution for impeachment must be passed by a two· thirds majority of the total membership of t.he House. The other House will investigate the charge. If the investigating House passed by a two-thirds majority of the total membership, a resolution that the charge preferred against the President has been sustained, it will have the effect of removing the President from his office.

Salary and Allowances: The President is entitled to an official rent·free residence and draws a salary of &.50,000 per month besides various allowances. He is entitled to pension of Rs.30,000 per month.

VICE-PRESIDENT Method of Election: The Vice·President is elected by the members of both Houses of Parliament at a joint session by meaDS of single transferable vote according to the system of proportional representation. Voting is by secret ballot. Qualifications: (1) He must be a citizen of India. (2) He must not be less than 35 years of age. (3) He must be qualified to become a member of the Rajya Sabba. (4) He should not be holding any orfice of profit under the Government. (5) He should not be 8 member of either House of Parliament or State Legislature. Terms of Office: The Vice· President holds office for a maximum period of five years and is eligible for re-election. Functions: (1) The Vice· President is ex·officio Chairman of the Rajya Sabhs. (2) If there occurs any vacancy in the office of President by reason of his death, resignation or removal. then he acts 8S President till a new President is elected, subject to a maximum period of six months. During this period he ceases to be the Chairman of Rajya Sabhn. (3) He also acts as the President during the temporary abse nce of the P¥esident due to illness or any other cause. Removal: The Vice· President can be removed from his office by a resolution of the Rajya Sabha by a majority of its total membership and agreed to by the Lok Sabha by a simple majority.

COUNCIL OF MINISTERS:- The Constitution provides for a Council of Ministers with a Prime Minister as its head to aId and advise the President in the exercise of his functions. The Prime Minister is appointed by the President. The other Ministers are appointed by the President on the advice of the Prime Minister. The Council of Ministers IS collectively responsible La the Lok Sabha under Art. 75(3) of the Constitut.ion, The President is bound by the advice of Council of Ministers. INDIAN PARLIAMENT The Union Parliament consists of the President and two Houses· Lok Sabha and Rajya Sabha.

RAJYASABHA:- Composition: It consisls of not more than 250 members, out of which 238 are elected and the remaining 12 nominated by the President for their special contribu tion to art, literature, science and social services. The elected members are chosen by the Stote Assemblies in accordance with the system of proportional representation by means of a single transferable vote. The allocat.ion of seats among the States is not on the basis of equality of representation. In the case of Union Territories. members are chosen in such a manner as the Parliament by law determines. A candidate for election to the Council of States (Rajya Sabha) must be (i) a citizen ofTndia: (ii) not less than 30 years of age; (iii) not holding any office of profit under the Government: and (iv) ordinarily a resident of the State from which he is contesting. Duration: The Council ofStat.es isa permanent. body, not subject. to dissolu tion. The term of office for its melT!bers is six yea rs, one·t.hird of the members retiring after every second year. Other Provisions: The Vice· President of India is e.(·o~cio Chairman of the Council of States. The Council elects one of ils members as Deputy Chairman. who presides over its meetings in the absence of the Vice·President. But whenever the Council is considering a Resolution for the removal of the Vice· President or the Deputy Chairman from his office. These officers shall n9t preside over the sitting of the House, nor can they vo~ on the resolution, though t.hey are entitled to speak .. Powers and Functions: With regard to legislative powers, the authority of the Rajya Sabhs is co-extensive with that of the Lok Sabha. No measure can become a law. unless it has been passed by the Rajya Sabha. It exercises control over the Union Administration by seeking information. By means of questions and supplementaries. By moving resolutions or motions of adjournment or censure. Blit it cannot oust the Ministry from office. As regards the Mom~y Bills. These cannot be introduced in the Council of States. Also when a Money Bill is passed by the Lok Sabha and transmitted to the Rajya Sabha, the iatt2r can delay the Bill for 14 days. It cannot reject the Bill

LOKSABHA Composition: It consists of not more than 552 members, out of which 530 members are elected from States and not more than 20 members from the Union Territories and tribal areas. The representatives from the States 8redirectly elected by the people on the basis of adult franchise. At present there are 543 elected members. The representatives of the Union Territories are to be chosen in such manner as the Parliament may, by law, provide. The President can also nominate two Members to Lok Sabha to represent the Anglo-Indian community if, in his opinion, it is not adequately represented. [Art. 331J A member for election to Lok Sabha must be (i) a citizen of India; (ii) not less than 25 years of age; and (iii) not holding any office of profit. The number of seats to each State is so allotted that the ratio between the members and population, as far as practicable, is the SRme for each State. Each member of the House should represent not less than 51akh citizens. Tenure: Lok Sabhs has a tenure of 5 years unless dissolved earlier. But while a Proclamation of Emergency under Art. 352 is in operation, this period may be extended for a period not exceeding one year ata time and not exceeding in any case beyond a period of six months after the proclamation has ceased to operate. Disqualification of Members of Parliament A person shall be disqualified for being chosen as, and for being, a member of either House of Parliament: (i) if he holds any such office of profit under the Government of India or Government of State, as is declared by Parliament. by law to disqualify its holder; (ii) if he is of unsound mllld and stands so declared by a competent court; (iii) if he is an undischarged insolvent; (iv) if he is not a citizen of India. or has voluntarily acquireu citizenship of a foreign State; and (v) ifhe is so disqualified by any law made by Parliament. Powers and Functions of Parliament (1) Its main function is to enact laws for the good government of the counLry. (2) It can pass a vote of No-confidence and thus dismiss the Government in power. (3) It controls the fmances of the Union. (4) The members can elicit information by asking questions and supplimentaries. (5) The members can move adjournment motions and thus criticize the government. (6) It ean impeach the President in case he violates the Conj>titution.(7) Maximum Gap between two sessions of ParUament is 6 months under Art. 85(1).

JOINT SESSION:- For Non Money Bills After a Bill has been passed by one House of Parliament and transmitted to the other House and (a) the Bill is rejected by the other Hom.e; or (b) the two Houses have finally disagreed as to the amendments to be made in the Bill; or (c) more than six months have elapsed from the date of receipt of the Bill by the other House without the Bill being passed by it. The Parliament may. unless the Bill has lapsed by reason of dissolution of the Lok Sabhs, notify to the Houses by message, if they are sitting, or by public notification, if they are not sitting, his intention to summon them to meet in a Joint session for the purpose of deliberating and voting on the Bill. If at the joint sitting of the two Houses, the Bill, with such amendments, if any. as are agreed to in the joint sitting, is passed by the majority of the t-Ota1 number of members of both Houses present and voting, it shall be deemed to have been passed by both the Houses. For Money sms: A Money Bill can be introduced in the Lok Sabha only on the recommendations of the President. Aner a Money Bill has been passed by the Lok Sabha. it is transmitteu to Rajya Sabha for recommendations. The Rajya Babha must make its ~ecommendations within 14 days of the receipt of the Bill. It is up to the Lok Sabha to accept or reject any of the recommendations. If the Lower House accepts any of the reoommendationsofthe Hajya Sabha, the Bill is deemed to have been passed by both the Houses with the amendment recommended by the Hajya Sabha and accepted by the Lok Sabha.If the Lok Sabha does not accept any of the recommendations of the Rajya Sabha, the Money Bill is deemed to have been passed by both Houses in the form in which it was passed by the Lok Sabha. If the Bill is not returned within 14 days, it is deemed to have been passed by both the Houses at the expiration of the term of 14 days. It is then transmitted to the President for assent. After this. it becomes an Act. In the case of an amendment to Constitution, the deadlock cannot be resolved by the joint session of the Parliament. The BiU for the amendment of the Constitution has to be presented again to both the Houses of .Parliament and it becomes an act only when passed by both the Houses by requisite majority.

THE SPEAKER

Election: The Speaker of the Lok Sabha is elected by the members of Lok Sabha by a simple majority. The term of his office is co· terminus with the life of the House itself. Power and Functions (1) He presides over the sitting ofLok Sabha and the joint session of Parliament. (2) He decides whether a particular Bill is a Money BUI or not Bnd his decision is £in al. (3) He determines the order of the business in the House in consultation with the Leader of lhe House. (4) He decides about the admissibility of questions and Adjournment Motions, etc. (5) He appoints Chairmen of the Select Committees. (6) He maintains proper decoru m in the Housc. He warns disorderly members and suspends them from s ittings of the House. if any member flouts his authority. Removal: The House of the People can remove the Speaker at any time by a resolution passed by the majority of the members of the time being. Such a resolution can be introduced in the House only after a notice has been given to t.hat effect at. Least fourteen days in advance. MONEY BILL A Bill is said to be a Money Bill if it contains only provisions dealing with all or Bny of the following matters: (i) the imposition, abolition. remission. alteration or regulation of any tax: (ii) regulation of borrowing of money or creating or regulation of any tax; (iii) custody of the Consolidated Fund of India or Contingency Fund of India and its operation; (iv) appropriation of money out of the Consolidated Ftlnd of India; (v) the declaring of money charged on the COl!:;oli:l.ated Fund of India or increasing the amount of such expenditure; (vi) the receipt of money on account of the Consolidated Fund of India or Public Account of I ndin or cllstody or iSSlle of 8 ny such expenditure; (vii) audit of accounts of the Union or a State; or (viii) any other matter incidental to any of the matters referred to above.

The Privileges of Parliament are certain rights belonging to each House collectively and some to the members individually for maintaining its freedom, status and dignity. The following are the privileges, viz., (i) freedom of speech in Parliament; (ii) no member of Parliament is liable to any proceedings in any court in respect of anything said or any vote given by him in Parliament or any committee thereof; and (ill) no peeson is liable in ,espeot of the publication by or under the orders of either House of Parliament of any report, paper, votes or proceedings. Powers of Parliament: The privileges, powers and immunities of a House of Parliament are: (i) that no court. shall look into the validity of its proceedings; (ii) no Officer or Member of Parliament is answerable to any court for exercise of the powels vested in him under the Constitution; (iii) To make its own rules for regulating its procedure and business; (iv) To regulate recruitment and conditions of service of persons appointed to the Secretaria t of the House; and (v) To punish any person for contempt of the House and breach of privileges of Members, Committees and the House. COMNUTTEESOFPARL~NT To cope with the ever-increasing work, the Indian ParliamenT. has set up a number of committees. These committees play an effective role in the working of the Indian Parliament. The members of these committees are appointed by the Speaker or are elected by the House from amongst its members. These committees are authorized to call witnesses and collect evidence by asking for official papers and records. The important committees of the Lok Sabhs are as follows: (1) Business Advisory COITlITlittee: This committee is concerned with the planning and regulation of t~e business of the House. It also advises the H Oll~e regarding allocation of ti.me for T.he discussion of various issues. This 'Committee is formed at the beginning of the Lok Sabha's session and consists of 15 members. The Speaker is the Chairman of this Committee. Toensure.the smooth workmg of the House, the leaders of the major opposition parties are also associated with this Committee. (2) Select Conunittees on Bills: There are a number of Select Committees of the House which collect information on various issues and submit necessary report on the basis of the examination of relevant material and witnesses. 'I'he Committee is dissolved soon after it has submitted the report on the subject under reference. The members of the Select Comrcittee are appointed by the House. The strength of members of various Select Committees differs according to the import.ance of the Bill. (3) Committee on Privi leges: The Committee tries to safeguard and protect the privileges of the members of the House and suggests appropriate action against the erring authorities. It may be noted that the members of the Parliament have been granted certain privileges and immunities, and any violation or denial of these is tantamount to a crime for which legal proceedings can be instituted against the erring authority. The Privileges Committee consists of 15 members, who are nominated by the Speaker at the commencement of the session of the Lok Sabha. Generally, the Deputy Speaker acts as the Chairman of this Committee. (4) Committee on Subordinate Legislation; The Committee IS constituted to ensure that the rule· making powers delegated to the executive are not misused. It scrutinizes the rules and regulations enacted by the various departments to ensure that these conform to the main law enacted by the Parliament. Thus the Committee plays an important role in preventing llsurpation of Parliament's powers by the executive. This Committee also consists of 15 members who are nominated by the Speaker. The Ministers cannot be members of this Committee. (5) Committee on Public Undertakings: This is a Committee of both the Houses of Parliament. It consists of22 members· 15 from the Lok Sabha and 7 from the Rajya Sabha. The Committee examines the working of the Public Undertakings, including their fmancial matters. It is also the function of the Committee to examine the reports and accounts of Public Undertakings specified in the Rules of Procedure and the reports of the Comptroller and Auditor-General thereon, if any, and to examine, in the context of the autonomy and efficiency of the Public Undertakings, whether the affairs of the Public Undertakings are being managed in accordance with the sound business principles and prudent commercial practice. (6) Committee on Government Assurances: This Committee examines the various assurances and undertakings given by the Ministers on the floor of the House to find out how far these have been fulfilled or implemented within the stipulated time. This Committee consists of 15 m~mbers who are nominated by the Speaker for one year. The Ministers arc not eligible for membership of this Committee. (7) Estimates Committee: It is very significant Committee and performs the following functions: (i) It reports what economies, improvements in organization, efficiency or administrative reforms, consistent with the policy underlying the estimates, can be effected. (ii) It suggest alternative policies to bring about efficiency and economy in administration. (Ui) It ensures that tge money is weU laidout within the limitS of the policy implied in the estimates. (iv) It suggests the form in which the estimates should be presented to the Parliament. The Estimates Committee consists of 30 members of the House on the basis of the proportional representation and single transferable vote. The Chairman of the Estimates Committee is appointed by the Speaker. However, if the Deputy Speaker happens to be a member of this Committee. he ipso facto becomes its Chairman. (8) Public Accounts Committee: This is also a joint committee of the two Houses. It consists of 22 members - 15 from Lok Sabha and 7 from Rajya Sabha. It may be noted that Rajya Sabha members are only associate members and are not. entitled to vote. The members of the Committee are elected for one year but by convention they generaUy continue in office for at least two years. The election is held on the basis of proportional representation through a single transferable vote. The Ministers cannot be members of this Committee. The Chairman of the Committee is appointed by the Speaker'from amongst its members. The main function of the Committee is to examine the repprt of the Comptroller and Auditor-General of India and to ascertain that the expenditure has not exceeded the grants made by the Parliament and the money has been spent for the purpose it was sanctioned by the Parliament. It also sees to it that the fmaneia! rules and regulations have been foUowed by the executive. The Committee plays an important role in ensuring regularity and economy in expenditure.

UGC Governance IV

SUPREME COURT:- Appointment of judges: Every judge of the Supreme Court is appointed by the President by warrant under his band and sea l after consultation with such Judges of the Supreme Court and of the High Courts a6 the president may deem necessary for the purpose. In case of appoint.ment of a judge, other than chief Justice, t.he Chief Justice of India is to be necc'3sanly consulted. A Judge of the Supreme Court remains in office until he attains the age of65 years. No person can be appointed a Judge of the Supreme Court unless (i) he is a citizen of India, (ii) has been for at. least five years a Judge of High Court or has been for at least ten years an advocate of a High Court or two or more courts in succession, (iii) is in the opinion of the President a distinguished jurist. Privileges of Judges: A Judge of the Supreme Court is entilled to such salaries as are specified in the Second Schedule. Every Judge of the Supreme Comt is entitled to the use of an official residence without rent. Also, every judge is entitled to such privileges and allowances and to such rights.in respect of leave of absence and pension as may, from time to time , be determined by the Parliament. Removal of Judges: Judge of the Supreme Court can only be removed from office by an order of the President, Parliament, supported by a majority of not less than two-thirds of the members of that house present and voting. Has been presented to the President in the same session for such removal on the ground of proved misbehavior or incapacity. The parliament has been empowered to regul,ate the procedure for the presentation ofan address and for the investigation and proof of the misbehavior or incapacity of a Judge under Article 124. Composition: The Supreme Court is the highest court of justice in fndia. ft consists of one chief justice and 25 other judges. There is provision for the appointment of ad hoc judgea and even the retired judges may be at times. when the neceSSlty arises, requested to be present. Powers and Functions: The Supreme Court is a court of recol'd and exercises all the powers of such a court, including th~ power to punish for the contempt of itself. Ita malO functions may be studied under the following heads: {l) Original Jurisdiction: The Supreme Court has exclusive jurisdiction in aU disputes- (a) between the Government of India and one or more States; (b) between the Government of India and any State or States on the other; and (e) between two or more States. Such jurisdiction, however, does not extend to a dispute al'ising out of any treaty, agreement, coven a nt , engagement or sanad or any similar instrument which was executed before the commencement of the Constitution. (2) Appellate Jurisdiction in Civil Cases: An appeal to the Supreme Court lies from any judgement, decree or final orders of a High court or, a certificate from a high court concerned that the case involves a substantial question as to the interpretation of the Constitution. (3) Jurisdiction in criminal Cases: In criminal cases an appeal lies to the Suprema Court if the High Court (i) has given any decree or final order in the case; (li) has withdrawn for trial before it self any case from any court subordinate to its authority a nd ha s in s uch trial sentenced the accused to death; or (iii) certifies that the case is a fit one for appeal to the Supreme Court. (4) Advisory Jurisdiction: The President may refer to the Supreme Court any question of law or fa ct of s ufficient importance for its opinion. The President may also refer to the court disputes arising out of any provision of treaty, agreement, co.-ensnt, engagement or sanad, etc. The opinion 80 expressed is not binding on the President. (5) Enforcement of Fundamental Rights: The Supreme Court has been armed with powers to issue directions or orders or writs in the nature of habeas corpus, mandam us, prohibition, quo warranto and certiorari for the enforcement of the Fundamental Rights conferred by the Constitution. (6) Additional Jurisdiction: Article 138 of the Constitution provides for enlargement of the jurisdiction of the Supreme Court by Parliament with reference to any matter contained in the Union List. It has also jurisdiction on any such matter as the Government ofIndia and the Government of any State may, by agreement, confer. But the Parliament has to give effect to this agreement by passing a law. (7) Power to Review: The Supreme Court has power to review sny judgement or order made by it, subject to any law passed by the Parliament in this regard. (8) Supplementary Powers: Parliament may by law confer such supplemental powers on the Supreme Court ss may appear to be necessary and desirable for the due discharge of its functions. Guardian of the Constitution: It is clear from the powers and functions of the Supreme Court that it is the ultimate interpreter of the Constitution and, as such, its guardian. The authority of the Court is further re-inforced by the provision that "the law declared by the Supreme Court shall be binding on all courts within the territory of India" (Art. 141). Further, in the exercise of its jurisdiction, the court is authorized to pass appropriate decrees or orders in the interests of complete justice in any case before it. Independence of Judiciary: The independence and impartiality of the Supreme Court is the corner-stone of democracy. Justice is said to be blind and this must be so, especially in a democracy which professes all its citizens to be equal before law. Our Constitution ensures the independence of the Judiciary through the following measures: (1) Though appointed by the President~ ajudge ofthe Supreme Court can only be removed a fter an address of each House of Parliament supported by a majority of the total membership of that House and by a majority of not less than 2/3 of the members present and voting and presented to the President on the ground of proved misbehaviour or incapacity. (2) The salary and the conditions of service of a judge of the Supreme Court cannot be varied to his disadvantage after his appointment. (3) After retirement, a judge of the Supreme Court cannot plead or act in any other Court or before any authority within the territory ofIndia. (4) The salaries. etc., of the judges and administrative expenses of the Supreme Court are chargeable on the Consolidated Fund of India and are, therefore, not votable.

HIGHCOURTS:- Appointment of Judges: Ajudge of the High Court is appointed by the President by warrant under his hand and seal after consultation with the Chief Justice ofIndia, the Governor of the State, and in the case of appointment of a judge other than Chief Justice, the Chief Justice of the High Court concerned. Provision has also been made for the attendance of the retired judges at sittings of the High Courts. Qualifications: A pErson cannot be appointed a judge of a High Court unless: (i) he is a citizen of India; (ij) has for at least ten years held a judicial office in the territory of India; and (iii) has for at least ten years been the advocate of a High Court or of two or more such Courts in succession. Conditions of Services: A judge of a High Court holds office until he attains the age of 62 years. He may be removed from his office in the same manner in which a judge of the Supreme Court is removed (discllssed earlier). Every judge is entitled to such allowances and to such rights in respect oC leave and pension as may from time to time be determined by the Parliamentary enactment. His allowances and other rights are not to be varied to his disadvantage after the appointment.

THE GOVERNOR:- Appointment: The Governor of a State is appointted by the President. Only a citizen of India, who hAS completed 35 years of age, is eligible for appointment 88 a Governor. He need not be a residentoCthat State for appointment as Governor. He holds office during the pleasure ~fthe President. Subject to this, he holds office for a period of five years. He receives asalary of Rs. 36,000 per month, and is entitled to certain other allowances and privileges. Powers of a Governor: (a) Legislative Powers: He summons, fixes the time and place for the meeting of the Legislature. He addresses the meeting of the Legislature at the commencement of session once in a year, He can send messages to the State Legislature. Every ~ Bill passed by the Legislature must have his assent. He has the power to promulgate an ordinance, whenever the legislature is not in session. (b) Executive Powers: He appoints Chief Minister of the State and the other Ministers on the advice of the Chief Minister, He also appoints the Chairman and members of the State Public Service Commission. He acts ss the agent of the Centre during an emergency. (c) Financial Powers: No Money Bill can be introduced in the Legislative Assembly of the State except on the Governor's recommendation. The State Contingency Fund is at his disposal and he can make advaoces out of it to meet unforeseen expenditure pending its authorization by the State Legislature. (d) Judicial Powers: He haa the power to grand pardons, and suspend, remit or commute sentences where the offence is under a low relating to matters within the executive competence ofthe State. (e) Discretionary Powers: (i) He detcrm.ines whether the Government of a State can or cannot be carried on in accordance With the provisions of the Constitution.lfhe feels that it cannot be SO carried on, he can make a report to the President under Art. 356(1). (0) If after the general elections, no single party is able to secure a clear majority or post-election splits reduce the majority to a minority, the Governor can use his owo disrretion to determine which party has the best chances of forming a stable government. (iii) In case the Governor comes to conclusion that none of the parties represented in the legislature is in a position to form a stable government he can in his discretion dissolve the legislature and order fresh elections. (iv) The Governor can reserve a bill or bills passed by the State Legislature for consideration of the President. Role of Governor: Ordinarily, the Governor has to act according to the wishes of the Council of Ministers. No other role can fit in well in a Parliamentary set up. It is only in the exercise of discretionary powers when he may ignore the wishes of the Ministers. Apart from the role of Governor as a Constitutional head of the State, the Constitution certainly visualizes another role on his part when he acta 88 the agent of the Centre. Itis only, when so doing that the use of discretionary powers become relevant. When the administration of State is not carried on in accordance with th~ provisions of the Constitution, he is to report to the Centre, During President's Rule, be runs the administration directly with the help of the Advisers appointed by the Central Government

STATE COUNCIL OF MINISTERS:- The Constitution provides for a Council of Ministers, with a Chief Minister at its head, to aid and advise the Governor in the exercise of his functions. The Governor appoints the Chief Minist.er and his Ministers. UsuaUy, all the Ministers must be members of the Legislature ofthe State but sometimes even a non· member may be appointed a Minister. In that case, he cannot retain his office for more than six months without being a member of the Legislature of the State. The Council of Ministers is collectively responsible to the Legislative Assembly of the State. STATE LEGISLATURE In every State, the Legislature consists of the Governor and (a) in case of Bihar, Maharashtra, Karnataka, V.P. and Jammu & Kashmir two Houses, namely, Legislative Council and Legislative Assembly and (b) in other States one House, viz. , Legislative Assembly. Legi'slative Assembly: It is a directly elected body on the basis of adult franchise. The total number of members of the Assembly shall in no case be more than 500 or less than 60. Its normal life is fiv(. years. A candidate for election to the Legislative Assembly ofa State should be (i) a citizen of India; (li) not less than 25 years of age; and (ill) not holding an office of profit under the Government. Legislative Council: This is a permanent body. One·third of its members l'etire every second year. Its total members should not exceed one·third of the members of State Legislative Assembly. Its minimum strength is 40. Only U.p.., Bihar, Maharashtra, Karnataka and Jammu & Kashmir have Legislative Councils.

DISTRIBUTION OF LEGISLATIVE POWERS BETWEEN THE UNION AND THE STATES:- The Constitution of India makes a division of legislative powers between the Union and the States under Seventh Schedule. The Union Parliament has powers to make laws for the whole or any part of the territory of India, while the Legislature of a State can make laws for the State concerned. Also, like the Government of India Act, 1935, there is three· fold distribution of powers between the Union and the States: (1) Union List: It includes 99 subjects ovel' which the Union Parliament has exclusive power of Legislation such as Defence, Foreign Affairs, Banking, Currency, etc. (2) State List: It comprises 61 items over which the State Legislatures have exclusive powers of Legislation, e.g., Health, Agriculture, etc. (3) Concurrent List: It comprises 52 items in which the Union and the State Legislatures both can make laws, e.g., criminal law and procedure, marriages, economic planning, education, etc. (4) Residuary Powers: According to Art. 248 of the Constitution, the residuary powers are vested in the Union Legislature, Le., the Parliament have the exclusive right to make any law with regard to any matter not specified in the Concurrent or State List. Conflict of Jurisdiction: In case of the overlapping of a matter as between the lists, predominance has been given to the Union Legislature. Thus, in the case of repugnancy between a law of the State and a valid Union law, the latter will prevail and the law made by the State to the extent of repugnancy shall he void. If, however, the legislation relates to a concurrent subject, the State legislation may prevail, notwithstanding any repugnancy, if the State law had been reserved for the President and received his assent.

ADMINISTRATIVE RELATIONS BETWEEN THE UNION AND THE STATES:- The Union Government have the power to give directions to the Slate Governments as regards exercise of their executive r"wers in respect of the following matters: (A) Normal Time Directions (1) To ensure compliance with Union laws and existing laws which apply in that State. [Art. 257J (2) To ensure that the exercise of executive powers of State do not interfere with the executive powers of the Union. [Art. 257(I)J (3) To ensure maintenance construction of the means and of communication of national or military importance by the state. [Art. 257(2)] (4) To ensure ,protection of railways within the State. [Art. 257(3)J (5) To ensure drawing and execution of schemes specified in the dirt:ctions to be essential for the welfare of the Scheduled Tribes in the State. [Art. 339(2)J (6) To ensure the provisions of adequate facilities for instruction in the mothertongue at the primary stage of education to children belonging to the linguistic minorities. [Art. 350-AJ (7) To ensure the_ development of Hindi language. [Art. 351] (8) During Emergency (1) During a proclamation of Emergency, the Union Government is empowered to give directions to any State as to the manner in which the executive power of the State is to be exercised. [Art.353(a)] (2) During a proclamation of failure of constitutional machinery in a State, the President may assume to himself all or any of the executive powers of the State. (Art.35G(I) (3) During the proclamation of Financial Emergency, the executive authority of the Union extends to the giving of directions to any State: (i) to observe such canons of financial ~ropriety as may be specified in the directions; (li) to red uce t he salaries and allowances of all or any class of persons serving in connection with the affairs of State or Union including Judges of Supreme Court and High Courts; and (iii) to require that all Money Bills and other financial Bills be reserved :Cor consideration by the Preside.nt when passed by the State Legislature. [Art. 30(4)] Sanction for Ensuring Compliance with Directives Article 35 of the Constitution provides that in case of non-compliance of directives given to a State by the Union, it shall be lawful for the President to declare that a situation has arisen in which the Government of the State cannot be carried in accordance with the provisions of the Constitution. On such a declaration being made, the provisions of Art. 356 regarding failure of constitutional machinery will come into operation and t he President will assume to himself all or any of the executive powers and thereby have the violated directives carried out.

FINANCIAL RELATIONS BETWEEN THE UNION AND THE STATES:- Ideally speaking, the best system of federal finance would be one which effected a clear-cut division of sources of the revenue between the Federal and the State Governments so as to make each of the parties financially independent of each other. Indian Constitution make elaborate provisions regarding the distribution of revenues between the Centre and the States. The financial relations between the Union and the States can be studied under the following heads: (1) Duties levied by the Union but Collected and Appropriated by the States: Stamp duties and duties of excise on the medical and toilet preparations are levied by the Government of India, but collected and appropriated by the States within which such duties are leviable except in the Union Territories where they are coll~cted by the Union Government. [Art. 268] (2) Taxes Levied and Collected by the Union but Assigned to the States within which they a,re Leviable: (i) Succession duty in respect of property other than agriculture land; (ii) Estate duty in respect of property other than agricultural land; (ill) Terminal taxes on goods or passengers carried by railways, sea or air; (iv) Taxes on railway fares and freights ; (v) Taxes on transactions in stock exchanges; (vi) Taxes on sale and purchase of newspapers, including advertisements published therein; (vii) Taxes on the sale and purchase of goods other than newspapers, where such purchase takes place in the cow·se of inter-state trade or commerce. [Art. 269] (3) Taxes Levied and collected by the Union and distributed between the Union and the States: Certain taxes are levied as well as collected by the Union, but their proceeds are divided between the Union and the States in a certain proportion in order to effect an equitable distribution of the financial resources. There are: (a) taxes on income other than agricultural income; and (b) excise duties as are included in the Union List, excepting medicinal and toilet prepara.tions. (4) Surcharge: The Parliament is, however, authorized to levy surcharge on the taxes mentioned at (2) above and on income-tax for the purpose of the Union. (5) Grants-in- Aid: Parliament may make grants-in-aid from the Consolidated Fund of India to such States as are in need of assistance, particularly for the promotion of welfare of tribal areas, including special grant to Assam. (6) Loans: The Union Government may make loan to any State or give guarantees with respect to loans raised by any States. (7) Previous Sanction of the President: No Bill or amendment can be introduc:ed or moved in either House of Parliament without" the previous sanction of the President, if: (a) it imposes or varies any tax in which the States are interested; or (b) it varies the meaning of the expression "Agricultural Income" as defined in the Indian lncome-Tax Act; or (c) it affects the principles on which money are distributed to the States; or (d) it imposes a surcharge on the State taxes for the purpose of the Union. (8) According to Article 301, freedom oftrade, commerce and intercourse throughout the territory of India is guaranteed, but the Parliament has the power to impose restrictions in public interest. (9) Although taxes on income, other than agricultural income, are levied by the Union, yet the State Legislatures can levy taxes on profession, trade, etc., provided that the total amount of such taxes payable in respect of anyone person should not exceed Rs. 2500 per month. (10) Provision has been made for the constitution of a Finance Commission to recommend to the President certain measures for the distribution of financial resources between the Union and the States.

FINANCE COMMISSION:- Constitution: Under Art. 280 of the Constitution, provision has been made for the Constitution of a Finance Commission within 2 years of the commencement of the Gonstitution and thereafter after expiration of every fifth year. It consists of a chairman and four other members appointed by the President. Functions: It is the duty of the Commission to make recommendations to the President as to: (i) the distribution between the Union and the States, the net proceeds of taxes, which are divisible between the Union and the States; (ii) the principles, which should govern the 241 UGC-JRF (Paper I}-31 grant-in-aid of revenues to the States out of the Consolidated Funds of India; (iii) the measures needed to augment the Consolidated Fund of a State to supplement the resources of the Panchayats in the State on the basis of the recommendations made by the Finance Commission of the State; (iv) the measures needed to augment the Consolidated Fund of a State to supplement the resources of Municipalities in the State on the basis of the Finance Commission of the State; and (v) any other matter referred to the Commission by the President in the interest of sound Finance. Report: The President shall cause the report of the Financ;e Commission with an explanatory memorandum as to the action taken thereon, to be laid before each House of Parliament.

UNION PUBLIC SERVICE COMMISSION

Constitution:- The Union Public Service Commission consists of a Chairman and other members appointed by the President and they hold office for a period of 6 years from the date of their appointment. Functions': The following are the main functions of the V.P.S.C.: (1) To conduct examinations for appointment to the Services of the Union. (2) If requested by two or more States, to assist those States in framing and operating the scheme of joint recruitment for services for which candidates possessing special qualifications a re required. (3) To serve all or any of the needs of a State witb the approval of the President if requested by the Governor of a State. (4) To advise the Union Government on: (i) all matters relating to methods of recruitment to civil services and for civil posts; (ti) the principles to be followed in making appoin~ments to civil services and posts. and in making promotions and transfers from one service to another; (iii) suitability of candidates for such appointments, promotions or transfers; (iv) all disciplinary matters affecting a person serving under the Government of India, including memorials or petitions relating thereto; , (v) any claim for the reimbursement of expenses incurred by a Government servant in defending legal proceedings against him for acts done in the execution of his duties; (vi) any claim. for the award of pension for injury sustained by a person while serving under the Govt. of India in a civil capacity; and (vii) on any matter which the President may refer to the Commission. ALL-INDIA SERVI CES Under Art. 312 ofthe Constitution, if the Rajya Sabha declared by resolution supported by not less than two-third of the members present and voting, that it is necessary or expedient to create an All-India Service, common to the Union and the States, Parliament may by law create such a service and regulate the recruitment and conditions of service of person appoin.ted to any such service. The Indian Administrative Service and Indian Police Service, w hicb were in existence at the commencement of Constitution, are deemed to be All-India Services created by the Parliament. The All-India Services Act was passed by Parliament and detailed rules and regulations under the Act have since been promulgated. The recruitment to All-India Services, namely. LA.S., I.F.S ., I.P.8., etc., is made by the U.P.S.C. on the basis of a competitive examination supplemented by viva-voce test. The conditions of service of persons appointed to those services have since been regulated by an act of Parliament.

ATTORNEY-GENERAL OF INDIA

Appointment :- The Attorney-General af lodia is appointed by the President under Article 76 of the Constitution. A person qualified to be ajudge of the Supreme Court is appointed to such a post. He is the highest legal adviser to the Gevt. Of India and is consulted in all important cases. He also appears in the Supreme Court on behalf of the Gevt. oeIndia to conduct important cases. Functions: The main functions of the AGI are: (i) to advise the Union Government in legal matters; (ii) to perform such other legal duties, which may be assigned to him by the President; and (iii) to discharge such other functions conferred on him by or under the Constitution or any other law for the time being in force. Terms of Office: He holds office during the pleasure of the President and receives such remuneration as the President may determine. Rights: In pursuance of his duties, the Attorney- General has the right of audience in all courts in'the territory of India. He has also a right to speak or take part in proceedings in either House of Parliament or in the joint session of two Houses or any Committee of the Parliament. He cannot, however, vote.

COMPTROLLER AND AUDITORGENERAL

Functions: The comptroller and AuditorG~ neral of India is appointed by the President. His main function are : (i) to bring account of the recipes and expenditure of the Union Government (except Railways, Defence Services and other ministries, the accounts of which are maintained by · the departmental authorities); (ii) to audit all expenditure from the revenues of the Union and States; and (ill) to audit all trading manufacturing and Profit and Loss Accounts of stores and stocks, where the President may have required him to conduct such audit. Independence of Audit: The independence of the Comptroller and Auditor-General has been sought to be ensured by the following provisions of the Constitution: (1) Though appointed by the President, the Comptr oller and Auditor-General of India can be removed from his office only after an address of each House of Parliament, supported by a majority of total membership of that House and not less than 213 of the members of the House present and voting, has been presented to the President on the grounds of (i) proved misbehaviour and (ii) incapacity. (2) The salary and the conditions of service of the Comptroller and Auditor-General of India cannot be varied to his disadvantage after his appointment. (3) He is not eligible for further appointment after his retirement, so that he may have no inducement to please the Executive of the Union or any State. (4) The salaries, etc., of the Comptroller and Auditor-General and his staff are charged upon the Consolidated Fund of India and are thus non-votable. (5) The reports of the Comptroller and AuditorGeneral relating to Accounts are submitted to the President who causes them to be laid before the Parliamene ELECTION COMMISSION Composition: It is a statutory body appointed under Article 324 of the Constitution. It consists of a Chief Election Commissioner and two other Election Commissioners. The Chief Election Commissioner is the Chairman of the Commission. Functions: The main functions of the Election Commission are: (i) to superintend, direct and control the preparation of electoral rolls for the elections; (ii) to conduct all elections and by-elections to the Parliament and State Legislatures and elections to the offices of President and Vice-President; (iii) to advise the President! Governors regarding the disqualification of Members 243 of Parliament or Members of State Legislatures; and (iv) to examine the return of expenses filed by the candidates nominated to various elections, disqualify the defaulting candidates and their election agents and consider the representation of such of them as apply for the removal of their disqualification.

LANGUAGE:- The official language of the Union is Hindi in Devnagari script and international form of Indian numerals is used for official purposes. For a period of fifteen years from the commencement of the Constitution, English was to continue for official purposes of the Union. If at the end of 15 years, Hindi was not able to replace English, Parliament could provide for the use of English for specific purposes. The Constitution also lays down that the legislature of a State may, by law, adopt any one or more of the languages for use in the State, but Hindi is to be used for all official purposes of the Uni9n. The need for use of English in the proceedings of the Supreme Court, High Courts, etc., and in bills and enactments has been recognized. The Official Language Act of 1967 has provIded for the use of English indefinitely. It has been provided that the Centre will carry on the correspondence with non-Hindi-speaking States in English and witlJ, the Hindi-speaking States in Hindi.

REGIONAL LANGUAGES:- According to the Eighth Schedule of the Indian Constitution, the following 18 languages have been recognized as regional languages: (i) Assamese; (ii) Bengali; (iii) Gujarati; (iv) Hindi; (v) Kannada; (vi) Kashmiri; (vii) Malayalam; (viii) Marathi; (ix) Oriya; (x) Punjabi; (xi) Sanskrit; (xii) Sindhi; (xiii) Tamil; (xiv) Telugu; (xv) Urdu; (xvi) Gorkhali; (xvii) Manipuri; and (xviii) Konkani. The last three languages were intro:luced in the Constitution (71stAmendment) Bill, 1992.

ZONAL COUNCILS:- Zonal CQuncils have been est\blished by the States Reorganisation Act, 1956 to advise on matters of common interest to ea~h of the five zone.s into which the territories of India. has. been divided· Northern, Southern, Eastern, Western and Central. These Zonal Councils do not owe their origin to the Constilution but to an Act of Parliament, having been introduced by the States Reorganisation Act, with a view to securing co-operation and co-ordination as between the Slates, t he Union Territories and the Union, particularly in respect of economic and social development. If properly worked these Councils would thus foster the "federal sentiment" by re sisting the separatist tendencies oflinguism and provincialism. The zones covered by these councils are as under: (i) The Central Zone, comprising the States of Uttar Pradesh, Madhya Pradesh, Uttaranchal and Chhatlisgarh. (ii) The Northern Zone, comprising t he States of Haryana. Himachal Pradesh, Punjab, Rajasthan, Jammu & Kashmir and the Union Territories of Delhi and Chandigarh. (ill) The Eastern Zone, comprising the States of Bihar, West Bengal, Orissa, Sikkim and Jharkhancl. (iv) The Western Zone, .comprising the States of Gujarat, Maharashtra, Goa and the Union Territories of .Dadra & Nagar Haveli, Daman and Diu. (v) The Southern Zone, comprising the States of Andhra Pradesh, Karnataka, Tamil Nadu, Kerala, and the Union Territory of . Besides these, there is the North Eastern Council set up in 1971, to deal with the common problems of Assam, Meghalaya, Manipur, , Tripura, Arunachal Pradesh and Mizoram. Constitution: Each Zonal Council consists of the Chief Minister and two other Ministers of each of the States in the Zone and the Administrator in the case of a Union Territory. There is also provision for holding joint meetings of two or more Zonal Councils. The Union Home Minister has been nominated as the common Chairman of all the Zonal Councils. Functions: The main functions of ZOnes) Councils are:

(a) to inquire into and advise upon disputes, which may arise among the States; (b) to investigate and discuss subjects, in which some or all the States or Union and one or more States have common interest; and (c) to make recommendations upon any such subject and, in particu lar, recommendations for better co-ordination of policy and action with respect to that subject. Role: The Zonal Councils play multiplicity of roles in order to achieve (i) an emotional integration of the people; (ii) arresting the growth of acute state consciousness in the form of regionalism, linguism, etc.; (Ui) enabling the Centre and the States in economic and social matters for evolving the uniform policies; (iv) co-operating with each other in speedy and successful execution of developmental plans; and (v) securing some kind of political equilibrium between different regions of the country. Importance: The importance of the Zonai Councils lies in the fact, they help to further co· ordination and integration through extrac constitutional advisory organization, without undermining the autonomy of States, thereby fostering the "federal sentiment" by resisting the separatist tendencies of linguism and provincialism.

AMENDMENT TO THE CONSTITUTION:- Method of Amendment Indian Constitution provides three methods of amending the Constitution: (1) Amendment by Special Majority: Under Article 368 of the Constitution, the general provision for the amendment of the Constitution can be initiated out by the introduction of a Bill in either House of Parliament. If the Bill is passed by a majority of total membership of the House and by a majority of not less than twothirds of the members present and voting in each House and thereafter assented to by the President, the Constitution stands amended. (2) Amendments requiring Special Mfljority and Ratification by States: Changes in the Constitution with regard to the following matters can be made by the Parliament after the Bill has been passed by both the Houses of Parliament by a majority of total membership of each House and by a twothirds majority of the members present and voting in each House and having been ratified by not less than one-half of the States and assented to by the President: (i) the manner of election of the President; (ii) extent of executive powers of the Union and the States; (iii) provisions relating to the Supreme Court and High Courts; (iv) distributing of legislative powers between Union and the States; (v) representation of States in Parliament; and (vi) provisions for the amendment of the Constitution. (3) Amendment by Simple Majority: A Bill in respect of any of the following subjects is treated as an ordinary· Bill, that is, it is passed by a simple majority of members present and voting: (i) admission or establishment of new States, formation of new States, and alteration of areas, boundaries or names of existing States (Art. 4); (ii) creation or abolition of Legislative Council in the States (Art. 169); (iii) administration and control of Scheduled Areas (para 7 of the Fifth Schedule); and (iv) administration of Tribal Areas in the States of Assam, Meghalaya. Tripura and Mizoram (para 21 of the Sixth Schedule). Though normal legislative procedure holds good so far as this class of amendments is concerned, certain conditions. however, do attach to the bills referred to in (i) and (ii) above, such as recommendation of the President for introduction of such Bills in Parliament and adoption of necessary resolution by concerned State Legislative Assembly, respectively.

NATIONAL FLAG:- The National Flag of India consists of three horizontal bands - saffron, white and dark green with the Asoka Wheel (having 24 spokes) in dark blue colour in the centre of the white band; all strips being equ~l in width. It ~ is rectangular in shape, the ratio of the length to breadth being 3:2. The emblem of the flag is an exact reproduction of the Dharma Chaki'a on the capitol of Asoka's pillar at Sarnath. Symbolic Representation: According to Dr. S. Radhakrishnan, the saffron colour represents the spirit of renunciation, the white stands for truth and peace, and green signifies growth. NATIONAL EMBLEM:- The emblem of the Government of India is a reproduction of the Asaka's Pillar at Sarnath. It shows three standing lions at a base having a Dharma Chakra in the centre, a bull on the right and a horse to the left. The words "Satyameva Jayate" , taken from Mundaka Upanishad, meaning ''Truth Alone Triumphs", are inscribed in Devnagari at the bottom.

74TH CONSTITUTIONAL AMENDMENT PANCHAYATI RAJ (1992):- It was also passed by Parliament in Dec. 1992 in order to activate Municipalities and to confer them statutory status. It provides for (i) constitution of three types of municipalities. (ii) Reservation of seats in every municipality for the Scheduled Castes, the Scheduled Tribes, Women and backward classes; (iii) Devolution of powers and responsibilities upon the municipalities with respect to preparation of plan for economic development, levy of taxes and duties, and review of finances of the municipalities; and (iv) Conducting election to the local bodies by an independent State Election Commission.

NATIONAL LITERACY MISSION (NLM):- It was launched in 1988. It aims at attaining functional literacy for 100 million persons in the age- group of 15-35 (including age-group 9·14 . were Non·Formal education is not in operation) in a time·bound manner. The most important development has taken place Wlder NLM is the near ascending of campaign made in adult education programme in the country.

MINORITIES COMMISSION:- Status: It was set up as a statutory Commission for Minorities in 1992. Composition: It consists of a Chairman and six other members. Functions: Its main functions are (1) evaluation of the working of various safeguards for the minorities provided in the Constitution; (ii) making recommendations for the effective implementation of safeguards for the protection of the interests of minorities by the Central Government or State Governments; (iii) reviewing of implementation of policies pursued by the Un ion and State Governments; (iv) looking into specific complaints regarding deprivation of rights and safeguards; (v) making surveys and research; (vi) suggesting appropriate and legal welfare measures in respect of any minority requiring special protection; (vii) making periodic or special reports to the Central Government on any matter pertaining to t he minorities and in particular difficulties confronted by them; and (viii) making recommendations regarding any other matter referred to it by the Central Government. Habeas Corpus: Habeas Corpus is a writ provided in the Constitution. It gives facilities to the prisoners for obtaining speedy trial or release on bail.

Ombudsman: Ombudsman, a Swedish Jprd, stands for "an officer appointed by the legislature to handle complaints against administrative and judicial action". Although appointed by the legislature, t he office of Ombudsman is a constitutional post and the incumbent is politically independent of the legislature. Created for the redressal of citizen's grievances, the institution of·Qmbudsman is typically Scandinavian.

Writ of Mandamus: Mandamus is an order from a superior court to a lower court or tribunal or public authority to perform an act. which falls within its duty. It is issued to secure the performance of public duties and to enforce private rights withheld by the public authorities. This writ cannot be claimed as a matter of right. I t is the discretionary power of a court to issue such writs.

UGC Higher Education I

HIGHER EDUCATION SYSTEM IN INDIA:- India has one of the largest 'Higher Education System' in the wo.ld. Main players in the higher education system in the country are: University Grants Commission (UGC) is responsible for coordination, determination and maintenance of standards, release of grants. Professional Councils are responsible for recognition of courses, promotion of professional institutions and providing grants to undergraduate programmes and various awards. The statutory professional councils are: All Inclia Council for Technical Education (AIeTE), Distance Education Council (DEC), Indian Council for Agriculture Research (lCAR), Bar Council of [odis (BCI), National Council for Teacher Education (NCTE) Rehabilitation Council of India (ReI), Medical Council of India (MCr), Pharmacy Cotmcil of India (Pcn, In!!!an Nursing Council o NC), Dentist Council of India (DCl), Central Council of Homeopathy (CCH), Central Council of Indian Medicine (CCIM) Central Government is responsible for major policy relating to higher education in the country. It provide grants to the uae and establishes central universities in the country. The Central Government is also responsible for declaration of Educational Institutions as 'Deemed to be University' on the recommendation of the UGC. Presently there are sixteen (16) Central Universities in the country. In pursuance of the Mizoram Accord, another Central University in the State .of Mizoram is planned. There are 37 Institutions which have been declared as Deemed to be Universities by the Govt. of [nelia as per Section of the UGe Act, 1956. State Governments are responsi ble for establishment of State Univer s ities and colleges, and provide plan grants for their develo,PpIent and non-plan grants for their maintenance. The coordination and cooperation between the Union and the States is brought about in the field of education through t.he Central Advisory Board of Education (CABE). Special Constitutional responsibility of the Central Government: Education is on the 'Concurrent list' subject to Entry 66 in the Union List of the Constitution. Thip gives exdusive Legislative Power to the Central Govt. for co-ordination and determination of standards in Institutions of higher education or research and scientific and technical institutions.

ACADEMIC QUALIFICATION FRAMEWORK

DEGREE STRUCTURE:- There are three principle levels of qualifications within the higher education system in the country. These are: Bachelor' Undergraduate level Master's f Post-graduate level Doctoral f Pre- doctoral level Diploma courses are also available at the undergraduate and postgraduate level. At the undergraduate level, it varies between one to three years in length, postgraduate diplomas are normally awarded after one year's study. Bachelor's degree in arts, commerce and sciences is three years of education (after 12 years of school education). In some places there are honours and special courses available. These are not necessarily longer in duration but indicate greater depth of study. Bachelor degree in professional field of study in agriculture, dentistry, engineering, pharmacy, technology and veterinary medicine generaUy take four years, while arch.itectw'e and medicine. it takes five and five and a half years respectively. There are other bachelor degrees in education, journalism and librarian-ship that are second degrees. Bachelor's degree in law can either be taken as an integrated degree lasting five years or three-year course as a second degree. Master's degree is normally of two-year I duration. It could be coursework based without t hesis or research a lone. Admission to p08tgradua~ programmes in engineering and technology is done on the basis of Graduate Aptitude Test in Engineering or Combined Medical Test respectively. A pre-doctoral programme - Master of Philosophy (M.Phil ) is taken after c;ompletion of the Master's Degree. This can either be completely research based or can include course work as well Ph.D. is awarded two year after the M.Phil. or three years after the Master's degree. Students are expected to write a substantial thesis based on original research, generally takes longer.

NEW INITIATIVES, VOCATIONALIZATION AT

THE FlRSfDEGREE LEVEL:--- In conformity with the National Policy on Education, 1986, a tiCheme to provide career orientation to education at the first degree level was l aunch~d in 1994-95. Under the scheme. a university I college could introduce one to three vocational courses in 35 identified subjects. Autonomous Colleges: 138 collegea have been functioning as autonomous colleges in eight states in the country. National Eligibility Test (NET) is being conducted by the UGC since 1989 for eligibility for lect ureship. Around 50000 students appear for the test every year. Pass percentage is around 5%. Eight State Level Tests have been accredited 8S par with NET. System of Governance of Hig her Education Institutions: The Universities are of various kinds: with a single faculty, or multi-faculties; teaching or affiliating, or teaching cum aff.tliating, single campus or multiple campus. Most of the Universities are affiliating universities. which prescribe to the affiliat.ed colleges the course of study, hold examinations and award degrees, while undergraduate and to some extent post, the colleges affiliated to them impart graduate instruction. Many of the university along with their affiliated colleges have grown rapidly to the extent of becoming uamanageable. Therefore, as per National Policy on Eaucation, 1986, a scheme of autonomous colleges was promoted. In the autonomous colleges, whereas the degree continues to be awarded by the University, the name of the college is also included. The colleges develop and propose new courses of study to the university for approval. They are also fully responsible for con duct of examination. There are at present 126 autonomous colleges in the country.

Focus of Ninth Plan: Thrust areas are: measures for quality improvement and modernization of syllabi. renewal of infrastructure, extra-budgetary resource mobilization and greater attention to issues in governance. Issues of access and relevance would receive attention. Conferment of grater autonomy to deserving colleges and professional upgradation of teachers through Academic Staff Colleges would be given priority. Emphasis is being placed on consolidation and optimal utilization of the existing infrastructure through institutjonal networking. restructuring expansion. so as to only meet the demand of the unserved areas with a focus on women and under privileged seCtiOIUl. The Open University system, which has been growing in popularity and size. Is striving to diversify courses and offerings and gain wider acceptability by upgrading its quality. It would focus more sharply on the educational needs of women and rural society, as well as professional training of in-service employees.

CENTRAL UNIVERSITIES:- * President of India is the Visitorofall Central Universities. * PresidentNisitor nominates some members to the Executive Committee/Board of ManagementlCourtiSelection Committees of the University as per the pl'ovisions made in the relevant University Act. * Ministry provides secretariat service for appointment of Vice- ChancellorfExecutlve Committee NomineeslCourtNomineeslSelectJon Committee Nominees etc. by the President. Indira Gandhi National Open University (IGNOU) Established in 1985 for introduction and promotion of Open University and distance education system. Major objectives include widening of access to higher education. IGNOU programmes telecast on Doordarshan Network six days a week. Its jurisdiction is through out the oountry.lt can set up Study Centres outside the country .·This was allowed vide amendment of the IGNOU Act in 1997. Distance Education Council (DEC) under IGNOU has the responsibility for coordination and maintenance of standards in open and distance education system in the country. University Of Hyderabad, Established in 1974 for post-graduate teaching and research, 20 Km from the City of Hyderabad on the Old Hyderabad - Bombay road. It has a City campus· 'The Golden Threshold' - the residence ofthe late Sarojini Naidu. The University has Eight Schools of Studies and a Centre for Distance Education offering post·graduate diploma in five disciplines. University or Delhi, Established in February 1922 as a unitary and residential university. It has 14 faculties, 82 teach.ing departments and 78 colleges spread over national Capital Territory of Delhi. A new State University - Indraprashtha Vishwavidhlaya bas come up in Delhi as an affiliating University. Mahatma Gandhi Antarrashtriya Hindi Visbwavidyalaya, Wardha Mahatma Gandhi Antarrashtriya Hindi Vishwavidyalaya Act (at Wardha) was passed by the Parliament in December, 1996. Univ~I' .. i.LY came into existence with effect from 29th December 1997. It has international cbaracter. Four schools proposed under this University. For the time being the University is operating from its temporary office at Delhi. Babasaheb Bhimrao Ambedkar University, Lucknow Established 8S a State University in 1994 at Lucknow, it was notified as a Central University on 10th January 1996. It aims to provide instructional and research facilities in new and frontier areas of learning. Has three schools and three centres. (School of Ambedkar Studies, School for Information Science and Technology and School fo :, Environmental studies and Centre for Rural Technology, Centre for Vocational Studies and Centre for Human Rights.) Pondicherry University Established in 1985 8S a teaching-cum affiliating university. It has jurisdiction over the Union Territory of Pondicherry and Andaman and Nicobar Islands. It also has a Community College. Affiliated institutions of which 13 are located in Pondicherry, 3 in Karaikal, 2 in Mahe. 1 in Yanam and 3 in Andaman & Nicobar Islands. Visva Bharati, Santiniketan It is an unitary teaching and residential University. Founded by Guru Rabindranath Tagore. Incorporated as a Central University by t.he Visva Bharati Act, 1951 . Itsjurisdiction is restricted to the area known as Santiniketan in the District of Birbhum, West Bengal. It imparts education from the Primary School level to Post- Graduate and Doctorate levels. It has 12 institutes - 8 at Santiniketan, 3 at Sriniketan and 1 at Kolkata. Rural Segment of the University (Sriniketan) created CAREER (Centre for Advanced Rural Education, Extenuation and Research) and CSV (Centre for Science in Villages). For creating facilities in the housing technology Nirman Bhawan (Building Centre) was established under the sponsorship of HUDCO. Millia lslamia, Jamia Nagar, New Delhi Functioned 8S a Deemed University since 1962. Acquired ytatus of a Central University in December, 1988 by an Act. of Parliament Imparts education from Nursery stage to p~st: graduate & Doctorate levels. It has six Faculties and Eight Centres Rnd Five Schools. AJ, Kidwai Mass Communication Research Centre (AJKMCRC) providefJ training at Post· graduate level in Mass Communication, producing educational material on different educational aspects/subjects for the UGC, INSAT Programme. Aligarb Muslim University, Aligarh Established in 1920 8S a fully residential Central University. It maintains four Hospitals, six Colleges (including Medical, Dental and Engineering Colleges), two Polytechnics and eight Schools. Offers six diploma courses exClusively for women. 18562 students (including school strength) were in rolls. Banaras Hindu University, Varanasi Came into existence in 1916 as a teaching and residential University. It consists of three Institutions· Institute of Medical Sciences, Institute of Technology and Institute of Agricultural Sciences. It has faculties with 121 academic departments and 4 inter·disciplinary schools. It maintains a constituent Mahila Mahavidyalaya and three School level institutions. lOOO·Bedded Modern Ayurvedic Medicine Hospital. Jawahar La! Nehru University, New Delhi It came into existence in 1969. It is primarily concerned with Post·graduate Education and Research. It has 7 schools consisting of 24 Centres of Studies and a separate Centre for Bio·Technology. Maulana Azad National Urdu University The University Act was passed by the Parliament in 1997 and it came into existence on 9th January, 1998. Its Administrative Office has been set up at Hyderabad. It has Regional Officers at Delhi, Patna and Bangalore. lt'saim is to promote and develop Urdu language and to impart vocational and technical education in Urdu medium through conventional and distance education system. ASSAM UNIVERSITY, Dorgakona, Assam Established as a teaching·cum·affiliating University on 21.1.1994. Though the act was passed in 1989. It has Jurisdiction over the districts ofCachar, Karimganj, Karhi, angling and Hailakandi in the State of Assam. Nagaland University, Established as a teaching-cum· affiliating University on 6.9.1994. Though the act was passed in 1989. Its Headquarters is at Lumami, Nagaland. It. has jurisdiction over the whole of the State of Nagaland. It has 39 colleges affiliated. It has campuses in Kohima, Lumami and Medsiphema (School of Agricultural Sciences and Rural Development· SASRD), 25 Departments and 4 Schools of Studies. Tezpur University, Nappam, Assam A non·affiliating unitary Central University set up in 1994 under an Act of Parliament, Tezpur University Act, 1993. It's aims is to offer employment- oriented and inter· disciplinary courses, mostly at post-graduate level. It has 11 Departments under 4 schools of studies and 6 centres of Studies. North-Eastern Hill University, Established in 1973 at Shillong by an Act of Parliament. North Eastern Hill University Act, 1973. It has a Campus at Aizwal and a centre in Tura. Its jurisdiction is over the States of Meghalaya, Arunachal Pradesh and Mizoram. Its Headquarters at Shillong. Post· graduate Departments and four Centres of Studies under its six schools of studies and an under-graduate college. It has 58 Under graduate Colleges and 8 professional course colleges and North-Eastern Regional Institute olScienee and Technology (NERJST) affiliared. It has a Regional Sophisticated Instrumentation Selitre (RSIC).

UGC Higher Education II UNIVERSITY GRANTS COMMISSION (UGC)

Objective: The government established University Grants Commission (UGC) by an Act of Parliament in 1956. It discharges the Constitutional mandate of coordination" determination, and maintenance of standards of teaching, examination and research in the ' field of University and Higher Education. UOC serves 8S a vita l link between the Union and State Governments and the institutions of higher learning. It monitors developments in the field of collegiate and university education; disburses grants to the univers ities and colleges: advises Cent.ral and State Governments on the measures necessary for the improvement of university ed ucation; and fram es regulations such as those on the minimum standards of instruction.

Composition Commission comprises of the Chairperson, Vice-Chairperson and ten other members appointed by the Central Government. 'The Chairperson is selected from among persons who are not officers of the Central Government or any State Government. Of the ten members, two are from amongst the officers of the Central Government to represent it. Not less than four. selected from among persons who are, at the time they are selected, shall be a teacher in the Universities. Others are selected from among eminent educationists, academics and experts in various fields. Chairperson is appointed for a term of 5 years or until the age of 65 years, whichever is earlier. Vice·Chairperson is appointed for a term of 3 years or until the age of 65 yesrs, whichever is earlier. The other members are appointed for a term of 3 years. The Chairperson. Vice· Chairperson and members can be appointed for a maximum of two terms. Funding UGC has no funds ofits own. It receives both Plan and Non·Plan grants from the Central Government to carry out the responsibilities assigned to it by law. It allocates and disburses full maintenance and development grants to all Central Universities, Colleges affiliated to Delhi and Banaras Hindu Universities and some of the institutions accorded the sta tus of 'Deemed to be Universities'. State Universlties, Colleges and other institutions of higher education, receive support only from the Plan grant for development schemes. Besides, it provides financial assistance to Universities and co lle ges under various schemesl programmes for promoting relevance, quality and excellence as also promoting the role of social change by the Universities. Regional Offices· Si." Regional Offices Name of Regional Office States Southem Regional Office: Andhra Pradesh, Kerala, Karnataka, Pondicherry, Tamil Nadu.

NorthemRegional Office: Jammu & Kashmir, Himachal Pradesh, Punjab, Haryana. Uttar Pradesh. Central Regional Office: Madhya Pradesh, Rajasthan. Eastern Regional Office :.West Bengal, Biha!', Orissa, Sikkim. North Eastern Regio/wl Office: Assam, Meghalaya, Manipur, Arunachal Pradesh, Tripura, Nagaland. Western Regional Office : Goa, Gujarat, Maharashtra. Inter University Centres (lUes) Under Section 12 (ccc) of the UGC Act, the Commission has established the follOwing Inter - University Centres to provide common facilities, se rvi ce and programmes to Universities since heavy investment in infrastructure and inputs have made it beyond the reach of individual .Universities to obtain these facilities:· Nuclear Science Centre. New Delhi: Accelerator oriented research ruc for Astronomy and Astrophysics, Pune: State-of·the·art instrumentation for research in astronomy IUC for DAE facilities, Indore: Use of facilities of Department of Atomic Energy Information ond Library Network (INFLIBNET), Ahmedabad: Networking of libraries through electronic medis Consortium for Educational Communication (CEe), New Delhi : To dissemi nate Countrywide programme through television 216 National Assessment & Accreditation Council (NACC), Bangalore: To assess and accredit public & Private institutions of higher learning National Facilities UGC has also set up the following Centres as National facilities in selected Universities:Western Regional Instrumentation Centre, Bombay: Design and development of indigenous equipment and training to staff in instrumentation. Regional Instrumentation Centre, Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore: Design and development of indigenous equipment and training to staff in instrumentation. Chennai : Research and dissemination of knowledge and oorganization of training programme in crystal growth. M.S.T. Radar Centre SriVenkateswara : Studies in atmospheric Dynamics to enable teachers to use MSTfRadar facility. Eastern Centre for Radio Astr'ophysics, Calcutta University: Research in Astrophysics Japal - Rangapur observatory, Osmania University. Hyderabad: Science Research Observatory Centre for Science Education & Communication, New Delhi: Popularization of Science INDIAN EDUCATION SYSTEM Institution Types & Credentials Types of higher education institutions: University Institute of Technology College Open University School leaving adult higher education Credentials: Higher Secondary School Certificate Secondary School Certificate Diploma Bachelor's Degree Postgraduate Diploma Master's Degree Master of Philosophy Post-Master Degree Doctorate Doctor of Laws Doctor of Literature Doctor of Science

Structure of education system

Pre-higher education::- Duration of compulsory education: Age of entry: 6 Age of exit: 14 Structure of school system: Primary Type of school providing this education: Lower Primary School (Standards I To V) Length of program in years: 5 Age level from : 6 to 11 Middle Type of school providing this education: Middle School (Standards V1 To Vllt) Length of program in years: 3 Age level from: 11 to 14 Secondary Type of school providing this education: Secondary School (Standards IX To X) Length of program in years: 2 Age level from: 14 to 16 Certificate/diploma awarded: Secondary School Certificate Senior Secondary Type of school providing this education: Higher Secondary School (Standards Xl To XlI) Length of program in years: 2 Age level from: 16 to 18 Certificate/diploma awarded: Higher Secondary School Certificate Vocational Secondary Type of school providing this education: Secondary schools Length of program in years: 3 Age level from: 16 to 18 Certificate/diploma awarded: Higher Secondary School Certificate

School education::--- School education in India is a two-tier system, the first ten years covering general education followed by two years of senior secondary education. Primary education is divided into two stages: the first five years constitute the prlmary stage (Standards I-V) and the next three years, the upper primary stage or middle school (Standards VI-VIII). Secondary education usually lasts between two and four years. After two years, pupils who have completed ten years of education (Standard X) take the Secondary School Certificate. Pupils then enter higher secondary schools or Junior Colleges and complete a further two years of education (Standards XI and XTI). Courses focus on university preparation. Public examinations are held at the end of Standard IX either by individual states or by Central Boards and lead to the award of the Higher Secondary School Certificate (also called All india Senior School Certificate or Indian School Certificate or Pre-University Course).Vocational education is offered in two years at Higher and Technical Schools and lead to the Certificate of Vocational Education (CVE).

Higher education::- Higher ed ucation is provided by: (1) Universities -including agricultural universities and medical universities· divided into Central Universities, funded directly by the Ministry of Human Resources Development, and State Universities, set up and funded by various states. (2) "Deemed to be universities", single-faculty, multi subjects institutions which enjoy the same academic status and privileges of a university; and (3) Institutions of National Importance , university-level institutions funded by the central government. These include the Indian Institutes of Technology. Most universities belong to the affiliating and teaching type in which departments impart instruction at the postgraduate level and undertake research. Agricultural universities stress research and extension work. Finally, there are technological universities and ten open universities. There are also research institutions, administered by the Indian Council of Social Science Research, and research laboratories, as well as more than tO,OOO colleges. most of which are afftliated to universities. Unive rsities are governed by statutory bodies such as the Academic Council. The Senate/Court and the Executive CounciU Syndicate. Funding for State universities largely comes from the State governments and the University Grants Commission. Higher education falls mainly under its jurisdiction. The Association of Indian Universities (AIU) represents univer si ties and has the responsibility for all matters within the higher education sector other than funding . Professional institutions are coordinated by different bodies. The All-India Council for Technical Education (AICTE), established in 1987, is responsible for the coordination of technica l and manage ment Educa ti on institutions. Bodies such as State Councils of Higher Education were established r ece ntly. Non-university level: On completion of Standard X, students may opt for (1) Further secondary school studies leading to the Higher Secondary School Certificate ; (2) Craftsman or apprenticeship courses offered in Industrial Training Institutes through the Craftman Training Scheme and Apprenticeship Scheme and leading to Trade Certificates or (3) Entering a Polytechnic where they are offered one to three-year diploma courses in all subjects except Medicine. There are over 1200 Polytechnics in l!ldia. Although planned to train technicians, an increasing number now offer oour8es leading to degrees and even post- graduate diplomas and certificates. Access to cou rses for the Higher National Diploma (HND) requires Standard XII. University level studies: First stage: Bachelor: First degree generally require three years' fulltime study leading to Bachelor of Arts, Science and Commerce degrees. Entrance to &n Honours course may require a higher pass mark in the higher secondary or pre· university examinations. An Honours degree does not generally involve longer study hut indicates greater specialization. In professional subjects: courses last for four to five and a half years. the Bachelor of Laws (LLB) can either be taken as an integrated flrst degree course (five years) or as a two to three-year course taken as a second degree. Second stage: Master's Degree: A Master's Degree in Arts, Science and Commerce generally requires two years of study after a first degree. Most. are cow·seworkbased without a thesis. The Indian Institutes of Technology offer three semester studies leading to ME, MSc (Engg) and MTech degrees. Master's courses in Engineering and Technology normally require two years' study after a first professional degree. Candidates must qualify through the Graduate Aptitude Test in Engineering Colleges. I n Medicine and Surgery, the MaFlter's degree takes two years after MBBSfBDS. The Master of Technology is awarded after a study period of three semesters. Students must complete a research project which usually takes one semester. The Master of Computer Applications (MCA) is awarded after three years' study beyond the Bachelor's Degree. Third stage: Master of Philosophy, PhD: One and a half-year MPhil programmes are open to those who have completed their second stage postgraduate degree. It is a preparatory programme for ~octoral level studies. Some universities admit MBBSIBE degree holders to PhD courses. The PhD programme involves two years' study beyond tt;le MPhil or a minimum of three years' stutly beyond the Master's degree and the submission of a thesis, as well as an oral examination. Fourth stage: DSc. Dlitt: The Doctor of Science (DSc) and the Doctor of Literature (Dlitt) degrees are awarded by some universities two to three years after the PhD for original contributions.

Teacher education: Training of preprimary and primary/basic school teachers

Teachers for lower primary classes (Standards I to V) are trained in Teacher Training Institutes (also called Junior Basic Training Institutes or Primary Teacher Colleges) attached to State departments of education. The course usually lasts for two years and leads to a Diploma or· a Teacher Training Certiflcate. Upper primary school teachers are trained in two years and the course leads to a Diploma. They must have passed the Higher Secondary School-Leaving Certificate. Training of secondary school teachers Teachers at lower secondary level (Standards IX and X) are graduates who havE' completed a one-year Bachelor of education at a college affiliated to a university. Teache-rs at the higher secondary level (Standards XI and XU) are postgraduates who have usually completed a Master's degree followed by a one-year Bachelor in Education. Four Regional Colleges of Education offer a combined fOUT-year integrated programme leading to a Bachelor's degree. Training of higher education teachers Teachers at colleges of education must hold an M.Ed and a PhD. Studies for these are undertaken at a number of universities. Non-traditional studies: Distahce higher education Since its inception in 1962 at the University of Delhi, distance education has grown considerably. There are now some sixty InstituteslDirectorates of distance education attached to conventional universities and ten Open Universities, including Indira Gandhi National Open University· with over 150 regional centers throughout India. Distance education programmes cover about one hundred DegreelDiploma courses. Many conventional universities also offer correspondence courses, which are sometimes supplemented by contact classes.

Lifelong higher education:-

Universities and colleges offer adult and continuing education with assistance from the ugc. Programmes include Population Eucation, Legal Literacy, Science Encation and Technology Transfer. There are also evening colleges which provide courses at undergraduate level and, in some areas, postgraduate courses are also offered. Other forms of non-formal education Non-university level post-secondary education consists of one-year Certificate courses and two- to three-year Diploma courses in various technical and commercial fields. They are conducted by industrial training institutes and polytechnics administered through the state departments oftechnical education.

NATIONAL BODIES

Administration & co-ordination:- Responsible authorities: Ministry of Human Resources Development, Science and Technology Head: Arjun Singh Shastri Bhavan New Delhi 110001 Association of Indian Universities AIU House, 16 Kotla Marg, New Delhi 110002 University Grants Corrunission Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi 110002 Role of governing body: Coordinates the work of the universities; establishes equivalences of degrees; acts as a bureau of information; conducts research on university development.

VOCATIONAL COURSES COVERED

UNDER APPRENTICES ACT 1961

Agriculture 1. Poultry Production 2. Fisheries/Fish Processing 3. Dairying 4. Sericulture 5. Apiculture 6. Floriculture 7. Plant Protection 8. Agricultural Ctiemicals 9. Inland Fisheries 10. Plantation Crops and Management 11. Seed Production Technology 12. Swine Production 13. Vegetable Seed Production 14. Medicinal and Aromatic Plant Industry 15. Sheep and Goat Husbandry 16. Repair and Maintenance of Power Driven Farm Machinery 17. Veterinary Pharmacist-cum-Artificial Insemination Assistant 18. Agro Based Food Industry (Animal based) 19. Agro Based Food Industry (Crop based) 20. Agro Based Food Industry (Feed based)

History of Computers:

1. First Generation (1939-1954) - vacuum tube • 1937 - John V. Atanasoff designed the first digital electronic computer • 1939 - Atanasoff and Clifford Berry demonstrate in Nov. the ABC prototype • 1941 - Konrad Zuse in Germany developed in secret the Z3 • 1943 - In Britain, the Colossus was designed in secret at Bletchley Park to decode German messages • 1944 - Howard Aiken developed the Harvard Mark I mechanical computer for the Navy • 1945 - John W. Mauchly and J. Presper Eckert built ENIAC at U of PA for the U.S. Army • 1946 - Mauchly and Eckert start Electronic Control Co., received grant from National Bureau of Standards to build a ENIAC-type computer with magnetic tape input/output, renamed UNIVAC in 1947 but run out of money, formed in Dec. 1947 the new company Eckert-Mauchly Computer Corporation (EMCC). • 1948 - Howard Aiken developed the Harvard Mark III electronic computer with 5000 tubes • 1948 - U of Manchester in Britain developed the SSEM Baby electronic computer with CRT memory • 1949 - Mauchly and Eckert in March successfully tested the BINAC stored-program computer for Northrop Aircraft, with mercury delay line memory and a primitive magentic tape drive; Remington Rand bought EMCC Feb. 1950 and provided funds to finish UNIVAC • 1950- Commander William C. Norris led Engineering Research Associates to develop the Atlas, based on the secret code-breaking computers used by the Navy in WWII; the Atlas was 38 feet long, 20 feet wide, and used 2700 vacuum tubes • 1951 - S. A. Lebedev developed the MESM computer in Russia • 1951 - Remington Rand successfully tested UNIVAC March 30, 1951, and announced to the public its sale to the Census Bureau June 14, 1951, the first commercial computer to feature a magnetic tape storage system, the eight UNISERVO tape drives that stood separate from the CPU and control console on the other side of a garage-size room. Each tape drive was six feet high and three feet wide, used 1/2-inch metal tape of nickel-plated bronze 1200 feet long, recorded data on eight channels at 100 inches per second with a transfer rate of 7,200 characters per second. The complete UNIVAC system weighed 29,000 pounds, included 5200 vacuum tubes, and an offline typewriter-printer UNIPRINTER with an attached metal tape drive. Later, a punched card-to-tape machine was added to read IBM 80-column and Remington Rand 90-column cards. • 1952 - Remington Rand bought the ERA in Dec. 1951 and combined the UNIVAC product line in 1952: the ERA 1101 computer became the UNIVAC 1101. The UNIVAC I was used in November to calculate the presidential election returns and successfully predict the winner, although it was not trusted by the TV networks who refused to use the prediction. • 1954 - The sage aircraft-warning system was the largest vacuum tube computer system ever built. It began in 1954 at MIT's Lincoln Lab with funding from the Air Force. The first of 23 Direction Centers went online in Nov. 1956, and the last in 1962. Each Center had two 55,000-tube computers built by IBM, MIT, AND Bell Labs. The 275-ton computers known as "Clyde" were based on Jay Forrester's Whirlwind I and had magnetic core memory, magnetic drum and magnetic tape storage. The Centers were connected by an early network, and pioneered development of the modem and graphics display.

2.Second Generation Computers (1954 -1959) - transistor • 1950 - National Bureau of Standards (NBS) introduced its Standards Eastern Automatic Computer (SEAC) with 10,000 newly developed germanium diodes in its logic circuits, and the first magnetic disk drive designed by Jacob Rabinow • 1953 – Watson Junior led IBM to introduce the model 604 computer, its first with transistors, that became the basis of the model 608 of 1957, the first solid-state computer for the commercial market. Transistors were expensive at first, cost $8 vs. $.75 for a vacuum tube. But Watson was impressed with the new transistor radios and gave them to his engineers to study. IBM also developed the 650 Magnetic Drum Calculator, the first by IBM to use magnetic drum memory rather punched cards, and began shipment of the 701 scientific "Defense Calculator" that was the first of the Model 700 line that dominated main frame computers for the next decade • 1955 - IBM introduced the 702 business computer; Watson on the cover of Time magazine March 28 • 1956 - Bendix G-15A small business computer sold for only $45,000, designed by Harry Huskey of NBS • 1959 - General Electric Corporation delivered its Electronic Recording Machine Accounting (ERMA) computing system to the Bank of America in California; based on a design by SRI, the ERMA system employed Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) as the means to capture data from the checks and introduced automation in banking that continued with ATM machines in 1974

3. Third Generation Computers (1959 -1971) - IC • 1959 - Jack Kilby of Texas Instruments patented the first integrated circuit in Feb. 1959; Kilby had made his first germanium IC in Oct. 1958; Robert Noyce at Fairchild used planar process to make connections of components within a silicon IC in early 1959; the first commercial product using IC was the hearing aid in Dec. 1963; General Instrument made LSI chip (100+ components) for Hammond organs 1968 • 1964 - IBM produced SABRE, the first airline reservation tracking system for American Airlines; IBM announced the System/360 all-purpose computer, using 8-bit character word length (a "byte") that was pioneered in the 7030 of April 1961 that grew out of the AF contract of Oct. 1958 following Sputnik to develop transistor computers for BMEWS • 1968 - DEC introduced the first "mini-computer", the PDP-8, named after the mini-skirt; DEC was founded in 1957 by Kenneth H. Olsen who came for the SAGE project at MIT and began sales of the PDP-1 in 1960 • 1969 - Development began on ARPAnet, funded by the DOD • 1971 - Intel produced large scale integrated (LSI) circuits that were used in the digital delay line, the first digital audio device

4. Fourth Generation (1971-1991) - microprocessor • 1971 - Gilbert Hyatt at Micro Computer Co. patented the microprocessor; Ted Hoff at Intel in February introduced the 4-bit 4004, a VSLI of 2300 components, for the Japanese company Busicom to create a single chip for a calculator; IBM introduced the first 8-inch "memory disk", as it was called then, or the "floppy disk" later; Hoffmann-La Roche patented the passive LCD display for calculators and watches; in November Intel announced the first microcomputer, the MCS-4; Nolan Bushnell designed the first commercial arcade video game "Computer Space" • 1972 - Intel made the 8-bit 8008 and 8080 microprocessors; Gary Kildall wrote his Control Program/Microprocessor (CP/M) disk operating system to provide instructions for floppy disk drives to work with the 8080 processor. He offered it to Intel, but was turned down, so he sold it on his own, and soon CP/M was the standard operating system for 8-bit microcomputers; Bushnell created Atari and introduced the successful "Pong" game • 1973 - IBM developed the first true sealed hard disk drive, called the "Winchester" after the rifle company, using two 30 Mb platters; Robert Metcalfe at Xerox PARC created Ethernet as the basis for a local area network, and later founded 3COM • 1974 - Xerox developed the Alto workstation at PARC, with a monitor, a graphical user interface, a mouse, and an ethernet card for networking • 1975 - the Altair personal computer is sold in kit form, and influenced Steve Jobs and Steve Wozniak • 1976 - Jobs and Wozniak developed the Apple personal computer; Alan Shugart introduced the 5.25-inch floppy disk • 1977 - Nintendo in Japan began to make computer games that stored the data on chips inside a game cartridge that sold for around $40 but only cost a few dollars to manufacture. It introduced its most popular game "Donkey Kong" in 1981, Super Mario Bros in 1985 • 1978 - Visicalc spreadsheet software was written by Daniel Bricklin and Bob Frankston • 1979 - Micropro released Wordstar that set the standard for word processing software • 1980 - IBM signed a contract with the Microsoft Co. of Bill Gates and Paul Allen and Steve Ballmer to supply an operating system for IBM's new PC model. Microsoft paid $25,000 to Seattle Computer for the rights to QDOS that became Microsoft DOS, and Microsoft began its climb to become the dominant computer company in the world. • 1984 - Apple Computer introduced the Macintosh personal computer January 24. • 1987 - Bill Atkinson of Apple Computers created a software program called HyperCard that was bundled free with all Macintosh computers. This program for the first time made hypertext popular and useable to a wide number of people.

5. Fifth Generation (1991 and Beyond) • 1991 - World-Wide Web (WWW) was developed by Tim Berners-Lee and released by CERN. • 1993 - The first Web browser called Mosaic was created by student Marc Andreesen and programmer Eric Bina at NCSA in the first 3 months of 1993. The beta version 0.5 of X Mosaic for UNIX was released Jan. 23 1993 and was instant success. The PC and Mac versions of Mosaic followed quickly in 1993. Mosaic was the first software to interpret a new IMG tag, and to display graphics along with text. Berners-Lee objected to the IMG tag, considered it frivolous, but image display became one of the most used features of the Web. The Web grew fast because the infrastructure was already in place: the Internet, desktop PC, home modems connected to online services such as AOL and Compuserve • 1994 - Netscape Navigator 1.0 was released Dec. 1994, and was given away free, soon gaining 75% of world browser market. • 1996 - Microsoft failed to recognized the importance of the Web, but finally released the much imporoved browser Explorer 3.0 in the summer.

CSIR NET JRF: Key points to know for Paper-I

• Which metal is always found in free state in nature-Gold. • Bauxite is an ore of-Aluminum. • Material used for bleaching pulp is-Sodium Hypo -chlori • Which gas is leaked in Bhopal gas tragedy-Methyl Isocyanides. • The chemical name of table salt is-Sodium Chloride. • Chemical name of Vitamin C is –Ascorbic Acid. • Bone is used as fertilizer because it contains the plant nutrient-Phosphorus. • Baking soda is-Sodium Bicarbonat. • Plaster of Paris is made from-Gypsum. • Which element is common in all acids-Hydrogen. • Which element is common in all organic compounds is -Chlorine. • What is the function of Green leaves in plants –Photosynthesis. • Which is largest Gland in human body Liver • Which is largest Organ in human body –Skin • Which is longest Bone in human body –Femur • Which Gland is called the master Gland –Pituitary • How many Bones in adult human body –206 • How many Bones in child‘s body –300 • What is the temperature of normal human body –36.9C. • Which is the helps in clotting in blood –Vitamin K. • Total volume of blood in normal adult human body 5-6iiters. • Red blood corpuscles(RBC)are formed in the bone marrow • The largest part of the human brain is the –cerebrum • What is main component of the bone and teeth –Calcium Phosphate • The main constituent of hemoglobin is –Transport Oxygen • The main function of Hemoglobin is - Transport Oxygen. • Malaraia is a disease which effect the –Spleen • Leukemia is a disease of the –Blood. • Rickets is a disease of the –Bones. • ECG is used for the diagnosis of ailments of –Heart. • Food is normally digested in the –Small intestines. • The main function of the kidney is –To remove waste product from body • The human cells contains –46 Chromosomes • Acquired immune-deficiency syndrome(AIDS)is caused by –Virus • The light with the longest wave length in the visible spectrum is – Red. • In the electric bulb, the gas used is – Inert. • Centigrade and Fahrenheit scales resemble at ( –40C). • Study of insects is called – Entomology. • The inner layer of the skin is called – Dermis • Nucleus of an atom has – Neutrons and Protons • Marsh gas is – Methane • In fireworks the green flame is produced because of – Barium • Nuclear fission is caused by the impact –Neutron • Atom Bomb is based on principal of – Nuclear Fission. • Glass is made from the mixture of – Sand and Salt. • Permanent hardness of water may be removed by the addition of – Sodium Carbonate. • P.V.C is obtained by the polymerization of – Vinylchtoride • The pursuit form of iron is – Cast Iron • The element found on the surface of the moon is –Titanium • One joule is equivalent to-10 ergs • The most efficient engine is –Electric • Wisdom teeth normally grow during the age of- 17- 30 years • The yellow colures of urine is due to the presence of –Urochrome. • Life of RVC in human blood is of –120 days. • How many teeth are known as milk teeth in human beings – 20. • Colure of the skin due to presence of -Melanin • Bile juice secreted by -Lactro meter • The smallest cell in the human body are –Blood cells. • Food is mainly digested in –small intestine. • The number of ribs in human body is –24 • The smallest bone in the human body is – Stirrup • Total number of bones in human skill are- 30 • The hitting element in an electric iron is made of –Tungsten. • A nuclear reactor uses as fuel –Uranium. • The Velocity of light was first measured by –Roemer. • The purity of milk is checked by –Lactro meter. • The hottest part of the flame lies in its –Non luminous Zone. • The first life came on this earth –In Water • An object weights maximum in –Vacuum • Which is the semiconductor –Silicon • Ic Chips for Computers are usually made of –Silicon • A device used for converting AC into DC is • called-Rectifier. • The volume Urine produced in an adult human every 24 hours is-1.5Liters. • The average Gestation period of Sheep is –150 days. • The Smallest possible unit of a comical compounds is –Molecule • The Vitamin which contains Cobalt is –B12 • The first metal to used by man was Copper • All acid essentially contain the element –Hydrogen • The main active continent of tea and coffee is –Caffeine. • Pencil lead is made up of –Graphite. • The human body contains the maximum amount of –water.

CSIR NET JRF: Key Points to know for Paper-I • Which gases ifs filled in balloons –Helium. • Rickets occurs due to the deficiency of –Vitamin A • Rocket launched station in Life-expectancy –Sriharikota • A lemon is sour is because of –Citric acid • Animals having hair and giving birth to young ones are called –Mammals • Resistance in Series –R=R1+R2+R3+R……….. • Resistance in Parallel –1/R=1/R1+1/R2+1/R3 • Sound travels the fastest in –Steel • Tuberculosis (T.B) is caused by –Bacteria • Temperature –C/100=F-32/180=K-273.15/100 • Cow‘s milk is slightly yellowish in hue due to –Riboflavin • The blue color of the sky is due to –Scattering of light • Clinical thermometer range –95F to 110F • Gold is a noble metal because it –is chemically less reactive • Which of the following is a bad conductor of electricity -Rubber • RDX is an explosive • In oxygen things burn –Brightly • What is water is composed of –Oxygen and Hydrogen • Domestic electric fitting are connected in Parallel • Cooking utensils are made up of metals because metals –are good conductors of heat • The voltage of the domestic electricity is –220 volt • The voltage of electicity used in factories is –440 volt • Which is the major source of the energy in human diet –Starch • A satellite is kept in circular orbit due to the gravitational –force of the earth • Hair, on our body, are meant to –Be a organs of defence • Velocity of a body is –Rate of changes of its position • Dialysis is done when –Kidneys fail • The speed of the Rocket Launcher is –Greater than ---11.6 KM per second • The color of carrot is red is due to –the presence of pigments • An instrument to measure the density of liquid –Hydrometer • The blood pressure of a normal human being is –120 /80 mm /Hg • During sleep, man‘s blood pressure –Fluctuates • Copper is mainly used in –Electric wires • It is known as the silent killer –Blood pressure • Human body‘s weight on the earth is maximum at –Poles • Which gas helps in extinguishing fire –Carbon dioxide • Marble is the changed form of –Limestone • Insulin is given for the treatment of –Diabetes • If a magnet is divided into two pieces –Both the pieces become independent magnets • Dehydration is loss of –Water • Which part of body typhoid affects –Intestines • One pound is equivalent to –453 gms • Diamonds are made up of –Carbon • Hydrophobia may effect a person suffering from –Dog bite • Carbon-dioxide as compared to air is –Heavier • Distance traveled by light in one year is called –Light year • One is germicide –Potassium permanganate • Jaundice is a disease of –Liver • Food poisoning is Caused by –Micro- organism • Formation of rust on iron is what kind of phenomenon –Chemical • The good conductor of electricity –Copper • Mercury is used in thermometers because it –Expands uniformly • Considered a balanced diet –Milk • Scientific study of micro-organs –Microbiology • Pollutes the environment –Carbon monoxide • Which bone related to head –Skull • When a piece of ice floats on water, its level –Remains the same • Nights are cool when –The nights are clear and the days are cloudy • Who discovered the steam engine –James Watt • Who invented Telephone –Graham Bell • Who discovered X-rays –Roentgen • Who discovered Radium –Marie Curie • Who discovered Penicillin –Alexander Fleming • Who discovered the cure for rabies –Louis Pasteur • The inventor of Television is –J. L. Baird • Phosphorus is a –Non –metal • A plant with green leaves placed in red light with apprear –Black • Light from the sun reaches us in nearly –8 Minute • The Common refrigerant used in domestic refrigerator is –Freon /ammonia • A Fuse wire is characterized by –high resistance and how melting point • Which metal is commonly used as an electromagnet –Iron • When ice melts in the beaker of water, the level of water in the beaker with –remain the same • The dynamo converts- electrical energy into mechanical energy • The oil in the wick of an oil lamp rises up due to –capillary action • The flying of birds is a proof of Newton‘s –first law • When milk is churned cream gets separated due to -centrifugal • A red light used in traffic signal because –It has longest wavelength and can be easily noticed from a long distance • The most convenient color combination that can be used for vehicle running day and night is –red and green • Metals are good Conductor of electricity because –they contains free electron • The phenomenon of total internal reflection may occur when light is passing from –glass to air • The velocity of sound is maximum in –a solid • The mirage is seen in the hot desert because –the density of layer of air increase with altitude • The best conductor of heat among liquid is –mercury • Sound of frequency below 20Hz are called –Infrasonics

CSIR NET JRF: Key Points to know for Paper-I: Free Study Material

• A man standing at the finish line is recording the time of a race competition by means of a stop watch. He must start the watch when –He sees flash of light coming from starting gun • If a shell from a canon bursts in the air, the total kinetic energy –increase • The pitch of sound is measured by its –frequency • Alternating current is converted to direct current by a –rectifier • When iron and wood are exposed to sunlight, the iron rod become hot quickly because of –the greater thermal conductivity of iron • In diesel engines, ignition takes place by –Compression • Cloudy nights are warmer because –Clouds prevent radiation of heat from the ground into the air • A electric bulb produce a loud sound when broken because –the air rushes into partial vaccum in the bulb • What is the approximate velocity of sound in air –800m/s. • In deserts, clouds do not precipitate because of –low humidity. • The ink of a pen leaks out in an aeroplane because –pressure of ink inside is more than the ambient pressure • Coating of iron with zinc is known as –Galvanization • A piece of rock was brought from moon to earth, then –Its weight alone changed • Which of the following is not a primary colour –Black • Which falls down faster in a vacuum –All with fall down at same speed in a vacuum because there will be no air resistance. • Atmospheric pressure is measured by using an instrument call a/an – barometer • The process of transfer of heat by matter but without actual movement of particle then selves is called –Conduction • In an electric kettle water becomes hot by –Convection • Tea will cool most easily in a –Metal cup • The source of solar energy is –Nuclear fusion • A radar that detect the presence of an enemy aircraft uses –Radio waves • Light year is a unit of –Distance • What is normal temp, of a human body –370 c • A Celsius and a Fahrenheit thermometer give the same reading at a particular temp. - -400C • In which atmospheric layer are the communication satellites located ? – Ionosphere • In an earthen pot , cooling of water depends upon the –All the above • A fuse wire used to –Prevent an unduly high electric current from passing through a circuit • The nucleus of an atom consists of –Proton + electron • What happen if water is cooled from 80C to 0C ? –its volume decrease up to 40C and then Increase • Which of the following is a good conductor of heat but bad conductor of electricity –Mica • A sudden fall in a barometer reading indicates –Storm • Sound travel with a different speed in different media. In what order does the velocity of sound increase in these media ? –Air, water and iron • Which part of the sun is visible during total solar eclipse ? –Corona • When a pencil is partly immersed in water in a beaker and held in a slanting position, the immersed portion appears –Bent towards the water surface • The three primary colour are –Blue, green, and red • Which part of a camera is analogous to the retina in the human eye ? –Film • When a person walking in bring sunlight enter a dark room, he is not able to see clearly for a little while because –the iris unable to dilate the pupil immediately • In electric fittings, the wires are earthed because –In case of a short circuit, current passes to the earth. • To an astronaut, the outer space appears –Black • Which of the following metal is used in aircraft ? -Palladium • A transformer is used to –Increase of decrease AC voltage • The element used in an electric filament is –Tungsten • The sky is blue in colour due to –dispersion • When a ship floats on water –The mass of water displaced is equal to the mass of the ship

INFORMATION SOURCES: Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Sources, and Gray literature

Primary source: Original manuscript, documents or records used in preparing a published or unpublished work. Secondary source: A published or unpublished work that relies on primary source(s). Tertiary source: A published or unpublished work that is based on secondary sources. Gray (=grey) literature: Source material(s) not available through the usual systems of publication (e.g. books or periodicals) and distribution.

* Certain disciplines may use different criteria for identifying Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary literature. Check with your professor for help specific to your discipline. Primary Sources Secondary Sources Tertiary Sources Gray Literature · Autobiography · Analysis · Film documentaries · Conference proceedings · Case studies · Biography · Work that is based · Data exchange · Correspo ndence · Criticism entirely on secondary · Dissertations / Theses · Diaries/ Personal papers · Dissertations/Theses (Literature sources · Environmental impact · Dissertations/Theses review materials) statements Type of (Be sure to distinguish between · Editorials · Government documents / work original and review material in the · Film documentaries publications text) · Reviews of the literature · Market research reports · Films: Original dramatic / · Work that relies on · Online documents artistic productions primary sources · Oral presentations · First-person accounts · Technical reports · Historical documents · Working papers (Constitution, treaties… & copies of…)

· Laboratory data · Minutes of meetings · Original manuscripts / documents · Original research · Photographs · Religious documents (Bible, scripture…) · Speeches · Technical reports · Works of fiction, poetry, drama… · Authors reporting on · Author has an interest in the · Author has an interest · Author works in the field personal topic. in the topic. · Expert in the field. Author experiences/work. · Can be an expert in the field. · Free-lance writers · Masters or PhD candidates · In academics or research, · Staff writer often written by an expert or graduate student in the (Continued on back) field.

Florida Gulf Coast University Library Services INFORMATION SOURCES: Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Sources, and Gray literature

Primary Sources Secondary Sources Tertiary Sources Gray Literature

· Books · Books · Books / textbooks · Business / Industry Where · Gray literature · Encyclopedias · Gray literature publications published · Monograph · Gray literature · Magazines · Government publications · Scholarly journal · Newspapers · Newspapers (Federal, state & local) · Refereed/peer reviewed · Pamphlets · Trade journals · Unpublished dissertation / journal · Scholarly journal Theses · Refereed/peer reviewed journal

Gray literature is also found in a Primary, Secondary and Tertiary Literature can be found in a variety print sources and electronic databases. variety of print sources and electronic databases, though sometimes can be harder to locate.

Some examples are: Where · Caloosahatchee Documents Found · Charlotte Harbor Info. · Dissertation Abstracts · GrayLIT Network http://www.osti.gov/graylit/ · Library of Congress loc.gov · National Sea Grant Lib http://nsgd.gso.uri.edu/ · NCJRS ncjrs.org/ · NOAA noaa.gov · NTIS ntis.gov · PapersFirst database · Proceedings · Scientific & Technical Information Network http://stinet.dtic.mil/ · US Census Bureau census.gov · USDA usda.gov · USGS usgs.gov

Revised 08/2005

Florida Gulf Coast University Library Services